Lanier Pro 8300S/8310S/8320S Guide

Lanier Pro 8300S/8310S/8320S Guide
Operator's Guide
Original Instructions
How to Read the Manuals
Manuals Provided with This Machine
Useful Functions
Getting Started
Copy
Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Adjustment Settings for Operators
Print
Scan
Document Server
Troubleshooting
Maintenance
For information not found in paper manuals, see the online manuals available on our
web site (https://www.ricoh.com/).
For safe and correct use, be sure to read Safety Information before
using the machine.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. How to Read the Manuals
Symbols Used in the Manuals........................................................................................................................... 9
Disclaimer......................................................................................................................................................... 10
Notes.................................................................................................................................................................11
Machine Types................................................................................................................................................. 12
Names of Major Features............................................................................................................................... 13
Model-Specific Information.............................................................................................................................14
Functions Requiring Optional Configurations................................................................................................ 15
2. Manuals Provided with This Machine
Manuals for This Machine...............................................................................................................................19
How to Use the Operating Instructions...........................................................................................................22
Read HTML Manuals...................................................................................................................................22
Read the HTML manuals on the control panel.......................................................................................... 22
3. Useful Functions
Booklet Printing.................................................................................................................................................23
Perfect Binding..................................................................................................................................................24
Finishing to a regular size............................................................................................................................25
Notes on Configuring the Perfect Binding................................................................................................. 26
Ring Binding......................................................................................................................................................28
Notes on Configuring the Ring Binding..................................................................................................... 29
Fold....................................................................................................................................................................31
Using the Multi-Folding Unit........................................................................................................................31
Using the Booklet Finisher........................................................................................................................... 35
Registering Custom Paper................................................................................................................................38
Overview of Paper Settings.........................................................................................................................38
Custom Paper Registration Workflow........................................................................................................ 40
How to Use the [Custom Paper Management] Screen.............................................................................40
How to Use the [Import From Master Library] Screen.............................................................................. 42
Registering a Custom Paper........................................................................................................................ 44
Registering a Custom Paper with the Media Identification Unit...............................................................49
Modifying a Custom Paper......................................................................................................................... 55
Custom Paper Settings.................................................................................................................................55
Adjusting the Image Position of Either Side of the Paper.......................................................................... 59
1
Searching for a Paper by Specifying the Conditions................................................................................61
Printing the Parameters of Custom Paper Settings..................................................................................... 62
Exporting Custom Paper to an SD Card.................................................................................................... 63
Deleting a Custom Paper.............................................................................................................................63
Managing the Master Library.....................................................................................................................64
Connecting to a Computer/DFE Remotely from the Control Panel............................................................. 65
Connecting to a Computer/DFE Remotely from the Control Panel.........................................................65
Creating a Destination of Remote Desktop Connection........................................................................... 66
Configuring the Connection App................................................................................................................68
How to Use the Application Site..................................................................................................................... 70
Setting Up..................................................................................................................................................... 70
Displaying the Application Site...................................................................................................................71
Installing Applications..................................................................................................................................72
Updating Applications.................................................................................................................................73
Uninstalling Applications.............................................................................................................................74
Managed Items Screen............................................................................................................................... 75
When Messages Appear............................................................................................................................76
Allowing Remote Connection from a PC to the Control Panel..................................................................... 78
Allowing Remote Operations......................................................................................................................78
Enabling the Remote Connection to the Control Panel.............................................................................79
4. Getting Started
Guide to Names and Functions of Components............................................................................................81
Guide to Functions of the Attention Light....................................................................................................85
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options................................................................................................87
Guide to Functions of the Machine's External Options.............................................................................87
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Internal Options/Option Controller............................................. 99
Guide to the Names and Functions of the Machine's Control Panel.........................................................100
Adjusting the Angle of the Control Panel.................................................................................................102
Turning On/Off the Power........................................................................................................................... 103
Turning On/Off the Power....................................................................................................................... 103
Turning On the Main Power..................................................................................................................... 103
Turning Off the Main Power..................................................................................................................... 104
Saving Energy............................................................................................................................................104
2
Transfer heater switch............................................................................................................................... 106
Adjusting the Display.....................................................................................................................................107
How to Use the [Home] Screen....................................................................................................................110
Main Icons on the [Home] Screen........................................................................................................... 112
Changing Modes by Pressing the Function Keys....................................................................................113
[Printer Status] Screen............................................................................................................................... 114
[Tray Paper Settings] Screen.................................................................................................................... 115
[Information] Screen..................................................................................................................................117
[Web Browser] Screen............................................................................................................................. 118
Possible Operations on the Application Screen..................................................................................... 120
Changing the Display Language............................................................................................................. 121
System Reset.............................................................................................................................................. 122
How to Use Each Application.......................................................................................................................123
Keys that Appear on the Initial Settings Screen and Screens of Each Standard Application.............123
How to Use the [Copier] Screen.............................................................................................................. 126
How to Use the [Document Server] Screen.............................................................................................127
How to Use the [Printer] Screen............................................................................................................... 131
How to Use the [Scanner] Screen............................................................................................................132
Switching Screen Patterns.........................................................................................................................144
Logging In the Machine................................................................................................................................ 145
When the Authentication Screen is Displayed........................................................................................145
User Code Authentication Using the Control Panel................................................................................145
User Code Authentication Using a Printer Driver....................................................................................146
Logging In Using the Control Panel......................................................................................................... 146
Logging Out Using the Control Panel...................................................................................................... 147
Logging In Using an IC Card....................................................................................................................148
Logging Out Using an IC Card................................................................................................................ 149
Using a Smart Device to Log in to the MFP............................................................................................. 149
Using a Smart Device to Log out from the MFP...................................................................................... 150
Auto Logout Function.................................................................................................................................150
Logging In Using a Driver......................................................................................................................... 151
Logging In Using Web Image Monitor....................................................................................................152
Logging Out Using Web Image Monitor................................................................................................ 152
3
User Lockout Function............................................................................................................................... 152
Changing the Login Password..................................................................................................................152
5. Copy
Auto Reduce / Enlarge................................................................................................................................. 155
Duplex Copying.............................................................................................................................................157
Specifying the Original and Copy Orientation...................................................................................... 159
Combined Copying....................................................................................................................................... 161
One-sided Combine..................................................................................................................................163
Two-sided Combine.................................................................................................................................. 164
Copying onto Envelopes...............................................................................................................................167
Copying onto Envelopes from the Multi Bypass Tray (Tray A)..............................................................167
Copying onto Envelopes from the Wide Large Capacity Tray............................................................. 168
Sort..................................................................................................................................................................169
Changing the Number of Sets..................................................................................................................169
Storing Data in the Document Server...........................................................................................................170
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Placing Originals........................................................................................................................................... 171
Recommended Original Sizes and Weights...........................................................................................171
Sizes Detectable with Auto Paper Select.................................................................................................174
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass................................................................................................ 176
Placing Originals in the Auto Document Feeder.....................................................................................178
Loading Paper................................................................................................................................................180
Precautions for Loading Paper................................................................................................................. 180
Loading Paper into Tray 1........................................................................................................................ 182
Loading Paper into the A3/11 × 17 Tray Unit.......................................................................................184
Loading Paper into Tray 2 and 3............................................................................................................. 185
Loading Paper into the Multi Bypass Tray (Tray A)................................................................................ 186
Loading Paper into the Large Capacity Tray.......................................................................................... 188
Loading Paper into the Three-tray Wide Large Capacity Tray............................................................. 189
Loading Paper into the Two-tray Wide Large Capacity Tray................................................................191
Loading Paper into the Interposer............................................................................................................ 193
Loading Cover Sheets into the Interposer of the Perfect Binder.............................................................195
Loading Orientation-fixed Paper or Two-sided Paper........................................................................... 198
4
Using Small Thick Paper........................................................................................................................... 200
Changing the Paper Size.............................................................................................................................. 204
Precautions for Changing the Paper Size................................................................................................204
Changing the Paper Size in Tray 2 and 3...............................................................................................204
Changing the Paper Size in the Large Capacity Tray............................................................................ 208
Changing the Paper Size in the Three-tray Wide Large Capacity Tray............................................... 213
Changing the Paper Size in the Two-tray Wide Large Capacity Tray................................................. 219
Changing to a Size That Is Not Automatically Detected....................................................................... 226
Changing to a Custom Paper Size...........................................................................................................227
Recommended Paper.................................................................................................................................... 228
Recommended Paper Sizes and Types................................................................................................... 228
Paper Weight Conversion Table..............................................................................................................262
Unusable Paper......................................................................................................................................... 264
Paper Storage............................................................................................................................................265
Changing Tray Paper Settings...................................................................................................................... 266
Accessing Tray Paper Settings..................................................................................................................266
Names and Positions of Paper Trays (Tray 1 to 6, Tray A, Tray T1 to T4)...........................................267
Tray Paper Settings....................................................................................................................................269
Using the Ring Binder and the High Capacity Stacker...........................................................................294
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
How to Use the [Adjustment Settings for Operators] Screen..................................................................... 303
Accessing the Adjustment Settings for Operators....................................................................................... 304
Features of the Displayed Items and Setting Operations....................................................................... 304
Printing with Adjusted Settings..................................................................................................................306
Menu Items and Functions............................................................................................................................ 308
Setting Values.................................................................................................................................................314
Main Unit: Image Position.........................................................................................................................314
Main Unit: Image Quality.........................................................................................................................316
Main Unit: Paper Feed/ Output...............................................................................................................317
Main Unit: Maintenance...........................................................................................................................320
Finishing:Finisher 1.................................................................................................................................... 322
Finishing:Finisher 2.................................................................................................................................... 331
Finishing: Fold............................................................................................................................................ 340
5
Finishing: Perfect Binder............................................................................................................................ 356
Finishing:Stacker........................................................................................................................................358
Finishing: Interposer.................................................................................................................................. 359
8. Print
Installing the Printer Driver by Using Device Software Manager Installer................................................ 361
Installing Device Software Manager from the CD-ROM.......................................................................361
Installing Device Software Manager from the Downloaded File..........................................................364
Displaying the Printer Driver Settings Screen...............................................................................................367
Displaying the Printer Driver Properties................................................................................................... 367
Displaying the Printing Preferences Dialog Box......................................................................................367
Displaying the Printer Driver Help............................................................................................................370
Standard Printing........................................................................................................................................... 372
When using the PCL 6 printer driver........................................................................................................ 372
Printing on Both Sides of Sheets................................................................................................................... 373
When using the PCL 6 printer driver........................................................................................................ 373
Types of two-sided printing...................................................................................................................... 373
Printing on Envelopes.................................................................................................................................... 375
Configuring envelope settings using the control panel.......................................................................... 375
Printing on envelopes using the printer driver......................................................................................... 375
9. Scan
Preparation for Sending by Scan to Folder................................................................................................. 377
Creating a shared folder on a computer running Windows/confirming a computer's information...377
Creating a shared folder on a computer running OS X or macOS/confirming a computer's
information................................................................................................................................................. 379
Registering the shared folder of the destination computer in the address book...................................381
Basic Procedure When Using Scan to Folder............................................................................................. 383
Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations........................................................................................................385
Sending Files to a Shared Network Folder................................................................................................. 386
Entering the path to the destination manually......................................................................................... 386
Specifying the path by browsing the network for destinations.............................................................. 388
Sending files to an FTP server................................................................................................................... 388
Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-mail......................................................................................391
Specifying the Destination or Recipient................................................................................................... 393
6
Selecting the Destination from the Machine's Address Book.................................................................393
Entering an E-mail Address Manually..................................................................................................... 396
Selecting the Destination from Recent Destinations................................................................................ 397
Selecting Destinations by Searching an LDAP Server............................................................................ 397
Registering a Destination E-mail Address or Folder............................................................................... 399
Storing and Saving the Scanned Documents.............................................................................................. 402
Basic Procedure for Storing Scan Files.................................................................................................... 402
Previewing the Contents of a Stored Document......................................................................................403
Sending a Stored File................................................................................................................................406
Managing Stored File............................................................................................................................... 407
Specifying Access Privileges for Stored Files.......................................................................................... 413
Storing the Scanned Documents to a USB Flash Memory Device or SD Card....................................414
Specifying the File Type................................................................................................................................ 417
Notes About and Limitations of File Types.............................................................................................. 418
Specifying Scan Settings............................................................................................................................... 420
10. Document Server
Storing Data................................................................................................................................................... 421
Printing Stored Documents............................................................................................................................ 424
Interrupting a Print Job.............................................................................................................................. 425
Changing the Number of Print Copies while Printing Is in Progress......................................................426
Sample Print............................................................................................................................................... 427
Printing a Specified Page..........................................................................................................................427
11. Troubleshooting
Getting Started...............................................................................................................................................429
When the Machine Makes a Beeping Sound........................................................................................ 429
When You Check the Indicator Lamps, Status Icons, and Messages on the Control Panel............... 430
When You Have Problems Operating the Machine.............................................................................. 434
When Messages Appear..............................................................................................................................443
When Messages Appear and the Machine Cannot Be Operated.......................................................443
Messages Displayed When You Use the Copy/Document Server Function.......................................444
Messages Displayed When You Use the Printer Function..................................................................... 449
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function..................................................................463
When Other Messages Appear...............................................................................................................479
7
Troubleshooting When You Use the Copy/Document Server Function................................................... 487
When You Cannot Make Clear Copies.................................................................................................. 487
When You Cannot Make Copies As Wanted........................................................................................ 491
Troubleshooting When You Use the Printer Function..................................................................................500
Checking the Error Log..............................................................................................................................500
If USB Connection Fails.............................................................................................................................501
When You Cannot Print............................................................................................................................ 501
Other Printing Problems............................................................................................................................ 503
Troubleshooting When You Use the Scanner Function.............................................................................. 512
When You Cannot Send Scanned Files.................................................................................................. 512
When Scanning Is Not Performed As Expected......................................................................................... 515
Clearing Misfeeds......................................................................................................................................... 517
Removing Jammed Paper......................................................................................................................... 517
Removing Jammed Staples....................................................................................................................... 522
Removing Jammed Ring Combs...............................................................................................................522
Removing Punch Waste............................................................................................................................ 523
Removing Staple Waste........................................................................................................................... 523
Removing Waste Paper............................................................................................................................ 523
12. Maintenance
General Requirements...................................................................................................................................525
Dos and Don'ts.......................................................................................................................................... 525
Saving Printouts......................................................................................................................................... 527
Backing Up Hard Disk Data..................................................................................................................... 527
Replenishing and Replacing Consumables............................................................................................. 528
Where to Put Your Machine..................................................................................................................... 536
Optimum Environmental Conditions After Moving the Machine...........................................................536
Maintaining Your Machine...........................................................................................................................541
How to Clean the Machine...................................................................................................................... 541
Cleaning the Exposure Glass and Scanning Glass................................................................................541
Cleaning the Auto Document Feeder.......................................................................................................542
Cleaning the Power Cord Plug.................................................................................................................543
Checking the Earth Leakage Breakers......................................................................................................... 545
Useful Information..................................................................................................................................... 547
8
1. How to Read the Manuals
Symbols Used in the Manuals
This manual uses the following symbols:
Indicates points to pay attention to when using functions. This symbol indicates points that may result in
the product or service becoming unusable or result in the loss of data if the instructions are not obeyed.
Be sure to read these explanations.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instructions on resolving user
errors.
Indicates where you can find further relevant information.
[]
Indicates the names of keys or buttons on the product or display.
(mainly Europe and Asia), (mainly Europe), or (mainly Asia)
(mainly North America)
Differences in the functions of Region A and Region B models are indicated by two symbols. Read the
information indicated by the symbol that corresponds to the region of the model you are using. For
details about which symbol corresponds to the model you are using, see "Model-Specific Information",
Device Management.
9
1. How to Read the Manuals
Disclaimer
To the maximum extent permitted by applicable laws, in no event will the manufacturer be liable for any
damages whatsoever arising out of failures of this machine, losses of the registered data, or the use or
non-use of this product and operation manuals provided with it.
Make sure that you always copy or have backups of the data registered in this machine. Documents or
data might be erased due to your operational errors or malfunctions of the machine.
In no event will the manufacturer be responsible for any documents created by you using this machine or
any results from the data executed by you.
10
Notes
Notes
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of
parts other than genuine parts from the manufacturer with your office products.
For good output quality, the manufacturer recommends that you use genuine toner from the
manufacturer.
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
11
1. How to Read the Manuals
Machine Types
Check the type of your machine before reading the manuals.
• Type 1: Pro 8300S
• Type 2: Pro 8310S
• Type 3: Pro 8320S
• Type 4: Pro 8310
• Type 5: Pro 8320
Certain types might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Depending on which country you are in, certain units may be optional. For details, please contact your
local dealer.
12
Names of Major Features
Names of Major Features
In this manual, major features of the machine are referred to as follows:
• Auto Document Feeder
ADF
• ADF Double-feed Detection kit Type-S7
• Attention Light Type C2
• LCIT RT5130
ADF double-feed detection kit
Attention Light
Large Capacity Tray (LCT)
• Wide Large Capacity Tray Wide LCT (in this manual, "wide LCT" refers to the three-tray wide
LCT and the two-tray wide LCT)
• LCIT RT5110
Three-tray wide Large Capacity Tray (Three-tray wide LCT)
• Vacuum Feed LCIT RT5120
Two-tray wide Large Capacity Tray (Two-tray wide LCT)
• Vacuum Feed Banner Sheet Tray Type S9
• Multi Bypass Tray BY5020
Banner sheet tray of two-tray wide LCT
Multi bypass tray (Tray A)
• Multi Bypass Attachment Kit for Vacuum Feed LCIT Type S9
• Multi Bypass Banner Sheet Tray Type S9
• Bridge Unit BU5010
A3/11 × 17 tray unit
Decurl unit
• Cover Interposer Tray CI5040
• Buffer Pass Unit Type S11
• Perfect Binder GB5010
Banner sheet tray of multi bypass tray (Tray A)
Bridge unit of two-tray wide LCT
• A3/11"x17" Tray Unit TK5020
• Decurl Unit DU5070
Interposer
Buffer pass unit
Perfect binder
• Multi-Folding Unit FD5020
Multi-folding unit
• Ring Binder RB5030
Ring binder
• Trimmer Unit TR5050
Trimmer
• High Capacity Stacker SK5040
High capacity stacker
• SR5000 series Output tray for Banner Sheet Type S6
sheet
• Output Jogger Unit Type M25
• Shift Sort Tray SH5000
• Bridge Unit BU5020
Multi bypass attachment kit
SR5000 series output tray for banner
Output jogger
Shift tray
Finisher bridge unit
• RPIP Interface Box Type S3
Interface box
• File Format Converter Type M19
File format converter
13
1. How to Read the Manuals
Model-Specific Information
This section explains how you can identify the region your machine belongs to.
There is a label on the rear of the machine, located in the position shown below. The label contains
details that identify the region your machine belongs to. Read the label.
EAR407
The following information is region-specific. Read the information under the symbol that corresponds to
the region of your machine.
(mainly Europe and Asia)
If the label contains the following, your machine is a Region A model:
• CODE XXXX -27
• 220–240 V
(mainly North America)
If the label contains the following, your machine is a Region B model:
• CODE XXXX -17
• 208–240 V
• Dimensions in this manual are given in two units of measure: metric and inch. If your machine is a
Region A model, refer to the metric units. If your machine is a Region B model, refer to the inch
units.
14
Functions Requiring Optional Configurations
Functions Requiring Optional Configurations
Certain functions require special machine configuration and extra options as follows:
You can use the copy function and scanner function on Type 1, 2, or 3 machines only.
• Copier mode
Function
Copying from the multi bypass tray (Tray A)
Option
One of the following combinations of options is
required:
• Multi bypass tray (Tray A) and LCT
• Multi bypass tray (Tray A) and three-tray
wide LCT
• Multi bypass tray (Tray A) and two-tray
wide LCT
Copying onto tab stock
One of the following options is required:
• Multi bypass tray (Tray A)
• LCT
• Three-tray wide LCT
• Two-tray wide LCT
• Shift Sort
• Stack
One of the following options is required:
• Finisher SR5090*1
• Booklet Finisher SR5100*1
• Finisher SR5110
• Booklet Finisher SR5120
• High Capacity Stacker
Staple
One of the following options is required:
• Finisher SR5090*1
• Booklet Finisher SR5100*1
• Finisher SR5110
• Booklet Finisher SR5120
Staple (Center)
• Booklet Finisher SR5100*1
• Booklet Finisher SR5120
15
1. How to Read the Manuals
Function
Punch
Option
One of the following combinations of options is
required:
• Finisher SR5090*1 and punch unit
• Booklet Finisher SR5100*1 and punch
unit
• Finisher SR5110 and punch unit
• Booklet Finisher SR5120 and punch unit
• Z-fold
One of the following combinations of options is
required:
• Letter Fold-out
• Letter Fold-in
• Finisher SR5110 and multi-folding unit
• Double Parallel Fold
• Booklet Finisher SR5120 and multifolding unit
• Gate Fold
Half Fold
One of the following combinations of options is
required:
• Booklet Finisher SR5100*1
• Booklet Finisher SR5120
• Finisher SR5110 and multi-folding unit
Fore Edge Cut
Booklet Finisher SR5120 and trimmer
Perfect Binding
Perfect binder
Ring Binding
Ring binder
*1 You can use this function on Type 1 machine only.
• Printer mode
Function
Printing from the multi bypass tray (Tray A)
Option
One of the following combinations of options is
required:
• Multi bypass tray (Tray A) and LCT
• Multi bypass tray (Tray A) and Three-tray
wide LCT
• Multi bypass tray (Tray A) and Two-tray
wide LCT
16
Functions Requiring Optional Configurations
Function
• Staple
• Shift Collate
Option
One of the following options is required:
• Finisher SR5090*1
• Booklet Finisher SR5100*1
• Finisher SR5110
• Booklet Finisher SR5120
Printing onto tab stock
One of the following combinations of options is
required:
• Multi bypass tray (Tray A)
• LCT
• Three-tray wide LCT
• Two-tray wide LCT
Punch
One of the following combinations of options is
required:
• Finisher SR5090*1 and punch unit
• Booklet Finisher SR5100*1 and punch
unit
• Finisher SR5110 and punch unit
• Booklet Finisher SR5120 and punch unit
• Z-fold
• Letter Fold-out
One of the following combinations of options is
required:
• Letter Fold-in
• Finisher SR5110 and multi-folding unit
• Double Parallel Fold
• Booklet Finisher SR5120 and multifolding unit
• Gate Fold
Half Fold
One of the following combinations of options is
required:
• Booklet Finisher SR5100*1
• Booklet Finisher SR5120
• Finisher SR5110 and multi-folding unit
Fore Edge Cut
Booklet Finisher SR5120 and trimmer
Perfect Binding
Perfect binder
17
1. How to Read the Manuals
Function
Option
Ring Binding
Ring binder
Adobe PostScript 3
PostScript 3 unit
IPDS
IPDS unit
XPS
XPS unit
*1 You can use this function on Type 1 machine only.
• Scanner mode
Function
Searchable PDF
Option
OCR unit
• Others
Function
18
Option
Communicate via wireless LAN
Wireless LAN board
Registering a custom paper with the Media
Identification Unit
Media Identification Unit
2. Manuals Provided with This Machine
Manuals for This Machine
The operating instructions of this machine are provided in the following formats:
Format
Manuals
Printed manuals
• Safety Information
CD-ROM
• Driver Installation Guide(HTML manuals)
Manuals displayed on the control panel
• Operating Instructions (HTML manuals)
Web page
• Operator's Guide
• Safety Information
• Operating Instructions (HTML manuals)
• Paper Fundamentals
• Driver Installation Guide(HTML manuals)
Operator's Guide
Contains excerpts from the following manuals such as the descriptions of the machine's basic
operations and frequently used functions. It also provides explanations of how to resolve error
messages that appear.
Safety Information
Contains the explanation about "Safety Information". Be sure to read this manual before you start
using the machine. The manual also provides information about various regulations and
environmental compatibility.
Preparation
Explains the preparation procedure to use the machine, and describes the control panel. It also
explains paper specifications and how to load paper. It also explains how to use the Master
Library in which different print settings for various papers can be registered and describes the
frequently used functions and useful features.
Basic Operations
Describes the following functions that are equipped on the machine in its standard configuration.
• Copier/Document Server
Explains how to configure the machine to use the copier function. It also explains various
copier features and describes how to operate and configure the original settings. It also
explains how to use the document server.
19
2. Manuals Provided with This Machine
• Printer
Explains how to print using the printer driver, and describes various print features.
• Scanner
Explains how to scan paper data on the machine and store or transfer the scanned data to a
computer.
Device Management
Explains how to connect the machine to a network and operate the machine under a network
environment. It also explains how to configure the system initial settings and register the address
book.
Maintenance and Management
Explains how to replace consumables. It also describes the installation requirements and cleaning
procedure of the machine and explains how to resolve problems that occur. It also explains how to
configure the items of Adjustment Settings for Operators.
Security Guide
This manual is intended for the administrator of this machine. It explains various security functions
available on the machine that allow you to prevent unauthorized use of the machine and changing
and copying of the data.
For enhanced security, it is recommended to perform the followings:
• Install the Device Certificate
• Enable SSL
• Change the user name and password of the administrator
For details, see "Before Using This Machine", Security Guide.
Be sure to read this manual when configuring the enhanced security functions and authentication.
Specifications
Explains the specifications of the machine and its options.
Paper Fundamentals
Explains the properties of different types of paper and how to handle them.
Driver Installation Guide
Describes how to install and configure each driver. This manual is included in the drivers CD.
• Before you configure the extended security and authentication settings, refer to "Before Using This
Machine" in the Security Guide.
• You can download information about the machine's certification, which is based on an IT security
certification system (hereafter CC Certification), from https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/
ccmanual/pro_8300_8310_8320/en/download_admin.html and https://support.ricoh.com/
services/device/ccmanual/pro_8300_8310_8320/en/download_user.html. This information is
20
Manuals for This Machine
about how to set up the machine. If you have purchased a CC Certified machine, be sure to read it
before operating the machine so you can make the correct settings before using it.
• You can see the following manuals on the Web page.
DHCP Option 204
21
2. Manuals Provided with This Machine
How to Use the Operating Instructions
This section describes the operating instructions of this machine.
Read HTML Manuals
• If JavaScript is disabled or unavailable in your browser, you will not be able to search or use
certain buttons in the HTML documentation.
• The required display resolution is 1,024 × 768 pixels or greater.
• In the help on the top right of the top page, you can check how to use the HTML manuals. The help
topics explain the icons and buttons that are displayed in the HTML manuals.
Search by entering a keyword
You can search through the HTML manuals.
This section explains how to search for "duplex".
1. Enter "duplex" in the search box on the top left of the top page.
2. Click
.
A list of titles or descriptions that include "duplex" appears.
A search result appears in the search result window. In addition you can use the drop-down menu
to select a manual.
3. Click a title to display the item you want to read.
• Use keywords to search for items you want to query. Depending on the keyword you enter, related
keywords might also appear.
• Items including the used keyword is appear in the search result window.
• If you put a space between keywords, pages that contain both keywords are displayed. For
example, if you enter "duplex" and a space and "staple", items including both words appear in the
search result window.
Read the HTML manuals on the control panel
You can also read the HTML manuals on the control panel. For details, see page 112 "Main Icons on
the [Home] Screen".
22
3. Useful Functions
This chapter describes useful functions such as booklet printing, folding, ring binding, perfect binding. It
also explains how to register Custom Paper and use the remote desktop function.
Booklet Printing
You can bind the printed documents in the center.
• The paper types that can be used for booklet printing from the printer driver are as follows:
• Plain, Recycled, White, Letterhead, Preprinted, Prepunched, Yellow, Green, Blue, Purple,
Ivory, Orange, Pink, Red, Gray, Bond, Cardstock, Coated (Glossy), Coated (Matte)
Magazine
CKN120
Specifying the Booklet Printing Settings
If the PCL 6 printer driver is used, booklet printing can be specified in the "Booklet:" list on the
[Frequently Used Settings] tab or in the [2 Sided/Layout/Booklet] menu on the [Detailed Settings]
tab.
• If the information icon ( / ) is displayed next to the "Booklet:" list, you cannot specify booklet
printing. Click the information icon ( / ) to check why booklet printing is unavailable.
• If the document contains pages with different original sizes, page breaks may occur.
• By combining the booklet printing and combine printing functions, you can print multiple pages
onto a single sheet and bind them to form a booklet. For details about combine printing, see
"Combining Multiple Pages into Single Page", Basic Operations.
• If you specify a custom size paper for the booklet printing function using the PostScript 3 printer
driver and the length of the short edge of the paper is equal to or shorter than half the length of the
long edge of the paper, the job will be canceled.
23
3. Useful Functions
Perfect Binding
When this function is selected, the machine applies heated glue to printed sheets to form a book block,
encloses the book block in a cover sheet, and then trims away excess paper.
You can use this function on Type 2, 3, 4, or 5 machines only.
• For details about the optional units required for this function, see page 15 "Functions Requiring
Optional Configurations".
• About paper sizes for which the Perfect Binding can be specified, see page 228 "Recommended
Paper Sizes and Types".
• The paper types that can be used for Perfect Binding are as follows:
Plain, Recycled, White, Letterhead, Preprinted Paper, Yellow, Green, Blue, Purple, Ivory, Orange,
Pink, Red, Gray, Coated (Glossy), Coated (Matte)
Guide to perfect bound booklets
BZH095
1. Book block
The bulk of the booklet, enclosed by the cover sheet.
2. Head edge
The edge that forms the booklet's top end.
3. Cover
The sheet enclosing the book block.
4. Spine
The booklet's bound edge.
5. Tail edge
The edge that forms the bottom end of the booklet.
6. Fore edge
The edge that forms the booklet's opening side.
24
Perfect Binding
Specifying the Perfect Binding Settings
If the PCL 6 printer driver is used, the Perfect Binding can be specified in the Finishing menu on the
Detailed Settings tab.
• Apply Perfect Binding to a single book block that contains 10 sheets or more.
• If plain paper is used, a book block of up to 200 sheets can be bound with Perfect Binding. The
maximum number of sheets that can be bound as a single book block varies depending on the
thickness of the paper used in the book block.
• Perfect Binding can be applied to bind a book block with a spine thickness of 23 mm or less.
• Collate is automatically enabled if the Perfect Binding is specified.
Finishing to a regular size
Specify the size of the finished bound booklets and cut three edges to a regular size.
Book block paper and cover sheet compatibility
If you specify finishing to a regular size, you can select one of the following sizes: A4 , B5 JIS ,
A5 , 81/2 × 11 , 51/2 × 81/2
We recommend that you use the cover sheet size with the book block paper sizes as shown in the
following table.
Required finished size
A4
Book block
Cover
SRA4
13 × 191/5
226 × 310 mm*1
13 × 19
13 × 18
SRA3
12 × 18
123/5 × 191/5
123/5 × 181/2
B5 JIS
A4
A3
81/2 × 11
11 × 17
16K
11 × 15
8K
A5
B5 JIS
B4 JIS
11 × 15
25
3. Useful Functions
Required finished size
81/2 × 11
Book block
9 × 12*1
Cover
13 × 191/5
13 × 19
12 × 18
123/5 × 191/5
123/5 × 181/2
51/2 × 81/2
71/4 × 101/2
10.5 × 14.5*1
*1 Specify the custom size in [Tray Paper Settings].
Notes on Configuring the Perfect Binding
Conditions where Perfect Binding will be canceled or a job reset may occur
Perfect Binding will be canceled or a job reset may occur if:
• The machine is configured to continue printing manually.
• [Auto Continue] is specified.
• Tray A is specified as the source tray.
• [Driver / Command] is selected in [Tray Setting Priority] for the specified source tray.
• Cover Sheets is specified.
• Slip Sheets is specified.
• Separation Sheets is specified.
• The staple function is specified.
• The punch function is specified.
• The fold function is specified.
• Paper is ejected with its printed side facing up.
• Ring Binding is specified.
• Perfect binder is not attached.
• Perfect Binding cannot be used for the selected tray, paper size, or paper type.
• Perfect Binding cannot be used for the selected paper orientation.
• The number of sheets exceeds the maximum Perfect Binding number.
• Sheets of paper to be bound using Perfect Binding are thicker than 200 sheets of plain paper.
Functions that will be canceled when Perfect Binding is applied to bind sheets of paper
The following functions will be canceled when specified with Perfect Binding at the same time:
26
Perfect Binding
• Stack
• Extended Auto Tray Switching
• Sub Paper Size*1
*1 The setting is applied to inside pages only.
27
3. Useful Functions
Ring Binding
When this function is selected, the machine punches holes along the long edge of the paper and binds
sheets with ring combs. Ring Binding can be applied to A4 or Letter (81/2 × 11) size paper.
You can use this function on Type 2, 3, 4, or 5 machines only.
• For details about the optional units required for this function, see page 15 "Functions Requiring
Optional Configurations".
• The paper types that can be used for Ring Binding are as follows:
Plain, Recycled, White, Letterhead, Yellow, Green, Blue, Purple, Ivory, Orange, Pink, Red, Gray,
Transparency, Tab Stock, Coated (Glossy), Coated (Matte)
BZH091
Specifying the Ring Binding Settings
If the PCL 6 printer driver is used, the Ring Binding can be specified in the Finishing menu on the
Detailed Settings tab.
• When binding output sheets with ring combs, specify the number of sheets to be bound between 2
and 100. If there is only one sheet, it will be punched with ring comb holes but not bound.
• If you are using 50-sheet type ring combs, you can bind up to 50 sheets of plain paper into a
single booklet. If you are using 100-sheet type ring combs, you can bind up to 100 sheets of plain
paper into a single booklet. The number of sheets that can be bound with ring combs varies
depending on paper weights.
• When binding 4 or fewer sheets of paper with a ring binding comb, it is recommended to use a
50-sheet comb, not a 100-sheet one.
• Collate is automatically enabled if the Ring Binding is specified.
28
Ring Binding
Notes on Configuring the Ring Binding
Conditions where Ring Binding will be canceled or a job reset may occur
Ring Binding will be canceled or a job reset may occur if:
• The machine is configured to continue printing manually.
• [Auto Continue] is specified.
• Tray A is specified as the source tray.
• [Driver / Command] is selected in [Tray Setting Priority] for the specified source tray.
• Slip Sheets is specified.
• Separation Sheets is specified.
• The staple function is specified.
• The punch function is specified.
• The fold function is specified.
• Paper is ejected with its printed side facing up.
• Perfect Binding is specified.
• Ring binder is not attached.
• Ring combs have run out.
• The hole punch receptacle is full.
• Ring Binding cannot be used for the selected tray, paper size, or paper type.
• Ring Binding cannot be used for the selected paper orientation.
• The number of printed sheets exceeds 50 when Ring Binding with 50-sheet type ring combs is
specified.
• The number of printed sheets exceeds 100 when Ring Binding with 100-sheet type ring
combs is specified.
• Sheets of paper to be bound with 50-sheet type ring combs are thicker than 50 sheets of plain
paper.
• Sheets of paper to be bound with 100-sheet type ring combs are thicker than 100 sheets of
plain paper.
• Ring combs are set in reverse orientation.
• Ring combs of a size that is not supported by the ring binder are used.
• The punch unit is not attached.
• Different types of ring combs (50-sheet type and 100-sheet type ring combs) are used
together.
Functions that will be canceled when the Ring Binding is applied to bind sheets of paper
The following functions will be canceled when specified with Ring Binding at the same time:
29
3. Useful Functions
• Stack
• Extended Auto Tray Switching
30
Fold
Fold
Printed documents can be folded using the optional Finisher and multi-folding unit or the optional
Booklet Finisher attached to the machine.
• For details about the optional units required for this function, see page 15 "Functions Requiring
Optional Configurations".
DWP070
Specifying the Fold Settings
If the PCL 6 printer driver is used, the fold function can be specified in the Finishing menu on the
Detailed Settings tab. For printing methods, see the printer driver Help.
• Collate is automatically enabled if Half Fold or Multi-sheet Fold is specified.
Using the Multi-Folding Unit
Printed documents can be folded using the optional Finisher and multi-folding unit attached to the
machine.
You can select the fold type from the following six types: Z-fold, Half Fold, Letter Fold-in, Letter Fold-out,
Double Parallel, and Gate Fold.
If you select the [Multi-sheet Fold] check box in the printer driver, you can apply Half Fold, Letter Foldin, or Letter Fold-out to up to three sheets of paper of the same size at one time.
31
3. Useful Functions
Folding positions
Select the fold position in the printer driver.
• The paper types that can be used for fold function are as follows:
Plain, Recycled, White, Yellow, Green, Blue, Purple, Ivory, Orange, Pink, Red, Gray, Bond,
Cardstock, Coated (Glossy), Coated (Matte)
The finished form may vary depending on the paper size. The following table shows the examples of A3
size paper folded in each fold type. For details, see the printer driver Help.
Print Data
Direction
Fold Types
Z-fold
Portrait
32
Folding Position
Print Inside
Print Outside
-
-
Not Specified
Half Fold
-
Letter Foldin
-
Letter Foldout
-
-
Double
Parallel
-
Gate Fold
-
Fold
Print Data
Direction
Fold Types
Folding Position
Print Inside
Print Outside
-
-
Z-fold
Landscape
Not Specified
Half Fold
-
Letter Foldin
-
Letter Foldout
-
-
Double
Parallel
-
Gate Fold
-
• For details about which paper sizes are compatible with which fold or Multi-sheet Fold, see
"Specifications for Multi-Folding Unit", Specifications.
• If you apply the Multi-sheet Fold function with letter fold-in to B5 JIS size paper, the folded sheets
will be different in size to sheets folded without the Multi-sheet Fold function.
1
2
CNH002
1. Multi-sheet Fold not applied
2. Multi-sheet Fold applied
• When printing a large number of copies with the Z-fold function, it is recommended to attach the Zfold support tray to the finisher. For details on attaching the Z-fold support tray to the finisher, see
page 92 "When using the Z-fold function" or page 93 "When using the Letter Fold-out
function".
33
3. Useful Functions
Notes on configuring the fold function
Conditions where fold function will be canceled
Fold function will be canceled when:
• Paper size or type which is not compatible with the fold function is selected.
• The machine is made to continue printing manually.
• [Auto Continue] is set.
• A paper type on which Multi-sheet Fold cannot be applied is selected.
• Multi-sheet Fold is specified but the paper sizes are different.
• Multi-sheet Fold is specified but the number of sheets exceeds the maximum number available
for the fold function.
• A combination of paper orientation and fold position that cannot be folded is selected.
• Paper is fed from an optional interposer.
• Multi-folding unit is not installed.
Functions that will cause job reset to occur when combined with the fold function
• Slip Sheets*1
• Separation Sheets*1
• Staple*2
• Punch
• Ring Binding
• Perfect Binding
• Half Fold configured on the Booklet Finisher
*1 Job reset occurs only when combined with Half Fold, Letter Fold-in, Letter Fold-out, Double
Parallel, or Gate Fold.
*2 Job reset occurs only when combined with Half Fold, Letter Fold-in, Letter Fold-out, Double
Parallel, or Gate Fold. It can be specified along with Z-fold except when Staple (Center) is selected
(using the Booklet Finisher).
Functions that will be canceled when combined with the fold function
The following functions will be canceled when specified with Booklet Binding at the same time:
• Stack
• Extended Auto Tray Switching
• Ejecting paper with the printed side facing up
• If the information icon ( / ) is displayed next to the "Fold:" list, you cannot specify fold
function. Click the information icon ( / ) to check why fold function is unavailable.
34
Fold
• If you cannot make fold function settings even with a multi-folding unit installed, options may not be
set correctly in the printer driver. To correct the printer driver's option settings, see "Specifying the
Option Configuration or Paper Settings Manually", Driver Installation Guide.
• When stapling Z-folded paper, fewer sheets than normal can be stapled together. This is because
a single Z-folded sheet is equivalent to 10 non-Z-folded sheets. For the number of sheets that can
be stapled, see "Specifications for Finisher SR5110" or "Specifications for Booklet Finisher
SR5120", Specifications.
• Depending on the temperate and humidity conditions of the machine's environment and the type of
paper being folded, use of the fold function can cause toner smearing, which can occasionally
result in spoilt prints.
• Wrinkling can occur when applying letter fold-out to B4 JIS , A3 , 81/214 , 11 × 17 , 8K
, or larger sheets. In some cases, you may have to use A4 sheets or smaller when applying
folds in combination with the reduction function.
• Print quality over fold lines might be reduced. This is due to cracking within the fused toner. Loss of
surface along fold lines can also occur with some types of paper. To avoid possible wastage, print
a single test sheet before beginning a print run.
• Printing will stop if the number of printed sheets exceeds tray capacity. If this happens, remove
printed sheets from the folding unit tray to resume printing.
Using the Booklet Finisher
When the optional Booklet Finisher is attached to the machine, you can fold printed documents in half.
Half Fold
CNP014
Half Fold positions
Select the position for folding printed documents in half in the printer driver.
When [Half Fold: Print Inside (Finisher Booklet Tray)] is specified, each piece of printed paper is folded
in half with the printed side facing inside, and it is output to the finisher booklet tray.
35
3. Useful Functions
When [Half Fold: Print Outside (Finisher Booklet Tray)] is specified, each piece of printed paper is
folded in half with the printed side facing outside, and it is output to the finisher booklet tray.
When [Half Fold: Multi-sheet fold (Finisher Booklet Tray)] is specified, the printed paper is folded in half
with the printed side facing inside, and it is stacked onto the finisher booklet tray.
• The paper types that can be used for Half Fold function are as follows:
Plain, Recycled, White, Letterhead, Preprinted Paper, Tab Stock, Yellow, Green, Blue, Purple,
Ivory, Orange, Pink, Red, Bond, Cardstock, Coated (Glossy), Coated (Matte)
The finished form may vary depending on the paper size. The following table shows the examples of A3
size paper folded in each fold type. For details, see the printer driver Help.
Print Data Direction
Folding Position
Print Inside
Print Outside
Multi-sheet fold
Portrait
Landscape
• For details about which paper sizes are compatible with which Half Fold function, see
"Specifications for Booklet Finisher SR5100" or "Specifications for Booklet Finisher SR5120",
Specifications.
Notes on configuring the Half Fold function
If [Half Fold: Multi-sheet fold (Finisher Booklet Tray)] is specified and the number of sheets specified to
be folded exceeds the maximum folding number, the machine first folds the maximum number of sheets
that can be folded together, and then it folds the remaining sheets. Up to six sheets can be folded at a
time.
Conditions to reset a job combined with the Half Fold function
A job is reset if:
• The machine is configured to continue printing manually.
• [Auto Continue] is specified.
• [Driver / Command] is selected in [Tray Setting Priority] for the specified source tray.
36
Fold
• Slip Sheets is specified.
• Separation Sheets is specified.
• The staple function is specified.
• The punch function is specified.
• The fold function on multi-folding unit is specified.
• Ring Binding is specified.
• Perfect Binding is specified.
• The machine is printing a report.
• The half fold function cannot be used for the selected paper size or type.
• [Half Fold: Multi-sheet fold (Finisher Booklet Tray)] is specified but the paper sizes are
different.
• [Half Fold: Multi-sheet fold (Finisher Booklet Tray)] is specified but the number of sheets
exceeds the maximum folding number.
• No requirements for specifying collate are fulfilled.
• Booklet Finisher is malfunctioning.
• Booklet Finisher is not attached.
Functions that will be canceled when combined with the Half-fold function
The following functions will be canceled when combined with the Half-fold function:
• Ejecting paper with the printed side facing up
• If the information icon ( ) is displayed next to the "Fold:" list, you cannot specify Half Fold
function. Click the information icon ( ) to check why Half Fold function is unavailable.
• If the Half Fold function is specified, folded paper cannot be output with the printed side facing up.
• If you cannot make Half Fold function settings even with a Booklet Finisher installed, options may
not be set correctly in the printer driver. To correct the printer driver's option settings, see
"Specifying the Option Configuration or Paper Settings Manually", Driver Installation Guide.
37
3. Useful Functions
Registering Custom Paper
Using the paper settings function of the machine, you can specify the paper type, size, weight and
various other properties of paper that you want to use and register the settings as "Custom Paper". Also,
you can achieve satisfactory printing results easily by specifying the paper settings for a commercially
available paper brand that is widely used from the Master Library.
Overview of Paper Settings
Tray paper settings
You need to specify the paper sizes and types for paper trays in order to properly print on the
paper loaded in the paper trays. You can configure these settings in the tray paper settings.
The machine has functions such as a master library and custom paper settings that make it easy to
configure the tray paper settings.
You can specify the tray paper settings in the following ways:
• Assign a custom paper to a paper tray
• Manually specify the paper settings such as a size and type for a paper tray
Master library
The master library contains settings such as paper types, paper weights, and machine operating
conditions (for example, paper feed, toner transfer, and toner fusing conditions) that are
customized for each major commercially available paper products and also for each major paper
types.
To use the settings in the master library, you must first select the name or type of your paper from
the master library. The paper settings will be registered to a custom paper. The master library
makes it easy to get the best results from your paper.
Custom paper
You can register each type of paper that you use as a "Custom Paper" by setting a name, size,
type, weight, and other advanced settings in "Tray Paper Settings".
This function is convenient because you can register certain types of paper that you often use as
custom paper.
"Custom Paper" can also be set from the master library.
The machine automatically synchronizes the custom paper settings with the media catalog
information on the print controller when using the print controller.
Custom papers can be registered in the following ways:
• Select the paper's name or type from the master library
• Modify a custom paper that has already been registered
• Manually specify the paper's settings such as the type and weight you want to use
38
Registering Custom Paper
Under the custom paper's advanced settings, you can specify the machine operating conditions
such as paper feed, toner transfer, and toner fusing conditions. The master library contains the
advanced settings that are preconfigured so that you do not need to configure them.
When you change the paper's settings such as the type and weight of the custom paper you
register, the paper's advanced settings are initialized.
Only the machine administrator can change the advanced settings. For details, contact your
machine administrator.
Saves all types of registered custom paper to an SD card at one time.
Saved custom papers can be restored and used as a custom paper again.
Relationships between functions
Printer
controller
Machine
Master Library
- Paper Type
- Paper Weight
- Paper Size
- Other settings
1
4
SD card
7
2
Media catalog
information
- Paper Type
- Paper Weight
- Paper Size
- Other settings
Custom Paper
3
5
1
6
Tray Paper Settings
8
Paper tray information
EAR106
1. You can import paper settings from the Master Library and register it as custom paper.
2. You can export all types of custom paper to an SD card at one time.
3. You can import and register the custom paper that you have exported to an SD card.
4. You can register custom paper by manually specifying its settings such as the type and weight you
want to use.
5. You can configure the tray paper settings by assigning a custom paper to each paper tray.
6. You can configure paper settings such as sizes and types manually for each tray.
39
3. Useful Functions
7. The machine automatically synchronizes the custom paper settings on the machine with the media
catalog information on the print controller when using the print controller.
8. The machine automatically synchronizes the tray paper settings on the machine and the paper tray
information on the print controller when using the print controller.
• Only the device administrator can configure the [Advanced Settings] for custom paper.
• For details about the recommended paper for use with this machine, see page 228
"Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".
• For details about the media catalog information, see the manual provided with the print controller.
Custom Paper Registration Workflow
Step
1
Using the Master Library
Select paper in the Master Library, and
register it as custom paper
• See page 44 "Selecting paper to
import from the Master Library or SD
card"
Not using the Master Library
Register paper as custom paper by
specifying a paper type, weight and other
settings as you want
• See page 45 "Registering a paper
whose paper name is not displayed in
the Master Library"
2
• See page 45 "Registering a paper
whose paper name is not displayed in
the Master Library"
Select the registered custom paper in the "Tray Paper Settings" for the paper tray
• See page 266 "Specifying a custom paper"
• When using the registered custom paper, see page 266 "Specifying a custom paper".
• When specifying the paper size and type individually and not using the custom paper, see
page 267 "Manually specifying a paper's size and type".
How to Use the [Custom Paper Management] Screen
This section explains the items on the [Custom Paper Management] screen.
This screen appears when you press [CustomPaper Management] on the [Tray Paper Settings] screen.
40
Registering Custom Paper
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
DWP153
1. [Search]
Press [Search] to search for papers in the list of custom papers. Press [Search] again to return to the list of
custom paper types from the search result. For details, see page 61 "Searching for a Paper by Specifying
the Conditions".
2. [Add New]
Press this key to register a new type of custom paper. For details, see page 44 "Registering a Custom
Paper".
3. [Delete]
Press this key to delete the selected custom paper from the list. For details, see page 63 "Deleting a Custom
Paper".
4. [Paper Identification]
Scans the paper using the Media Identification Unit, and searches for a type of paper with the closest settings
from the registered custom paper.
For details, see page 49 "Registering a Custom Paper with the Media Identification Unit".
5. Item name
Displays an item name in the custom paper list. The items to be displayed can be selected from the following:
• [No.] (fixed item)
• [Paper Name] (fixed item)
• [Paper Brand] (initial display)
• [Paper Size] (initial display)
• [Paper Weight] (initial display)
• [Manufacturer]
• [Paper Thickness]
• [Paper Type]
• [Paper Color]
41
3. Useful Functions
• [Coated Paper Type]
• [Prepunched]
• [Textured]
• You can specify whether or not to display each item except [No.] and [Paper Name].
• You can sort the custom paper list by pressing each item name.
• To select an item to display on the custom paper list, press the list icon (
) to display the [Select Item
Displayed/Arrange Order] screen, and then select the item by selecting the check box. You can also
change the display order by dragging the item on the screen.
6. [Import]
Press this key to import custom paper from the Master Library or SD card. For details, see page 44
"Selecting paper to import from the Master Library or SD card".
7. [Export]
Press this key to export all types of custom paper to an SD card.
For details, see page 63 "Exporting Custom Paper to an SD Card".
8. [Print the Settings]
Press this key to print the parameters of the custom paper settings. For details, see page 62 "Printing the
Parameters of Custom Paper Settings".
9. [Jump to Row]
Press this key to scroll down the list of custom paper to the specified line. You can specify the number in
increments of 100.
10. List of custom papers
The list of registered custom papers is displayed.
A custom paper that is assigned to a paper tray is indicated by the icon
assigned to more than one trays is indicated by the icon .
, and a custom paper that is
Also, one of the following icons is displayed next to [No.]:
: A custom paper that is created as new
: A custom paper that is registered from the Master Library
: A custom paper that is registered from the Master Library and then modified
How to Use the [Import From Master Library] Screen
This section explains the items on the [Import From Master Library] screen.
This screen is displayed when you press [Import] on the [Custom Paper Management] screen, and then
select [From Master Library].
42
Registering Custom Paper
1
2
3
4
5
6
DWP154
1. [Search]
Press [Search] to search the papers in the paper list. Press [Search] again to return to the list of custom paper
from the search result. For details, see page 61 "Searching for a Paper by Specifying the Conditions".
2. [Paper Identification]
Scans paper with the Media Identification Unit, and then searches the master library for a custom paper with
settings that are similar to those of the scanned paper. For details, see page 49 "Registering a Custom Paper
with the Media Identification Unit".
3. Item name
Displays the item names in the Master Library list. The items specified in the "Custom Paper Management"
screen are displayed.
Also, you can sort the Master Library list by each displayed item. Press the item to be used for the sorting.
4. [Import]
Select an item in the Master Library list, and press [Import] to import the selected paper as custom paper. For
details, see page 44 "Selecting paper to import from the Master Library or SD card" and page 45
"Registering a paper whose paper name is not displayed in the Master Library".
5. [Jump to Row]
Press this key to scroll down the Master Library list to the specified line. You can specify the number in
increments of 100.
6. List of papers in the library
The list of all types of custom paper registered in the Master Library is displayed.
• The contents in the master library on your machine might differ slightly from those shown in the
illustrations in this manual.
43
3. Useful Functions
Registering a Custom Paper
You can register up to 1000 custom papers.
Check the product name, size, and type of your paper before registering it.
Check that the size and type of your paper are compatible with the paper tray that you want to use. Tray
compatibility depends on the paper's size and type. For details about the paper sizes and types that can
be used, see page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".
• When the number of registered custom papers reaches the maximum, you will not be able to
register a new custom paper. Delete any unnecessary custom papers from the list, and then try
registering again. For details, see page 63 "Deleting a Custom Paper".
Selecting paper to import from the Master Library or SD card
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
To import data from an SD card, insert the SD card into the media.
For details about using an SD card, see "Inserting an SD Card", Preparation.
3. Press [Import].
4. Select [From Master Library] or [From SD Card].
5. Select the name of the paper that you want to register.
Select an item by selecting its check box.
If the paper you want to select is not displayed, use [Jump to Row], or scroll through the screen until
the desired item is displayed.
You can select two or more types of paper.
6. Press [Import].
7. Press [OK].
44
Registering Custom Paper
8. Press [Exit].
9. Press
.
10. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
• You can check and change the settings of the registered custom paper such as the paper size
setting on the [Custom Paper Management] screen. For details about modifying the custom paper,
see page 55 "Modifying a Custom Paper".
Registering a paper whose paper name is not displayed in the Master Library
If the paper you want is not in the library's paper list or you don't know the name of the paper, use the
following procedures:
• Selecting the paper's type from the master library
The master library contains the optimum printing conditions not only for each commercially
available paper but also for each type of paper.
Even if you don't know the brand name of a paper, you can register the paper as the custom paper
by selecting a paper of the matching paper type and weight from the Master Library.
• Manually specifying a paper's type and weight
You can register a custom paper by manually specifying its type and weight.
Selecting the paper's type from the master library
You can select the type of paper from the master library and register it as a custom paper.
• Specify [Paper Type] and [Paper Weight] as the items to be displayed in the Custom Paper
Management screen. For details about selecting the displayed items, see page 40 "How to
Use the [Custom Paper Management] Screen".
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Press [Import].
4. Select [From Master Library].
5. Select the most appropriate combination of type and weight for your paper.
If the paper you want to select is not displayed, use [Jump to Row], or scroll through the
screen until the desired item is displayed.
45
3. Useful Functions
6. Press [Import].
7. Press [OK].
8. Press [Exit].
When selected, custom paper is imported from the Master Library.
9. Press
.
10. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
• You can check and change the settings of the registered custom paper such as the paper
name setting on the [Custom Paper Management] screen. For details about modifying the
custom paper, see page 55 "Modifying a Custom Paper".
Manually specifying a paper's type and weight
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Press [Add New].
4. Press [Paper Name].
5. Enter the name of the paper.
You can enter up to 38 half-width characters. You can register Different Custom Paper under
the same name.
46
Registering Custom Paper
6. Press [Paper Size].
7. Select a paper size.
8. Press [Paper Weight].
9. Specify the paper's weight.
You can also specify [Paper Thickness].
10. Press [Paper Type].
11. Specify the paper type.
12. Specify other items, such as [Coated Paper Type], [Paper Color], [Prepunched],
[Textured], [Apply Duplex], and [Apply Auto Paper Select] as necessary.
13. Press [Save Paper].
The [Save Custom Paper] screen is displayed.
If you change the [Paper Weight], [Paper Type], [Coated Paper Type], [Paper Color],
[Prepunched], or [Textured] and press [OK], a message appears to notify you that the
[Advanced Settings] will be initialized. To apply the changes for those settings, select
[Change]. To cancel the changes, select [Do not Change].
14. Press [Save].
15. Press [Program].
16. Press [Exit].
Custom paper is saved under the smallest unregistered number.
17. Press
.
18. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
• If you want to use glossy paper, select [Coated: Glossy] for [Coated Paper Type]. If you want
to use matte paper (including silk, dull, and satin paper), select [Coated: Matte] for [Coated
Paper Type].
• For details about custom paper settings, see page 55 "Custom Paper Settings".
• For details about [Advanced Settings], contact your machine administrator.
Registering a new custom paper by modifying an existing paper
You can open and modify the settings of a registered custom paper and register them as a new custom
paper.
This function is useful when registering paper that is the same type as an existing paper, but a different
size.
Depending on which settings you modify, details of a newly registered custom paper will be as follows:
47
3. Useful Functions
• When the settings of the selected custom paper are not changed:
All settings of the selected custom paper ([Paper Name], [Paper Size], [Paper Weight], and [Paper
Type], including the attributes specific to the print controller) are copied to the newly registered
custom paper.
• When the settings [Paper Name], [Paper Size], [Paper Thickness], [Apply Duplex], [Apply Auto
Paper Select], or [Advanced Settings] of the selected custom paper are changed:
The changes are applied to the newly registered custom paper.
• When the settings [Paper Weight], [Paper Type], [Coated Paper Type], [Paper Color],
[Prepunched], or [Textured] of the selected custom paper are changed:
The changes are applied to the newly registered custom paper and its advanced settings are reset
to their default values according to the changes that are applied to the settings.
When modifying a custom paper that is registered from the master library, you can change its [Paper
Name], [Paper Size], [Apply Duplex], and [Apply Auto Paper Select] settings. You can also confirm the
brand name and the version of data from [Paper Brand].
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Select a type of custom paper to refer to.
4. Press
.
5. Change the settings for custom paper (such as paper's name, size, and type), as
necessary.
6. Press [Save Paper].
If you change the [Paper Weight], [Paper Type], [Coated Paper Type], [Paper Color],
[Prepunched], or [Textured] and press [Save Paper], a message appears to notify you that the
[Advanced Settings] will be initialized. To apply the changes for those settings, select [Change]. To
cancel the changes, select [Do not Change].
7. Press [Add New].
48
Registering Custom Paper
8. Select a number that is labeled as "Not Programmed".
• Custom paper overwrites the existing item if you select the existing custom paper.
9. Press [Save].
10. Press [Program].
11. Press [Exit].
12. Press
.
13. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
• For details about custom paper settings, see page 55 "Custom Paper Settings".
• For details about [Advanced Settings], contact your machine administrator.
Registering a Custom Paper with the Media Identification Unit
When you scan paper with the Media Identification Unit, the Media Identification Unit searches custom
paper in the master library. When custom paper with configurations that are similar to those of the
scanned paper is found, it is displayed.
Part names and functions of the Media Identification Unit
4
1
2
3
DFZ012
1. Power lamp
Lights up when a USB cable is connected and the Media Identification Unit is ready to start scanning paper.
2. Scanning lamp
Lights up when paper is inserted into the scanning area.
49
3. Useful Functions
After the paper is removed, it flashes while paper is being scanned.
3. Error lamp
Lights up when an error occurs.
4. Paper scanning area
Insert the paper you want to scan here.
Connect the Media Identification Unit
1. Connect the USB cable to the USB host interface on the back of the machine.
• USB host interface
DSD018
How to register paper scanned by the Media Identification Unit as custom paper
Registering a paper from the master library with the Media Identification Unit
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Press [Import].
4. Select [From Master Library].
5. Press [Paper Identification].
50
Registering Custom Paper
6. Insert paper into the Media Identification Unit, and then remove it.
Hold the edges of the paper with both hands when inserting the paper.
Keep the paper flat as you pull it out.
DFZ009
The list of custom paper whose configurations are similar to those of the scanned paper
appears.
7. Select the custom paper you want to use, and then press [Import].
8. Press [OK].
9. Press [Exit].
The selected custom paper is imported from the Master Library.
10. Press
.
11. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
• The list displayed in Step 6 includes custom paper with configurations whose match rates are
80% or higher.
• You can check and change the settings of the registered custom paper such as the paper size
setting on the [Custom Paper Management] screen. For details about modifying the custom
paper, see page 55 "Modifying a Custom Paper".
Registering a new custom paper with the Media Identification Unit
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
51
3. Useful Functions
3. Press [Add New].
4. Press [Scan the Value].
5. Insert paper into the Media Identification Unit, and then remove it.
Hold the edges of the paper with both hands when inserting the paper.
Keep the paper flat as you pull it out.
DFZ009
6. Change the settings for custom paper (such as paper's name, size, and type), as
necessary.
7. Press [Save Paper].
If you change the [Paper Weight], [Paper Type], [Coated Paper Type], [Paper Color],
[Prepunched], or [Textured] and press [Save Paper], a message appears to notify you that the
[Advanced Settings] will be initialized. To apply the changes for those settings, select
[Change]. To cancel the changes, select [Do not Change].
8. Press [Add New].
9. Select a number that is labeled as "Not Programmed".
• The custom paper overwrites the existing item if you select an existing custom paper.
10. Press [Save].
11. Press [Program].
52
Registering Custom Paper
12. Press [Exit].
13. Press
.
14. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
• When you register and scan custom paper using the Media Identification Unit, following items
are automatically specified:
• Paper weight
• Coated paper other than matte paper
• For details about custom paper settings, see page 55 "Custom Paper Settings".
• For details about [Advanced Settings], contact your machine administrator.
Modifying the registered custom paper settings using the Media Identification Unit
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Select the custom paper whose settings you want to modify.
If the paper you want to select is not displayed, use [Jump to Row], or scroll through the
screen until the desired item is displayed.
4. Press
.
5. Press [Scan the Value].
6. Insert paper into the Media Identification Unit, and then remove it.
Hold the edges of the paper with both hands when inserting the paper.
Keep the paper flat as you pull it out.
DFZ009
7. Change the settings.
8. Press [Save Paper].
If you change the [Paper Weight], [Paper Type], [Coated Paper Type], [Paper Color],
[Prepunched], or [Textured] and press [Save Paper], a message appears to notify you that the
53
3. Useful Functions
[Advanced Settings] will be initialized. To apply the changes for those settings, select
[Change]. To cancel the changes, select [Do not Change].
9. Press [Overwrite].
10. Press
.
11. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
• For details about custom paper settings, see page 55 "Custom Paper Settings".
• You cannot modify a custom paper that is assigned to a paper tray. To modify it, cancel the
assignment.
• For details about [Advanced Settings], contact your machine administrator.
Specifying a custom paper for paper trays with the Media Identification Unit
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [Paper Tray] tab.
3. Select the tray to specify the paper settings.
4. Press [Paper Identification].
5. Insert paper into the Media Identification Unit, and then remove it.
Hold the edges of the paper with both hands when inserting the paper.
Keep the paper flat as you pull it out.
DFZ009
The list of custom paper whose configurations are similar to those of the scanned paper
appears.
6. Select the custom paper you want to use, and then press [Allocate to Tray].
7. Press
.
8. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
• If you want to change the custom paper settings, press [Edit the Settings] in Step 6.
54
Registering Custom Paper
Modifying a Custom Paper
Before modifying a custom paper, confirm that no one is modifying it on Web Image Monitor or on the
print controller.
You can only change the [Paper Name], [Paper Size], [Apply Duplex], and [Apply Auto Paper Select]
settings for a custom paper that is registered from the master library.
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Select the custom paper whose settings you want to modify.
If the paper you want to select is not displayed, use [Jump to Row], or scroll through the screen until
the desired item is displayed.
4. Press
.
5. Change the settings.
6. Press [Save Paper].
If you change the [Paper Weight], [Paper Type], [Coated Paper Type], [Paper Color],
[Prepunched], or [Textured] and press [Save Paper], a message appears to notify you that the
[Advanced Settings] will be initialized. To apply the changes for those settings, select [Change]. To
cancel the changes, select [Do not Change].
7. Press [Overwrite].
8. Press
.
9. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
• For details about custom paper settings, see page 55 "Custom Paper Settings".
• You cannot modify a custom paper that is assigned to a paper tray. To modify it, cancel the
assignment.
• For details about [Advanced Settings], contact your machine administrator.
Custom Paper Settings
Paper Brand
Displays brand name and data version of the custom paper registered from the master library.
Brand name and data version is displayed only for the custom paper registered from the master
library.
Manufacturer
Displays the manufacturer's name.
55
3. Useful Functions
Paper Name
Specify the name of the custom paper using up to 38 characters.
Paper Size
Select the paper's size from the regular sizes or specify a [Custom Size].
You can specify a custom size between 100.0 and 330.2 mm (3.94 and 13.00 inches) vertically,
and between 139.7 and 487.7 mm (5.50 and 19.20 inches) horizontally.
If the banner sheet tray is attached, you can specify a custom size between 100.0 and 330.2 mm
(3.94 and 13.00 inches) vertically, and between 139.7 and 700.0 mm (5.50 and 27.55 inches)
horizontally.
Paper Weight
Specify the weight (g/m2) of the custom paper. Specify the paper weight between [Paper Weight
1] and [Paper Weight 8]. For details about the relationship between the paper weight and ream
weight, see "Paper weight", page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types". Paper weight can
also be scanned using the Media Identification Unit.
Paper Thickness
Specify the thickness (µm) of the custom paper. You can also scan paper thicknesses using the
Media Identification Unit.
Paper Type
Specify the type of the custom paper.
Coated Paper Type
Specify whether or not the custom paper is coated. The type of coating finish (other than matte
paper) can also be scanned using the Media Identification Unit.
Paper Color
Specify the color of the custom paper.
Prepunched
Specify whether or not the custom paper is punched.
Textured
Specify whether or not the custom paper is embossed.
Apply Duplex
Specify whether the duplex function is enabled for the custom paper.
Apply Auto Paper Select
Specify whether the auto paper select function is enabled for the custom paper.
Auto Adjust Image Position
Perform automatic adjustment of the print position on the back side of custom paper allocated to
the tray. You can use this function on Type 1, 2, or 3 machines only.
56
Registering Custom Paper
Use the following procedure to perform adjustment:
1. Load 9 sheets of paper in the tray.
2. Press [Auto Adjustment] for "Print Adjustment Sheet/Scan:".
A total of 9 sheets, comprising 3 blank sheets, 3 adjustment sheets, and 3 blank sheets, is
delivered.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen to start scanning the adjustment sheets.
Scan the front and back of each of the 3 adjustment sheets.
4. After completing scanning, press [Auto Adjustment].
5. Check the displayed adjustment result, and then press [Apply].
The setting value that reflects the adjustment result is applied.
6. Press [Exit] to finish.
• To check the print position only, load 9 sheets of paper in the tray, and then press [Print] for "
Test Print:".
• Adjust the print position using [Manual Adjust Image Position] or [Registration to Align Front
and Back Images Using Template] if a satisfactory adjustment result could not be obtained
using [Auto Adjust Image Position]. For details about using [Registration to Align Front and
Back Images Using Template] for adjustment, see page 59 "Adjusting the Image Position of
Either Side of the Paper".
Manual Adjust Image Position
Adjust the print position manually on the custom paper allocated to the tray. For details, see
page 303 "Adjustment Settings for Operators".
Scan the Value
Obtain the paper weight and thickness, coating information, and identification data using the
Media Identification Unit.
This item is displayed only when the Media Identification Unit is attached.
Update the Value
Obtain the identification data using the Media Identification Unit.
This item is displayed only when the Media Identification Unit is attached.
Advanced Settings
Specify the advanced settings for the paper.
Only the machine administrator can specify these settings.
Advanced settings can be changed even if the selected custom paper is assigned to a paper tray.
For details, contact your machine administrator.
57
3. Useful Functions
You can change settings for [Paper Name], [Paper Size], [Apply Duplex], and [Apply Auto Paper
Select] if a custom paper has already been registered using the master library.
Settings that you can change depend on the following:
Custom papers that have been
registered using the master library
(listed with an icon or )
Custom papers that have been
registered by specifying paper
types and weight ( )
Paper Brand
Not Available
-
Manufacturer
Not Available
-
Paper Name
Available
Available
Paper Size
Available
Available
Paper Weight
Not Available
Available
Paper Thickness
Not Available
Available
Paper Type
Not Available
Available
Coated Paper Type
Not Available
Available
Paper Color
Not Available
Available
Prepunched
Not Available
Available
Textured
Not Available
Available
Apply Duplex
Available
Available
Apply Auto Paper Select
Available
Available
Scan the Value
Available
Not Available
Update the Value
Available
Available
Advanced Settings
Available*1
Available*1
Settings
*1 Can be changed only by the machine administrator.
• Before changing these settings, check that the size and type of your paper are compatible with the
paper tray that you want to load the paper in. Tray compatibility depends on the paper's size and
type.
58
Registering Custom Paper
Adjusting the Image Position of Either Side of the Paper
Adjusts the image position so it is the same on either side of the paper.
First, print a template and measure the length of the specified area. Next, enter the length on the
machine to adjust the position of the image.
Specify the size of each piece of paper you use. Specified settings are saved as custom paper settings,
so that you can use the registered settings next time.
You need administrator privileges to adjust the image position.
Preparations
Before adjusting image positions, perform the following:
• Skew correction with the print controller
First of all, perform skew correction with the print controller. For details, see the manuals for the
print controller.
• Print a template
After performing skew correction, print a template included on the supplied CD-ROM. Select a
template whose size is the same with the paper that includes an image whose position you want to
adjust on the machine.
• Measure the template
When you print the template, arrows are printed in the corners.
Measure the length from the corners of the paper to the peaks of the arrows and from the peaks to
the peaks of the arrows, and then write the length in the box on the template. Perform these for both
sides of the paper.
1
2
DFZ010
1. The length from the peak of one arrow to the peak of another arrow
2. The length from the corner of the paper to the peak of the arrow
59
3. Useful Functions
Entering the value
When you specify the lengths of the template after measuring them, the values to adjust the image
position are automatically calculated and applied.
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Select the name of the paper that you want to register.
If the paper you want to select is not displayed, use [Jump to Row], or scroll through the screen until
the desired item is displayed.
4. Press
.
5. Press [Advanced Settings].
6. Enter the login user name and password of the administrator if an authentication screen
appears.
The authentication screen does not appear if you log in as an administrator.
7. Press [Reg Align Frt&Bck Img Use Template].
8. Enter the value you wrote on the printed template.
Enter the measured values in the corresponding fields on the [Side 1] and [Side 2] tabs.
Select the item you want to enter and use the numeric keypad to enter the value.
You can enter values from 0.1 to 999.9 mm in 0.1-mm increments.
60
Registering Custom Paper
9. Press [Apply].
10. Press [Save].
11. Press [Save Paper]
12. Press [Overwrite].
13. Press
.
14. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
• For details about how to register a custom paper, see page 44 "Registering a Custom Paper".
Searching for a Paper by Specifying the Conditions
You can specify search parameters to search for types of paper from the lists of paper types, such as
custom types of paper and the master library.
The following conditions can be specified for paper searches: [No.], [Paper Brand], [Manufacturer],
[Paper Name], [Paper Size (Regular)], [Paper Size (Custom)], [Paper Weight], [Paper Thickness],
[Paper Type], [Coated Paper Type], [Paper Color], [Prepunched], [Textured], [Apply Duplex], and
[Apply Auto Paper Select].
61
3. Useful Functions
1. Press [Search] on each screen.
2. Press each condition to specify search parameters, and then enter a search string.
To add a search string, press
.
3. Press [OK].
4. Press [Search].
If the paper you want to select is not displayed, use [Jump to Row], or scroll through the screen until
the desired item is displayed.
Printing the Parameters of Custom Paper Settings
You can print the parameters for registered custom paper from the [Custom Paper Management] screen.
You can print 1000 custom paper settings at a time.
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Select the custom paper whose settings you want to print.
If the paper you want to select is not displayed, use [Jump to Row], or scroll through the screen until
the desired item is displayed.
62
Registering Custom Paper
4. Press [Print the Settings].
5. Press [Print the Settings].
6. Press
.
7. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
Exporting Custom Paper to an SD Card
You can save all types of registered custom paper to the paper library in an SD card at one time.
Up to 1,000 custom papers can be saved in the library.
Each saved custom paper is assigned a sequential number from 0001. New data overwrites existing
data if both the paper names and paper size settings are the same.
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Insert an SD card into the media slot.
For details about using an SD card, see "Inserting an SD Card", Preparation.
4. Press [Export].
5. Press [OK].
6. Press [Exit].
7. Press
.
8. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
Deleting a Custom Paper
Before deleting a custom paper, confirm that no one is modifying it on Web Image Monitor or on the
print controller.
You can export custom papers to an SD card. For details about backing up custom papers, see page 63
"Exporting Custom Paper to an SD Card".
63
3. Useful Functions
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Select the custom paper that you want to delete.
If the paper you want to select is not displayed, use [Jump to Row], or scroll through the screen until
the desired item is displayed.
4. Press [Delete].
5. Press [OK].
6. Press
.
7. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
• You cannot delete a custom paper that is currently assigned to a paper tray.
• You cannot delete a custom paper that is being used with the print controller. For details, see the
manual provided with the print controller.
Managing the Master Library
To update the master library, do the following:
To update the master library
Contact your service representative for details.
To copy the data of the paper library in the SD card to another machine of the same model
You can import the paper settings from the database in an SD card.
For details, see page 44 "Selecting paper to import from the Master Library or SD card".
64
Connecting to a Computer/DFE Remotely from the Control Panel
Connecting to a Computer/DFE Remotely from
the Control Panel
The screen of a computer or DFE connected on a network can be displayed and operated on the
machine's control panel by using the app installed on the machine.
Using the machine's control panel, you can remotely operate a computer or DFE, and perform
operations such as instructing the machine to print.
Connecting to a Computer Remotely
Use the remote desktop client application to connect to a remote computer.
You can connect to an RDP (Remote Desktop Protocol) server that supports RDP Version 8.0
(compatible).
Connecting to a DFE Remotely
Use the DFE connection application to connect to a DFE remotely.
The DFE connection icon is displayed only when a DFE is connected to the machine. Also, the
name of the DFE connection icon varies depending on the type of DFE to be connected.
• You can connect to only one computer or DFE at one time.
• This function cannot be used while you are operating on the screen of the machine's control panel
remotely (see page 78 "Allowing Remote Connection from a PC to the Control Panel").
• Up to six computers and only one DFE can be registered as the destinations.
• Press the Enter key twice to confirm the input text when using Microsoft IME (Roman input) on Fiery
to enter Japanese characters while connecting to Fiery.
Connecting to a Computer/DFE Remotely from the Control Panel
This section describes the procedure for connecting to a computer/DFE remotely from the control panel
of the machine.
Connecting to a Computer Remotely from the Control Panel
1. Press the [Home] (
2. Press
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
.
3. Press the [APPS] tab.
4. Press the [Remote Desktop] icon.
5. Select a destination.
A remote connection starts, and the screen of the computer is displayed on the machine's
control panel.
65
3. Useful Functions
For details about how to create a new destination, see page 66 "Creating a Destination of
Remote Desktop Connection".
6. To end the remote connection, press [Menu] (
) and then press [Disconnect].
Connecting to DFE Remotely from the Control Panel
1. Press the [Home] (
2. Press
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
.
3. Press the [APPS] tab.
4. Press the DFE connection icon.
5. Enter the login information for connecting to the DFE, and then press [Login].
A remote connection starts, and the screen of the DFE is displayed on the machine's control
panel.
Menu Displayed during Remote Connection
During remote connection, you can perform the following functions by pressing [Menu] (
).
Keyboard
Displays a software keyboard.
Select External Keyboard
Select the type of connected keyboard. After replacing the keyboard with another type,
disestablish the remote connection and then establish it again.
EFI Certification
Edit the authentication information. This item is displayed only when the connection destination
is a DFE and the target device is Fiery.
Disconnect
Terminate the remote connection.
• You can also register a remote desktop app or DFE connection app to a function key and start the
app by pressing the function key. For details about the function keys, see page 113 "Changing
Modes by Pressing the Function Keys".
• The current remote connection session continues even when you press [Home] ( ) or other items
and the remote desktop client app move to background. Also, the current remote connection
session continues even after the machine restarts by a system reset.
Creating a Destination of Remote Desktop Connection
To connect from the machine's control panel to a computer (RDP server) remotely, create a destination
for the remote connection by using the following procedure:
66
Connecting to a Computer/DFE Remotely from the Control Panel
Use the following procedure to configure a connection destination.
1. Press the [Home] (
2. Press
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
.
3. Press the [APPS] tab.
4. Press the [Remote Desktop] icon.
5. Press [Add Connection].
Specify the following items:
Host
Label
Specify the name under which to register the destination information.
Host
Specify the host name (IP address) of the destination.
Port
Specify the port number of the destination.
Default: [3389]
Credentials
Username
Enter the login user name.
Password
Enter the login password.
Domain
Enter the domain name.
Settings
Screen
• Colors
Specify the display color of the screen. You can select from the following:
• High Color (16 Bit)
• True Color (24 Bit)
• Highest Quality (32 Bit)
Default: [Highest Quality (32 Bit)]
Advanced
• Enable Gateway
Specify whether or not to use the gateway.
67
3. Useful Functions
Default: [OFF]
• Gateway Settings
You can configure this setting if [Enable Gateway] is set to [ON]. You can specify
the following items:
• Host
Enter the host name.
• Port
Enter the port number.
Default: [443]
• Username
Enter the user name.
• Password
Enter the password.
• Domain
Enter the domain name.
• Security
Specify the encryption setting.
• Automatic
• RDP
• TLS
• NLA
Default: [Automatic]
6. Press [Return] (
) at the bottom center of the screen.
7. Press [Yes] on the confirmation screen.
The settings are saved as a new destination.
8. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
Configuring the Connection App
This section explains the setting items of the remote desktop client app and DFE connection app.
The configured settings are shared by the remote desktop client app and DFE connection app.
Configure the Connection App using the following procedure.
1. Press the [Home] (
2. Press .
68
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
Connecting to a Computer/DFE Remotely from the Control Panel
3. Press the [APPS] tab.
4. Press the [Remote Desktop] icon.
5. Press [Menu] (
).
6. Press [Settings].
The configuration screen is displayed.
Power Saving
Close idle Connections
Specify the time to wait before closing a session when the screen display is turned off.
Specify a value between 0 (do not disconnect) and 5 (minutes), in increments of one
minutes.
Default: [5]
Security
Accept all Certificates
Specify whether or not to accept all certifications.
Default: [OFF]
Clear Certificate Cache
Clears the certificate cache.
7. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
69
3. Useful Functions
How to Use the Application Site
By using the Application Site, you can download applications for your machine. You can also update or
uninstall downloaded applications.
To use Application Site, you need to configure an environment to connect to the Internet.
Configuring an environment to connect to the Internet
• Proxy Settings
In an environment where a proxy server is used, configure the proxy settings as follows:
• [Screen Features] > [WIRELESS & NETWORKS] > [Proxy Settings]
• Web Image Monitor > [Device Management] > [Configuration] > [RC Gate Proxy
Server]
• DNS Configuration
• [Machine Features] > [System Settings] > [Interface Settings] > [Network]
• For details about this machine's settings, see "System Settings", Device Management.
• For details about Web Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor Help.
Notes on backing up the application settings
It is recommended that you create a backup of the settings items for each application using the
device's export function in case you need to restore an application that has been installed. For
details about the export function, see "Managing Device Information", Security Guide.
Setting Up
If you are accessing the Application Site for the first time, configure the following settings:
• Specify the region
• Configure the extension code (if necessary)
1. Press [Home] (
2. Press
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
.
3. Press the [Application Site] icon (
).
A confirmation message to update the firmware is displayed if the firmware of the machine needs to
be updated to use the Application Site. Follow the instructions on the screen. You can apply the
update immediately, or specify the time to apply the update. You can change or cancel the
specified time later.
4. Press [Next].
70
How to Use the Application Site
5. In [Region], specify the region in which you are using the machine.
6. If you have been notified of the extension code by your sales representative, enter the
code in [Extension Code (Optional)], and then press [Next].
7. Carefully read the terms of service. If you agree to all the terms, select the [I agree with
the terms of service] checkbox, and then press [OK].
• A message asking whether to save cookies in the web browser may be displayed while you
configure the settings. When this message appears, press [OK] to complete the configuration.
Displaying the Application Site
1. Press [Home] (
2. Press
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
.
3. Press the [Application Site] icon (
).
The screen that shows the list of applications is displayed.
There are two types of application list screens:
• Show all applications
All available applications are displayed in the list. Press the [All] tab to view them on this
screen.
71
3. Useful Functions
• Show the applications in separate categories
Applications are organized for each function of the machine. Press the [Search by Category]
tab to view them on this screen.
• To view information such as the server maintenance information of the Application Site, press
[Information] that is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.
Installing Applications
The procedure to install applications is described below.
• If administrator authentication is specified, only the device administrator can install applications. To
log in to the machine as the machine administrator, see "Administrator Login Method", Security
Guide.
1. On the application list screen, select the application you want to install.
2. Press [Install].
A confirmation message to update the firmware is displayed if the firmware of the machine needs to
be updated to install the application. Follow the instructions on the screen. You can apply the
72
How to Use the Application Site
update immediately, or specify the time to apply the update. You can change or cancel the
specified time later.
3. In the confirmation screen, press [Install].
Carefully read the terms of service, if available.
Depending on the application, a product key is required. Contact the sales representative of the
application.
A message appears when the installation is completed.
4. Press [Close].
• Depending on the application that is being installed, a message indicating that the application
cannot be installed because JavaVM is disabled may be displayed. If this message appears,
enable JavaTMPlatform under [Extended Feature Settings] in Web Image Monitor.
• The contact information of the installed application is displayed on the screen of each application.
Updating Applications
The procedure to update applications is described below.
You can update all applications together or select them separately.
• If administrator authentication is specified, only the device administrator can update the
applications. To log in to the machine as the machine administrator, see "Administrator Login
Method", Security Guide.
1. If updates are available for some applications, a message appears in the upper part of
the screen for several seconds when the application list screen is displayed.
If [Updated Application Notice] in [Newly Arrived Update Notice] in [Managed Items] is set to
[Off], this message will not appear. For details, see page 75 "Managed Items Screen".
You can check whether there are any updates by pressing the [Update Apps.] tab in [Admin.
Menu]. If there is an update, go to Step 3.
2. Press [Update].
3. Press [Update All] to update all the applications that are displayed. Press [Update] of
each application to update only some of them.
A confirmation message to update the firmware is displayed if the firmware of the machine needs to
be updated to perform an application update. Follow the instructions on the screen. You can apply
73
3. Useful Functions
the update immediately or specify the time to apply the update. You can change or cancel the
specified time later.
4. On the confirmation screen, press [Update].
A message appears when the installation is completed.
5. Press [Close].
• Even after the message in Step 1 disappears, you can open the screen in Step 3 by pressing
Admin. Menu, which is displayed in the upper right corner of the application list screen. The
number of applications that can be updated is displayed to the right of [Admin. Menu].
Uninstalling Applications
The procedure to uninstall applications is described below.
• If administrator authentication is specified, only the device administrator can uninstall applications.
To log in to the machine as the machine administrator, see "Administrator Login Method", Security
Guide.
1. Press [Admin. Menu] in the upper right corner of the application list screen.
2. Press the [Managed Items] tab.
3. Press [Application List/Uninstallation].
4. Press the [Uninstall] button of the application you want to uninstall.
5. On the confirmation screen, press [Uninstall].
A message appears when the uninstallation is completed.
6. Press [Close].
74
How to Use the Application Site
• Only the applications that have been installed in the Application Site can be uninstalled.
Managed Items Screen
This section explains the Managed Items screen under Admin. Menu.
1. Press [Admin. Menu] in the upper right corner of the application list screen.
2. Press the [Managed Items] tab.
The Managed Items screen appears.
1
4
2
5
3
6
EAR160
1. [Application List/Uninstallation]
On this screen, you can uninstall applications. For details, see page 74 "Uninstalling Applications".
2. [Region/Extension Code]
The same screen as the one displayed when you access the Application Site for the first time appears,
and you can configure the extension code again. For details see page 70 "Setting Up".
3. [Newly Arrived/Update Notice]
• Newly Arrived Application Notice
If set to [On], a message notifying that a new application can be downloaded appears at the
bottom left of the screen. In the application list screen, new applications appear with a New icon
(
).
• Updated Application Notice
If set to [On], a message notifying that installed applications are ready for update appears at the
bottom left of the screen. The message also appears at the upper part of the screen when starting
the application site.
4. [Auto Update]
If set to [On], installed applications are updated automatically. You can also specify the time to execute
the update.
75
3. Useful Functions
5. [Firmware Management]
On the screen that will be displayed, you can perform the following operations. Follow the instructions
on the screen.
• [Update Firmware]
Updates the firmware of the machine. The update can be applied immediately or at the specified
time. You can change or cancel the specified time later.
• [Restore Firmware]
Reverts the current version of the firmware to the previous version of it.
6. [Terms of Service]
Displays the terms of service for accessing the Application Site.
When Messages Appear
This section describes the machine's main messages. If other messages appear, follow their instructions.
If a problem occurs, we recommend that you first check the information in the [Information] section of the
Application Site. The server maintenance information is described in [Information].
Message
Cause
JavaVM has not been
started. Install the
application after JavaVM
starts.
JavaVM has not been
started.
Enable JavaTMPlatform under
[Extended Feature Settings] in Web
Image Monitor.
Failed to download the
application.
No connection to the
installation server can be
established.
Check the server maintenance
information in [Information]. Also check
if the network settings ([DNS
Configuration] and [Proxy Settings])
are correctly configured. For the
network settings, see page 70 "How to
Use the Application Site".
An error has occurred.
Failed to install the
application.
Cannot connect to server
which installs applications.
Check maintenance
information on Information
screen or network settings.
Could not update the
firmware.
A server error has occurred.
76
Solution
An unexpected error has
occurred on the server.
How to Use the Application Site
Message
Cause
Solution
The specified page cannot
be found.
An error has occurred on the Check the server maintenance
Application Site.
information in [Information].
There is insufficient space to
store internally, delete any
unnecessary applications.
The available internal
storage is insufficient.
Delete unnecessary applications.
Could not restore the
firmware because the
required data does not exist.
The firmware has not been
updated from the
Application Site.
No recovery can be performed unless
the firmware of the machine has been
updated from the Application Site.
77
3. Useful Functions
Allowing Remote Connection from a PC to the
Control Panel
You can monitor the control panel screen or operate the machine remotely from a Web browser running
on a computer that is connected to the same network. You can also turn off or lock the screen to prevent
unintended operations of the machine.
To allow a remote connection to the control panel, enable [Remote Panel Operation] from the User
Tools screen of the machine.
• Only the device administrator can configure the remote connection to the control panel.
• You cannot use the function while using a remote desktop app or DFE connection app.
Allowing Remote Operations
The Remote Operation/Monitoring request dialog box appears when the administrator requests remote
operation or monitoring of the machine while a user operates the machine. Specify how to respond to a
connection request from the following, depending on the operational situation.
• To deny remote operations or monitoring by the administrator:
Press [Prohibit].
• To allow the administrator to only monitor the screen of the machine:
Press [Allow Monitoring].
• To allow the administrator to remotely operate the machine remotely:
Press [Allow Remote Operation].
When remote operation starts, the status of the remote operation is displayed in the bottom-right area of
the control panel screen.
• The message displayed on the Remote Operation/Monitoring request dialog box varies
depending on the request content submitted by the administrator.
• If no item is pressed within 30 seconds after the Remote Operation/Monitoring request dialog box
has appeared, the remote operation or monitoring starts automatically.
• The Remote Operation/Monitoring request dialog box does not appear when no operation is
performed on the machine for more than 180 seconds.
• The following functions are not enabled when a remote operation or monitoring connection is
established:
• Power Saving Function
• System Reset Timer
78
Allowing Remote Connection from a PC to the Control Panel
• The administrator is disconnected from the machine if any of the following occurs while the
connection is active:
• Any remote operation is not performed on the machine by the administrator for the duration
specified in [Set Remote Connection Timeout]*1
• The machine is turned off
• The control panel is being restarted
• The administrator can view the screen of the machine remotely while a connection is active. To view
a screen containing information that the administrator does not want you to see, such as an ID,
password, or other confidential information, terminate remote operation.
*1 The default of [Timeout (min.)] is 30 minutes. For details about the settings, see page 79 "Enabling the
Remote Connection to the Control Panel".
Terminating a Remote Operation
A remote operation can be terminated by the following procedure:
1. Tap [Admin. is operating remotely] or [Deny admin.'s operation, tap here] displayed in
the bottom-right area of the control panel screen.
The system message dialog box is displayed.
2. Press [Disconnect].
The end message is displayed, and the remote operation is terminated.
• A remote operation may be terminated by the administrator.
• When an operation on the machine screen is locked, any remote operation cannot be terminated
by operating the machine screen.
Enabling the Remote Connection to the Control Panel
• If the items "Remote Operation/Monitoring Functions" and password setting are not displayed,
consult your sales or service representative.
1. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
2. Press the [User Tools] (
) icon in the Home screen.
3. Press [Basic Settings for Extended Devices].
4. Press [Remote Panel Operation].
5. Set [Remote Operation/Monitoring Functions] to [ON].
79
3. Useful Functions
6. Configure other items as necessary.
Remote Operation/Monitoring Functions
Specify whether or not to enable the remote operation and monitoring functions.
Default: [OFF]
Remote Connection URL
The URL (IP address and port) is displayed when Remote Panel Operation/Monitoring is
enabled.
Activate Monitoring Password
Select this check box to enable the password settings of the administrator to connect to the
machine for monitoring.
Set Monitoring Password
Enter the password for monitoring the machine.
You can enter up to 8 half-width characters combining a-z, A-Z and 0-9.
You cannot monitor the machine unless specifying the password.
Activate Remote Operation Password
Select this check box to enable the password settings of the administrator to connect to the
machine for remote operations.
Set Remote Operation Password
Enter the password for operating the machine remotely.
You can enter up to 8 half-width characters combining a-z, A-Z and 0-9.
You cannot operate the machine remotely unless specifying the password.
Set Remote Connection Timeout
If the administrator establishes a remote connection with the machine but performs no remote
operation for the specified duration, the connection with the administrator will be terminated
automatically. Specify a value between 3 and 60 minutes.
Default: [30 minutes]
7. Press the [Home] (
80
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
4. Getting Started
This chapter describes preparations for using the machine and operating instructions.
Guide to Names and Functions of Components
• Do not obstruct the machine's vents. Doing so can result in fire as the internal components are
overheated.
You can load and scan originals on a Type 1, 2, or 3 machine.
Front and left view
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
EAR123
1. Main power switch
To operate the machine, the main power switch must be on. If it is off, open the main power switch's cover and
turn the switch on.
2. ADF
Lower the ADF over originals placed on the exposure glass.
81
4. Getting Started
If you load a stack of originals in the ADF, the ADF will automatically feed the originals one by one.
3. Exposure glass
Place originals face down here.
4. Control panel
See page 100 "Guide to the Names and Functions of the Machine's Control Panel".
5. Toner cartridge cover
Open to change toner cartridges.
6. Front left cover
Open to remove paper jams or turn on/off the AC power switch.
7. Front right cover
Open to remove paper jams.
8. Paper trays (Trays 1–3)
Load paper here. Tray 1 is a tandem tray where paper on the left side automatically moves to the right when
paper there has run out.
An indicator on the front left side of the tray lights while paper is feeding.
9. Transfer heater switch
The switch is inside the front left cover. See page 106 "Transfer heater switch".
10. AC power switch
Press to completely turn off the power of the machine. The AC power switch must be kept on in normal use.
The switch is inside the front left cover. For details, see page 525 "Dos and Don'ts".
82
Guide to Names and Functions of Components
Front and right view
1
2
EAQ124
1. Attention light
See page 85 "Guide to Functions of the Attention Light".
This is optional for a Type 1 machine but is attached to other models.
2. ADF's extender
Pull this extender to support large paper.
83
4. Getting Started
Rear and right view
1
1
1
1
2
3
EAQ125
1. Vents
Prevent overheating.
2. Remote Administration Service Connecting Port
Use this to employ the remote administration service (RICOH @Remote) over the Internet. Depending on the
country, region, or environment, RICOH @Remote may be unavailable.
3. Earth leakage breaker
Protects users from electric shock. For details about checking the earth leakage breaker, see page 545
"Checking the Earth Leakage Breakers".
• If you perform a large amount of print jobs in a high-temperature environment, the print jobs may
be suspended and the machine's inner fans near the vents continue running to cool the machine.
• The fan inside the machine near the vents may continue running to cool the machine after a large
print job.
84
Guide to Names and Functions of Components
Guide to Functions of the Attention Light
• Do not push or pull the attention light when installed to the machine. Doing so may result in
damage or malfunction of the attention light or the machine.
CUV121
The attention light notifies the user by light when there is a paper jam or no paper is left.
The colors of the lamp and their meanings are as follows:
Lamp
The bottom lamp lights blue.
The bottom lamp flashes blue.
Status
Printing
• Scanning
• Data in
The top lamp lights red.
Error occurred
(Example)
• When the service call message appears
• Paper jam
• Out of paper
• Out of toner
• Memory overflow
• Waste toner bottle full
Read the message on the display panel, and then
take appropriate action. For details, see
page 443 "When Messages Appear".
85
4. Getting Started
Lamp
The top lamp flashes yellow.
Status
Warning
(Example)
• Toner has nearly run out.
• Waste toner bottle is nearly full.
Read the message on the display panel, and then
take appropriate action. For details, see
page 443 "When Messages Appear".
86
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options
You can use the copy function and scanner function on Type 1, 2, or 3 machines only.
For the names of the options, see page 13 "Names of Major Features".
For the options required for certain functions, see page 15 "Functions Requiring Optional
Configurations".
Guide to Functions of the Machine's External Options
Type 2, 3, 4, or 5 machines
2
3
4
5
6
9
7 8
11
12
10
13
14
11
1
15
9
15
10
9
22
23
20
21
19
18
17
16
EAR122
87
4. Getting Started
Type 1 machine
2
5
6
7 8
24
9
10
12
13
11
1
25
9
15
10
26
9
23
22
28
27
18
17
16
EAR136
1. Trimmer
Cuts the fore edge of the book block after the book block is saddle stitched.
2. Booklet Finisher SR5120
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. The saddle stitch function can staple multiple sheets of
paper in the center and fold them into booklets. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher shift tray 1
• Finisher shift tray 2
• Finisher booklet tray
Copies or prints can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
3. High capacity stacker
Consists of the following paper trays:
• Stacker upper tray
• Stacker tray
The stacker upper tray can hold up to 250 sheets of paper, and stacker tray can hold up to 5,000 sheets of
paper. You can connect up to two high capacity stackers.
4. Ring binder
Binds sheets of paper with a ring comb.
88
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options
5. Multi-folding unit
Applies the following folds: Half Fold, Letter Fold-out, Letter Fold-in, Double Parallel Fold, Gate Fold, and Zfold.
6. Interposer
Inserts cover or slip sheets into copied or printed paper.
7. Decurl unit
Flattens curls from sheets to prevent paper jams.
8. ADF double-feed detection kit
Detects a double feeding of the original when it is placed in the ADF.
9. Multi bypass tray (Tray A)
Holds up to 500 sheets of paper.
10. Banner sheet tray of multi bypass tray (Tray A)
Allows you to load large-sized paper in the multi bypass tray (Tray A).
11. Two-tray wide LCT
Holds up to 4,800 sheets of paper. You can load paper whose sizes are up to SRA3 or 13 × 191/5. You can
connect up to two two-tray wide LCTs.
12. Banner sheet tray of two-tray wide LCT
Allows you to load large-sized paper in the two-tray wide LCT.
13. Multi bypass attachment kit
Attaches the multi bypass tray (Tray A) to the two-tray wide LCT.
14. Bridge unit of two-tray wide LCT
Connects a two-tray wide LCT to an additional wide LCT.
15. Three-tray wide LCT
Holds up to 4,000 sheets of paper. You can load paper sizes up to SRA3 or 13 × 191/5.
16. LCT
Holds up to 4,550 sheets of paper.
17. Interface box
Allows you to connect extended options to the machine.
18. A3/11 × 17 tray unit
You can load A3, 11 × 17 or larger size paper in Tray 1 using this unit. If you install the A3/11 × 17 tray unit
on your machine, you cannot use it as a tandem tray.
An indicator on the front left side of the tray lights while paper is feeding.
19. Buffer pass unit
Cools copies or prints.
20. Perfect binder
Applies adhesive to the spine of gathered pages to bind them in a booklet.
89
4. Getting Started
21. Finisher Bridge Unit
This option is required for connecting another manufacturer's finisher.
22. Finisher SR5110
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher shift tray 1
• Finisher shift tray 2
Copies or prints can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
23. SR5000 series output tray for banner sheet
Allows you to output paper that has a horizontal length of 487.8 mm (19.21 inches) or longer on Finisher
SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120.
24. Attention light
The machine’s operation status is indicated by lights. This is optional for a Type 1 machine but is attached to
other models.
See page 85 "Guide to Functions of the Attention Light".
25. Shift tray
This tray is capable of sorting and stacking printed sheets by copy or print job.
26. Booklet Finisher SR5100
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
• Finisher booklet tray
Copies or prints can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
27. Finisher SR5090
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
Copies or prints can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
28. Output jogger
Jogs the sheets delivered to the finisher shift tray
• You cannot install multiple finishers simultaneously.
• You cannot install the ring binder and perfect binder simultaneously.
• If you have connected two high capacity stackers, you cannot install the multi-folding unit, the ring
binder, or the perfect binder.
• You can install the multi-folding unit only if either Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120 is
installed.
90
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options
• You can install the ring binder or the perfect binder only if one of the following options is installed:
Finisher SR5110, Booklet Finisher SR5120, or the high capacity stacker.
• You can install the trimmer only if Booklet Finisher SR5120 is installed.
• The multi bypass tray (Tray A) can be attached only if either the LCT, the two-tray wide LCT, or the
three-tray wide LCT. However, you can attach the multi bypass tray (Tray A) to the two-tray wide
LCT only if the multi bypass attachment kit is installed.
Removing prints from finisher during printing
This section describes how to suspend a large copy or print job when using Finisher SR5110 or Booklet
Finisher SR5120.
Depending on the image you are copying or printing, prints might not stack properly. If this happens,
suspend the job, remove the prints and then restart the job.
If Delivered to Finisher Shift Tray 1
1. Press the [Suspend / Resume] key of finisher shift tray 1.
1
2
EAQ128
1. [Suspend / Resume] key
2. [Remove Paper] key
2. Press the [Remove Paper] key.
3. After the tray is lowered, remove the delivered paper.
EAQ129
91
4. Getting Started
4. Press the [Suspend / Resume] key to restart the print.
If Delivered to Finisher Shift Tray 2
1. Press the [Suspend / Resume] key of finisher shift tray 2.
1
EAQ126
1. [Suspend / Resume] key
2. Remove the stack of paper from the finisher shift tray 2.
EAQ127
3. Press the [Suspend / Resume] key to restart the print.
When using the Z-fold function
To use the Z-fold function, you must attach the Z-fold support tray.
Finisher SR5110 and Booklet Finisher SR5120
• Finisher shift tray
Attach the Z-fold support tray by inserting the two protrusions on its underside into the holes
on the finisher shift tray.
92
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options
EAQ130
Multi-folding unit
1. Lift up and slide the Z-fold support tray for multi-folding unit to the right, and then set
it in place.
CWR002
When you have finished using the Z-fold support tray for multi-folding unit, lift it up and slide
the tray to the left, and then lower it.
CWR003
When using the Letter Fold-out function
To use the Letter Fold-out function and the Multi-sheet Fold function at the same time, install the Z-fold
support tray for multi-folding unit and the output holding unit for letter fold-out.
93
4. Getting Started
2
1
CWR007
1. Z-fold support tray for multi-folding unit
2. Output holding unit for letter fold-out
1. Lift up and slide the Z-fold support tray for multi-folding unit to the right, and then set it in
place.
CWR002
2. Pull out the output holding unit for letter fold-out.
CWR008
When you have finished using the Z-fold support tray for multi-folding unit and the output holding
unit for letter fold-out, return each to their previous positions.
94
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options
CWR009
When ejecting paper weighing less than 52.2g/m2 to Finisher SR5110 or Booklet
Finisher SR5120
When printing on paper weighing less than 52.2g/m2, set the Z-fold support tray that is provided with
the finisher on the finisher shift tray.
1. Press the [Suspend / Resume] key on Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120, and
then remove the delivered paper.
See page 91 "Removing prints from finisher during printing".
2. Pull out the extension tray on the finisher shift tray 1 or 2.
EAQ138
95
4. Getting Started
3. Attach the Z-fold support tray by inserting the protrusions on its underside into the holes
on the finisher shift tray 1 or 2.
EAQ137
4. Press the [Suspend/Resume] key to resume printing.
When ejecting carbonless paper weighing less than 63g/m2 to Finisher SR5110 or
Booklet Finisher SR5120
When printing on carbonless paper weighing less than 63g/m2, set the Z-fold support tray that is
provided with the finisher on the finisher shift tray.
For details about how to attach the Z-fold support tray, see page 95 "When ejecting paper weighing
less than 52.2g/m2 to Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120".
• Depending on the brand of the paper being used, the paper may be ejected normally even when
the Z-fold support tray is not attached.
• When the Z-fold support tray is attached, output sheets may not be stacked neatly.
When ejecting envelopes to Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120
When printing on envelopes (with triangular flap) and ejecting them to Finisher SR5110 or Booklet
Finisher SR5120, set the Z-fold support tray that is provided with the finisher on the finisher shift tray.
For details about how to attach the Z-fold support tray, see page 95 "When ejecting paper weighing
less than 52.2g/m2 to Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120".
• When the Z-fold support tray is attached, the stack of the output sheets may not be aligned as
cleanly as when the support tray is not attached.
96
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options
When Continuously Printing on Coated Paper a Large Number of Copies to be Ejected
to the Finisher Booklet Tray
When ejecting to Booklet Finisher SR5120 a large number of booklets printed on coated paper larger
than A4, fold down the finisher booklet tray as shown in the figure below.
DTY001
• The finisher booklet tray can be folded in two angles.
• The approximate number of copies that can be ejected when the finisher booklet tray is not folded
is as follows:
• When binding 2–5 sheets: 45 copies
• When binding 6–10 sheets: 23 copies
• When binding 11–15 sheets: 15 copies
• When binding 16–20 sheets: 10 copies
• When binding 21–30 sheets: 5 copies
When ejecting thick paper or envelopes to the upper tray of the high capacity stacker
Attach the supplied thick paper support tray when ejecting the following paper to the upper tray of the
high capacity stacker:
• Thick paper longer than the length of B4 JIS
• Envelopes that exceed 332 mm (13.1 inches) in length
97
4. Getting Started
DWP023
Precautions for using Finisher SR5090 or Booklet Finisher SR5100
• Remove printouts from Finisher SR5090 or Booklet Finisher SR5100 by lifting them
straightforwardly from the left side. If you remove printouts at an angle or towards the front, the shift
tray may rise and catch them.
EAQ143
• When moving the finisher, do not hold the guide covers. Otherwise, the covers might be damaged.
1
EAQ144
1. Guide covers
• Do not hit the finisher (for instance, do not hit the surface of the finisher repeatedly to arrange stacks
of paper neatly).
98
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Internal Options/Option Controller
• OCR unit
Allows you to use the searchable PDF function. This is an option for Type 1, 2, and 3 machines.
• PostScript 3 unit
Allows you to print by Adobe PostScript 3 printer driver.
Allows you to output documents using the PDF Direct Print function, and store documents in PDF
format using Print from Storage Device function.
• XPS unit
Allows you to print XPS files.
• IPDS unit
Allows you to print using Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS).
• Wireless LAN board
Allows you to communicate over wireless LAN.
• File format converter
Allows you to download the documents that are stored in the Document Server. This is an option for
Type 1, 2, and 3 machines. See "Downloading Stored Documents with Web Image Monitor",
Basic Operations.
• Printer controller
Allows you to print by Fiery controller.
You can only attach the file format converter or printer controller.
The wireless LAN board cannot be used together with the following components:
• Gigabit Ethernet port
• Interface box*1
*1 When used for connecting another manufacturer's finisher.
99
4. Getting Started
Guide to the Names and Functions of the
Machine's Control Panel
You can use the copy function, scanner function, and programs on Type 1, 2, or 3 machines only.
1
2
3 45
6
7
8
9
13
12
11 10
14
15
16
100
17
EAR134
Guide to the Names and Functions of the Machine's Control Panel
1. Display panel
This is a touch panel display that features icons, keys, shortcuts, and widgets that allow you to navigate the
screens of the various functions and applications and provide you with information about operation status and
other messages. See page 110 "How to Use the [Home] Screen" and page 123 "How to Use Each
Application".
2. [Check Status] key
Press to check the machine's system status, operational status of each function, and current jobs. You can also
display the job history and the machine's maintenance information.
3. Status indicator
Indicates the status of the system. Stays lit when an error occurs or the toner runs out.
4. [Energy Saver] key
Press to switch to Low Power mode or Sleep mode. When the machine is in Sleep mode, press the key again
to recover the machine from sleep. See page 104 "Saving Energy".
5. Energy saver indicator
When the machine is in Low Power mode, the energy saver indicator is lit. In Sleep mode, the energy saver
indicator flashes slowly.
6. Main power indicator
The main power indicator goes on when you turn on the main power switch.
7. Data In indicator (printer mode)
Flashes when the machine is receiving print jobs from a computer. See Print.
8. [ ] key (Enter key)
Press to confirm values entered or items specified.
9. [Start] key
Press to start copying, printing, scanning, or sending.
10. [Clear] key
Press to delete a number entered.
11. [Stop] key
Press to stop a job in progress, such as copying, scanning or printing.
12. Number keys
Use to enter the numbers for copies and data for the selected function.
13. Display adjustment keys
Allows you to adjust the displayed image.
See page 107 "Adjusting the Display".
14. Control panel reset key
Press to restart the control panel. Used when operating from the control panel becomes unresponsive.
15. Media slots
Use to insert an SD card or a USB flash memory device. For details, see "Inserting/Removing a Memory
Storage Device", Preparation.
101
4. Getting Started
16. Media access lamp
Lights up when an SD card is inserted in the media slot.
17. USB Host Interface
Connect a keyboard, mouse, or other USB device.
Adjusting the Angle of the Control Panel
To improve usability, you can adjust the angle of the control panel.
1. Position the control panel at the horizontal angle that you require.
EAQ139
2. Position the control panel at the vertical angle that you require.
EAQ140
102
Turning On/Off the Power
Turning On/Off the Power
You can use the ADF and the address list on a Type 1, 2, or 3 machine.
Turning On/Off the Power
• Do not push the main power switch repeatedly.
• When you push the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds after it is confirmed that the main
power indicator has lit up or gone out.
• If the main power indicator does not light up or go out in 5 minutes after you push the main power
switch, contact your service representative.
The main power switch is on the top left of the machine. When this switch is turned on, the main power
turns on and the main power indicator on the right side of the control panel lights up. When this switch is
turned off, the main power turns off and the main power indicator on the right side of the control panel
goes out. When this is done, machine power is off.
Confirm how much power the options draw, and then plug them into an outlet that is nearby but
separate from the outlet that the main machine is plugged into.
• This machine automatically enters Low Power mode or Sleep mode if you do not use it for a while.
For details, see page 104 "Saving Energy".
Turning On the Main Power
1. Make sure the power cord is firmly plugged into the wall outlet.
2. Open the main power switch cover, and then push the main power switch.
The main power indicator goes on.
CWW213
103
4. Getting Started
• After you switch the main power on, a screen may appear to indicate that the machine is
initializing. Do not switch the power off during this process. Initialization takes about 16 minutes.
However, the time for initialization may differ depending on which options are installed on the
machine.
• If the machine does not turn on even if you press the main power switch, open the front left cover
and make sure that the AC power switch is turned on. For details about the AC power switch, see
page 525 "Dos and Don'ts".
• Application icons appear on the [Home] screen as the applications start running.
Turning Off the Main Power
• When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, always pull the plug, not the cord.
Pulling the cord can damage the power cord. Use of damaged power cords could result in fire
or electric shock.
• Do not turn off the power while the machine is in operation.
• Do not hold down the main power switch while turning off the main power. Doing so forcibly turns
off the machine's power and may damage the hard disk or memory and cause malfunctions.
1. Open the main power switch cover, and then push the main power switch.
The main power indicator goes out. The main power turns off automatically when the machine shuts
down. If the screen on the control panel does not disappear, contact your service representative.
Saving Energy
This machine has the following energy saving functions.
Low Power mode
If you do not use the machine for a certain period after an operation, the display will turn off and
the machine goes into Low Power mode. The machine uses less electricity in Low Power mode.
You can change the amount of time that the machine waits before switching to Low Power mode
under [Low Power Mode Timer]. For details, see "System Settings", Device Management.
You can change the machine's settings to enter Low Power mode when you press the [Energy
Saver] key. For details, see "System Settings", Device Management.
To exit Low Power mode, do one of the following:
104
Turning On/Off the Power
• Lift the ADF
• Place an original in the ADF
• Press the [Check Status] key
Sleep mode
If the machine remains inactive for a specified period or the [Energy Saver] key is pressed, it enters
Sleep mode to further reduce the electricity it consumes. For details, see "System Settings", Device
Management.
You can change the amount of time that the machine waits before switching to Sleep mode under
[Sleep Mode Timer]. For details, see "System Settings", Device Management.
To exit Sleep mode, do one of the following:
• Lift the ADF
• Place an original in the ADF
• Press the [Energy Saver] key
• Press the [Check Status] key
• When the machine is in Low Power mode, the [Energy Saver] key is lit. In Sleep mode, the [Energy
Saver] key flashes slowly.
• The energy saving functions will not operate in the following cases:
• When fixed warm-up is in progress
• When operations are suspended during printing
• When a warning message appears
• When paper is jammed
• When the Data In indicator is lit or flashing
• During communication with external equipment
• When the hard disk is active
• When the service call message appears
• When the ADF, machine's cover, or ADF cover are opened
• When the "Add Toner" message appears
• When toner is being replenished
• When one of the following screens is displayed:
• Machine Features
• Counter
• Inquiry
• Address Book Management
105
4. Getting Started
• Tray Paper Settings
• When the remote administration service notification screens is displayed.
• When data is being processed
• When a recipient is being registered in the address list
• When the sample print, locked print, hold print, or stored print screen is displayed
• When the screen of a document that was stored under the printer function appears (The
machine enters Low Power mode if this happens)
• When the internal cooling fan is active
• When accessing the machine using Web Image Monitor
Transfer heater switch
If the machine's interior temperature is not sufficiently high—for instance, on a winter morning—the
transfer roller's resistance value may increase temporarily, resulting in image quality degradation. To
prevent this, the machine is equipped with a transfer heater.
1. Open the front left cover.
2. If the machine's interior temperature is not sufficiently high—for instance, on a winter
morning—turn on the transfer heater switch.
Otherwise, set it to the standby position.
1
EAR133
1. Transfer heater switch
3. Close the front left cover.
106
Adjusting the Display
Adjusting the Display
You can adjust the color, brightness and display position of the control panel screen using the display
adjustment keys in the bottom right part of the control panel.
To adjust the display and unlock it, press and hold the Up and Down buttons at the same time for five
seconds.
• The setting is saved automatically if you do not perform any operation for more than 10 seconds
while configuring the setting.
1
2
3
DWP083
1. Mode button
Press this button to start or end display adjustment. This button also selects or deselects the setting item when
you are adjusting the display.
2. Up button
Press this button to move between the setting items, or change the setting value.
The cursor moves to the item above when moving between the items.
The value increases when changing a setting value.
It is also used to enable the display adjustment function.
3. Down button
Press this button to move between the setting items, or change the setting value.
The cursor moves to the item below when moving between the items.
The value decreases when changing a setting value.
It is also used to enable the display adjustment function.
107
4. Getting Started
Display adjustment screen
Setting item
108
Content
Setting range
Initial
value
Contrast
Adjust the overall contrast of all colors in RGB
0-255
55
ContrastRed
Adjust the contrast in red (digital setting)
0-255
50
ContrastGreen
Adjust the contrast in green (digital setting)
0-255
50
ContrastBlue
Adjust the contrast in blue (digital setting)
0-255
50
Filter
Select the spatial filter setting
Non, 0-4
Non
Gamma
Specify the gamma value setting
0.1-3.0
1.0
Backlight
Adjust the brightness
0-31
31
InputSelect
Select an image source to display
DVI/RGB
DVI
OSD HPosition
Adjust the horizontal position to display the
display adjustment screen (OSD)
5-253
128
OSD VPosition
Adjust the vertical position to display the
display adjustment screen (OSD)
63-210
128
OSD Effect
Specify the opacity setting of the display
adjustment screen (OSD)
0-7
0
Adjusting the Display
Setting item
Content
Setting range
Initial
value
Non, 5-60*1
30
OSD Timeout
Specify the time to wait before closing the
display adjustment screen (OSD)
Restore Default
Select to initialize the settings
-
-
Save Data
Select to save the data
-
-
Cancel
Select to cancel selection, or hide the display
adjustment screen (OSD)
-
-
Status
Select to display the status screen
-
-
*1 Select the time from 5-10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 and 60.
109
4. Getting Started
How to Use the [Home] Screen
You can use the copy function, Document Server function, scanner function, and programs on Type 1,
2, or 3 machines only.
The [Home] screen is set as the default screen when the machine is turned on.
One icon is assigned to each function, and these icons are displayed on the [Home] screen. You can
add shortcuts to frequently used functions or Web pages to the [Home] screen. Also, you can register
widgets such as the Change Langs. Widget to it. The [Home] screen and the screen of each function may
differ depending on the optional units that are installed.
To display the [Home] screen, press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
• Do not apply strong impact or force to the screen, or it may be damaged. Maximum force
allowable is approx. 30N (approx. 3 kgf). (N = Newton, kgf = Kilogram force. 1 kgf = 9.8N.)
To switch between screens, flick your finger to the right or left on the screen.
1
2
3
4
5
15
6
7
7
14
13
1. Machine status display
Displays the machine status.
2. Job status display
Displays the status of the first job in the job list.
3. Remaining toner icon
Shows the remaining amount of toner.
110
12
11
10
9
8
EAQ101
How to Use the [Home] Screen
4. Logged-in user icon
This key is displayed when user authentication is enabled. When you press the icon while [Login] is displayed,
the login screen appears. If you are already logged in to the machine, the logged-in user name is displayed.
Press the icon while you are logged-in to log out from the machine.
For details about how to log in and out, see page 145 "Logging In the Machine".
5. Function keys
For details, see page 113 "Changing Modes by Pressing the Function Keys".
6. Application list icon
Press to display the application list. You can create shortcuts to the applications on the [Home] screen.
To use an application displayed in the [Widgets] tab and [Program] tab, create a shortcut for the application
on the [Home] screen. For details, see "Customizing the [Home] Screen ", Preparation.
7. Icons to switch between screens
Press to switch between the five home screens. The icons appear at the bottom right and left of the screen, the
number of icons indicates the number of screens on each side of the current screen.
8. [Counter]
Press to display or print the total number of printed sheets. See page 547 "Counter".
9. [Media Information]
/
/
Press to remove the inserted SD card or USB flash memory device from the media slot. For details, see
"Removing an SD Card" or "Removing a USB Flash Memory Device", Preparation.
10. Remote operation message
Displays the connection status when you are connected to the control panel from a computer. For details
about "Remote Panel Operation", see page 78 "Allowing Remote Connection from a PC to the Control Panel".
11. [Menu]
Displays the menu screen of the application you are using. Depending on the application you are using, this
key may be disabled. You can also press this key in the [Home] screen to restore the [Home] screen's settings
to their defaults.
12. [Home]
Press to display the [Home] screen.
13. [Return]
Press this key to return to the previous screen while Screen Features are enabled or applications are used.
Depending on the application you are using, this key may be disabled. You can specify whether this key is
enabled or not in some applications. For details about the settings, see "Screen Features", Device
Management.
14. System message
Displays messages from the machine system and applications.
15. Icon display area
Displays the function or application icons and widgets. Displayed icons differ between the five home screens.
For details about icons on each screen, see page 112 "Main Icons on the [Home] Screen".
111
4. Getting Started
You can also add shortcuts and arrange icons using folders. For details, see "Customizing the [Home]
Screen", Preparation.
• You can change the [Home] screen's wallpaper. For details, see "Changing the [Home] Screen's
Wallpaper", Preparation.
• You can switch modes by pressing icons on the [Home] screen. You can also switch modes by
pressing the function keys.
• You cannot switch modes in any of the following situations:
• While scanning an original using the scanner function
• When accessing the following screens:
• Machine Features
• Counter
• Inquiry
• Address Book Management
• Current Job / Job History
• During interrupt copying
• The [Home] screen is set as the default screen when the machine is turned on. You can change this
default setting under Function Priority. See "Screen Features", Device Management.
Main Icons on the [Home] Screen
The following icons are displayed on the [Home] screen as a factory default:
Icon
Copier (Classic)
Description
Press to display the copier function's screen.
For details about how to use the copier function, see "Copy/Document
Server", Basic Operations.
Scanner (Classic)
Press to display the scanner function's screen.
For details about how to use the scanner function, see page 377
"Scan".
Printer (Classic)
Allows you to make settings for using the machine as a printer easily.
For details about how to use the printer function, see page 361 "Print".
112
How to Use the [Home] Screen
Icon
Description
Document Server
Press to store or print documents on the machine's hard disk.
For details about how to use the Document Server function, see
"Copy/Document Server", Basic Operations.
User Guide
Press to display the manuals for the machine.
User Tools
Press to display the screen for the machine's initial settings.
Printer Status
Press to display the device information screen. For details, see
page 114 "[Printer Status] Screen".
Tray Paper Settings
Press to display the Tray Paper Settings screen. For details, see
page 115 "[Tray Paper Settings] Screen".
Adjustment Settings for
Operators
Press to display the Adjustment Settings for Operators screen. For
details, see page 303 "Adjustment Settings for Operators".
You can add icons to the [Home] screen to customize the machine. For details about adding icons to the
[Home] screen, see "Adding Icons to the [Home] Screen", Preparation.
Changing Modes by Pressing the Function Keys
You can switch modes by pressing the function keys on the top of the screen.
1
EAR102
113
4. Getting Started
1. Function Keys
You can use the function keys when [Function Key] in Screen Features is enabled. See "Screen Features",
Device Management.
[Printer Status], [Tray Paper Settings] and [Adjustment Settings for Operators] are fixed items, and cannot be
changed. For detail about each function, see page 114 "[Printer Status] Screen", page 115 "[Tray Paper
Settings] Screen", and page 303 "Adjustment Settings for Operators".
You can assign frequently used functions to the 6 other keys to the right.
You can register often used functions to the function keys by using the following procedure:
1. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
2. Press the [User Tools] icon (
).
3. Press [Screen Features].
4. Press [Screen Device Settings].
5. Press [Function Key Settings].
6. Select the [Function Key] check box.
7. Select from [Function Key 1]-[Function Key 6] to which you want to assign a function.
8. Press [Allocated Function].
9. Select a function you want to register from the list.
10. Press [Display Name].
11. Enter the function name to display on the key.
12. Press [OK].
13. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
The function key is registered to the top of the screen.
[Printer Status] Screen
Press [Printer Status] among the function keys to display the device information screen.
In the device information screen, you can view the status of the supplies and paper in the main unit and
in each optional unit, and the list of jobs.
114
How to Use the [Home] Screen
3
4
1
2
EAR103
1. Supply / Paper Information
Displays errors prompting to replenish supplies or notifying the waste toner bottle being full, and information
such as the set status and remaining amount of toner. Also displays the settings and remaining amount of
paper in each tray.
2. Job Information
Displays the list of jobs.
3. [Supply Status]
Press [Supply Status] to view the Paper, Maintenance Info, Data Storage, Machine Address Info, and Inquiry
information.
For details, see "Checking Machine Status and Settings", Preparation.
4. Machine Front View
Shows the machine configuration, the tray used for printing, error status, and other information.
[Tray Paper Settings] Screen
Press [Tray Paper Settings] among the function keys to display the [Tray Paper Settings] screen.
In the [Tray Paper Settings] screen, you can specify the paper settings for the trays and interposer, and
configure the settings for functional papers.
115
4. Getting Started
1
2
3
4
EAR104
1. [Paper Tray] tab
Displays the list that shows the setting details of each tray and interposer.
The icon
indicates the tray that is configured manually or does not support duplex printing.
The icon indicates the tray that is manually configured or excluded from the source of automatic paper
selection.
The [Allocate Paper] screen is displayed when you select a tray. If you select the interposer, the [Interposer
Settings] screen is displayed.
For details about the paper settings for the paper tray, see page 266 "Changing Tray Paper Settings".
2. [Cover/Designation/Slip/Separation Sheet] tab
Displays the list of settings for front cover, back cover, designation, slip, and separation sheets.
When you select a functional paper, the functional paper settings screen is displayed.
3. The machine front view
Displays information such as the machine configuration, tray used for printing, error status, and other
information.
4. [CustomPaper Management]
Displays the [Custom Paper Management] screen.
For details about the [Custom Paper Management] screen, see page 40 "How to Use the [Custom Paper
Management] Screen".
116
How to Use the [Home] Screen
[Information] Screen
To raise awareness of resource conservation, you can configure the machine to display the reduction in
paper usage.
When user authentication is enabled, the screen is displayed when you log in to the machine. When
user authentication is not enabled, the screen is displayed after returning from Sleep mode or after a
system reset. The [Information] screen appears when the power is turned on, regardless of the
authentication settings.
1
2
3
4
5
EAR105
1. [Prev.] / [Crnt.]
Press to switch between the [Information] screen of the previous count period and that of the current count
period.
2. Paper Reduction
Shows the amount of paper saved by using the duplex and combine printing functions. The figure indicates the
percentage of paper saved from the total of all the paper used. As the figures become greater, the number of
the trees increases. If the paper reduction ratio exceeds a certain level, the trees will bear fruit.
Press the balloon to display the following items:
• Total Print Pages:
Total number of pages printed in the current count period is displayed.
• 2 sided Utilization:
The ratio of 2-sided prints to the total number of prints is displayed.
The higher the ratio is, the more leaves are displayed.
• Combine Utilization:
The ratio of combined prints to the total number of prints is displayed.
The higher the ratio is, the more leaves are displayed.
3. [Close]
Press this to close the [Information] screen and return to operation.
4. Count periods
The current and previous count periods are displayed.
117
4. Getting Started
5. Message
A message from the administrator is displayed.
• Depending on the machine settings, the [Information] screen may not be displayed. For details, see
"Managing Eco-friendly Counter", Security Guide.
• You can also use Web Image Monitor to check the usage status. For details about how to check
them, see Web Image Monitor Help.
• Under [Eco-friendly Counter Period / Administrator Message] in [System Settings], you can check
"Count Period", "Administrator Message", "Display Information Screen", and "Display Time". Only
the administrator can change the settings. For details, see "Managing Eco-friendly Counter",
Security Guide.
[Web Browser] Screen
The machine has a web browser that allows you to view Web pages.
You must first configure the network settings in [Screen Features]. For details about the settings, see
"Screen Features", Device Management.
To start a web browser on the control panel, press
[APPS] tab.
1
2
, and then press the [Web Browser] icon on the
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
EAR107
1. Tab
Press to switch screens. To display the URL bar, press the tab of the Web page.
118
How to Use the [Home] Screen
2. URL bar
Press this bar to enter the URL of a Web page. You can type the URL of a Web page that you want to display
by pressing the address bar.
3. Menu
Press [Menu] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center to open this menu.
4. [Refresh]/[Stop]
Press to refresh a Web page.
While a Web page is refreshing, [Stop] appears.
5. [Forward]
Press to return to the previous Web page after pressing [Return] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
6. [New tab]
Press to open a new tab.
7. [New incognito tab]
Press to open a new tab that leaves no record in the browser history or search history.
8. [Share page]
Press to share Web pages with other devices.
9. [Find on page]
Press to type a word and search for it on the current Web page.
10. [Request desktop site]
Press to switch the Web page display mode from the mobile version to the desktop version.
11. [Save for offline reading]
Press to save the Web page for offline reading.
12. [Page info]
Press to display the URL or server certificate of the Web page that you are accessing.
13. [Print]
Press to specify the printing conditions such as paper sizes and duplex printing. For details, see "Printing a
Web Page", Preparation.
14. [Save PDF File]
Press to save the PDF file displayed on the browser. You can save the file to an SD card or USB flash memory
device. For detail, see "Saving PDF files downloaded from Web pages", Preparation.
15. [Settings]
Press to specify security settings and other browser settings. For details, see "Browser Settings", Preparation.
• For precautions on accessing external servers using the Web Browser, see "Checking the security
of the browser function", Preparation.
119
4. Getting Started
Possible Operations on the Application Screen
This section describes the home screen, and explains the operations that can be performed on the
operation screen of some applications.
• Pinch-in
Place your thumb and forefinger on the screen, and then pinch the fingers together to zoom out the
screen. Double-tapping can also be effective for this operation.
DWP061
• Pinch-out
Place your thumb and forefinger on the screen, and then spread the fingers apart to zoom in the
screen. Double-tapping can also be effective for this operation.
DWP062
• Flick
Flick your finger to the right or left on the screen to switch between screens.
DWP063
• Long tap
120
How to Use the [Home] Screen
Place your finger on the screen and hold it there until the next screen appears. You can display the
menu screen of the application you are using.
DWP064
• Drag
Slide your finger while pressing the screen. You can move an icon to where you want to place it on
the screen.
DWP065
• While using applications other than any of Standard Application, you may enter text for the
operations explained above.
Changing the Display Language
You can change the language used on the display. English is set as default.
1. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
2. Press the [User Tools] icon (
).
3. Press [Screen Features].
4. Press [Language & input].
5. Press [Change Language].
6. Select the language you want to display.
7. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
121
4. Getting Started
• You can specify which display languages are available in [Select Switchable Languages]. For
details, see "Screen Features", Device Management.
System Reset
After finishing a job, the machine waits a specified length of time and then restores its settings to the
default values specified under Function Priority. This function is called "System Reset".
For the procedure for specifying default settings under Function Priority, see "Screen Features", Device
Management.
To change the length of time that the machine waits before restoring its settings to their default values,
use the System Auto Reset Timer setting. See "Timer Settings", Device Management.
122
How to Use Each Application
How to Use Each Application
You can use the copy function, Document Server function, scanner function, and programs on Type 1,
2, or 3 machines only.
You can open the function screens by pressing icons such as [Copier (Classic)], [Printer (Classic)], or
[Scanner (Classic)] on the [Home] screen.
There are two types of application screens.
Standard Application Screen
Functions and settings that are used frequently are shown on the top screen. Flick the screen up or
down to select a setting item. When you select an item, the pull-down menu appears, or the setting
item pops up. For details about operations on this screen, see page 126 "How to Use the [Copier]
Screen", page 127 "How to Use the [Document Server] Screen", page 131 "How to Use the
[Printer] Screen", and page 132 "How to Use the [Scanner] Screen".
Other Application Screen
Other functions and the application for configuring and adjusting the machine are shown on this
screen. Printer status, tray paper settings, operator adjustment, other items are available on the
other application screen.
Keys that Appear on the Initial Settings Screen and Screens of Each Standard
Application
The display panel shows the operation status, messages, and function menus.
The function items displayed serve as selector keys. You can select or specify an item by lightly pressing
them.
When you select or specify an item on the display panel, it is highlighted like
appearing as
cannot be used.
. Keys
123
4. Getting Started
Machine Features screen
2
1
EAR108
1. Function screen
You can customize the default settings of the machine system, copier, Document Server, printer, and
scanner function. See "System Settings", Device Management, "Copier / Document Server Features"
Preparation, "Printer Features" Preparation, or "Scanner Features" Preparation.
2. [User Tools]
Press this to use the following items:
• Screen Features
Press to customize the default settings of the operating system installed on the control panel. See
"Screen Features", Device Management.
• Machine Features
Press to display Machine Features screen.
• Counter
Press to check or print the counter value. See "Counter", Maintenance and Management.
• Inquiry
Press to find out where to order expendable supplies and where to call when a malfunction occurs.
• Address Book Management
Press to display the Address Book.
Standard applications' screen
You can use [Program], [Interrupt], and [Sample Copy] on Type 1, 2, or 3 machines only.
124
How to Use Each Application
1
2
3
4
5
EAQ109
1. [Simple Scrn]
Press to switch to the simple screen. See page 144 "Switching Screen Patterns".
2. [Reset]
Press to clear the current settings.
3. [Program]
Press to register frequently used settings, or to recall registered settings. See "Registering Frequently Used
Functions", Preparation.
4. [Interrupt]
Press to make interrupt copies. See "Interrupt Copy", Basic Operations.
5. [Sample Copy]
Press to make a single set of copies or prints to check print quality before making multiple sets. See
"Sample Copy", "Sort", Basic Operations.
125
4. Getting Started
How to Use the [Copier] Screen
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
EAR110
1. Operational status and messages
Displays operational status and messages.
2. Frequently used reduce/enlarge ratios
You can register up to two frequently used reduce/enlarge ratios other than the preset ratios under
[Reproduction Ratio] in the User Tools menu. For details, see "Reproduction Ratio", Preparation.
3. [Store File]
Allows you to store documents in the Document Server.
4. Original, Quantity, and Copy
Displays the numbers of originals scanned, copies set, and copies made.
5. [Check Modes]
Press the key to confirm the current settings.
6. Sort, Stack, Staple, Punch, and Fold functions
Displays settings that can be selected for sorting, stacking, stapling, punching, and folding copies.
You can register frequently used staple, punch, and fold functions under [Input / Output] in the User Tools
menu. For details, see "Input / Output", Preparation.
7. Available functions
Press a function to display its menu. When you select a function,
is displayed under the key.
8. Original and scanning settings
Use this area to specify the original type, image density level, and other settings.
126
How to Use Each Application
How to Use the [Document Server] Screen
You can organize documents stored in the Document Server in folders.
You can view a list of the documents in a folder by touching the folder key.
Folder list screen
1
2
7
3
4
6
5
EAR111
File list screen
8
9
10
13
11
12
EAR112
1. Operational status and messages
Displays operational status and messages.
127
4. Getting Started
2. [No.], [Folder Name], and [Created Date/Time]
Press the item to sort the folders. Select the same item once more for a reverse sort.
3. [New Folder]
Press to create a new folder.
4. [Edit Folder]
Press to change the folder name or password, or to delete the folder.
5. Folder keys
Press to display the list of stored files in the folder. If a password has been specified for a folder, a lock icon
appears to the left of the folder name.
6. Keys for searching for folders
You can search for folders by number or name.
7. List and Thumbnails
Displays keys for switching the display between list and thumbnails.
8. [User Name], [File Name], and [Date]
Press the item to sort the files. Select the same item once more for a reverse sort.
9. [Up One Level]
Press to display the list of folders.
10. Page, Quantity, and Print
Displays the number of originals stored in memory, number of sets to be printed, and prints made.
11. Operation keys
Press to operate stored files.
If the file you want to select is not displayed in the list, press [ ] or [ ] to scroll the screen.
12. Icons
Displays an icon that indicates the function used to store the document. If a password has been specified for a
file, a lock icon appears to the left of the user name for the file.
The following icons appear in the list of the Document Server to indicate the function used to store a document.
Function
Icon
Copier
Printer
13. Keys for searching for files
You can search for documents by user name or file name.
[Thumbnail] screen
In thumbnail view, reduced versions of the stored documents are displayed. This is useful for
checking a document's content on the file list screen.
128
How to Use Each Application
• Some stored documents may not be displayed, depending on the security settings.
• For details about how to check the files stored using the scanner function, see page 137 "[Select
Stored File] screen under the scanner function".
[Preview] screen under the Document Server function
This section explains the items that appear on the [Preview] screen and how to preview stored
documents.
The [Preview] screen denotes the screen that allows confirming contents of the scanned documents.
To preview stored documents, select the documents you want to preview on the file list screen, and then
press [Preview].
129
4. Getting Started
1
2
8
3
4
7
6
5
EAR113
1. [Exit]
Closes the preview display.
2. Display File
Displays the file name.
If you have selected two or more files for preview, press [Switch] to switch between them.
3. Display Page
Displays the number of the currently displayed page, total number of pages and page size.
4. [Switch]
Flips the page of the selected file.
5. Display Position
Indicates the location of the displayed preview image when the image is enlarged.
6. [ ][ ][ ][ ]
Moves the display area in the direction indicated by the arrow.
7. [Zoom Out] and [Zoom In]
Scales the displayed page down or up.
8. Preview image
Displays a preview of scanned documents. Double-tapping the image allows you to enlarge and display it at
the original magnification. The position where you tapped the image is displayed in the center of the preview
area when the preview image is magnified.
• When the preview is already selected from another function, the preview screen function may become
unusable.
130
How to Use Each Application
• The preview display is also not available when the paper size is larger than A3 or if the image file is
corrupt. If the image file is corrupt, store it again.
How to Use the [Printer] Screen
1 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
EAR114
1. Operational status or messages
Displays current machine status, such as "Ready", "Offline", and "Printing...". Information about the print job
(user ID and document name) appears in this section.
2. Paper tray status indicators
Displays paper tray settings.
3. [Print from Memory Storage Device]
Press to display the screen for printing files stored on memory storage devices directly.
4. [Job Reset]
Press to cancel the current print job.
If you press it when the Hex Dump is selected, Hex Dump is canceled.
5. [Job Operation]
Press to suspend a job being processed.
6. [Form Feed]
Press to print all the data left in the machine's input buffer.
7. [Spooling Job List]
Press to display spooled jobs.
131
4. Getting Started
8. [Error Log]
Press to display the error logs of print jobs sent from a computer.
9. [Print Jobs]
Press to display print jobs sent from a computer.
How to Use the [Scanner] Screen
[Email] screen
This section explains the screen layout when sending scan files by e-mail.
1 2
3
4
5 6 7
8
9
14
10
13
12
11
DWP133
1. [Reg. No.]
Press this key to specify the destination using a five-digit registration number.
2. Operational status and messages
Displays operational status and messages.
3. Email / Folder
Press these tabs to switch between the [Email] screen and [Scan to Folder] screen.
• When
(Email) is selected, you can specify e-mail destinations.
• When
(Folder) is selected, you can specify folder destinations.
Switch the screen also when sending the same files by both e-mail and Scan to Folder.
4. E-mail icon
Indicates that the [Email] screen is displayed.
132
How to Use Each Application
5. [Manual Entry]
To specify destinations not registered in the address book, press this key, and then enter the e-mail addresses
using the soft keyboard that appears.
6. [Recent]
Press this key to select destinations that have been recently specified using [Manual Entry]. If there are multiple
recent destinations, press [ ] or [ ] to scroll through them.
7. Switch screens
Press to switch to the [WSD scanner (Push Type)] screen or the [DSM scanner] screen. If you are using the
WSD scanner, [WSD Dest.] appears. If you are using the DSM scanner, [DSM Destination] appears.
8. [Check Modes]
Allows you to confirm the scanning settings.
9. Destination field
The specified destination appears. If more than one destination has been specified, press [ ] or [ ] to scroll
through the destinations.
10. Destination list
The list of destinations registered in the machine appears. If all of the destinations cannot be displayed, press
[ ] or [ ] to switch the screen.
The (
) symbol indicates a group destination.
The (
or
) symbol indicates a destination that can receive encrypted e-mail.
11. [Text], [Subject], [Security], [Sender Name], and [Recept. Notice]
Enter the message and specify the subject, security (encryption and a signature), sender, and whether or not
to use Message Disposition Notification.
12. [Select Stored File]
Allows you to send the documents stored in the Document Server.
13. [Send File Type / Name]
Press to specify settings such as file format and file name.
14. Original and scanning settings
Allows you to specify scan settings and original feed types.
[Scan to Folder] screen
This section describes the screen layout when sending scan files by Scan to Folder.
133
4. Getting Started
1 2
3
4
5 6 7
8
9
14
10
13
12
11
DWP134
1. [Reg. No.]
Press to specify a destination using a five-digit registration number.
2. Operational status and messages
Displays operational status and messages.
3. Email / Folder
Press to switch between the [Scan to Folder] screen and [Email] screen.
• When
(Email) is selected, you can specify e-mail destinations.
• When
(Folder) is selected, you can specify folder destinations.
Also switch the screen when sending a file simultaneously by both Scan to Folder and e-mail.
4. Scan to Folder icon
Shows that the [Scan to Folder] screen is displayed.
5. [Manual Entry]
To specify destinations not registered in the address book, specify Scan to Folder destinations on the screen
displayed by pressing this key.
6. [Recent]
Press this key to select destinations that have been recently specified using [Manual Entry]. If there is more than
one recent destination, press [ ] or [ ] to scroll through them.
7. Switch screens
Press to switch to the [WSD scanner (Push Type)] screen or the [DSM scanner] screen. If you are using the
WSD scanner, [WSD Dest.] appears. If you are using the DSM scanner, [DSM Destination] appears.
8. [Check Modes]
Allows you to confirm the scanning settings.
134
How to Use Each Application
9. Destination field
The specified destination appears. If more than one destination has been specified, press [ ] or [ ] to scroll
through the destinations.
10. Destination list
The list of destinations registered in the machine appears.
If all of the destinations cannot be displayed, press [ ] or [ ] to switch the screen.
The (
) symbol indicates a group destination.
11. [Text], [Subject], [Security], [Sender Name], and [Recept. Notice]
Enter the message and specify the subject, e-mail security (encryption and a signature), sender, and whether
or not to use Message Disposition Notification. The entries will be used for e-mail transmission when sending
files simultaneously by Scan to Folder and e-mail. For details, see "Sending Scanned Documents to a Client
Computer", Basic Operations.
12. [Select Stored File]
Allows you to send the documents stored in the Document Server.
13. [Send File Type / Name]
Press to specify settings such as file format and file name.
14. Original and scanning settings
Allows you to specify scan settings and original feed types.
[WSD scanner (Push Type)] screen
This section explains the layout of the screen that allows you to send scan files using WSD (Push Type).
1
2
3
4
5
7
6
DWP135
1. [Update]
Press this key to update the destination list.
135
4. Getting Started
2. WSD
This tab is highlighted whenever the machine is used as a WSD scanner.
3. [WSD Dest.]
Press to switch to the [Email] screen or [Scan to Folder] screen.
4. [Check Modes]
Allows you to confirm the scanning settings.
5. Destination field
The specified destination is displayed here. You can specify only one destination.
6. Destination list
The list of available destinations is displayed here.
If all of the destinations cannot be displayed, press [ ] or [ ] to move through the list.
7. Original and scanning settings
Allows you to specify scan settings and original feed types.
[DSM scanner] screen
This section explains the layout of the screen that allows you to send scan files using DSM.
1
2
3
4
6
5
DWP136
1. DSM
This tab is highlighted whenever the machine is used as a DSM scanner.
2. [DSM Destination]
Press to switch to the [Email] screen or [Scan to Folder] screen.
3. [Check Modes]
Allows you to confirm the scanning settings.
136
How to Use Each Application
4. Destination field
The specified destination is displayed here. You can specify only one destination.
5. Destination list
The list of available destinations is displayed here.
If all of the destinations cannot be displayed, press [ ] or [ ] to move through the list.
6. Original and scanning settings
Allows you to specify scan settings and original feed types.
[Select Stored File] screen under the scanner function
This section describes how the list of stored files is displayed.
To display stored files, press [Select Stored File] on the initial scanner display. You can organize files
stored in folders. You can view a list of the files in a folder by touching the folder key.
Folder list screen
1
7
2
3
4
5
6
EAR145
137
4. Getting Started
File list screen
8
9
10
11
12
13
15
14
EAR117
1. [No.], [Folder Name], and [Created Date/Time]
Press the item to use to sort the folders. Select the same item once more for a reverse sort.
2. [Cancel]
Press to return to the previous screen.
3. [New Folder]
Press to create new folder.
4. [Edit Folder]
Press to change the folder name or password, or to delete the folder.
5. Folder keys
Press to display the list of stored files in the folder. If a password has been specified for a folder, a lock icon
( ) appears to the left of the folder name.
6. Keys for searching for folders
You can search for folders by number or name.
7. List/Thumbnails
You can select whether to display stored files as a list or as thumbnails.
8. [Send]
Press this to send a stored file by e-mail or Scan to Folder.
9. [Manage / Delete File]
Press this to delete stored files or change the file data.
10. [User Name], [File Name], and [Date]
Press to sort the files using the selected item. Select the same item once more for a reverse sort. However, the
files cannot be sorted in reverse delivery.
138
How to Use Each Application
11. [Details]
Press this to display details about the selected file.
12. [Preview]
Press this to display a preview of the selected file. For details, see "Checking a stored file selected from the
list", Basic Operations.
13. List of stored files
Displays the list of stored files.
If the file you want to select is not displayed in the list, press [ ] or [ ] to scroll the screen.
14. Icons
If a password has been specified for a file, a lock icon ( )appears to the left of the user name for the file.
Displays an icon that indicates the color mode of the document.
Color mode
Icon
Black & White, Gray scale
Full color
15. Keys for searching for files
You can search for documents by user name or file name.
• Depending on the security setting, some files may not appear in the list.
• Files stored under functions other than the scanner function do not appear on this screen.
[Check Modes] screen under the scanner function
Use the [Check Modes] screen to check scanning and transmission settings.
Pressing [Check Modes] switches the screen from the initial scanner display to the [Check Modes]
screen.
139
4. Getting Started
[Check Modes] screen
1
2
3
6
4
5
DWP139
1. Transmission function icon
Displays the icon of the transmission function in use.
) symbol indicates a group destination.
The (
The (
or
) symbol indicates a destination that can receive encrypted e-mail.
2. Sender and destination
Displays the sender and transmission destinations.
3. Send
Displays transmission settings such as sender and subject.
You can also check the security settings (encryption and signature).
4. Store File Setting
Displays settings for storing documents selected in [Store File].
5. [Expand Group Dest.]
Press to display the members of the group, when a group is specified as the destination.
6. Original
Displays Scan Settings, Original Feed Type, and other scanning settings.
• While this machine is being used as a WSD scanner, only the settings specified directly on the
machine can be displayed.
140
How to Use Each Application
[Preview] screen under the scanner function
Use the [Preview] screen to check that originals have been scanned correctly.
This section explains about the [Preview] screen that can be used before sending files by e-mail or Scan
to Folder, or the DSM scanner.
Before you start scanning, press [Preview]. If you scan originals while [Preview] is selected, the [Preview]
screen appears.
You can start or cancel sending the files after checking the preview and the scan settings used for
scanning.
1
2
3
9
4
5
8
7
6
DWP140
1. [Cancel Sending]
Press to close a preview and interrupt a transmission.
2. [Send]
Press to close a preview and continue a transmission.
3. Display File
Displays a file's name and size.
4. Display Page
Displays the number of the currently displayed page, total number of pages, page size, and color mode.
5. [Switch]
Press to change the page of the scanned original that is displayed.
6. Display Position
Displays the position of an image when enlarged.
141
4. Getting Started
7. [ ][ ][ ][ ]
Press to shift the displayed area.
8. [Zoom Out] and [Zoom In]
Press to reduce or enlarge the displayed preview.
9. Preview image
Displays a preview of scanned documents. Double-tapping the image allows you to enlarge and display it at
the original magnification. The position where you tapped the image is displayed in the center of the preview
area when the preview image is magnified.
• Preview is not available if you are scanning by WSD. View the scanned images on the destination
computer instead.
• Preview is not available if a file is scanned using [Store to HDD]. You can view a stored file using the
[Preview] screen displayed from the list of stored files. For details about viewing a stored file, see
"Checking a stored file selected from the list", Basic Operations.
• Preview is not available if you select [High Compression PDF] as the file type.
• Preview might not be displayed if scanning failed or the image file is corrupted. If this is the case, scan
the original again.
[Scanned Files Status] screen under the scanner function
This section explains items that are displayed and how to display the [Scanned Files Status] screen.
Use the [Scanned Files Status] screen to check e-mail transmission and Scan to Folder results.
Press [Scanned Files Status] to display the [Scanned Files Status] screen.
Up to nine transmission results are displayed at the same time. Press [ ] or [ ] to switch between results.
142
How to Use Each Application
[Scanned Files Status] screen
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
DWP141
1. Date / Time
Displays the time and date transmission was specified by this machine or the time and date when
Completed, Error, or Cancelled was confirmed.
2. Transmission function icon
Displays the icon of the transmission function used.
The ( ) symbol indicates a destination that can receive encrypted e-mail.
3. Destination
Displays the transmission destination.
If you have selected multiple destinations, the first selected destination is displayed.
Other destinations appear as "+ X" (X indicates the number of destinations.) when sending files by email.
4. Sender
Displays the sender name.
5. File Name
Displays the stored file name of files that are simultaneously sent and stored, or of stored files that are
sent.
6. Errors Descriptions
Press to display likely causes of the scanner function errors.
7. Status
Displays one of the following transmission statuses: Completed, Trnsmtg., Waiting..., Error, or Cancelled.
8. [Cancel]
To cancel transmission, select a file whose status is "Waiting...", and then press [Cancel].
143
4. Getting Started
9. [Print List]
Press to print transmission results.
10. [ ]/[ ]
Press to scroll the screen.
• You cannot check scanner function transmission results in the [Job History] screen. To check
transmission results, press [Scanned Files Status].
• Depending on security settings, some transmission results might not be displayed.
Switching Screen Patterns
This section explains how to switch to the simple screen and the keys that are displayed.
Only the main functions can be used.
Letters and keys are displayed at a larger size, making operations easier.
1. Press [Simple Scrn] on the upper left of the screen.
This illustration shows the copier function's simple screen.
1
EAR119
1. [Key Color]
Press to increase screen contrast by changing the color of the keys.
This is effective on the simple screen only.
• To return to the initial display, press the same key used in Step 1.
144
Logging In the Machine
Logging In the Machine
When the Authentication Screen is Displayed
If Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, or LDAP Authentication is active, the authentication
screen appears on the display. The machine only becomes operable after entering your own Login User
Name and Login Password. If User Code Authentication is active, you cannot use the machine until you
enter the User Code.
If you can use the machine, you can say that you are logged in. When you go out of the operable state,
you can say that you are logged out. After logging in the machine, be sure to log out of it to prevent
unauthorized usage.
• Ask the user administrator for the Login User Name, Login Password, and User Code. For details
about user authentication, see "Configuring User Authentication", Security Guide.
• User Code to enter on User Code Authentication is the numerical value registered in the Address
Book as "User Code".
• If authentication fails, the "Authentication has failed." message appears. Check that the Login User
Name and Login Password are correct.
User Code Authentication Using the Control Panel
If User Code Authentication is active, a screen prompting you to enter a User Code appears.
1. Enter a User Code (up to eight digits), and then press [OK].
• To log out, press the [Energy Saver] key after jobs are completed, or press and hold [Reset].
145
4. Getting Started
User Code Authentication Using a Printer Driver
If User Code Authentication is active, specify the User Code in the printer properties of the printer driver.
For details, see the printer driver Help.
• When logged in through User Code Authentication, you do not have to log out.
Logging In Using the Control Panel
This section explains the procedure for logging in to the machine when Basic Authentication, Windows
Authentication, or LDAP Authentication is set.
1. Press the logged-in user icon on the top right on the screen.
2. Press [User Name].
146
Logging In the Machine
3. Enter a login user name.
4. Press [Password].
5. Enter a login password.
6. Press [Login].
• If authentication fails, the "Cannot log in." message appears. Check that the Login User Name and
Login Password are correct.
• When User Code Authentication is active, a different screen appears. See page 145 "User Code
Authentication Using the Control Panel".
Logging Out Using the Control Panel
This section explains the procedure for logging out the machine when Basic Authentication, Windows
Authentication, or LDAP Authentication is set.
• To prevent use of the machine by unauthorized persons, always log out when you have finished
using the machine.
1. Press the logged-in user icon on the top right on the screen.
2. Press [OK].
147
4. Getting Started
Logging In Using an IC Card
Log in to the machine by waving an IC card over the machine when Quick Card Authentication is
specified.
• Wave only one IC card over the machine at a time.
When using an IC card registered with your login user name and password:
1. Wave it over the NFC card reader.
DWP047
You will log in to the machine.
When using an IC card not registered with your login user name and password:
1. Wave it over the NFC card reader.
DWP047
The registration screen is displayed.
2. Enter the login user name and password registered to the machine's address book.
3. Press [Register].
4. Press [Exit].
5. Wave the card over the NFC card reader.
You will log in to the machine.
148
Logging In the Machine
• If a user waves an IC card over a machine another user is logged in to, the user who logged in
previously is logged out and the newer user logs in.
• You can also log in to the machine by pressing [Login Using Keyboard] and entering your login
user name and password.
Logging Out Using an IC Card
Log out from the machine by waving your IC card over the machine when Quick Card Authentication is
specified.
• Wave only one IC card over the machine at a time.
1. Wave your IC card over the NFC card reader.
DWP047
You will log out from the machine.
• You can also log out from the machine by pressing [Logout] in the top right corner of the screen.
Using a Smart Device to Log in to the MFP
When operating a machine for which user authentication is specified, you can log in to the machine
without entering a user name and password by holding your smart device near its operation panel.
For details about RICOH Smart Device Connector, see the manuals for RICOH Smart Device Connector.
• To use this function, enable the Quick Card Authentication function and Bluetooth Authentication
Plugin.
149
4. Getting Started
• Register the smart device to the MFP using the Quick Card Authentication function before using this
function.
• If the machine's Bluetooth setting is enabled and Quick Card Authentication is set to "Bluetooth",
you can log in to the machine by holding a smart device over the operation panel.
• To use a smart device, it is necessary to enable the Bluetooth setting and start RICOH Smart Device
Connector.
• The smart device's hardware and operating system must support Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE).
1. Check that the Bluetooth function of the smart device is enabled.
2. On the operation panel of the machine, display the authentication screen of Quick Card
Authentication.
3. On the menu of RICOH Smart Device Connector, flick the screen to the left or right to
select [Login Machine].
4. Press [Login / Logout].
5. Touch the smart device to the Bluetooth label on the operation panel of the machine.
The smart device is connected with the machine, and login is now complete.
• You cannot log in to the MFP by holding the smart device near its operation panel while the MFP is
in Sleep mode.
• If a user waves a smart device over a machine another user is logged in to, the user who logged in
previously is logged out and the newer user logs in.
Using a Smart Device to Log out from the MFP
If the machine's Bluetooth setting is enabled and Quick Card Authentication is set to "Bluetooth", you can
log out from the machine by holding the smart device over the operation panel.
1. Touch the smart device to the Bluetooth label on the operation panel of the machine.
You will be logged out from the machine.
• You can also log out from the machine by pressing [Logout] in the top right corner of the screen.
Auto Logout Function
This machine has an auto logout function.
If the machine is idle for a specified period, the user is automatically logged out.
150
Logging In the Machine
Logging In Using a Driver
Enter your login user name and password as registered in the machine. You need only do this the first
time you access the machine.
The procedure is explained using Windows 10 as an example.
Logging in using a printer driver
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Windows System].
2. Click [Control Panel].
3. Click [View devices and printers].
4. Right-click the icon for this machine, and then click [Printing properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
5. Click the [Advanced Options] tab.
6. Select the [User Authentication] check box.
7. If you want to encrypt the login password, click [Driver Encryption Key...].
If you do not want to encrypt the password, proceed to Step 10.
8. Enter the driver encryption key already set on the machine.
9. Click [OK] to close the [Driver Encryption Key] dialog box.
10. Click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box.
11. Right-click the icon for this machine, and then click [Printing preferences].
The printing preferences dialog box appears.
12. Specify the user authentication setting.
13. Enter a login user name and login password already set on the machine or the server
for user authentication.
Be sure to enter the same login user name and login password that is registered on the
machine or the server.
If you do not enter a valid login user name and login password, printing will not start.
14. Click [OK] to close the [Authentication] dialog box.
15. Click [OK] to close the printing preferences dialog box.
• Depending on the application in use, the properties specified in this procedure may not take
effect.
• If you log in using the driver, you do not need to log out when you finish.
151
4. Getting Started
Logging In Using Web Image Monitor
This section explains the procedure for logging in to the machine via Web Image Monitor.
1. Open a web browser.
2. Enter "http://(the machine's IP address or host name)/" in the address bar.
3. Click [Login].
4. Enter a Login User Name and Login Password, and then click [Login].
Depending on the configuration of your web browser, the login user name and password might be
saved. If you do not want to save them, configure your web browser's settings so that this
information is not saved.
• For User Code Authentication, enter a User Code in the [Login User Name] box, and then click
[Login].
• The procedure may differ depending on the web browser used.
Logging Out Using Web Image Monitor
This section explains the procedure for logging out the machine via Web Image Monitor.
1. Click [Logout].
• Delete the cache memory of a web browser after logging out.
User Lockout Function
This machine has a User Lockout function.
If an incorrect password is entered the number of times specified by the administrator, the User Lockout
function prevents further login attempts under the same user name.
Even if the locked out user enters the correct password later, authentication will fail and it will not be
possible to use the machine.
For details about releasing a locked out user, see "User Lockout Function", Security Guide.
Changing the Login Password
You can use alphanumeric characters and symbols when registering login user passwords.
You can register up to 128 single-byte characters.
152
Logging In the Machine
The passwords are case-sensitive. Keep this in mind when registering them.
• Do not disclose the password to outsiders. Similarly, do not write the password down and leave it
where others can see it.
• Change the password periodically.
• Make the password difficult to guess.
Password Policy
This machine has a password policy.
Only passwords meeting the specified criteria for level of complexity and minimum number of
characters can be registered. For details about the criteria, see "Specifying the Extended Security
Functions", Security Guide.
Passwords can contain the following characters:
• Upper case letters: A to Z (26 characters)
• Lower case letters: a to z (26 characters)
• Numbers: 0 to 9 (10 characters)
• Symbols: (space) ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _` { | } ~ (33 characters)
Some characters are not available, regardless of whether their codes are entered using the
keyboard or the control panel.
Changing the login password using the control panel
1. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
2. Press the [User Tools] icon (
).
3. Press [Machine Features].
4. Press [Login] twice.
5. Enter a login user name, and then press [OK].
6. Enter a login password, and then press [OK].
7. Press [Exit].
8. Press [Address Book Management].
9. Select the user.
10. Press [Auth. Info].
11. Press [Change] for [Login Password].
12. Enter a new login password, and then press [OK].
13. If a password reentry screen appears, enter the login password, and then press
[OK].
14. Press [OK].
153
4. Getting Started
15. Press [User Tools] (
16. Press [Home] (
) on the top right of the screen.
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
Changing the login password using Web Image Monitor
1. Open a web browser.
2. Enter "http://(the machine's IP address or host name)/" in the address bar.
3. Click [Login].
4. Enter the login user name and login password, and then click [Login].
5. Point to [Device Management], and then click [Address Book].
6. Select the user or group.
7. Click [Change].
8. Click [Change] next to [Login Password] in the [Authentication Information] area.
9. Enter the new password in the [New Password] box.
10. Enter the new password in the [Confirm Password] box.
11. Click [OK] three times.
Changing the login password for the printer driver
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Windows System].
2. Click [Control Panel].
3. Click [View devices and printers].
4. Right-click the icon for this machine, and then click [Printing preferences].
The printing preferences dialog box appears.
5. Specify the user authentication setting.
If you are using the PCL 6 printer driver, click the [Detailed Settings] tab, click [Job Setup],
and then click [Authentication...] in the [Job Setup] area.
6. Enter a login password already set on the machine or the server for user
authentication.
Be sure to enter the same login password that is registered on the machine or the server.
If you do not enter a valid login password, printing will not start.
7. Click [OK] to close the [Authentication] dialog box.
8. Click [OK] to close the printing preferences dialog box.
154
5. Copy
This chapter describes what you can do using the machine's Copy function. It also describes how to
store documents in the Document Server of the machine and how to print or manage the stored files.
You can use the Copy function on Type 1, 2, or 3 machines only.
Auto Reduce / Enlarge
The machine automatically detects the original size and then selects an appropriate reproduction ratio
based on the paper size you select.
CKN008
• If you select a reproduction ratio after pressing [Auto Reduce / Enlarge], [Auto Reduce / Enlarge]
is canceled and the image cannot be rotated automatically.
This is useful to copy different size originals to the same size paper.
If the orientation in which your original is placed is different from that of the paper you are copying onto,
the machine rotates the original image by 90 degrees and fits it on the copy paper (Rotate Copy). For
example, to reduce A3 (11 × 17) originals to fit onto A4 (81/2 × 11) paper, select a paper tray
containing A4 (81/2 × 11) paper, and then press [Auto Reduce / Enlarge]. The image is
automatically rotated. For details about Rotate Copy, see "Rotate Copy", Basic Operations.
The original sizes and orientations you can use with this function are as follows:
(mainly Europe and Asia)
Original location
Original size and orientation
, A5 , 81/2 × 13
Exposure glass
A3 , B4 JIS , A4
, B5 JIS
ADF
A3 , B4 JIS , A4
× 17 , 81/2 × 11
, B5 JIS
, A5
1
, 8 /2 × 13
, B6 JIS
, 11
155
5. Copy
(mainly North America)
Original location
Original size and orientation
Exposure glass
11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14
, 51/2 × 81/2
*1, 81/
2
2 × 13 /5
ADF
11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 *1, 81/2 × 132/5 *1, 81/2 × 11
, 51/2 × 81/2
, 81/2 × 101/2 , 10 × 14 , A3
, A4
*1 You can switch the initial setting to determine whether the machine detects either 81/2 × 14
132/5 .
*1, 81/ × 11
2
or 81/2 ×
1. Press [Auto Reduce / Enlarge].
2. Select the paper size.
3. Place the originals, and then press the [Start] key.
• For details about the base point, see "Reducing or Enlarging Originals", Basic Operations.
156
Duplex Copying
Duplex Copying
Copies two 1-sided pages or one 2-sided page onto a 2-sided page. During copying, the image is
shifted to allow for the binding margin.
CKN009
There are two types of Duplex.
1 Sided
2 Sided
Copies two 1-sided pages on one 2-sided page.
2 Sided
2 Sided
Copies one 2-sided page on one 2-sided page.
The resulting copy image will differ according to the orientation in which you place your originals ( or
).
Original orientation and completed copies
To copy on both sides of the paper, select the original and copy orientation according to how you
want the printout to appear.
Original
Placing originals
Original
Orientation
Orientation
Copy
Top to Top
Top to Bottom
157
5. Copy
Original
Placing originals
Original
Orientation
Orientation
Copy
Top to Top
Top to Bottom
1. Press [Dup./ Combine/ Series].
2. Make sure that [Duplex] is selected. If [Duplex] is not selected, press [Duplex].
3. Select [1 Sided 2 Sided] or [2 Sided
document to be output.
2 Sided] according to how you want the
To change the original or copy orientation, press [Orientation].
For details about the setting, see page 159 "Specifying the Original and Copy Orientation".
4. Press [Original Orientation].
5. Select the original orientation, and then press [OK].
6. Press [OK].
158
Duplex Copying
7. Place the originals.
8. Press the [Start] key.
• You cannot use the following copy paper with this function:
• Translucent paper
• Label paper (adhesive labels)
• Transparencies
• Envelopes
• Tab stock
• Carbonless paper
• When an odd number of originals are placed in the ADF, the back of the last page of copied
paper is blank.
• For details about the sizes, orientations, and weights of paper that can be used in the Duplex
function, see "Specifications for the Main Unit", Specifications.
• You can specify the margins under [Edit] in User Tools. For details, see "Edit", Preparation.
Specifying the Original and Copy Orientation
Select the orientation of the originals and copies if the original is two-sided or if you want to copy onto
both sides of the paper.
• Top to Top
CKN011
• Top to Bottom
CKN012
1. Press [Orientation].
159
5. Copy
2. Select [Top to Top] or [Top to Bottom] for [Original:] if the original is two-sided.
3. Select [Top to Top] or [Top to Bottom] for [Copy:].
4. Press [OK].
• The default is [Top to Top]. You can change the default orientation under [Original Orientation in
Duplex Mode] and [Copy Orientation in Duplex Mode] in User Tools. For details about these
settings, see "General Features", Preparation.
160
Combined Copying
Combined Copying
This mode can be used to select a reproduction ratio automatically and copy the originals onto a single
sheet of copy paper.
The machine selects a reproduction ratio between 25 and 400%. If the orientation of the original is
different from that of the copy paper, the machine will automatically rotate the image by 90 degrees to
make copies properly.
Orientation of the original and image position of Combine
The image position of Combine differs according to original orientation and the number of originals
to be combined.
• Portrait ( ) originals
CKN015
• Landscape ( ) originals
CKN016
Placing originals (originals placed in the ADF)
The default value for the copy order in the Combine function is [From Left to Right]. To copy
originals from right to left in the ADF, place them upside down.
• Originals read from left to right
161
5. Copy
CKN010
• Originals read from right to left
CKN017
• If you selected [2 Sided] for [Original:] or [Combine 2 Sides] for [Copy:], you can change the
orientation. For details, see page 159 "Specifying the Original and Copy Orientation".
• If the calculated reproduction ratio falls below the minimum reproduction ratio, the calculated
reproduction ratio will be adjusted to the minimum ratio. If this happens, with some ratios, parts of
the image might not be copied.
• If the number of originals placed is less than the number specified for combining, the last page is
left blank as shown.
CKN013
• You can change the order of combined images under [Copy Order in Combine] in User Tools. For
details, see "Edit", Preparation.
• You can change the type of separation line under [Separation Line in Combine] in User Tools. For
details, see "Edit", Preparation.
162
Combined Copying
• You can select whether to erase a 3 mm (0.1 inches) boundary margin around four edges of each
original in combined copying. This setting can be changed under [Erase Original Shadow in
Combine] in User Tools. For details, see "Edit", Preparation.
One-sided Combine
Combine several pages onto one side of a sheet.
CKN014
There are six types of One-Sided Combine.
1 Sided 2 Originals
Combine 1 Side
Copies two 1-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
1 Sided 4 Originals
Combine 1 Side
Copies four 1-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
1 Sided 8 Originals
Combine 1 Side
Copies eight 1-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
2 Sided 2 Pages
Combine 1 Side
Copies one 2-sided original to one side of a sheet.
2 Sided 4 Pages
Combine 1 Side
Copies two 2-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
2 Sided 8 Pages
Combine 1 Side
Copies four 2-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
163
5. Copy
1. Press [Dup./ Combine/ Series].
2. Press [Combine].
3. Select [1 Sided] or [2 Sided] for [Original:].
If you selected [2 Sided], you can change the orientation.
4. Make sure that [Combine 1 Side] is selected.
5. Select the number of originals to combine.
6. Press [Original Orientation].
7. Select the original orientation, and then press [OK].
8. Press [OK].
9. Select the paper size.
10. Place the originals, and then press the [Start] key.
Two-sided Combine
Combines various pages of originals onto two sides of one sheet.
164
Combined Copying
CKN074
There are six types of Two-Sided Combine.
1 Sided 4 Originals
Combine 2 Sides
Copies four 1-sided originals to one sheet with 2 pages per side.
1 Sided 8 Originals
Combine 2 Sides
Copies eight 1-sided originals to one sheet with 4 pages per side.
1 Sided 16 Originals
Combine 2 Sides
Copies 16 1-sided originals to one sheet with 8 pages per side.
2 Sided 4 Pages
Combine 2 Sides
Copies two 2-sided originals to one sheet with 2 pages per side.
2 Sided 8 Pages
Combine 2 Sides
Copies four 2-sided originals to one sheet with 4 pages per side.
2 Sided 16 Pages
Combine 2 Sides
Copies eight 2-sided originals to one sheet with 8 pages per side.
1. Press [Dup./ Combine/ Series].
2. Press [Combine].
165
5. Copy
3. Select [1 Sided] or [2 Sided] for [Original:].
4. Press [Combine 2 Sides].
5. Press [Orientation].
6. Select [Top to Top] or [Top to Bottom] for [Original:] if the original is two-sided.
7. Select [Top to Top] or [Top to Bottom] for [Copy:], and then press [OK].
8. Select the number of originals to combine.
9. Press [Original Orientation].
10. Select the original orientation, and then press [OK].
11. Press [OK].
12. Select the paper size.
13. Place the originals, and then press the [Start] key.
166
Copying onto Envelopes
Copying onto Envelopes
This section describes how to copy onto regular size and custom size envelopes. Place the original on
the exposure glass and place the envelope in the multi bypass tray (Tray A) or wide LCT.
Specify the thickness of the paper according to the weight of the envelopes you are printing on. For
details about the relationship between paper weight and paper thickness and the sizes of envelopes that
can be used, see page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".
About handling envelopes, supported envelope types, and how to load envelopes, see page 260
"Envelopes".
• The Duplex function cannot be used with envelopes. If the Duplex function is specified, cancel the
setting.
To copy onto custom size envelopes, you must specify the envelope's dimensions. Specify the horizontal
and vertical length of the envelope.
DFX003
: Horizontal
: Vertical
Be sure to include the fully open flap in the horizontal dimension.
Copying onto Envelopes from the Multi Bypass Tray (Tray A)
1. Load the envelopes face up in the multi bypass tray (Tray A).
2. Press [Tray A].
167
5. Copy
3. Press [Paper Size].
4. Specify the envelope size, and then press [OK].
5. Press [Paper Type].
6. Press [Next].
7. Select [Envelope], and then press [OK].
8. Place the originals, and then press the [Start] key.
• For details about using envelopes, see page 167 "Copying onto Envelopes".
Copying onto Envelopes from the Wide Large Capacity Tray
Before using this function, specify the paper size and type under [Tray Paper Settings]. For the paper
type, select [Envelope]. For details, see page 266 "Changing Tray Paper Settings".
1. Select the paper tray where the envelopes are loaded.
2. Place the originals, and then press the [Start] key.
• For details about using envelopes, see page 167 "Copying onto Envelopes".
168
Sort
Sort
The machine assembles copies as sets in sequential order.
Changing the Number of Sets
You can change the number of copy sets during copying.
• This function can be used only when the Sort function is selected.
1. While "Copying..." is displayed, press the [Stop] key.
2. Enter the number of copy sets with the number keys.
3. Press [Continue].
Copying starts again.
• The number of sets you can enter in Step 2 differs depending on when the [Stop] key is pressed.
169
5. Copy
Storing Data in the Document Server
The Document Server enables you to store documents being read with the copy feature on the hard disk
of this machine. Thus you can print them later applying necessary conditions.
You can check the stored documents on the Document Server screen. For details about the Document
Server, see page 421 "Document Server".
1. Press [Store File].
2. Enter a user name, file name, or password if necessary.
3. Specify a folder in which to store the document if necessary.
4. Press [OK].
5. Place the originals.
6. Make the scanning settings for the original.
7. Press the [Start] key.
Stores scanned originals in memory and makes one set of copies. If you want to store another
document, do so after copying is complete.
• To stop scanning, press the [Stop] key. To resume a paused scanning job, press [Continue] in the
confirmation screen. To delete scanned images and cancel the job, press [Cancel Copying]. The
originals placed in the ADF will be ejected. Press [Job List] to display the [Job List] screen. For
details, see "Types of Screens to Manage Jobs", Preparation.
• When placing the original on the exposure glass, press the [ ] key after all the originals have
been scanned.
• For details about printing stored documents, see page 424 "Printing Stored Documents".
• For details about setting user name, file name, and password, see page 408 "Changing stored
document information".
• For details about how to specify a folder, see "Arranging Stored Documents Using Folders", Basic
Operations.
170
6. Paper Specifications and Adding
Paper
Describes how to load originals and sheets and about their specifications.
Placing Originals
You can place originals on a Type 1, 2, or 3 machine.
Recommended Original Sizes and Weights
This section describes the sizes and weights of originals that can be placed in the ADF or on the
exposure glass.
(mainly Europe and Asia)
Original location
Original size
Original weight
Exposure glass
Up to A3
ADF
(One-sided originals)
A3 –B6 JIS (Japanese Industrial
Standard)
ADF
A3 –A5
(Two-sided originals)
11 × 17 –51/2 × 81/2
ADF
A3 , B4 JIS , A4
, B5 JIS
, 52.3–81.4 g/m2 (14.0–
11 × 17 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 21.7 lb. Bond)
, 81/2 × 14
(Mixed Sizes mode)
*1 51/2 × 81/2
11 × 17 –51/2 × 81/2
40.0–128.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb.
Bond–47.3 lb. Cover)
*1
*1
52.0–128.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–47.3 lb. Cover)
can be used only in the scanner function.
(mainly North America)
Original location
Original size
Exposure glass
Up to 11 × 17
ADF
11 × 17 –51/2 × 81/2
(One-sided originals)
A3 –A5
*1
Original weight
40.0–128.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb.
Bond–47.3 lb. Cover)
171
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Original location
Original size
Original weight
ADF
11 × 17 –51/2 × 81/2
(Two-sided originals)
A3 –A5
ADF
11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11 52.3–81.4 g/m2 (14.0–
, 10 × 14 , 71/4 × 101/2 ,
21.7 lb. Bond)
A3 , A4
(Mixed Sizes mode)
*1 A5
*1
52.0–128.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–47.3 lb. Cover)
can be used only in the scanner function.
• About 220 originals can be loaded in the ADF. Specifications can vary depending on the type and
condition of the paper.
• You can place originals of two different sizes only at a time in the Mixed Sizes mode.
Maximum scan area
This section explains the size of the area the machine can scan and detect.
When placing an original on the exposure glass
This section explains the maximum scan area when the original is placed on the exposure glass.
• Maximum scan area of the exposure glass
1
2
3
CJV619
1. Positioning mark
2. Vertical size:
297 mm (11.7 inches)
3. Horizontal size:
432 mm (17.1 inches)
• Maximum standard original size for the exposure glass:
A3 , 11 × 17
172
Placing Originals
When placing an original into the ADF
This section explains the maximum scan area when the original is placed in the ADF.
• Maximum scan area of the ADF
1
2
CJV620
1. Vertical size:
297 mm (11.7 inches)
2. Horizontal size:
• In copier mode:
1,260 mm (49.7 inches)
• In scanner mode:
432 mm (17.1 inches)
• Maximum standard original size for the ADF:
A3 , 11 × 17
Missing image area
Even if you place originals in the ADF or on the exposure glass correctly, margins of a few millimeters on
all four sides of the original might not be copied.
Missing Image Area
1
2
3
4
CVA089
1. Leading edge:
• When you use paper other than coated paper: 5.0 ± 0.5 mm (0.20 ± 0.02 inches) (Paper Weight
1–Paper Weight 3), 4.0 ± 0.5 mm (0.16 ± 0.02 inches) (Paper Weight 4–Paper Weight 8)
173
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• When you use coated paper: 7.0 ± 0.5 mm (0.28 ± 0.02 inches) (Paper Weight 2), 5.0 ± 0.5mm
(0.20 ± 0.02 inches) (Paper Weight 3), 4.0 ± 0.5 mm (0.16 ± 0.02 inches) (Paper Weight 4–
Paper Weight 8)
2. Trailing edge:
• When you use paper other than coated paper: 5.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.20 ± 0.04inches) (Paper Weight
1–Paper Weight 3), 4.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.16 ± 0.04 inches) (Paper Weight 4–Paper Weight 8)
• When you use coated paper: 7.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.28 ± 0.04 inches) (Paper Weight 2), 5.0 ± 1.0mm
(0.20 ± 0.04 inches) (Paper Weight 3), 4.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.16 ± 0.04 inches) (Paper Weight 4–
Paper Weight 8)
3. Left edge: 2.0 ± 1.5 mm (0.08 ± 0.06 inches)
4. Right edge: 2.0 ± 1.5 mm (0.08 ± 0.06 inches)
• The missing image area can be changed. For details, consult the administrator or contact your
service representative. If plain paper that weighs less than 70 g/m2 or coated paper that weighs
less than 105 g/m2 is registered as custom paper from the master library, the missing image area
for the leading edge is set to approximately 5 mm. Depending on the paper's condition, the reverse
side's missing image area and its registered values may be different.
Sizes Detectable with Auto Paper Select
The following sizes and orientations of originals are detected automatically:
(mainly Europe and Asia)
Original
location
A3
Exposure
glass
*1
B4 JIS
A4
*1
*1, *2
B5 JIS
A5
*1
*1
A5
B6 JIS
×*1,*3
×
*4
ADF
Original location
Exposure glass
ADF
11 × 17
×
*5
81/2 × 11
×*2
*6
81/2 × 13
*7
*7
: Detectable size, ×: Undetectable size
*1 If you want to switch the detectable sizes from these sizes to 8K and 16K, contact your service
representative.
174
Placing Originals
*2 Default is A4. If you want to switch the detectable size from A4 to 81/2 × 11, contact your service
representative.
*3 If you want to make A5
size detectable, contact your service representative.
*4 You cannot use the two-sided scanning mode.
*5 Default is 11 × 17. If you want to switch the detectable size from 11 × 17 to 8K, contact your service
representative.
*6 Default is 81/2 × 11. If you want to switch the detectable size from 81/2 × 11 to 16K, contact your
service representative.
*7 Default is 81/2 × 13. If you want to switch the detectable size from 81/2 × 13 to 81/4 × 13 or 8 × 13,
contact your service representative.
(mainly North America)
Original
location
11 × 17
81/2 × 14
Exposure
glass
ADF
Original location
Exposure glass
*1
*2
81/2 × 11
*3
*3
*4
*5
71/4 × 101/2
10 × 14
×
81/2 × 11
×
51/2 ×
81/2
51/2 ×
81/2
×*6
A3
A4
×*3
×
ADF
: Detectable size, ×: Undetectable size
*1 Default is 11 × 17. If you want to switch the detectable size from 11 × 17 to 11 × 15, contact your
service representative.
*2 Default is 81/2 × 14. If you want to switch the detectable size from 81/2 × 14 to 81/2 × 13, contact
your service representative.
*3 Default is 81/2 × 11. If you want to switch the detectable size from 81/2 × 11 to A4, contact your
service representative.
*4 Default is 81/2 × 11 . If you want to switch the detectable size from 81/2 × 11 to 71/4 × 101/2 ,
contact your service representative.
*5 Default is 81/2 × 11 . If you want to switch the detectable size from 81/2 × 11
contact your service representative.
*6 If you want to make 51/2 × 81/2
to 8 × 10 ,
size detectable, contact your service representative.
• Originals whose size is non-auto detectable will be scanned at the wrong paper size if fed in from
the ADF.
175
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• If the size of your original cannot be detected automatically, you must specify its size. If the size is
not specified, part of the image may be cropped or not output satisfactorily. For details about how
to specify the size of the originals, see "Specifying Original Sizes", or page 420 "Specifying Scan
Settings".
Originals that are difficult to detect the size
If the original type is one of the following, the machine might not detect its size correctly and the
receiver's machine might print it on paper of the wrong size. The machine may also fail to copy or print
the image on an appropriate size of paper.
If the original type is one of the following, select the paper size manually:
• Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts
• Transparent originals such as transparencies or translucent paper
• Dark originals with a lot of text and drawings
• Originals which partially contain a solid image
• Originals which have solid images at their edges
• Originals with glossy surfaces
• Bound originals of more than 10 mm (0.4 inches) in thickness, such as books
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass
• When lowering the ADF, do not place your hands on the hinges and exposure glass. Your
hands or fingers are caught, which can result in injury.
• Do not lift the ADF forcefully. Otherwise, the cover of the ADF might open or be damaged.
1. Lift the ADF.
Be sure to lift the ADF by more than 30 degrees. Otherwise, the size of the original might not be
detected correctly.
2. Place the original face down on the exposure glass. The original should be aligned to the
rear left corner.
Start with the first page to be scanned.
176
Placing Originals
1
CWW353
1. Positioning mark
3. Lower the ADF.
• When you place a thick book or three-dimensional original on the exposure glass and lower the
ADF, the back side of the ADF rises up to accommodate the original. Keep your hands away from
the hinges at the back of the ADF when you close it.
CWW354
• Take care to place originals after any correction fluid and ink has completely dried. Not taking this
precaution could cause marks on the exposure glass that will be scanned.
• For details about how to specify the size of the originals, see "Specifying Original Sizes", or
page 420 "Specifying Scan Settings".
• For details about the sizes of originals that can be used, see page 171 "Recommended Original
Sizes and Weights".
Left original beeper
The beeper sounds and an error message is displayed when you leave your originals on the exposure
glass after scanning.
You can change the beeper setting under [Alert Sound: Original left on Exposure Glass] in the User
Tools menu. For details, see "General Features", Preparation.
177
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Placing Originals in the Auto Document Feeder
Be sure not to block the sensor or load the original untidily. Doing so may cause the machine to detect
the size of the original incorrectly or display a paper misfeed message. Also, be sure not to place
originals or other objects on the top cover. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
1
2
2
EAQ151
1. Sensors
2. Original guide
1. Adjust the original guide to the original size.
2. Place the aligned originals squarely face up in the ADF.
Do not stack originals beyond the limit mark.
The first page should be on the top.
EAQ152
1. Limit mark
• For information on using the ADF, see "Specifying the Settings for Originals", Basic Operations.
• Straighten curls in the originals before placing them in the ADF.
• To prevent multiple sheets from being fed at once, fan the original before placing it in the ADF.
• When originals are loaded in the ADF, the bottom plate rises automatically.
178
Placing Originals
• Do not add paper to the ADF after the bottom plate has risen automatically.
• You can specify when the bottom plate of the ADF rises. For details, see "General Features", Device
Management.
• Take care to place originals after any correction fluid and ink has completely dried. Not taking this
precaution could cause marks on the exposure glass that will be scanned.
• For details about the sizes and weights of originals that you can place in the ADF, see page 171
"Recommended Original Sizes and Weights".
Non-compatible originals for the Auto Document Feeder
Placing unsuitable originals in the ADF can cause paper misfeeds or black lines, or result in damage to
the originals.
Place the following types of originals on the exposure glass instead:
• Stapled or clipped originals
• Perforated or torn originals
• Curled, folded, or creased originals
• Pasted originals
• Originals with adhesive tape, glue or paste stuck to them
• Originals with any kind of coating, such as thermal fax paper, art paper, aluminum foil, carbon
paper, or conductive paper
• Originals with perforated lines
• Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts
• Sticky originals such as translucent paper
• Thin or highly flexible originals
• Thick originals such as postcards
• Bound originals such as books
• Transparent originals such as transparencies or translucent paper
• The original might become dirty if it is written with a pencil or a similar tool.
179
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Loading Paper
This chapter describes how to load paper into the paper tray or multi bypass tray (Tray A).
You can use the copy function and ADF on Type 1, 2, or 3 machines only. You can load and scan
originals on a Type 1, 2, or 3 machine. You can use perfect binder interposer on Type 2, 3, 4, or 5
machines only.
Precautions for Loading Paper
• When replacing paper or removing jammed paper, make sure not to trap or injure your fingers.
• Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
Jams and misfeeds can occur when printing on thick glossy sheets. To prevent such problems, be sure to
fan glossy sheets thoroughly before loading them.
When loading paper, set the paper direction according to its grain, as shown in the following diagram:
• Even if paper is loaded as described above, normal operations and print quality might still not be
possible, depending on the paper type.
• When loading 52.3 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond) paper into paper trays or loading translucent paper into
the wide LCT or the multi bypass tray (Tray A), always use long grain paper.
• Prints might be noticeably curled. Flatten out prints if they are creased or curled. For details about
settings for flattening out curled paper, see page 319 "0310 Correct Output Paper Curl".
• To prevent multiple sheets from being fed at once, fan the paper before loading it.
• If you load paper when only a few sheets of paper remain in the tray, multiple sheet feeding may
occur. Remove any remaining paper, stack them with the new sheets of paper, and then fan the
entire stack before loading it into the tray.
• Straighten curled or warped paper before loading.
• When paper in trays that are set to automatically eject unnecessary tab stock sheets runs out,
reload the tab stock from the beginning of the cycle (the first sheet).
• When you load paper into the paper tray for the first time or when you change the size or type of
paper in the paper tray, be sure to specify the appropriate paper settings in Tray Paper Settings.
For details, see page 266 "Changing Tray Paper Settings".
• For details about the paper sizes and types that can be used, see page 228 "Recommended
Paper Sizes and Types".
180
Loading Paper
• You might at times hear a rustling noise from paper moving through the machine. This noise does
not indicate a malfunction.
Fanning the paper
• If you load coated paper, label paper, or thick paper of 163.1–300.0 g/m2 (60.1 lb. Cover–
165.0 lb. Index) in the three-tray wide LCT, it is important that you fan the sheets thoroughly.
Misfeeds may occur if paper is not fanned thoroughly.
1. Loosen the stack by riffling the sheets.
CVA068
2. Holding its shorter ends, flex the stack back and forth to create space between the sheets.
Repeat this several times.
CVA069
181
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
CVA070
3. Make sure there is space between the sheets.
CVA071
Loading Paper into Tray 1
(mainly Europe and Asia)
Tray 1 can hold A4 paper only. If you want to print on 81/2 × 11 from Tray 1, contact your service
representative.
(mainly North America)
Tray 1 can hold 81/2 × 11 paper only. If you want to print on A4 from Tray 1, contact your service
representative.
• When paper loaded in the right side of Tray 1 runs out, paper on the left is automatically shifted to
the right. Do not pull out Tray 1 while the tray is moving paper; wait until sounds stop coming from
the tray.
• If Tray 1 is closed too quickly, the paper in the tray may force the right tray's side fence to slip out
of place. If the paper misfeeds because of this, open the tray, adjust the fence, and close the tray
slowly.
• For the right stack, align the right edge of the paper with the right edge of the tray. For the left
stack, align the left edge of the paper to the left edge of the tray.
182
Loading Paper
1. Carefully pull out the paper tray until it stops.
CWW301
2. Square the paper and load it print side down.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
• Whole tray pulled out
CWW302
• Left half of the tray pulled out
CWW303
3. Carefully push the paper tray fully in.
• You can load paper even if Tray 1 is in use. It is okay to pull out the left half of the tray while Tray 1
is in use.
183
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Loading Paper into the A3/11 × 17 Tray Unit
(mainly Europe and Asia)
A3/11 × 17 tray unit can hold A3 paper only. If you want to print on A4
81/2 × 14 , or 81/2 × 11
, contact your service representative.
, B4 JIS , 11 × 17 ,
(mainly North America)
A3/11 × 17 tray unit can hold 11 × 17 paper only. If you want to print on A3 , A4
81/2 × 14 , or 81/2 × 11
, contact your service representative.
, B4 JIS ,
• Check the paper edges are aligned at the right side.
1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.
DER058
2. Square the paper and load it print side down.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
DER059
3. Carefully push the paper tray fully in.
184
Loading Paper
Loading Paper into Tray 2 and 3
Each paper tray is loaded in the same way.
In the following example procedure, paper is loaded into Tray 2.
• Check the paper edges are aligned at the right side.
• If a paper tray is pushed vigorously when putting it back into place, the position of the tray's side
fences may slip out of place.
• When loading a low number of sheets, be sure not to squeeze the side fences in too tightly. If the
side fences are squeezed too tightly against the paper, the edges may crease, the paper may
misfeed, or if it weighs between 52.3–63.0g/m2 (14.0–16.9 lb. Bond), it may wrinkle.
1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.
CWW306
2. Square the paper and load it print side down.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
CWW307
3. Carefully push the paper tray fully in.
185
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• Various sizes of paper can be loaded in Tray 2 and 3 by adjusting the positions of side fences and
end fence. For details, see page 208 "Changing the Paper Size in the Large Capacity Tray".
Loading Paper into the Multi Bypass Tray (Tray A)
Use the multi bypass tray (Tray A) to use transparencies, translucent paper, and paper that cannot be
loaded in the paper trays.
• The maximum number of sheets you can load at the same time depends on paper type. Do not
stack paper over the limit mark. For the maximum number of sheets you can load, see page 228
"Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".
• Check the paper edges are aligned at the left side.
• When loading a low number of sheets, be sure not to squeeze the side fences in too tightly. If the
side fences are squeezed too tightly against the paper, the edges may crease, the paper may
misfeed, or if it weighs between 52.3–63.0 g/m2 (14.0–16.9 lb. Bond), it may wrinkle.
1. Set the side fences to the paper size, and then square the paper and load it print side up.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
CWW309
186
Loading Paper
2. Set the end fence.
1
2
CWW311
1. End fence
2. Extender
To remove the end fence, slide it to the right by pressing the stopper down.
CWW312
3. Press the elevator switch on the multi bypass tray (Tray A).
1
CWW313
1. Elevator switch
The lamp of the elevator switch is blinking while the tray is going up, and keeps lit when it stops.
Press the elevator switch to move down the tray if you want to either add paper or remove jammed
ones.
187
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• Pull the extender out when loading A4 , 81/2 × 11
(Tray A).
or larger sheets in the multi bypass tray
• Letterhead paper must be loaded in a specific orientation. For details, see page 198 "Loading
Orientation-fixed Paper or Two-sided Paper".
• You can load envelopes into the multi bypass tray (Tray A). Envelopes must be loaded in a specific
orientation. For details, see page 260 "Envelopes".
• Specify the sizes of paper that are not automatically detected. For details about the sizes that can
be detected automatically, see page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types". For details
about how to specify sizes, see page 226 "Changing to a Size That Is Not Automatically
Detected".
• When copying from the multi bypass tray (Tray A), see "Copying from the Multi Bypass Tray (Tray
A)", Basic Operations.
Loading tab stock into the multi bypass tray (Tray A)
When setting tab stock, always use the tab fence. Tabs must be set at the right side of the multi bypass
tray (Tray A).
1
2
CWW308
1. Tab fence
2. End fence
Loading Paper into the Large Capacity Tray
The LCT is identified as Tray 4, Tray 5, and Tray 6.
(mainly Europe)
Tray 6 can hold A4 paper only. If you want to print on A5
from Tray 6, contact your service representative.
(mainly North America)
188
, B5 JIS , 81/2 × 11 , or 51/2 × 81/2
Loading Paper
Tray 6 can hold 81/2 × 11 paper only. If you want to print on A5
from Tray 6, contact your service representative.
, B5 JIS , A4 , or 51/2 × 81/2
• Check the paper edges are aligned at the left side.
1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.
CWW315
2. Load paper into the paper tray with print side up.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
CWW316
3. Carefully push the paper tray fully in.
• Various sizes of paper can be loaded in Tray 4 and Tray 5 by adjusting the positions of side fence
and end fence. For details, see page 208 "Changing the Paper Size in the Large Capacity Tray".
Loading Paper into the Three-tray Wide Large Capacity Tray
The three-tray wide LCT is identified as Tray 4, Tray 5, and Tray 6.
• Check that the paper edges are aligned with the left side.
189
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• If a paper tray is pushed vigorously when putting it back into place, the position of the tray's side
fences may slip out of place.
1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.
DER074
2. Load paper into the paper tray with print side up.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
DER075
3. Carefully push the paper tray fully in.
• If you select Paper Weight 5 to 7, [Coated: Glossy], [Coated: Matte], or [Label Paper] in [Tray
Paper Settings], air is blown out automatically to fan the paper loaded in the three-tray wide LCT.
Fan this paper before loading it. For details, see page 181 "Fanning the paper".
• Various sizes of paper can be loaded in the three-tray wide LCT by adjusting the positions of side
fences and end fence. For details, see page 213 "Changing the Paper Size in the Three-tray Wide
Large Capacity Tray".
• You can load envelopes in the three-tray wide LCT. When loading envelopes, place them in the
correct orientation. For details, see page 260 "Envelopes".
190
Loading Paper
Loading Paper into the Two-tray Wide Large Capacity Tray
The two-tray wide LCT is identified as Tray T1, Tray T2, Tray T3, and Tray T4.
• Check the paper edges are aligned at the left side.
• When you use paper of Paper Weight 7 with a convex curl greater than 5 mm, or paper of Paper
Weight 8 with a convex curl greater than 3 mm, a paper jam may occur if the height of the stacked
paper is less than 4 mm. To use paper in such condition, set the paper in the tray as follows:
• Set as many as 5 to 10 more sheets than the number of sheets you intend to print
• Correct the curl amount before setting the paper
• Turn over the paper so that the paper is with a concave curl.
1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.
DWP072
2. Load paper into the paper tray with print side up.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
DWP073
3. Carefully push the paper tray fully in until it clicks.
191
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• Various sizes of paper can be loaded in the two-tray wide LCT by adjusting the positions of side
fence and end fence. For details, see page 219 "Changing the Paper Size in the Two-tray Wide
Large Capacity Tray".
• You can load envelopes in the two-tray wide LCT. When loading envelopes, place them in the
correct orientation. For details, see page 260 "Envelopes".
• When you are using a special printing feature such as banner printing, cover page, and separation
sheets, the indicator on the front side of the tray remains lit until printing is completed. You cannot
reload paper while the indicator remains lit.
Attaching the small tab end fence to the two-tray wide Large Capacity Tray
When loading the following paper, attach the small tab end fence:
• B5 (width: 182 mm; length: 257 mm)–SRA4
Weight 8
(width: 225 mm; length: 320 mm) of Paper
• Carbonless paper of Paper Weight 2 or less
• Label paper
To print on carbonless paper of Paper Weight 0, open the front cover, pull out the drawer unit, and then
wipe with a dry and clean cloth six ribs each on the front and back sides in the figure before printing.
Wipe off dirt or toner on the top and side of each rib. Toner smear may appear on the printed paper if
prints are made while the ribs are stained.
EAQ142
1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.
192
Loading Paper
2. Take out the small tab end fence from the pocket on the right-hand side of the paper
source tray.
DWP662
3. Set the side fences to the size of the paper to be loaded, and then load paper into the
tray.
4. Attach the small tab end fence, and then align the end fence gently against the paper you
loaded while pressing the release button of the end fence.
DSC098
5. Carefully push the paper tray fully in until it clicks.
• Replace the small tab end fence after use.
Loading Paper into the Interposer
• Do not place anything on top of or leave documents on the sensor. This may lead to the paper size
not being correctly scanned or paper jams.
193
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
1. While pressing the release lever, align the side fences with the paper size to be loaded.
EAQ131
2. Load paper orderly.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
Align the side fences gently against the paper you loaded, if necessary.
EAQ132
• Load paper with its printed side up (the front side). If you are using the booklet finisher, load sheets
print side down.
• Load paper in the interposer in the same orientation as paper in the paper tray.
• The staple position or punch hole position will be on the left side of the paper, when you are facing
the machine.
• When loading paper larger than A4 (81/2 × 11) , pull out the paper extender.
• To load the paper in the interposer, align the orientation of originals in the ADF as shown below.
Interposer
194
ADF
Loading Paper
Interposer
ADF
Loading Cover Sheets into the Interposer of the Perfect Binder
• The length/size of cover sheets depends on the thickness of the spine.
• Load paper in the
orientation.
• Do not place anything on top of or leave documents on the sensor. This may lead to the paper size
not being correctly detected or paper jams.
Estimating the thickness of the spine
This section explains how to calculate the approximate spine thickness and the cover sheet length
and size.
Note that the length and size of a cover sheet depends on the thickness of the book block spine.
The following list shows examples for A4 or 81/2 × 11 size, 80.0 g/m2 (21.0 lb. Bond) paper:
• 10-sheet book block: 1 mm (0.04 inches)
• 30-sheet book block: 3 mm (0.12 inches)
• 50-sheet book block: 5 mm (0.20 inches)
• 80-sheet book block: 8 mm (0.32 inches)
• 100-sheet book block: 10 mm (0.40 inches)
• 200-sheet book block: 20 mm (0.80 inches)
Specify the cover sheet size based on the thickness of the book block spine. Use the following
equation to calculate the length of the cover sheet:
Minimum length of cover sheet (mm/inch) = "length of book block sheet (mm/inch)" × 2 +
"thickness of spine (mm/inch)"
To perfect bind a booklet with the following dimensions, specify a cover sheet length of at least
440 mm (17.4 inches):
195
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
2
2
1
3
CWW369
1. Length of book block sheet
2. Thickness of spine
3. Length of cover sheet
Orientation and binding position of covers and originals
This section explains the orientation and binding positions of covers and originals.
Place covers and originals in the orientation in which they are read.
Placing the cover
in the interposer
Placing the book block
sheet in the ADF
Binding position
Left binding
Top binding*1
Right binding
*1 Select
196
(unreadable orientation) in Original Orientation, and then select top binding.
Loading Paper
1. While lightly pinching the side fence, align it with the paper size to be loaded.
CWW323
2. Load paper face up and neatly stacked.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
CWW324
• You cannot perfect bind a booklet if the thickness of the book block's spine exceeds 23 mm (0.9
inches).
• Depending on your machine, the procedure for selecting the orientation of covers and originals for
the printer function might be slightly different. For details, refer to the procedure for your machine.
• Depending on your machine, the procedure for selecting the orientation of covers and originals
might be slightly different. For details, refer to the procedure for your machine.
• When loading thick paper of 251.0 g/m2 (138.8 lb. Index) or heavier in the interposer trays of
the perfect binder, make sure the grain of the paper is perpendicular to the feed direction.
• If you are loading sheets that are likely to stick together (such as sheets of coated paper), be sure
to fan them thoroughly before loading. Fanning them will help prevent jams and allow them to be
fed in one sheet at a time.
• The perfect binding process may scratch glossy paper.
197
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Loading Orientation-fixed Paper or Two-sided Paper
Orientation-fixed (top to bottom) or two-sided paper (for example, letterhead paper, punched paper, or
copied paper) might not be printed correctly, depending on how the originals and paper are placed.
Settings for the User Tools
• Copier mode
Specify [Yes] for [Letterhead Setting] in [Input / Output] under the Copier / Document Server
Features menu, and then place the original and paper as shown below.
• Printer mode
Specify [Auto Detect] or [On (Always)] for [Letterhead Setting] in [System] under the Printer
Features menu, and then place the paper as shown below.
For details about the letterhead settings, see "Input / Output", or "System", Preparation.
Original orientation and paper orientation
The meanings of the icons are as follows:
Icon
Meaning
Place or load paper scanned or printed side face up.
Place or load paper scanned or printed side face down.
• Original orientation
Original orientation
Readable orientation
198
Exposure glass
ADF
Loading Paper
Original orientation
Unreadable
orientation
Exposure glass
ADF
• Copy
• Scanner
• Paper orientation
• Copier mode
Copy side
Tray 1
Trays 2–3 or A3/11
× 17 tray unit
Multi bypass tray
(Tray A), LCT, or
wide LCT
Tray 1
Trays 2–3 or A3/11
× 17 tray unit
Multi bypass tray
(Tray A), LCT, or
wide LCT
One-sided
Two-sided
• Printer mode
Print side
One-sided
199
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Print side
Tray 1
Trays 2–3 or A3/11
× 17 tray unit
Multi bypass tray
(Tray A), LCT, or
wide LCT
Two-sided
• In copier mode:
• For details about how to make two-sided copies, see page 157 "Duplex Copying".
• In printer mode:
• To print on letterhead paper when [Auto Detect] is specified for [Letterhead Setting], you must
specify [Letterhead] as the paper type in the printer driver's settings.
• If a print job is changed partway through printing from one-sided to two-sided printing, onesided output after the first copy may be printed facing a different direction. To ensure all
paper is output facing the same direction, specify different input trays for one-sided and twosided printing. Note also that two-sided printing must be disabled for the tray specified for
one-sided printing.
• For details about how to make two-sided prints, see page 373 "Printing on Both Sides of
Sheets".
Using Small Thick Paper
When loading paper with a paper weight of 200 gsm (110 lb. index) or more and a vertical paper
length (short side) of 210 mm (8.27 inches) or less, move the lever in the drawer unit to raise the height
of the paper transfer unit.
This is applicable to the following types of paper:
200
Loading Paper
1
2
3
EAQ146
1. Short side
2. Long side
3. Paper feed direction
Paper Weight
200–350 g/m2 (110.0–193.3 lb.
Index)
Paper Size
Short side
Long side
A4
210 mm
297 mm
A5
148 mm
210 mm
B5
182 mm
257 mm
139.7 mm
215.9 mm
(5.5 inches)
(8.5 inches)
195 mm
267 mm
Paper Weight 5–8
200–350 g/m2 (110.0–193.3 lb.
Index)
Paper Weight 5–8
200–350 g/m2 (110.0–193.3 lb.
Index)
Paper Weight 5–8
200–350 g/m2 (110.0–193.3 lb.
Index)
51/2×81/2
Paper Weight 5–8
200–350 g/m2 (110.0–193.3 lb.
Index)
16K
Paper Weight 5–8
201
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Moving the lever in the drawer unit
• Move the lever only when using the applicable types of paper. Otherwise, return the lever to its
original position.
1. Open the front cover, then pull out the drawer unit.
EAQ147
The lever is located in the recess of the drawer unit.
2. Lower the lever in the direction of the arrow.
EAQ148
202
Loading Paper
3. Check that the indicator decal on the back of the lever is visible.
EAQ149
The height of the paper transfer unit is changed to allow the applicable types of paper to be fed.
EAQ150
203
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Changing the Paper Size
You can scan originals on a Type 1, 2, or 3 machine.
Precautions for Changing the Paper Size
• When replacing paper or removing jammed paper, make sure not to trap or injure your fingers.
• Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
• Do not change the size of the paper for the specified printing tray while documents are being
scanned or printed.
•
(mainly Europe and Asia)
Tray 1 and Tray 6 of the LCT can hold A4 paper only. If you want to print on other paper sizes
from Tray 1, contact your service representative.
•
(mainly North America)
Tray 1 and Tray 6 of the LCT can hold 81/2 × 11 paper only. If you want to print on other paper
sizes from Tray 1, contact your service representative.
•
(mainly Europe and Asia)
A3/11 × 17 tray unit can hold A3 paper only. If you want to print on other paper sizes from
A3/11 × 17 tray unit, contact your service representative.
•
(mainly North America)
A3/11 × 17 tray unit can hold 11 × 17 paper only. If you want to print on other paper sizes
from A3/11 × 17 tray unit, contact your service representative.
• After loading paper whose sizes are not detected automatically, be sure to specify the appropriate
paper size in [Tray Paper Settings]. If you do not, misfeeds might occur. For details, see page 226
"Changing to a Size That Is Not Automatically Detected".
• To prevent multiple sheets from being fed at once, fan the paper before loading.
• Straighten curled or warped paper before loading.
• For details about the paper sizes and types that can be used, see page 228 "Recommended
Paper Sizes and Types".
Changing the Paper Size in Tray 2 and 3
The paper size setting is changed in the same way for each paper tray.
204
Changing the Paper Size
In the following example procedure, the paper size setting for Tray 2 is changed.
• Check the paper edges are aligned at the right side.
• If a paper tray is pushed vigorously when putting it back into place, the position of the tray's side
fences may slip out of place.
• When loading a low number of sheets, be sure not to squeeze the side fences in too tightly. If the
side fences are squeezed too tightly against the paper, the edges may crease, the paper may
misfeed, or if it weighs between 52.3–63.0g/m2 (14.0–16.9 lb. Bond), it may wrinkle.
1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.
CWW306
2. Remove paper if loaded.
3. Release the lock on the side fences.
CWW325
205
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
4. While pressing down the release lever, slide the side fences until they are aligned with the
paper size you want to load.
CWW326
5. While pressing down on both sides of the end fence, slide it until it is aligned with the size
of paper to you want to load.
CWW327
6. Square the paper and load it print side down.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
CWW370
7. Re-lock the side fences.
Make sure there are no gaps between the paper and side fences or end fence.
206
Changing the Paper Size
CWW328
8. Carefully slide the paper tray fully in.
• After sliding the paper tray in, make sure that the paper size is changed correctly on the printer's
initial screen. To display the printer's initial screen, display the [Home] screen and press the [Printer]
icon.
Loading Custom Size Paper
When loading custom size paper in Tray 2 or 3, use the following procedure to lock the end fence:
1. While pressing down on both sides of the end fence, slide the end fence until it is aligned
with the bottom edge of the paper you want to load.
DSC301
2. Hold the grip of the end fence and pull it upward, and then release it.
Make sure the stopping claws are extended and the end fence is securely locked.
207
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
DSC302
• When loading standard size paper, hold the grip of the end fence and push it downward, and
then set it back in its original position.
Changing the Paper Size in the Large Capacity Tray
• Check that the paper edges are aligned with the left side.
1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.
CWW371
2. Remove paper if loaded.
208
Changing the Paper Size
3. Pull out the screws fixing the side fences.
CWW329
4. Set the paper size selector in the innermost part of the tray to the new paper size.
CWW334
5. Set the side fences to the size you want.
CWW330
209
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
6. Fasten the side fences with the screws.
CWW331
7. Set the end fence along the paper size.
CWW332
8. Load paper into the paper tray with print side up.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
CWW333
210
Changing the Paper Size
9. If you load A4 or 81/2 × 11 size paper, set the end fence according to the paper size.
1
3
2
CWW357
1. A4
2. 81/2 × 11
3. Tab stock
10. Fasten the end fence using the screw provided.
CWW358
11. Carefully slide the paper tray fully in.
• As for changing paper sizes of Tray 6, contact your service representative.
• After sliding the paper tray in, make sure that the paper size is changed correctly on the printer's
initial screen. To display the printer's initial screen, display the [Home] screen and press the [Printer]
icon.
Attaching the tab sheet holder to the Large Capacity Tray
When loading tab stock, attach the tab sheet holder.
211
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
1. Open the front cover of the LCT, and then take out the tab sheet holder.
CWW335
2. Close the front cover.
3. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.
CWW315
4. Set the side fences and end fence to the size of the tab stock to be loaded, and then load
it.
5. Attach the tab sheet holder.
CWW336
6. Carefully slide the paper tray fully in.
• Tab stock can be loaded only in Tray 4 and Tray 5.
212
Changing the Paper Size
• When loading tab stock, shift the end fence for A4 , 81/2 × 11 to position 3 before setting the
end fence for tab stock. For details, see page 208 "Changing the Paper Size in the Large Capacity
Tray".
• Replace the tab sheet holder after use.
Changing the Paper Size in the Three-tray Wide Large Capacity Tray
• Check that the paper edges are aligned with the left side.
• If a paper tray is pushed vigorously when putting it back into place, the position of the tray's side
fences may slip out of place.
1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.
DER074
2. Remove paper if loaded.
3. Release the end fence.
DER076
213
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
4. Loosen the screws holding the side fences in position.
DER077
5. When loading paper wider than 257 mm, lock the supporting plate (large) in place by
hooking its edge on the side fence.
DWP843
6. Load paper by aligning the paper with the left side of the paper tray.
Place paper with print side up.
Load a stack of paper about 5–10 mm (0.2–0.4 inches) high.
Make sure the paper rest on top of the supporting plates on both sides.
1
1
DER078
1. Supporting plates
214
Changing the Paper Size
7. Take the grip of the side fences with your fingers, and adjust the side fences to the paper
size.
Set the paper flush against the protrusions in the bottom of the inner side fence.
Check that the scale numbers on the top of the side fences are roughly the same.
DER079
8. Hold the grip of the side fence at the back of the paper tray, then turn the screws slowly to
fasten it in place.
Fasten the front side fence in the same way.
CWW341
9. Load additional sheets, if necessary.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
DER081
215
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
10. Tightly fit the end fence to the loaded paper, and then re-lock the end fence again.
Make sure there are no gaps between the paper and end fence.
DER082
11. Carefully slide the paper tray fully in.
• After sliding the paper tray in, make sure that the paper size is changed correctly on the printer's
initial screen. To display the printer's initial screen, display the [Home] screen and press the [Printer]
icon.
• You can load envelopes into the three-tray wide LCT. When loading envelopes, place them in the
correct orientation. For details, see page 260 "Envelopes".
Attaching the tab fence in the three-tray wide Large Capacity Tray
When loading tab stock, attach the tab fence.
1. Open the front cover of the three-tray wide LCT, and then take out the tab fence.
DER083
2. Close the front cover.
216
Changing the Paper Size
3. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.
DER074
4. Set the side fences to the size of the tab stock to be loaded, and then load it.
5. Attach the tab fence, and then align the end fence gently against the paper you loaded
while pressing the release button of the end fence.
CWW345
6. Carefully slide the paper tray fully in.
• Replace the tab fence after use.
Attaching the postcard side fences in the three-tray wide Large Capacity Tray
When loading paper that is 100.0 to 139.2 mm (3.94 to 5.49 inches) in vertical length, attach the
postcard side fences.
The three-tray wide LCT is equipped with two types of postcard side fences: the long type and the short
type. Use the longer pair for Tray 4 and the shorter pair for Trays 3 and 5.
217
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
1. Open the front cover of the three-tray wide LCT, and then pull the postcard side fences
and screws out.
DER085
2. Close the front cover.
3. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.
CWW372
4. Fit the indentation on the bottom of the postcard side fence with the limit mark into the
head of the screw on the bottom of the inner side fence.
5. Fit the hole on the top of the postcard side fence into the projection on the top of the side
fence.
Set the other postcard side fence to the front side fence in the same way.
218
Changing the Paper Size
6. Fasten the postcard side fences with the screws.
CWW347
7. Align the end fence and side fences with the paper size to be loaded, and then load the
paper.
8. Carefully slide the paper tray fully in.
• Replace the postcard side fences after use.
Changing the Paper Size in the Two-tray Wide Large Capacity Tray
• Check that the paper edges are aligned with the left side.
1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.
DWP072
2. Remove paper if loaded.
219
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
3. Release the end fence.
DWP074
4. Release the side fence.
DWP075
5. Load paper by aligning the paper with the left side of the paper tray.
Place paper with print side up.
Load a stack of paper about 5–10 mm (0.2–0.4 inches) high.
Make sure the paper rest on top of the supporting plates on both sides.
DWP076
When you load paper that is 204 mm (8.04 inches) or smaller, remove the supporting plates from
the bottom of the paper tray.
220
Changing the Paper Size
1
DWP077
1. Supporting plates
6. Take the grip of the side fences with your fingers, and adjust the side fences to the paper
size.
Set the paper flush against the protrusions in the bottom of the inner side fence.
Check that the scale numbers on the top of the side fences are roughly the same.
DWP078
7. Load additional sheets, if necessary.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
DWP079
8. Tightly fit the end fence to the loaded paper, and then re-lock the end fence again.
Make sure there are no gaps between the paper and end fence.
221
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
DWP080
9. Carefully push the paper tray fully in until it clicks.
• Do not push in the paper presser on the upper part of the side fence. If it is pushed in, return it to its
original position by hand.
• When printing on normal paper that is 487.8 mm (19.20 inches) long or more with a thickness of
Paper Weight 2 or below or coated paper with a thickness of Paper Weight 3 or below, output
paper may bend in the paper output tray so that it may curl or clog in the paper output entrance. In
this case, use long-grain paper. If the output paper still bends when coated long-grain paper of
Paper Weight 3 or below, remove the output paper one by one or place a single sheet of paper in
the shift tray then resume printing.
• After sliding the paper tray in, make sure that the paper size is changed correctly on the printer's
initial screen. To display the printer's initial screen, display the [Home] screen and press the [Printer]
icon.
• You can load envelopes into the two-tray wide LCT. When loading envelopes, place them in the
correct orientation. For details, see page 260 "Envelopes".
• When you load paper that is 420.0 mm (16.54 inches) or wider in the banner sheet tray of the
two-tray wide LCT, load it as follows:
• Press the elevator switch to move the bottom plate down until the lamp goes out, and then
open the cover and load the paper.
• Hold the paper lengthwise and load it little by little.
• If you load thin paper or coated paper, load it little by little. Press down on the paper while
you load it so that the paper loaded in the bottom is not dragged.
• If you load thick paper, load it little by little and align the side fence with the horizontal side of
the paper.
• Check that the paper is correctly positioned against the back of the paper feed tray and the
label on which is printed the paper sizes for the paper tray.
• When you load paper that is 420.0-559.9 mm (16.54–22.00 inches) wide, use two shortend fences.
222
Changing the Paper Size
1
2
3
DWP841
1. Side fence extension
2. Side fence
3. Short-end fences
• When you load paper that is 560.0-700.0 mm (22.00–27.55 inches) wide, use one longend fence.
1
2
3
DWP842
1. Side fence extension
2. Side fence
3. Long-end fences
• When you load paper, load the paper and set the auxiliary side fence. Align the auxiliary
side fence against the side of the paper that is higher than the side fence extension.
• When you load paper whose horizontal length is 487.8 mm (19.20 inches) or more, or
paper weight 8 (300.1–350 gsm), use the banner sheet supporting plate.
223
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
DWQ022
• If you are not using the banner sheet supporting plate, hook it on the screw under the banner
sheet two-tray wide LCT.
Attaching the tab fence in the two-tray wide Large Capacity Tray
When loading tab stock, attach the tab fence.
1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.
DWP072
2. Take out the tab fence from the pocket on the right-hand side of the paper tray.
DWP081
3. Set the side fences to the size of the tab stock to be loaded, and then load it.
224
Changing the Paper Size
4. Attach the tab fence, and then align the end fence gently against the paper you loaded
while pressing the release button of the end fence.
DER098
5. Carefully push the paper tray fully in until it clicks.
• Replace the tab fence after use.
Loading envelopes into Two-tray Wide LCT
• Open the flaps, and load the envelopes with their flaps pointing to the right side of the paper tray.
• Before loading envelopes, press down on them to remove any air inside and flatten edges or
creases.
• Straighten curled or warped envelopes before loading (keep the amount of curling or warping for
each envelope within 5 mm).
5mm
DSC095
• Set the envelopes so that the difference in the height of the stacks is less than 10 mm.
225
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
10mm
Min.
Max.
DSC096
• When loading an envelope that has an self-adhesive flap and releasing paper, make sure the
releasing paper is not curled or peeled off.
Changing to a Size That Is Not Automatically Detected
If you load a paper size that is not selected automatically, specify the paper size using the control panel.
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [Paper Tray] tab.
3. Select the tray for which you want to change the paper size.
4. Select the [Manual Setting] check box.
5. Press [Edit the Settings].
6. Press [Paper Size].
7. Select the loaded paper size, and then press [Save Paper].
8. Press
226
.
Changing the Paper Size
9. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
• For details about paper sizes selected automatically, see page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".
• If you want to print on paper that is selected automatically after printing on a paper size that is not
selected automatically, you must return the setting to [Auto Detect]. Reload the paper, and select
[Auto Detect] in step 6.
Changing to a Custom Paper Size
When the custom size paper is loaded, the user must specify the paper size using the control panel.
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [Paper Tray] tab.
3. Select the tray for which you want to change the paper size.
4. Select the [Manual Setting] check box.
5. Press [Edit the Settings].
6. Press the [Paper Size].
7. Press [Custom Size].
8. Press the setting value next to [A:].
9. Enter the horizontal size using the number keys, and then press [Enter].
10. Press the setting value next to [B:].
11. Enter the vertical size using the number keys, and then press [Enter].
12. Press [OK].
13. Press [Save Paper].
14. Press
.
15. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
227
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Recommended Paper
This chapter describes recommended paper sizes and types, unusable paper, and how to store paper.
You can use the copy function on Type 1, 2, or 3 machines only.
Recommended Paper Sizes and Types
This section describes recommended paper sizes and types.
• If you use paper that curls, either because it is too dry or too damp, a staple clogging or paper jam
may occur.
• Do not use paper designed for inkjet printers, as these may stick to the fusing unit and cause a
misfeed.
• When you load transparencies, check the front and back of the sheets, and place them correctly,
or a misfeed might occur.
Tray 1
Paper type and weight
52.3–256.0g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–141.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 6
Paper size
Paper capacity
1,000 sheets × 2
A4
81/2 × 11
52.3–256.0g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–141.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 6
*1
1,000 sheets × 2
81/2 × 11
A4
*1 To load paper any of the sizes specified above, contact your service representative.
228
Recommended Paper
Tray 1 (A3/11 × 17 tray unit)
Paper type and weight
52.3–256.0g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–141.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 6
Paper size
Paper capacity
1,000 sheets
A3
11 × 17
52.3–256.0g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–141.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 6
*1
1,000 sheets
A4
, B4 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2
× 11
, 81/2 × 14
A3 , A4
, B4 JIS , 81/2 × 11
, 81/2 × 14
*1 To load paper any of the sizes specified above, contact your service representative.
Trays 2 and 3
Paper type and weight
52.3–256.0g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–141.0 lb. Index)
Paper size
Paper sizes that can be detected
automatically:
Paper capacity
500 sheets
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 6
A3 , A4
, A5
, B4 JIS , B5
1
JIS
, 11 × 17 , 8 /2 × 14 ,
81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11
, 81/4
× 13 , 8 × 13 , 71/4 × 101/2
, 51/2 × 81/2
, 8K , 16K
, SRA3
A3 , A4
, A5
, B4 JIS , B5
JIS
, 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 ,
81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11
, 81/4
1
× 13 , 8 × 13 , 7 /4 × 101/2
, 51/2 × 81/2
, 8K , 16K
, 12 × 18
229
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Paper type and weight
52.3–256.0g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–141.0 lb. Index)
Paper size
Select the paper size using the Tray
Paper Settings menu:
Paper capacity
500 sheets
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 6
81/4 × 14 , 8 × 10 , 11 × 15 ,
11 × 14 , 10 × 15 , 10 × 14 ,
13 × 18 , 12 × 18 , SRA4
,
226 × 310 mm
, 310 × 432 mm
, 81/2 × 132/5
81/4 × 14 , 8 × 10 , 11 × 15 ,
11 × 14 , 10 × 15 , 10 × 14 ,
13 × 18 , SRA3 , SRA4
,
226 × 310 mm
, 310 × 432 mm
, 81/2 × 132/5
52.3–256.0g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–141.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 6
Custom size:
500 sheets
Vertical: 139.7–330.2 mm
Horizontal: 139.7–457.2 mm
Vertical: 5.50–13.00 inches
Horizontal: 5.50–18.00 inches
Translucent paper
A3 , A4
Transparencies
A4
, B4 JIS , B5 JIS
*1
*1 *2
*1 Do not stack paper over the limit mark. The maximum number of sheets you can set at once depends on
the paper's thickness and condition.
*2 Transparencies can be fed only from Tray 2.
230
Recommended Paper
Multi bypass tray (Tray A)
Paper type and weight
52.3–216.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–79.9 lb. Cover)
Paper size
Paper sizes that can be detected
automatically:
Paper capacity
500 sheets
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 5
A3 , A4
, A5
, A6 , B4 JIS
, B5 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11
, 8 × 13 , 51/2 × 81/2 , SRA3
*2
A3 , A4 , A5 , A6 , B4 JIS ,
B5 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11
, 8 × 13 , 51/2 × 81/2
, 12
× 18
231
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Paper type and weight
52.3–216.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–79.9 lb. Cover)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 5
Paper size
*1
Paper capacity
500 sheets
B5 JIS , B6 JIS , 81/2 × 14 ,
81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/4 ×
14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 10 ,
71/4 × 101/2
, 51/2 × 81/2 ,
8K , 16K
, 11 × 15 , 11 ×
14 ,
10 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5
*2, 13 × 19 *2, 123/ × 191/
5
5
*2, 123/ × 181/
*2, 13 × 18
5
2
*2, 12 × 18 , SRA4 *2, SRA4
, 226 × 310 mm *2, 226 × 310
mm , 310 × 432 mm *2, 81/2 ×
132/5
A4 , A5 , B5 JIS , B6 JIS ,
81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/4 ×
14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 10 ,
71/4 × 101/2
, 8K , 16K
,
11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 ,
10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5 *2, 13 ×
19 *2, 123/5 × 191/5 *2,
123/5 × 181/2 *2, 13 × 18 *2,
SRA3 *2, SRA4 *2, SRA4 , 226
× 310 mm *2, 226 × 310 mm ,
310 × 432 mm *2, 81/2 × 132/5
*2
52.3–216.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–79.9 lb. Cover)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 5
Custom size: *3
Vertical: 100.0–330.2 mm*4
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm*5
Vertical: 3.94–13.00 inches*4
Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches*5
232
500 sheets
Recommended Paper
Paper type and weight
Paper size
Translucent paper
A3 , A4
, B4 JIS , B5 JIS
Transparencies
A4
Tab stock*7
A4 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11
, 81/2 × 11
Paper capacity
*6
*6
*6
52.3–216.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–79.9 lb. Cover)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 5
10 sheets
Envelopes
163.1–216.0 g/m2 (60.1 lb.
Cover–79.9 lb. Cover)
Paper Weight 5
Vertical: 100.0–330.2 mm*4
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm*5
Vertical: 3.94–13.00 inches*4
Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches*5
*1 Select the paper size. For details, see page 266 "Changing Tray Paper Settings".
*2 The paper sizes specified above cannot be used if the LCT is installed.
*3 Enter the paper size. For details, see page 266 "Changing Tray Paper Settings".
*4 When the LCT is installed, the maximum custom width is 305.0 mm (12.1 inches). When the two-tray or
three-tray wide LCT is installed, the maximum custom width is 330.2mm (13.1 inches). Also note that
when the banner sheet tray of multi bypass tray (Tray A) is installed, the minimum vertical size of custom
paper changes depending on the horizontal size as shown below:
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm (5.50–19.20 inches); vertical: 100 mm (3.93 inches) or more
Horizontal: 487.7–700.0 mm (19.20–27.55 inches); vertical: 210 mm (8.27 inches) or more
*5 When the banner sheet tray is installed, the maximum horizontal length of custom size paper is 700.0
mm (27.55 inches).
*6 Do not stack paper over the limit mark. The maximum number of sheets you can set at once depends on
the paper's thickness and condition.
*7 The tab fence is required.
LCT (Trays 4 and 5)
Paper type and weight
Paper size
52.3–216.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–79.9 lb. Cover)
Select the paper size using the
paper size selector:
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 5
A4 , A5
, B5 JIS , 81/2 × 11
1
1
, 5 /2 × 8 /2
Paper capacity
1,000 sheets
233
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Paper type and weight
Paper size
Paper capacity
Translucent paper
A4 , B5 JIS
*1
Label paper*2
A4 , 81/2 × 11
*1
Transparencies
A4 , 81/2 × 11
*1
Tab stock*3
A4 , 81/2 × 11
*1
52.3–216.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–79.9 lb. Cover)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 5
52.3–216.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–79.9 lb. Cover)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 5
*1 Do not stack paper over the limit mark. The maximum number of sheets you can set at once depends on
the paper's thickness and condition.
*2 You can load paper into Tray 5 only.
*3 The tab sheet holder is required.
LCT (Tray 6)
Paper type and weight
52.3–163.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–60.0 lb. Cover)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 4
Paper size
Paper capacity
2,550 sheets
A4
81/2 × 11
52.3–163.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–60.0 lb. Cover)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 4
*1
A5
, B5 JIS , 81/2 × 11 ,
51/2 × 81/2
A4 , A5
81/2
234
2,550 sheets
, B5 JIS , 51/2 ×
Translucent paper
A4 , B5 JIS
*2
Transparencies
A4 , 81/2 × 11
*2
Recommended Paper
*1 To load paper any of the sizes specified above, contact your service representative.
*2 Do not stack paper over the limit mark. The maximum number of sheets you can set at once depends on
the paper's thickness and condition.
Three-tray wide LCT (Trays 4 and 6)
Paper type and weight
52.3–256.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–141.0 lb. Index)
Paper size
Paper sizes that can be detected
automatically:
Paper capacity
1,000 sheets
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 6
A3 , A4
, A5
, B4 JIS , B5
JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11 , 8 ×
13 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 12 × 18
A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS
, 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11
,8×
1
1
13 , 5 /2 × 8 /2
, SRA3
235
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Paper type and weight
52.3–256.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–141.0 lb. Index)
Paper size
Select the paper size using the Tray
Paper Settings menu:
Paper capacity
1,000 sheets
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 6
A6 *1, B5 JIS , B6 JIS *1, 81/2
× 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 ,
81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 10
, 71/4 × 101/2
, 51/2 ×
81/2 , 8K , 16K
,
11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 ,
10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19
, 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
181/2 , 13 × 18 , SRA3 ,
SRA4
, 226 × 310 mm
, 310
1
2
× 432 mm , 8 /2 × 13 /5
A4 , A5 , A6 *1, B5 JIS , B6
JIS *1, 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13
, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 ×
10 , 71/4 × 101/2
, 8K ,
16K
, 11 × 15 , 11 × 14 ,
10 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5
, 13 × 19 , 123/5 × 191/5 ,
123/5 × 181/2 , 13 × 18 , 12 ×
18 , SRA4
, 226 × 310 mm
, 310 × 432 mm , 81/2 ×
132/5
52.3–256.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–141.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 6
Custom size:
Vertical: 100.0–330.2 mm*1
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm
Vertical: 3.94–13.00 inches*1
Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches
236
1,000 sheets
Recommended Paper
Paper type and weight
Coated: Glossy
Coated: Matte
52.3–256.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–141.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 6
Paper size
Paper sizes that can be detected
automatically:
Paper capacity
–
A3 , A4
, A5
, B4 JIS , B5
JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11 , 8 ×
13 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 12 × 18
A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS
, 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11
,8×
13 , 51/2 × 81/2
, 12 × 18
Coated: Glossy
Coated: Matte
52.3–256.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–141.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 6
Select the paper size using the Tray
Paper Settings menu:
–
A6 *1, B5 JIS , B6 JIS *1, 81/2
× 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 ,
81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 10
, 71/4 × 101/2
, 51/2 ×
1
8 /2 , 8K , 16K
,
11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 ,
10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19
, 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
181/2 , 13 × 18 , SRA3 ,
SRA4
, 226 × 310 mm
, 310
× 432 mm , 81/2 × 132/5
A4 , A5 , A6 *1, B5 JIS , B6
JIS *1, 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13
, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 ×
10 , 71/4 × 101/2
, 8K ,
16K
, 11 × 15 , 11 × 14 ,
10 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5
, 13 × 19 , 123/5 × 191/5 ,
123/5 × 181/2 , 13 × 18 ,
SRA3 , SRA4
, 226 × 310 mm
, 310 × 432 mm , 81/2 ×
132/5
237
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Paper type and weight
Coated: Glossy
Paper size
Paper capacity
–
Custom size:
Coated: Matte
52.3–256.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–141.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 6
Vertical: 100.0–330.2 mm*1
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm
Vertical: 3.94–13.00 inches*1
Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches
, B5 JIS
*2
Translucent paper
A3 , A4
Transparencies
A4
, 81/2 × 11
*2
Tab stock*3
A4
, 81/2 × 11
*2
52.3–256.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–141.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 6
Envelopes
163.1–216.0 g/m2 (60.1 lb.
Cover–79.9 lb. Cover)
Paper Weight 5
10 sheets
Vertical: 100.0–330.2 mm*1
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm
Vertical: 3.94–13.00 inches*1
Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches
*1 The postcard side fences are required to load paper that is between 100.0 and 139.2 mm (3.94 and
5.49 inches).
*2 Do not stack paper over the limit mark. The maximum number of sheets you can set at once depends on
the paper's thickness and condition.
*3 The tab fence is required.
238
Recommended Paper
Three-tray wide LCT (Tray 5)
Paper type and weight
40.0–300.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight
7
Paper size
Paper sizes that can be detected
automatically:
Paper capacity
2,000 sheets
A3 , A4
, A5
, B4 JIS , B5
1
JIS , 11 × 17 , 8 /2 × 11 , 8 ×
13 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 12 × 18
A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS
, 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11
,8×
13 , 51/2 × 81/2
, SRA3
239
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Paper type and weight
40.0–300.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight
7
Paper size
Select the paper size using the Tray
Paper Settings menu:
Paper capacity
2,000 sheets
A6 *2, B5 JIS , B6 JIS *2, 81/2
× 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 ,
81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 10
, 71/4 × 101/2
, 51/2 ×
81/2 , 8K , 16K
,
11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 ,
10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19
, 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
181/2 , 13 × 18 , SRA3 ,
SRA4
, 226 × 310 mm
, 310
1
2
× 432 mm , 8 /2 × 13 /5
A4 , A5 , A6 *2, B5 JIS , B6
JIS *2, 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13
, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 ×
10 , 71/4 × 101/2
, 8K ,
16K
,
11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 ,
10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19
, 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
181/2 , 13 × 18 , 12 × 18 ,
SRA4
, 226 × 310 mm
, 310
× 432 mm , 81/2 × 132/5
40.0–300.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight
7
Custom size:
Vertical: 100.0–330.2 mm*1
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm
Vertical: 3.94–13.00 inches*1
Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches
240
2,000 sheets
Recommended Paper
Paper type and weight
Coated: Glossy
Coated: Matte
40.0–300.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight
7
Paper size
Paper sizes that can be detected
automatically:
Paper capacity
–
A3 , A4
, A5
, B4 JIS , B5
JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11 , 8 ×
13 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 12 × 18
A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS
, 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11
,8×
13 , 51/2 × 81/2
, 12 × 18
Coated: Glossy
Coated: Matte
40.0–300.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight
7
Select the paper size using the Tray
Paper Settings menu:
–
A6 *2, B5 JIS , B6 JIS *2, 81/2
× 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 ,
81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 10
, 71/4 × 101/2
, 51/2 ×
1
8 /2 , 8K , 16K
,
11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 ,
10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19
, 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
181/2 , 13 × 18 , SRA3 ,
SRA4
, 226 × 310 mm
, 310
× 432 mm , 81/2 × 132/5
A4 , A5 , A6 *2, B5 JIS , B6
JIS *2, 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13
, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 ×
10 , 71/4 × 101/2
, 8K ,
16K
,
11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 ,
10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19
, 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
181/2 , 13 × 18 , SRA3 ,
SRA4
, 226 × 310 mm
, 310
1
2
× 432 mm , 8 /2 × 13 /5
241
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Paper type and weight
Coated: Glossy
Paper size
Paper capacity
–
Custom size:
Coated: Matte
40.0–300.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight
7
Vertical: 100.0–330.2 mm*2
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm
Vertical: 3.94–13.00 inches*2
Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches
, B5 JIS
*3
Translucent paper
A3 , A4
Transparencies
A4
, 81/2 × 11
*3
Tab stock*4
A4
, 81/2 × 11
*3
A4
, 81/2 × 11
*3
52.3–300.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 7
Label paper
52.3–300.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 7
Envelopes
163.1–300.0 g/m2 (79.9 lb.
Cover–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 5–Paper Weight 7
10 sheets
Vertical: 100.0–330.2 mm*2
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm
Vertical: 3.94–13.00 inches*2
Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches
*1 When a paper jam occurs while printing is performed on paper of Paper Weight 0, pull out the drawer
unit check that there is no paper left inside the upper part of the machine, and then remove the paper.
Also, confirm the paper feed direction and set the paper in the direction so that the grain direction is
aligned with the feed direction.
*2 The postcard side fences are required to load paper that is between 100.0 and 139.2 mm (3.94 and
5.49 inches).
*3 Do not stack paper over the limit mark. The maximum number of sheets you can set at once depends on
the paper's thickness and condition.
242
Recommended Paper
*4 The tab fence is required.
Two-tray wide LCT (Trays T1 to T4)
Paper type and weight
40.0–350.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb.
Bond–193.3 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight
8
Paper size
Paper sizes that can be detected
automatically:
Paper capacity
2,400 sheets
A3 , A4
, A5
, B4 JIS , 11
× 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11 ,
8 × 13 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 ×
81/2 , 12 × 18 , 13 × 191/5 ,
SRA3 , SRA4
A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , 11 ×
17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11
,
1
1
1
8 × 13 , 7 /4 × 10 /2 , 5 /2 ×
81/2
, 12 × 18 , 13 × 191/5
, SRA3 , SRA4
243
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Paper type and weight
40.0–350.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb.
Bond–193.3 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight
8
Paper size
Select the paper size using the Tray
Paper Settings menu:
Paper capacity
2,400 sheets
A6 , B5 JIS
, B6 JIS , 81/2 ×
1
13 , 8 /2 × 11 , 81/4 × 14 ,
81/4 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 ×
101/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 8K ,
16K
,
11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 ,
10 × 14 , 13 × 19 , 123/5 ×
191/5 , 123/5 × 181/2 , 13 ×
18 , SRA4 , 226 × 310 mm
,
310 × 432 mm , 81/2 × 132/5
A4 , A5 , A6 , B5 JIS
, B6
JIS , 81/2 × 13 , 81/4 × 14 ,
81/4 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 ×
101/2 , 8K , 16K
, 11 × 15
, 11 × 14 ,
10 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 13 × 19 ,
123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 × 181/2
, 13 × 18 , SRA4 , 226 × 310
mm
, 310 × 432 mm , 81/2 ×
2
13 /5
40.0–350.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb.
Bond–193.3 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight
8
Custom size:
Vertical: 100.0–330.2 mm
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm
Vertical: 3.94–13.00 inches
Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches
244
2,400 sheets
Recommended Paper
Paper type and weight
Coated: Glossy
Coated: Matte
40.0–350.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb.
Bond–193.3 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight
8
Paper size
Paper sizes that can be detected
automatically:
Paper capacity
–
A3 , A4
, A5
, B4 JIS , 11
× 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11 ,
8 × 13 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 ×
81/2 , 12 × 18 , 13 × 191/5 ,
SRA3 , SRA4
A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , 11 ×
17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11
,
1
1
1
8 × 13 , 7 /4 × 10 /2 , 5 /2 ×
81/2
, 12 × 18 , 13 × 191/5
, SRA3 , SRA4
Coated: Glossy
Coated: Matte
40.0–350.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb.
Bond–193.3 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight
8
Select the paper size using the Tray
Paper Settings menu:
–
B5 JIS
, 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 ×
11 , 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 ,
8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 ×
81/2 , 8K , 16K
,
11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 ,
10 × 14 , 13 × 19 , 123/5 ×
191/5 , 123/5 × 181/2 , 13 ×
18 , SRA4 , 81/2 × 132/5
A4 , A5 , B5 JIS
, 81/2 × 13
1
1
, 8 /4 × 14 , 8 /4 × 13 , 8 ×
10 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 8K , 16K
,
11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 ,
10 × 14 , 13 × 19 , 123/5 ×
191/5 , 123/5 × 181/2 , 13 ×
18 , SRA4 , 81/2 × 132/5
245
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Paper type and weight
Coated: Glossy
Paper size
Custom size:
Paper capacity
–
Coated: Matte
40.0–350.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb.
Bond–193.3 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight
8
Vertical: 139.7–330.2 mm
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm
Vertical: 5.50–13.00 inches
Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches
Translucent paper
A3 , A4
, B5 JIS
Transparencies*3
A4
Tab stock*4
A4 , 81/2 × 11
, 81/2 × 11
*2
*2
–
40.0–350.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb.
Bond–193.3 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 0*1–Paper Weight
8
Label paper*9
A4
, 81/2 × 11
–
40.0–350.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb.
Bond–193.3 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 0*1–Paper Weight
8
Envelopes
*5, *6, *7
163.1–300.0 g/m2 (79.9 lb.
Cover–165.0 lb. Index)
240 × 332 mm, 235 × 120 mm,
120 × 235 mm, 105 × 241 mm,
110 × 220 mm
Paper Weight 5–Paper Weight 7
246
10 sheets
Recommended Paper
Paper type and weight
Carbonless paper *8
40.0–350.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb.
Paper size
Paper sizes that can be detected
automatically:
Paper capacity
–
Bond–193.3 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight
8
A3 , A4
, A5
, B4 JIS , 11
× 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11 ,
8 × 13 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 ×
81/2 , 12 × 18 , 13 × 191/5 ,
SRA3 , SRA4
A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , 11 ×
17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11
,
1
1
1
8 × 13 , 7 /4 × 10 /2 , 5 /2 ×
81/2
, 12 × 18 , 13 × 191/5
, SRA3 , SRA4
247
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Paper type and weight
Carbonless paper *8
40.0–350.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb.
Paper size
Select the paper size using the Tray
Paper Settings menu:
Paper capacity
–
Bond–193.3 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight
8
A6 , B5 JIS
, B6 JIS , 81/2 ×
1
13 , 8 /2 × 11 , 81/4 × 14 ,
81/4 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 ×
101/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 8K ,
16K
,
11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 ,
10 × 14 , 13 × 19 , 123/5 ×
191/5 , 123/5 × 181/2 , 13 ×
18 , SRA4 , 226 × 310 mm
,
310 × 432 mm , 81/2 × 132/5
A4 , A5 , A6 , B5 JIS
, B6
JIS , 81/2 × 13 , 81/4 × 14 ,
81/4 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 ×
101/2 , 8K , 16K
, 11 × 15
, 11 × 14 ,
10 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 13 × 19 ,
123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 × 181/2
, 13 × 18 , SRA4 , 226 × 310
mm
, 310 × 432 mm , 81/2
2
×13 /5
Carbonless paper *8
Custom size:
–
40.0–350.0 g/m2 (10.7 lb.
Bond–193.3 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 0 *1–Paper Weight
8
Vertical: 100.0–330.2 mm
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm
Vertical: 3.94–13.00 inches
Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches
Perforated paper
A4
–
*1 When a paper jam occurs while printing is performed on paper of Paper Weight 0, pull out the drawer
unit check that there is no paper left inside the upper part of the machine, and then remove the paper.
248
Recommended Paper
Also, confirm the paper feed direction and set the paper in the direction so that the grain direction is
aligned with the feed direction.
*2 The maximum number of sheets you can set at once depends on the paper's thickness and condition.
*3 Fan the paper thoroughly so that the sheets do not stick to each other when reloading the paper that
has been output.
*4 The tab fence is required.
*5 Open the flaps, and load the envelopes with their flaps pointed toward the right side of the paper tray.
*6 Enter the sizes of the envelopes including their flap sizes using the Tray Paper Settings function.
*7 Sizes do not include flap sizes.
*8 Attach the small tab end fence when loading carbonless paper of paper weight 2 or less.
*9 The small tab end fence is required.
Two-tray wide LCT (When the banner sheet tray of two-tray wide LCT is installed) (Tray 1 or 3)
Paper type and weight
Paper size
52.3–350.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–193.3 lb. Index)
Select the paper size using the Tray
Paper Settings menu:
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 8
A3 , 11 × 17 , 12 × 18 , 13 ×
19 , 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
181/2 , 13 × 18 , 13 × 191/5
, SRA3 , 310 × 432mm
52.3–350.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–193.3 lb. Index)
Custom size:
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 8
Paper capacity
720 sheets
720 sheets
Vertical: 210.0–330.2 mm
Horizontal: 420.0–700.0 mm
Vertical: 8.27–13.00 inches
Horizontal: 16.54–27.55 inches
Coated: Glossy
Coated: Matte
52.3–350.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–193.3 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 8
Select the paper size using the Tray
Paper Settings menu:
*1
A3 , 11 × 17 , 12 × 18 , 13 ×
19 , 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
181/2 , 13 × 18 , 310 ×
432mm
249
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Paper type and weight
Coated: Glossy
Paper size
Custom size:
Paper capacity
*1
Coated: Matte
52.3–350.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–193.3 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 8
Vertical: 210.0–330.2 mm
Horizontal: 420.0–700.0 mm
Vertical: 8.27–13.00 inches
Horizontal: 16.54–27.55 inches
Carbonless paper
52.3–350.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–193.3 lb. Index)
Select the paper size using the Tray
Paper Settings menu:
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 8
A3 , 11 × 17 , 12 × 18 , 13 ×
19 , 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
181/2 , 13 × 18 , 310 ×
432mm
Carbonless paper
Custom size:
52.3–350.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–193.3 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 8
*1
*1
Vertical: 210.0–330.2 mm
Horizontal: 420.0–700.0 mm
Vertical: 8.27–13.00 inches
Horizontal: 16.54–27.55 inches
*1 The maximum number of sheets you can set at once depends on the paper's thickness and condition.
250
Recommended Paper
Interposer
Paper type and weight
52.3–300.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper size
Paper sizes that can be detected
automatically:
Paper capacity
200 sheets × 2
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 7
A3 , A4
, A5
, B4 JIS , B5
1
JIS , 11 × 17 , 8 /2 × 11 , 8 ×
13 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 12 × 18
A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS
, 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11
,8×
13 , 51/2 × 81/2
, 12 × 18
251
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Paper type and weight
52.3–300.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper size
Select the paper size using the Tray
Paper Settings menu:
Paper capacity
200 sheets × 2
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 7
B5 JIS , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13
, 81/2 × 11 , 81/4 × 14 ,
81/4 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 ×
101/2
, 51/2 × 81/2 , 8K ,
16K
,
11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 ,
10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19
, 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
181/2 , 13 × 18 , SRA3 ,
SRA4
, 226 × 310 mm
, 310
1
2
× 432 mm , 8 /2 × 13 /5
A4 , A5 , B5 JIS , 81/2 × 14 ,
81/2 × 13 , 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 ×
,
13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2
8K , 16K
, 11 × 15 ,
11 × 14 , 10 × 15 , 10 × 14 ,
13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19 , 123/5 ×
191/5 , 123/5 × 181/2 , 13 ×
18 , SRA3 , SRA4
, 226 ×
310 mm
, 310 × 432 mm ,
81/2 × 132/5
52.3–300.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 7
Custom size:
Vertical: 139.7–330.2 mm
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm
Vertical: 5.50–13.00 inches
Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches
252
200 sheets × 2
Recommended Paper
Paper type and weight
Coated: Glossy
Coated: Matte
105.1–300.0 g/m2 (28.1 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 4–Paper Weight 7
Paper size
Paper sizes that can be detected
automatically:
Paper capacity
*1
A3 , A4
, A5
, B4 JIS , B5
JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11 , 8 ×
13 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 12 × 18
A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS
, 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11
,8×
13 , 51/2 × 81/2
, 12 × 18
Coated: Glossy
Coated: Matte
105.1–300.0 g/m2 (28.1 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 4–Paper Weight 7
Select the paper size using the Tray
Paper Settings menu:
*1
B5 JIS , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13
, 81/2 × 11 , 81/4 × 14 ,
81/4 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 ×
101/2
, 51/2 × 81/2 , 8K ,
16K
,
11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 ,
10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19
, 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
181/2 , 13 × 18 , SRA3 ,
SRA4
, 226 × 310 mm
, 310
× 432 mm , 81/2 × 132/5
A4 , A5 , B5 JIS , 81/2 × 14 ,
81/2 × 13 , 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 ×
,
13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2
8K , 16K
, 11 × 15 ,
11 × 14 , 10 × 15 , 10 × 14 ,
13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19 , 123/5 ×
191/5 , 123/5 × 181/2 , 13 ×
18 , SRA3 , SRA4
, 226 ×
310 mm
, 310 × 432 mm ,
81/2 × 132/5
253
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Paper type and weight
Coated: Glossy
Paper size
Paper capacity
*1
Custom size:
Coated: Matte
105.1–300.0 g/m2 (28.1 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 4–Paper Weight 7
Vertical: 139.7–330.2 mm
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm
Vertical: 5.50–13.00 inches
Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches
Translucent paper
A3 , A4
Transparencies
A4
, 81/2 × 11
Tab stock
A4
, 81/2 × 11
*1
, B5JIS
*1
, 11 × 17
*1
52.3–300.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 7
Label paper
52.3–300.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
A3 , A4 , B4 JIS , 81/2 × 14
, 81/2 × 11
*1
Paper Weight 1–Paper Weight 7
*1 The maximum number of sheets you can set at once depends on the paper's thickness and condition.
Interposer of the perfect binder
Paper type and weight
105.1–300.0 g/m2 (28.1 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper size
Paper sizes that can be detected
automatically:
Paper Weight 4–Paper Weight 7
A3 , 8K , 13 × 19
11 × 17 , 12 × 18 , 13 × 19
254
Paper capacity
200 sheets (or up to
24 mm in height) ×
2
Recommended Paper
Paper type and weight
105.1–300.0 g/m2 (28.1 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper size
Paper capacity
Select the paper size using the Tray
Paper Settings menu:
200 sheets (or up to
24 mm in height) ×
2
Paper Weight 4–Paper Weight 7
B4 JIS , 11 × 17 , 12 × 18 ,
11 × 15 , 13 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
191/5 , 123/5 × 181/2 , 13 ×
18 , SRA3 , 310 × 432 mm
A3 , B4 JIS , 8K , 11 × 15 ,
13 × 191/5 , 123/5 × 191/5 ,
123/5 × 181/2 , 13 × 18 ,
SRA3 , 310 × 432 mm
105.1–300.0 g/m2 (28.1 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 4–Paper Weight 7
Custom size:
Vertical: 257.0–330.2 mm
200 sheets (or up to
24 mm in height) ×
2
Horizontal: 364.0–487.7 mm
Vertical: 10.12–13.00 inches
Horizontal: 14.34–19.20 inches
Coated: Glossy
Coated: Matte
Paper sizes that can be detected
automatically:
105.1–300.0 g/m2 (28.1 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
A3 , 8K , 13 × 19
*1
Paper Weight 4–Paper Weight 7
11 × 17 , 12 × 18 , 13 × 19
255
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Paper type and weight
Coated: Glossy
Paper size
Paper capacity
Select the paper size using the Tray
Paper Settings menu:
Coated: Matte
105.1–300.0 g/m2 (28.1 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 4–Paper Weight 7
*1
B4 JIS , 11 × 17 , 12 × 18 ,
11 × 15 , 13 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
191/5 , 123/5 × 181/2 , 13 ×
18 , SRA3 , 310 × 432 mm
A3 , B4 JIS , 8K , 11 × 15 ,
13 × 191/5 , 123/5 × 191/5 ,
123/5 × 181/2 , 13 × 18 ,
SRA3 , 310 × 432 mm
Coated: Glossy
*1
Custom size:
Coated: Matte
105.1–300.0 g/m2 (28.1 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 4–Paper Weight 7
Vertical: 257.0–330.2 mm
Horizontal: 364.0–487.7 mm
Vertical: 10.12–13.00 inches
Horizontal: 14.34–19.20 inches
*1 The maximum number of sheets you can set at once depends on the paper's thickness and condition.
Paper thickness
Paper weight*1
256
Metric
Bond paper
Cover paper
Index paper
Paper Weight
0*2
40.0–52.2
g/m2
10.7–13.9 lb.
Bond
14.8–18.9 lb.
Cover
22.1–28.9 lb.
Index
Paper Weight
1*2
52.3–63.0
g/m2
14.0–16.9 lb.
Bond
19.0–23.0 lb.
Cover
29.0–34.9 lb.
Index
Paper Weight 2
63.1–80.0
g/m2
17.0–21.0 lb.
Bond
23.1–29.9 lb.
Cover
35.0–44.0 lb.
Index
Paper Weight 3
80.1–105.0
g/m2
21.1–28.0 lb.
Bond
30.0–38.9 lb.
Cover
44.1–58.0 lb.
Index
Recommended Paper
Paper weight*1
Metric
Bond paper
Cover paper
Index paper
Paper Weight 4
105.1–163.0
g/m2
28.1–43.0 lb.
Bond
39.0–60.0 lb.
Cover
58.1–90.0 lb.
Index
Paper Weight 5
163.1–220.0
g/m2
43.1–58.9 lb.
Bond
60.1–80.9 lb.
Cover
90.1–121.0 lb.
Index
Paper Weight 6
220.1–256.0
g/m2
59.0–68.0 lb.
Bond
81.0–94.0 lb.
Cover
121.1–141.0 lb.
Index
Paper Weight 7
256.1–300.0
g/m2
68.1–80.0 lb.
Bond
94.1–110.0 lb.
Cover
141.1–165.0 lb.
Index
Paper Weight 8
300.1–350.0
g/m2
80.1–93.3 lb.
Bond
110.1–128.8 lb. 165.1–193.3 lb.
Cover
Index
*1 Print quality will decrease if the paper you are using is close to the minimum or maximum weight.
Change the paper weight setting to thinner or thicker.
*2 When loading paper of 40.0–63.0 g/m2 (10.7–16.9 lb. Bond), the edges may crease or the paper
misfeed depending on the paper type.
• Certain types of paper, such as translucent paper or transparencies, may produce noise when
delivered. This noise does not indicate a problem and print quality is unaffected.
• The paper capacity described in the tables above is an example. Actual paper capacity might be
lower, depending on the paper type.
• When loading paper, make sure the stack height does not exceed the limit mark of the paper tray.
• If multiple sheet feeding occurs, fan sheets thoroughly or load sheets one by one from the multi
bypass tray (Tray A).
• You can specify whether or not the machine auto detects multi-sheet feeds in paper from every tray.
In "0302 When Double Feed is Detected" under the [Adjustment Settings for Operators], you can
also specify whether to suspend or continue the current jobs when a multi-sheet feed is detected.
However, depending on the condition of the paper, the machine may not detect a multi-sheet feed
correctly. For details about Adjustment Settings for Operators, see page 317 "0301 Double Feed
Detection".
• Flatten out curled sheets before loading them.
• The Adjust Paper Curl function might not be able to fully remove curl, depending on the type of
paper and the direction of its grain. If long grain paper does not uncurl properly, try short grain
paper instead. For details about the Adjust Paper Curl function, see page 319 "0310 Correct
Output Paper Curl".
• Depending on the paper's size, weight, and type, the copy/print speed may be slower than usual.
257
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• When loading envelopes, see page 260 "Envelopes".
• When copying or printing onto letterhead paper, the paper placing orientation is different
depending on which function you are using. For details, see page 198 "Loading Orientation-fixed
Paper or Two-sided Paper".
• If you load paper of the same size and same type in two or more trays, the machine automatically
feeds from one of the trays in which [Yes] is selected for [Apply Auto Paper Select] when the first
tray in use runs out of paper. This function is called Auto Tray Switching. This saves interrupting a
copy run to replenish paper when making a large number of copies. You can specify the paper
type of the paper trays under [Paper Type] tab. For details, see page 228 "Recommended Paper
Sizes and Types". For the setting procedure of the Auto Tray Switching function, see "General
Features", Device Management.
• The paper types you can select in Tray Paper Settings are only general classifications. Print quality
for every kind of paper in a classification is not guaranteed. For details, see page 264 "Unusable
Paper".
• If the surface of the paper is dusty, white spots might appear on prints. To remove dust, fan the
paper thoroughly.
• When loading label paper:
• Select [Label Paper] for [Paper Type] in [Tray Paper Settings], and select an appropriate
paper weight under [Paper Weight].
• When loading transparencies:
• When copying onto transparencies, see "Copying onto transparencies", Basic Operations.
• To print on transparencies, select [Transparency] for [Paper Type] in [Tray Paper Settings].
• When you load transparencies, check the front and back of the sheets, and place them
correctly, or a misfeed might occur.
• Fan transparencies thoroughly whenever you use them. This prevents transparencies from
sticking together, and from feeding incorrectly.
• Remove copied or printed sheets one by one.
• When outputting to the high capacity stacker, specify the output tray as the stacker upper tray.
For details, see "General Features", Device Management.
• When loading translucent paper:
• When loading translucent paper, always use long grain paper, and set the paper direction
according to the grain.
• Translucent paper easily absorbs humidity and becomes curled. Remove curl in the translucent
paper before loading. For details about settings for flattening out curled paper, see "0310
Correct Output Paper Curl", Maintenance and Management.
• Remove copied or printed sheets one by one.
• When loading coated paper:
258
Recommended Paper
• If you want to use glossy paper, select [Coated: Glossy] for [Paper Type]. If you want to use
matted paper (including silk, dull, and satin paper), select [Coated: Matte] for [Paper Type].
For details about the settings for using coated paper with custom paper, see page 44
"Registering a Custom Paper".
• When loading coated paper or glossy paper, always fan the paper before using it.
• If a paper jam occurs or if the machine makes a strange noise when feeding stacks of coated
paper, feed the coated paper one sheet at a time.
• To load coated paper into the wide LCT, you must specify [Coated: Glossy] or [Coated:
Matte] as the paper type and select an appropriate paper weight under [Paper Weight].
• When using carbonless paper, note the following:
• Carbonless paper can be used only when Two-tray Wide LCT is used along with Finisher
SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120 for post-processing.
• When using carbonless paper, you can attach no option except the high capacity stacker
between the machine and Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120.
• Duplex printing cannot be performed.
• Some types of carbonless paper have expiration dates. Purchase the amount you can use
within the time limit. Contact your paper retailer regarding the expiration dates and storage
methods.
• Depending on the paper weight or direction of the paper, paper jams may occur when reverse
output or duplex printing is performed. If the paper jams when thick long-grain paper is used, either
cancel the reverse output or duplex print settings, or to use short-grain or thin paper.
Thick paper
This section gives you various details about and recommendations concerning thick paper.
When loading thick paper of 163.1 g/m2 (60.1 lb. Cover) or heavier in Trays 1–3, the wide LCT, multi
bypass tray (Tray A), or Trays 4 and 5 of the LCT, follow the recommendations below to prevent
misfeeds and loss of image quality.
• When loading thick paper into Trays 1–3, be sure to load at least 20 sheets. Also, be sure to
position the side fences flush against the paper stack.
• Jams and misfeeds can occur when printing on thick smooth paper. To prevent such problems,
be sure to fan smooth paper thoroughly before loading them. If paper continues to become
jammed or feed in together even after they are fanned, load them one by one from the multi
bypass tray (Tray A).
• When loading thick paper, set the paper direction according to its grain, as shown in the
following diagram. Not doing so might cause a paper jam, marked edges or the paper edges
to be folded. Using paper that is 209.0 g/m2 (77.4 lb. Cover) or heavier may also cause a
paper jam.
259
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Direction of paper grain
Paper 64.0 g/m2 (17.1 lb.
Bond) or less
Paper heavier than 64.0 g/m2
(17.1 lb. Bond)
• Select [Paper Weight 5], [Paper Weight 6], [Paper Weight 7], or [Paper Weight 8] as the paper
thickness for the tray in [Tray Paper Settings].
• Even if thick paper is loaded as described above, normal operations and print quality might still not
be possible, depending on the paper type.
• Prints might have prominent vertical creases.
• Prints might be noticeably curled. Flatten out prints if they are creased or curled. For details about
settings for flattening out curled paper, see "Adjustment Settings for Operators", Maintenance and
Management.
Envelopes
This section describes loading envelopes.
• Misfeeds might occur depending on the length and shape of the flaps.
• Only envelopes that are at least 139.7 mm (5.5 inches) wide can be loaded.
To print on envelopes, load them into the Wide LCT or multi bypass tray (Tray A), and be sure to specify
an appropriate paper type.
To load envelopes, be sure to unfold their flaps and set them in the
260
orientation with print side face up.
Recommended Paper
CDL070
If you are printing onto side-opening envelopes, be sure to unfold their flaps and set them in the
orientation with print side face up. Flaps must be at the right side of the Wide LCT or multi bypass tray
(Tray A).
CDL081
Recommended envelopes
For information about recommended envelopes, contact your local dealer.
Storage of envelopes
Keep envelopes stored in sealed plastic bags and remove only the quantity needed. Do not add
envelopes during printing, as this might cause misfeeds.
• Be sure to specify the size of the envelope and flap size in [Tray Paper Settings]. For details, see
page 227 "Changing to a Custom Paper Size".
• When using envelopes, set [Paper Weight] in [Tray Paper Settings] to the same value as two sheets
of the paper used for the envelopes.
• Before loading envelopes, press down on them to remove any air inside and to flatten any edges
or creases. When envelopes are curled, flatten the envelopes so that the amount of curling is less
than 5 mm for paper whose paper weight is 52.3-299.9g/m2 or less than 3 mm for paper whose
weight is 300-400g/m2.
• Place one envelope at a time if you still get any of the following results:
• The envelope jams
261
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• The envelope is not fed
• Multiple envelopes are fed at the same time
• Humidity levels of over 50% can cause envelopes to come out creased or misprinted.
• Certain types of envelope might be delivered creased, soiled, or misprinted. If you are printing a
solid fill on an envelope, lines may appear where the overlapped edges of the envelope make it
thicker.
• If the horizontal size of the envelope is 297 mm (11.7 inches) or less, a paper misfeed might occur.
If this happens, turn off Skew Detection. For details, see page 318 "0304 Skew Detection".
• When printing on envelopes thicker than 127.0 g/m2 (47.0 lb. Cover), do not use [П Curl
Correction Level: Large] or [U Curl Correction Level: Large] for "0310 Correct Output Paper Curl"
of [Adjustment Settings for Operators].
Paper Weight Conversion Table
The weight of paper is measured as paper weight or ream weight.
Paper weight is the weight of one square meter of a sheet of paper, measured in units of g/m2. Ream
weight is the weight in pounds of 500 sheets of the paper. The basic size varies depending on the type
(grade) of paper.
The basic sizes for each grade are as follow:
• Bond, Ledger: 17" × 22"
• Offset, Text: 25" × 38"
• Cover: 20" × 26"
• Index: 251/2" × 301/2"
Ream weight can be calculated using the following equation:
Ream weight (lb) = paper weight (g/m2) × dimension of paper (m2/sheet) × 500 (sheets)
The following table shows the relationship between paper weight and ream weight:
Ream weight
262
Paper weight
Bond / Ledger
Offset / Text
Cover
Index
(g/m2)
(lb.)
(lb. text)
(lb. cover)
(lb. index)
52
14
36
20
29
60
16 *
40 *
22
33
75
20 *
50 *
28
42
90
24 *
60 *
33
50
Recommended Paper
Ream weight
Paper weight
Bond / Ledger
Offset / Text
Cover
Index
(g/m2)
(lb.)
(lb. text)
(lb. cover)
(lb. index)
105
28 *
70 *
39
58
108
29
73
40 *
60
118
31
80 *
44
65
120
32 *
81
45
67
135
36
90
50 *
75
148
39
100 *
55
82
162
43
110
60 *
90 *
176
47
120
65 *
97
199
53
135
74
110 *
216
58
146
80 *
120
244
65
165
90 *
135
253
67
171
94
140 *
256
68
173
95
142
270
72
183
100 *
150
297
79
201
110 *
165
307
82
208
114
170 *
325
87
220
120
180 *
351
94
237
130 *
194
398
106
269
147
220 *
405
108
274
150
224
Asterisks (*) indicate the most common weights for that category.
263
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Unusable Paper
• Do not use stapled sheets of paper, aluminum foil, carbon paper, or any kind of conductive
paper. Doing so can result in fire.
• To prevent faults, do not use any of the following kinds of treated paper:
• Paper for inkjet printers
• Thermal paper
• Art paper
• Aluminum foil
• Carbon paper
• Conductive paper
• Transparencies for color copying
• Hemmed-edge paper
• Faults can occur if you copy or print onto sides that are already printed. Take care to copy or print
onto unprinted sides only.
• To prevent misfeeds, do not use the following kinds of paper:
• Bent, folded, or creased paper
• Torn paper
• Paper with a dusty surface
• The following paper types are not supported by the perfect binder interposer and the interposer.
• Heavily curled paper
• Paper with staples or clips
• Torn paper
• Paper with penciled characters or images
• Folded paper
• The following paper types are not supported by the perfect binder interposer.
• Label paper
• Tab stock
• Cardstock
264
Recommended Paper
• Even supported types of paper may cause paper jams or malfunctions if the paper is not in good
condition.
• If you copy or print onto rough grain paper, the output image might be blurred.
• Do not load sheets that have already been printed onto by another machine. (Sheets can become
jammed if they have been improperly stored.)
Paper Storage
• When storing paper, the following precautions should always be followed:
• Do not store paper where it will be exposed to direct sunlight.
• Store all your thick paper in the same environment - a room where the temperature is 20–
25°C (68–77°F) and the humidity is 30–65%.
• Store on a flat surface.
• Do not store paper vertically.
• Once opened, store paper in plastic bags.
• Keep paper tightly sealed in a bag made of anti-humidity material even if the package of paper
has not been opened yet. If sheets of paper are not stored in an anti-humidity bag, store them in a
plastic bag and tightly seal it.
265
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Changing Tray Paper Settings
This section explains how to specify the size and type of the paper that is loaded in the source tray.
For an overview of the paper settings and how to register custom paper, seepage 38 "Registering
Custom Paper".
Accessing Tray Paper Settings
If the specified size differs from the actual size of the paper loaded in the paper tray, a misfeed might
occur because the correct paper size is not detected.
• If the specified paper type differs from the actual type of paper that is loaded in the paper tray, the
paper might misfeed, the toner might not fuse properly, or the print quality might be reduced.
Specifying a custom paper
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [Paper Tray] tab.
3. Select the tray to specify the paper settings.
4. Select [Allocate from Media Catalog].
The custom papers that can be used in the selected tray appear.
The Master Library information is indicated by the
icon.
If the paper you want to select is not displayed, use [Jump to Row], or scroll through the screen until
the desired item is displayed.
5. Select the custom paper that you want to use, and then press [Allocate to Tray].
After selecting a custom paper, you can check its type and color by pressing [Check Settings].
6. Press [Cover/Designation/Slip/Separation Sheet] tab.
266
Changing Tray Paper Settings
7. Change the settings for the copy function (such as front cover sheet and designation
sheet), if necessary.
8. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
• If you want to change the custom paper settings, press [Change Custom Paper Sett.] in Step 5.
Manually specifying a paper's size and type
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [Paper Tray] tab.
3. Select the tray to specify the paper settings.
4. Select [Manual Setting].
5. Press [Edit the Settings].
6. Change the paper settings, and then press [Save Paper].
You can configure the following items:
• [Paper Size]
• [Paper Weight]
• [Paper Type]
• [Apply Duplex]
• [Apply Auto Paper Select]
7. Press [Save].
8. Press [Cover/Designation/Slip/Separation Sheet] tab.
9. Change the settings for the copy function (such as front cover sheet and designation
sheet), if necessary.
10. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
Names and Positions of Paper Trays (Tray 1 to 6, Tray A, Tray T1 to T4)
The optional units that your machine is equipped with determine the paper tray configuration.
267
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
1 2
3
7
4 5 6
4
5
6
8
10
9
11
EAQ121
1. Tray 1
2. Tray 2
3. Tray 3
4. Tray 4
5. Tray 5
6. Tray 6
7. Multi bypass tray (Tray A)
8. Tray T1
9. Tray T2
10. Tray T3
11. Tray T4
268
Changing Tray Paper Settings
Tray Paper Settings
This section explains the paper tray settings for Tray 1 to 6, Tray T1 to T4, the multi bypass tray (Tray A),
Interposer Tray and Perfect Binder Interposer Tray.
You can specify the settings for the [Cover/Designation/Slip/Separation Sheet] tab on Type 1, 2, or 3
machines only.
You can use perfect binder interposer on Type 2, 3, 4, or 5 machines only.
When you assign a custom paper to a paper tray
• Auto Tray Switching is used for automatically switching between trays for custom papers that
have the same configured registration number.
• When printing in the Auto Paper Select mode, Auto Tray Switching switches between trays
that are configured for custom papers that meet all of the following conditions:
• The paper type is [Plain Paper] or [Recycled Paper] and both custom papers' paper
types are the same
• The paper weight is [Paper Weight 2] or [Paper Weight 3] and both custom papers'
paper weights are the same
• Both custom papers' paper sizes are the same
• If the specified size differs from the actual size of the paper loaded in the paper tray, a misfeed
might occur because the correct paper size is not detected.
• If you want to use preprinted paper, contact your service representative.
Paper Tray
This section explains the paper tray settings in the [Paper Tray] menu under [Tray Paper Settings].
Tray 1
This section explains the paper tray settings for Tray 1.
Paper Size
•
(mainly Europe)
A4
•
(mainly North America)
81/2 × 11
Paper Weight
• Paper Weight 1 (52.3–63.0g/m2)
269
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 3 (80.1–105.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 4 (105.1–163.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 5 (163.1–220.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 6 (220.1–256.0g/m2)
Default: [Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)]
Paper Type
• Plain Paper
• Recycled Paper
• White
• Yellow
• Green
• Blue
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
• Red
• Gray
• Letterhead
• Preprinted Paper
• Bond Paper
• Cardstock
• Prepunched Paper
Default: [Plain Paper]
Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
Apply Auto Paper Select
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
270
Changing Tray Paper Settings
•
(mainly Europe)
The paper guide in the tray is fixed. If you need to change the paper size to 81/2 × 11 , contact
your service representative.
•
(mainly North America)
The paper guide in the tray is fixed. If you need to change the paper size to A4 , contact your
service representative.
• The lock mark ( ) is displayed next to the paper tray if [Apply Auto Paper Select] is not enabled.
Tray 1 (when using the A3/11 × 17 tray unit)
This section explains the paper tray settings for Tray 1 (when using the A3/11 × 17 tray unit).
Paper Size
•
(mainly Europe)
A3
•
(mainly North America)
11 × 17
Paper Weight
• Paper Weight 1 (52.3–63.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 3 (80.1–105.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 4 (105.1–163.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 5 (163.1–220.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 6 (220.1–256.0g/m2)
Default: [Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)]
Paper Type
• Plain Paper
• Recycled Paper
• White
• Yellow
• Green
• Blue
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
271
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• Red
• Gray
• Letterhead
• Preprinted Paper
• Bond Paper
• Cardstock
• Prepunched Paper
Default: [Plain Paper]
Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
Apply Auto Paper Select
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
•
•
(mainly Europe)
The paper guide in the tray is fixed. If you need to change the paper size to A4
17 , or 81/2 × 11
, contact your service representative.
, B4 JIS , 11 ×
(mainly North America)
The paper guide in the tray is fixed. If you need to change the paper size to A3 , A4
, or 81/2 × 11
, contact your service representative.
, B4 JIS
• The lock mark ( ) is displayed next to the paper tray if [Apply Auto Paper Select] is not enabled.
Trays 2 and 3
This section explains the paper tray settings for Trays 2 and 3.
Paper Size
Custom Size, Auto Detect, A3 , A4 , A4 , A5 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS ,
B5 JIS , SRA3 , SRA4 , SRA4 , 310 × 432mm , 226 × 310mm ,
226 × 310mm , 13 × 18 , 12 × 18 , 11 × 17 , 11 × 15 , 11 × 14 ,
10 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 132/5 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 ,
81/2 × 11 , 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2 ,
71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 8K , 16K , 16K
Default: [Auto Detect]
272
Changing Tray Paper Settings
You can specify a custom size between 139.7 and 330.2 mm (5.50 and 13.00 inches)
vertically, and between 139.7 and 457.2 mm (5.50 and 18.00 inches) horizontally.
For details about auto detectable paper sizes, see page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".
Paper Weight
• Paper Weight 1 (52.3–63.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 3 (80.1–105.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 4 (105.1–163.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 5 (163.1–220.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 6 (220.1–256.0g/m2)
Default: [Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)]
Paper Type
• Plain Paper
• Recycled Paper
• White
• Yellow
• Green
• Blue
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
• Red
• Gray
• Letterhead
• Translucent Paper
• Preprinted Paper
• Bond Paper
• Cardstock
• Transparency*1
• Prepunched Paper
Default: [Plain Paper]
*1 Tray 2 only.
273
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
Duplex printing is automatically disabled if you select [Translucent Paper] or [Transparency]
for [Paper Type].
Apply Auto Paper Select
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
• The lock mark ( ) is displayed next to the paper tray if [Apply Auto Paper Select] is not enabled.
Tray 4 (when the Large Capacity Tray is installed)
This section explains the paper tray settings for Tray 4 (when the LCT is installed).
Paper Size
(mainly Europe)
•
A4
•
(mainly North America)
81/2 × 11
Paper Weight
• Paper Weight 1 (52.3–63.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 3 (80.1–105.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 4 (105.1–163.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 5 (163.1–220.0g/m2)
Default: [Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)]
Paper Type
• Plain Paper
• Recycled Paper
• White
• Yellow
• Green
• Blue
274
Changing Tray Paper Settings
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
• Red
• Gray
• Letterhead
• Translucent Paper
• Preprinted Paper
• Bond Paper
• Cardstock
• Transparency
• Envelope
• Coated: Glossy
• Coated: Matte
• Prepunched Paper
• Tab Stock
Default: [Plain Paper]
If you select [Tab Stock], you must configure the detailed settings.
Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
Duplex printing is automatically disabled if you select [Translucent Paper], [Transparency], or
[Tab Stock] for [Paper Type].
Apply Auto Paper Select
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
• The lock mark ( ) is displayed next to the paper tray if [Apply Auto Paper Select] is not enabled.
• For details about how to specify paper size, see page 208 "Changing the Paper Size in the Large
Capacity Tray". For details about the paper sizes that can be used, see page 228 "Recommended
Paper Sizes and Types".
275
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• For details on how to use custom size paper, contact your service representative. Paper that has a
vertical length of 210.0–305.0 mm (8.27–12.00 inches) and a horizontal length of 139.7–230.0
mm (5.50–9.05 inches) can be loaded into Tray 4.
• The maximum weight of paper that can be loaded into Tray 4 is 216.0 g/m2 when the large
capacity tray is installed.
Tray 5 (when the Large Capacity Tray is installed)
This section explains the paper tray settings for Tray 5 (when the LCT is installed).
Paper Size
•
(mainly Europe)
A4
•
(mainly North America)
81/2 × 11
Paper Weight
• Paper Weight 1 (52.3–63.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 3 (80.1–105.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 4 (105.1–163.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 5 (163.1–220.0g/m2)
Default: [Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)]
Paper Type
• Plain Paper
• Recycled Paper
• White
• Yellow
• Green
• Blue
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
• Red
• Gray
• Letterhead
• Label Paper
276
Changing Tray Paper Settings
• Translucent Paper
• Preprinted Paper
• Bond Paper
• Cardstock
• Transparency
• Prepunched Paper
• Tab Stock
Default: [Plain Paper]
If you select [Tab Stock], you must configure the detailed settings.
Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
Duplex printing is automatically disabled if you select [Label Paper], [Translucent Paper],
[Transparency], or [Tab Stock] for [Paper Type].
Apply Auto Paper Select
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
• The lock mark ( ) is displayed next to the paper tray if [Apply Auto Paper Select] is not enabled.
• For details about how to specify paper size, see page 208 "Changing the Paper Size in the Large
Capacity Tray". For details about the paper sizes that can be used, see page 228 "Recommended
Paper Sizes and Types".
• For details on how to use custom size paper, contact your service representative. Paper that has a
vertical length of 210.0–305.0 mm (8.27–12.00 inches) and a horizontal length of 139.7–230.0
mm (5.50–9.05 inches) can be loaded into Tray 5.
• The maximum weight of paper that can be loaded into Tray 5 is 216.0 g/m2 when the large
capacity tray is installed.
Tray 6 (when the Large Capacity Tray is installed)
This section explains the paper tray settings for Tray 6 (when the LCT is installed).
Paper Size
•
(mainly Europe)
A4
•
(mainly North America)
277
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
81/2 × 11
Paper Weight
• Paper Weight 1 (52.3–63.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 3 (80.1–105.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 4 (105.1–163.0g/m2)
Default: [Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)]
Paper Type
• Plain Paper
• Recycled Paper
• White
• Yellow
• Green
• Blue
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
• Red
• Gray
• Letterhead
• Translucent Paper
• Preprinted Paper
• Bond Paper
• Cardstock
• Transparency
• Prepunched Paper
Default: [Plain Paper]
Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
278
Changing Tray Paper Settings
Duplex printing is automatically disabled if you select [Translucent Paper] or [Transparency]
for [Paper Type].
Apply Auto Paper Select
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
• The lock mark ( ) is displayed next to the paper tray if [Apply Auto Paper Select] is not enabled.
•
(mainly Europe)
The paper guide in the tray is fixed. If you need to change the paper size to B5 JIS , A5 , A5 ,
81/2 × 11 , 51/2 × 81/2 or 51/2 × 81/2 , contact your service representative.
•
(mainly North America)
The paper guide in the tray is fixed. If you need to change the paper size to A4 , B5 JIS , A5 ,
A5 , 51/2 × 81/2 , or 51/2 × 81/2 , contact your service representative.
• For details on how to use custom size paper, contact your service representative. Paper that has a
vertical length of 210.0–305.0 mm (8.27–12.00 inches) and a horizontal length of 139.7–230.0
mm (5.50–9.05 inches) can be loaded into Tray 6.
Trays 4 and 6 (when the three-tray wide Large Capacity Tray is installed)
This section explains the paper tray settings for Trays 4 and 6 (when the three-tray wide LCT is
installed).
Paper Size
Custom Size, Auto Detect, A3 , A4 , A4 , A5 , A5 , A6 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS ,
B5 JIS , B6 JIS , SRA3 , SRA4 , SRA4 , 310 × 432mm , 226 × 310mm ,
226 × 310mm , 13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19 , 13 × 18 , 123/5 × 191/5 ,
123/5 × 181/2 , 12 × 18 , 11 × 17 , 11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 , 10 × 14 ,
81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 132/5 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/4 × 14 ,
81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 ,
51/2 × 81/2 , 8K , 16K , 16K
Default: [Auto Detect]
You can specify a custom size between 100.0 and 330.2 mm (3.94 and 13.00 inches)
vertically, and between 139.7 and 487.7 mm (5.50 and 19.20 inches) horizontally.
When loading paper that is 100.0 to 139.2 mm (3.94 to 5.49 inches) in vertical length,
attach the postcard side fences.
For details about auto detectable paper sizes, see page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".
279
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Paper Weight
• Paper Weight 1 (52.3–63.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 3 (80.1–105.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 4 (105.1–163.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 5 (163.1–220.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 6 (220.1–256.0g/m2)
Default: [Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)]
Paper Type
• Plain Paper
• Recycled Paper
• White
• Yellow
• Green
• Blue
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
• Red
• Gray
• Letterhead
• Translucent Paper
• Preprinted Paper
• Bond Paper
• Cardstock
• Transparency
• Envelope
• Coated: Glossy
• Coated: Matted
• Prepunched Paper
• Tab Stock
Default: [Plain Paper]
280
Changing Tray Paper Settings
If you select [Tab Stock], you must configure the detailed settings.
Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
Duplex printing is automatically disabled if you select [Translucent Paper], [Transparency],
[Envelope], or [Tab Stock] for [Paper Type].
Apply Auto Paper Select
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
• If you want to use glossy paper, select [Coated: Glossy] for [Paper Type]. If you want to use matte
paper (including silk, dull, and satin paper), select [Coated: Matte] for [Paper Type].
• The lock mark ( ) is displayed next to the paper tray if [Apply Auto Paper Select] is not enabled.
Tray 5 (when the three-tray wide Large Capacity Tray is installed)
This section explains the paper tray settings for Tray 5 (when the three-tray wide LCT is installed).
Paper Size
Custom Size, Auto Detect, A3 , A4 , A4 , A5 , A5 , A6 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS ,
B5 JIS , B6 JIS , SRA3 , SRA4 , SRA4 , 310 × 432mm , 226 × 310mm ,
226 × 310mm , 13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19 , 13 × 18 , 123/5 × 191/5 ,
123/5 × 181/2 , 12 × 18 , 11 × 17 , 11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 , 10 × 14 ,
81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 132/5 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/4 × 14 ,
81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 ,
51/2 × 81/2 , 8K , 16K , 16K
Default: [Auto Detect]
You can specify a custom size between 100.0 and 330.2 mm (3.94 and 13.00 inches)
vertically, and between 139.7 and 487.7 mm (5.50 and 19.20 inches) horizontally.
When loading paper that is 100.0 to 139.2 mm (3.94 to 5.49 inches) in vertical length,
attach the postcard side fences.
For details about auto detectable paper sizes, see page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".
Paper Weight
• Paper Weight 0 (40.0–52.2g/m2) *1
281
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• Paper Weight 1 (52.3–63.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 3 (80.1–105.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 4 (105.1–163.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 5 (163.1–220.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 6 (220.1–256.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 7 (256.1–300.0g/m2)
Default: [Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)]
*1 When printing on paper of Paper Weight 0, confirm the paper feed direction and set the paper in
the direction so that the grain direction is aligned with the feed direction.
Paper Type
• Plain Paper
• Recycled Paper
• White
• Yellow
• Green
• Blue
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
• Red
• Gray
• Letterhead
• Label Paper
• Translucent Paper
• Preprinted Paper
• Bond Paper
• Cardstock
• Transparency
• Envelope
• Coated: Glossy
• Coated: Matte
• Prepunched Paper
282
Changing Tray Paper Settings
• Tab Stock
Default: [Plain Paper]
If you select [Tab Stock], you must configure the detailed settings.
Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
Duplex printing is automatically disabled if you select [Label Paper], [Translucent Paper],
[Transparency], [Envelope], or [Tab Stock] for [Paper Type].
Apply Auto Paper Select
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
• If you want to use glossy paper, select [Coated: Glossy] for [Paper Type]. If you want to use matte
paper (including silk, dull, and satin paper), select [Coated: Matte] for [Paper Type].
• The lock mark ( ) is displayed next to the paper tray if [Apply Auto Paper Select] is not enabled.
Tray T1 to T4 (when the two-tray Wide Large Capacity Tray is installed)
This section explains the paper tray settings for Tray T1 to T4 (when the two-tray wide LCT is
installed).
Paper Size
Custom Size, Auto Detect, A3 , A4 , A4 , A5 , A5 , A6 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS ,
B5 JIS , B6 JIS , SRA3 , SRA4 , SRA4 , 310 × 432mm , 226 × 310mm ,
226 × 310mm , 13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19 , 13 × 18 , 123/5 × 191/5 ,
123/5 × 181/2 , 12 × 18 , 11 × 17 , 11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 , 10 × 14 ,
81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 132/5 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/4 × 14 ,
81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 ,
51/2 × 81/2 , 8K , 16K , 16K
Default: [Auto Detect]
You can specify a custom size between 100.0 and 330.2 mm (3.94 and 13.00 inches)
vertically, and between 139.7 and 487.7 mm (5.50 and 19.20 inches) horizontally.
For details about auto detectable paper sizes, see page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".
283
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Paper Weight
• Paper Weight 0 (40.0–52.2g/m2) *1
• Paper Weight 1 (52.3–63.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 3 (80.1–105.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 4 (105.1–163.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 5 (163.1–220.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 6 (220.1–256.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 7 (256.1–300.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 8 (300.1–350.0g/m2)
Default: [Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)]
*1 When printing on paper of Paper Weight 0, confirm the paper feed direction and set the paper in
the direction so that the grain direction is aligned with the feed direction.
Paper Type
• Plain Paper
• Recycled Paper
• White
• Yellow
• Green
• Blue
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
• Red
• Gray
• Letterhead
• Label Paper
• Translucent Paper
• Preprinted Paper
• Bond Paper
• Cardstock
• Transparency
• Envelope
284
Changing Tray Paper Settings
• Coated: Glossy
• Coated: Matte
• Carbonless Paper
• Prepunched Paper
• Tab Stock
Default: [Plain Paper]
If you select [Tab Stock], you must configure the detailed settings.
Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
Duplex printing is automatically disabled if you select [Label Paper], [Translucent Paper],
[Transparency], [Envelope], [Tab Stock], or [Carbonless Paper] for [Paper Type].
Apply Auto Paper Select
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
• If you want to use glossy paper, select [Coated: Glossy] for [Paper Type]. If you want to use matte
paper (including silk, dull, and satin paper), select [Coated: Matte] for [Paper Type].
• The lock mark ( ) is displayed next to the paper tray if [Apply Auto Paper Select] is not enabled.
Multi bypass tray (Tray A)
This section explains the paper tray settings for multi bypass tray (Tray A).
Paper Size
Custom Size, Auto Detect, A3 , A4 , A4 , A5 , A5 , A6 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS ,
B5 JIS , B6 JIS , SRA3 , SRA4 , SRA4 , 310 × 432mm , 226 × 310mm ,
226 × 310mm , 13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19 , 13 × 18 , 123/5 × 191/5 ,
123/5 × 181/2 , 12 × 18 , 11 × 17 , 11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 , 10 × 14 ,
81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 132/5 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/4 × 14 ,
81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 ,
51/2 × 81/2 , 8K , 16K , 16K
Default: [Auto Detect]
Specify the paper size with the number keys when you select [Custom Size]. The paper sizes
that can be used differ depending on the machine's configuration.
285
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• When the LCT is installed:
Vertical: 100.0–305.0 mm (3.94–12.00 inches), Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm (5.50–
19.20 inches)
• When the wide LCT is installed:
Vertical: 100.0–330.2 mm (3.94–13.00 inches), Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm (5.50–
19.20 inches)
• When the Wide LCT and the Banner sheet tray of multi bypass tray (Tray A) are installed:
Horizontal: 139.7–700.0 mm (5.50–27.55 inches)
However, the minimum vertical size of custom paper changes depending on the
horizontal size as shown below:
• Horizontal: 139.7–487.7mm (5.50–19.20 inches); vertical: 100 mm (3.94
inches) or more
• Horizontal: 487.7–700.0mm (19.20–27.55 inches); v ertical: 210 mm (8.27
inches) or more
For details about auto detectable paper sizes, see page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".
Paper Weight
• Paper Weight 1 (52.3–63.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 3 (80.1–105.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 4 (105.1–163.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 5 (163.1–220.0g/m2)
Default: [Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)]
Paper Type
• Plain Paper
• Recycled Paper
• White
• Yellow
• Green
• Blue
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
• Red
286
Changing Tray Paper Settings
• Gray
• Letterhead
• Translucent Paper
• Preprinted Paper
• Bond Paper
• Cardstock
• Transparency
• Envelope
• Prepunched Paper
• Tab Stock
Default: [Plain Paper]
If you select [Tab Stock], you must configure the detailed settings.
Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
Duplex printing is automatically disabled if you select [Translucent Paper], [Transparency],
[Envelope], or [Tab Stock] for [Paper Type].
Apply Auto Paper Select
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
• The lock mark ( ) is displayed next to the paper tray if [Apply Auto Paper Select] is not enabled.
• The maximum weight of paper that can be loaded into the multi bypass tray (Tray A) is 216.0
g/m2.
Interposer Upper and Lower Tray (when the interposer is installed)
This section explains the paper tray settings for the upper and lower trays of the interposer.
Paper Size
Custom Size, Auto Detect, A3 , A4 , A4 , A5 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS , B5 JIS ,
SRA3 , SRA4 , SRA4 , 310 × 432mm , 226 × 310mm , 226 × 310mm ,
13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19 , 13 × 18 , 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 × 181/2 , 12 × 18 ,
11 × 17 , 11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 132/5 ,
81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 ,
287
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
71/4 × 101/2 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 8K , 16K , 16K
Default: [Auto Detect]
You can specify a custom size between 139.7 and 330.2 mm (5.50 and 13.00 inches)
vertically, and between 139.7 and 487.7 mm (5.50 and 19.20 inches) horizontally.
For details about auto detectable paper sizes, see page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".
Paper Weight
• Paper Weight 1 (52.3–63.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 3 (80.1–105.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 4 (105.1–163.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 5 (163.1–220.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 6 (220.1–256.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 7 (256.1–300.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 8 (300.1–350.0g/m2)
Default: [Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)]
Paper Type
• Plain Paper
• Recycled Paper
• White
• Yellow
• Green
• Blue
• Purple
• Ivory
• Orange
• Pink
• Red
• Gray
• Letterhead
• Label Paper
• Translucent Paper
• Preprinted Paper
• Bond Paper
288
Changing Tray Paper Settings
• Cardstock
• Transparency
• Coated: Glossy
• Coated: Matte
• Prepunched Paper
• Tab Stock
Default: [Plain Paper]
If you select [Tab Stock], you must configure the detailed settings.
Perfect Binder Interposer Upper and Lower Tray (when the Perfect Binder Interposer is
installed)
This section explains the paper tray settings for the upper and lower trays of the Perfect Binder
Interposer.
Paper Size
Custom Size, Auto Detect, A3 , B4 JIS , SRA3 , 310 × 432mm , 13 × 191/5 ,
13 × 19 , 13 × 18 , 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 × 181/2 , 12 × 18 , 11 × 17 ,
11 × 15 , 8K
Default: [Auto Detect]
You can specify a custom size between 257.0 and 330.2 mm (10.12 and 13.00 inches)
vertically, and between 364.0 and 487.7 mm (14.34 and 19.20 inches) horizontally.
For details about auto detectable paper sizes, see page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".
Cover/Designation/Slip/Separation Sheet
This section explains the paper tray settings in the [Cover/Designation/Slip/Separation Sheet] menu
under [Tray Paper Settings].
Front Cover (Front Cover Sheet Tray)
You can specify and display the paper tray in which to load front cover sheets.
You can also specify the display time and copying method for duplex copying.
• Tray to Program
• Tray 1
• Tray 2
• Tray 3
• Tray 4
• Tray 5
289
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• Tray 6
• Tray T1
• Tray T2
• Tray T3
• Tray T4
• Tray A
• Intpsr. Upper (when the interposer is installed.)
• Intpsr. Lower (when the interposer is installed.)
Default: Off (Tray is not specified.)
• Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [No]
• Display Time
• At Mode Selected
• Full Time
Default: [At Mode Selected]
• When you select an interposer tray, you cannot change the [Display Time] and [Apply Duplex]
settings.
• When [At Mode Selected] is selected for [Display Time], the [Front Cover] settings only appear
when the front cover sheet function is selected.
• You can specify the [Apply Duplex] settings only when [At Mode Selected] is selected for [Display
Time].
• On the standard application screen, a lock icon ( ) is displayed against the paper tray for which
[Display Time] is set to [Full Time].
Back Cover (Back Cover Sheet Tray)
You can specify and display the paper tray in which to load back cover sheets.
You can also specify the display time and copying method for duplex copying.
• Tray to Program
• Tray 1
• Tray 2
• Tray 3
• Tray 4
290
Changing Tray Paper Settings
• Tray 5
• Tray 6
• Tray T1
• Tray T2
• Tray T3
• Tray T4
• Tray A
• Intpsr. Upper (when the interposer is installed.)
• Intpsr. Lower (when the interposer is installed.)
Default: Off (Tray is not specified.)
• Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [No]
• Display Time
• At Mode Selected
• Full Time
Default: [At Mode Selected]
• When you select an interposer tray, you cannot change the [Display Time] and [Apply Duplex]
settings.
• When [At Mode Selected] is selected for [Display Time], the [Back Cover] settings only appear
when the back cover sheet function is selected.
• You can specify the [Apply Duplex] settings only when [At Mode Selected] is selected for [Display
Time].
• On the standard application screen, a lock icon ( ) is displayed against the paper tray for which
[Display Time] is set to [Full Time].
Slip Sheet (Slip Sheet Tray)
You can specify and display the paper tray in which to load slip sheets.
You can also specify the display time and copying method for duplex copying.
• Tray to Program
• Tray 1
• Tray 2
• Tray 3
291
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• Tray 4
• Tray 5
• Tray 6
• Tray T1
• Tray T2
• Tray T3
• Tray T4
• Tray A
Default: Off (Tray is not specified.)
• Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [No]
• Display Time
• At Mode Selected
• Full Time
Default: [At Mode Selected]
• When [At Mode Selected] is selected for [Display Time], the [Slip Sheet] settings only appear when
the slip sheet function is selected.
• You can specify the [Apply Duplex] settings only when [At Mode Selected] is selected for [Display
Time].
• On the standard application screen, a lock icon (
[Display Time] is set to [Full Time].
) is displayed against the paper tray for which
Sep. Sheet (Separation Sheet Tray)
You can specify and display the paper tray in which to load separation sheets.
You can also specify the display time.
• Tray to Program
• Tray 1
• Tray 2
• Tray 3
• Tray 4
• Tray 5
• Tray 6
292
Changing Tray Paper Settings
• Tray T1
• Tray T2
• Tray T3
• Tray T4
• Tray A
• Intpsr. Upper (when the interposer is installed.)
• Intpsr. Lower (when the interposer is installed.)
Default: Off (Tray is not specified.)
• Display Time
• At Mode Selected
• Full Time
Default: [At Mode Selected]
• When you select an interposer tray, you cannot change the [Display Time] setting.
• When [At Mode Selected] is selected for [Display Time], the [Sep. Sheet] settings only appear
when the separation sheet function is selected.
• On the standard application screen, a lock icon ( ) is displayed against the paper tray for which
[Display Time] is set to [Full Time].
Desig. Sheet 1–11 (Designation Sheet 1–11 Tray)
You can specify and display the paper tray in which to load designation sheets.
You can also specify the display time and copying method for duplex copying.
• Tray to Program
• Tray 1
• Tray 2
• Tray 3
• Tray 4
• Tray 5
• Tray 6
• Tray T1
• Tray T2
• Tray T3
• Tray T4
• Tray A
• Intpsr. Upper (when the interposer is installed.)
293
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• Intpsr. Lower (when the interposer is installed.)
Default: Off (Tray is not specified.)
• Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [No]
• Display Time
• At Mode Selected
• Full Time
Default: [At Mode Selected]
• When you select an interposer tray, you cannot change the [Display Time] and [Apply Duplex]
settings.
• When [At Mode Selected] is selected for [Display Time], the [Desig. Sheet 1–11] settings only
appear when the designation sheet function is selected.
• You can specify the [Apply Duplex] settings only when [At Mode Selected] is selected for [Display
Time].
• On the standard application screen, a lock icon (
[Display Time] is set to [Full Time].
) is displayed against the paper tray for which
Using the Ring Binder and the High Capacity Stacker
You can attach the ring binder and the high capacity stacker on Type 2, 3, 4, or 5 machines only.
Using the ring binder
Removing bound booklets from the ring binder tray
• When removing bound booklets, keep your hands clear of the paper exit. You might trap
your fingers if you do not.
294
Changing Tray Paper Settings
1. Slightly lift the bound booklet and remove it, taking care not to scratch the tray with
the binding comb.
1
2
EAR159
• When removing bound booklets from the ring binder tray, be careful not to catch the rings on
the machine.
Inserting pages into an existing ring bound booklet
• When binding paper manually with the ring opener, take care not to trap or injure fingers.
You can use the ring stand and ring opener to insert new pages into the existing ring bound
booklets. Use these devices when you need to insert covers, replace existing pages, or add new
pages.
1
2
CET031
1. Ring stand
2. Ring opener
1. Punch holes into the pages that you want to insert into the ring bound booklet.
295
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
2. With the ring bound booklet closed, place the ring comb on the ring stand so that
each of the rings is in a groove on the stand.
CET032
3. Insert the spine of the ring comb into the fixing lug of the ring stand. Gently press
down on the ring comb to lock it into place.
CET033
4. Open the bound booklet to where you want to insert the new pages, and then place
one of your hands on the ring stand.
CET034
296
Changing Tray Paper Settings
5. Insert the sharp end of the ring opener into one end of the ring comb, and then push
it all the way through the ring comb.
CET035
The rings of the comb will open as you push the ring opener through them.
6. Insert the new pages.
7. Holding the sides of the ring opener, carefully press down the opened rings.
To close a 50-sheet type binding ring comb, use the side of the ring opener that has the
smaller grooves.
To close a 100-sheet type binding ring comb, use the side of the ring opener that has the
larger grooves.
CET036
The rings of the comb will close as you press down with the ring opener.
8. Remove the ring comb from the ring stand.
• When using the ring opener, take care to avoid injuring self or others and damaging nearby
equipment.
297
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Using the high capacity stacker
Stacker control panel
The high capacity stacker has a control panel that you can use to lower the stacker tray and
confirm the status of the high capacity stacker.
1
2
4
3
5
7
6
CGH007
1. Tray Moving Indicator
This flashes blue when the stacker tray is moving up or down. When the stacker tray has moved all the
way up and is in the standby state, the indicator turns off. When the stacker tray has moved all the way
down, the indicator lights up blue.
2. Lower Tray Button
Press this button to lower the tray. The tray cannot move if the stacker front cover is open.
3. Paper Jam Button
This is lit red when a paper jam occurs. Pressing this button lowers the stacker tray into the paper
removal position.
4. Cover of the Stacker Control Panel
5. Stacker Collecting Indicator
This flashes blue when the stacker tray is collecting output paper.
6. Stacker Full Indicator
This is lit red when the stacker tray is full.
7. Error Indicator
This is lit to indicate one or more of the following errors:
• The handcart is not properly set.
• The stacker front cover is open.
• Jammed paper is still inside the high capacity stacker.
Removing paper
• Use the stacker cart for transporting paper from the high capacity stacker. Do not use the
stacker cart for any other purpose.
298
Changing Tray Paper Settings
• Do not attempt to get inside the high capacity stacker.
• The paper press might leave a mark on the top of the paper stack. To prevent this, put several
sheets of unwanted paper or a protective sheet between the paper press and the paper stack.
1. Open the cover of the stacker control panel, and then press the lower tray button.
CET019
To stop the lowering stacker tray, press the lower tray button again.
To resume lowering the tray, open and close the stacker front cover, and then press the lower
tray button again after the tray has risen completely.
When the stacker tray is fully lowered, the tray moving indicator stops flashing and remains lit.
2. Open the stacker front cover.
DER105
299
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
3. Carefully pull out the stacker cart.
DER106
Take care not to let the paper stack topple.
4. Rest the paper press on top of the paper stack.
CET022
5. Pull the lever on the paper press toward you.
CET023
6. Transport the paper to where it is required, and then unload the stacker cart.
300
Changing Tray Paper Settings
7. Return the paper press to its original position.
CET024
8. Put the stacker cart back inside the high capacity stacker.
DER107
Be careful to push the stacker cart in straight, not at an angle.
DER108
9. Close the stacker front cover.
The stacker tray begins elevating automatically and the tray moving indicator begins flashing.
When the tray moving indicator stops flashing, the tray is fully elevated.
• Before moving the high capacity stacker, be sure to take the stacker cart out of the high
capacity stacker.
301
6. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
302
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
This section explains Adjustment Settings for Operators and how to specify them.
How to Use the [Adjustment Settings for
Operators] Screen
This section explains how to use the Adjustment Settings for Operators.
1
2
5
3
6
4
EAR301
1. [-]
Press this key to collapse the hierarchical display of the adjustment items and display the group names of those
items.
2. [Reset]
Press this key to reset the settings/modifications currently configured. You cannot reset he settings/
modifications after pressing [Apply].
3. [Apply]
Press this key to apply the settings/modifications.
4. [To Print Screen]
Press this key to display the print screen. You can use this screen to view the changes you have made.
5. Adjustment items
Adjustment items are displayed in this area. When you select an item, its configuration screen will then open.
6. Configuration screen
Configure or modify the settings of the adjustment item you select.
303
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Accessing the Adjustment Settings for
Operators
1. Press [Adjustment Settings for Operators] at the upper left of the screen.
2. Select and change adjustment settings.
The method for changing the selected adjustment setting depends on the setting that you want to
change. For details, see page 304 "Features of the Displayed Items and Setting Operations".
3. Press [Apply].
4. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
Features of the Displayed Items and Setting Operations
The following operations are available for each adjustment item:
• Value setting
• Item setting
• Executing
• Display only
Value setting
Press [ ] or [ ] to increase or decrease the value respectively, or use the numeric keypad to enter
the value.
For some settings, move the slider right or left to increase or decrease the setting value.
304
Accessing the Adjustment Settings for Operators
A numeric keypad appears to the left when you press the input box. Use the keypad to enter a
value.
• [×]: Press to delete the entered value character by character.
• [Clear]: Clear the entered value.
• [+/-]: Change the sign of the entered value from + (positive) to - (negative) and vice versa.
• [Enter]: Confirm the entered value.
For some items, you can select a value from the pull-down list that appears when you press the
input box. Select a value from the list.
Item setting
Select the item you require.
Executing
Press [Execute] to perform a selected function.
305
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Display Only
You can check the setting of the selected item.
Printing with Adjusted Settings
How the adjusted settings are applied to print jobs varies depending on the adjusted setting.
• Settings adjustable for each paper tray
• Settings adjustable for each paper size
Settings adjustable for each paper weight
These are settings adjustable for each paper weight.
Print jobs are processed with the adjusted settings when printing paper of the paper weight with the
applied setting.
Settings adjustable for each paper size
These are settings adjustable for each paper size.
Print jobs are processed with the adjusted settings when printing with a paper size that has the
applied settings.
306
Accessing the Adjustment Settings for Operators
• For details about selecting the paper tray and paper size for printing, see the manuals for the
related functions.
307
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Menu Items and Functions
Main Unit: Image Position
For details about the following items, see page 314 "Main Unit: Image Position".
No.
Item
0101
Image Position: With Feed
Adjust the horizontal position of the print image.
0106
Select Test Pattern for
Image Position Adjustment
Select the test image for adjusting the image position.
ADF Double Feed
Detection
Specify whether or not to detect multiple feeding of
originals loaded in the Auto Document Feeder(ADF).
0108
Description
This function is available for Type 1, 2, and 3 machines.
This function is available for Type 1, 2, and 3 machines.
Main Unit: Image Quality
For details about the following items, see page 316 "Main Unit: Image Quality".
No.
Item
Description
0202
Execute Image Quality
Adjustment
Adjust the toner adhesion amount to the intermediate
transfer belt during the image density adjustment.
0208
Avoid Paper Transfer
Shock Jitter: Feed Interval
Specify whether or not to enable the mode to reduce the
jitter*1 produced when paper enters the paper transfer
roller.
*1 The jitter occurs when the leading or trailing edge of paper that passes through the paper transfer unit is
transmitted to the drum unit via the intermediate transfer belt, causing banding.
Main Unit: Paper Feed/ Output
For details about the following items, see page 317 "Main Unit: Paper Feed/ Output".
No.
308
Item
Description
0301
Double Feed Detection
Specify whether or not to detect double feeding of
paper.
0302
When Double Feed is
Detected
Specify how the machine behaves when it detects a
double feed.
0304
Skew Detection
Specify whether or not to detect paper skew.
Menu Items and Functions
No.
Item
0310
Correct Output Paper Curl
Description
Specify the method for straightening curled sheets.
Main Unit: Maintenance
For details about the following items, see page 320 "Main Unit: Maintenance".
No.
Item
Description
0502
Execute Photoconductor
Refreshing
Remove dust on the drum surface.
0517
Temperature / Humidity
Inside
Display the internal temperature and humidity.
0518
Temperature / Humidity
Outside
Display the external temperature and humidity.
0519
Display Banner for
Conditions Outside
Optimal Range
Specify whether or not to display the banner to indicate
conditions outside the recommended operating
environment.
0522
Execute Charger Cleaning
Clean the charge unit.
0523
Switch Print Screen
Set the function displayed when pressing [To Print
Screen].
Finishing:Finisher 1
For details about the following items, see page 322 "Finishing:Finisher 1".
No.
Item
Description
0601
Staple Position for Booklet
Adjust the horizontal position of the booklet staples when
using Booklet Finisher SR5120.
0602
Folding Position for Booklet
Adjust the horizontal position of the folding when using
Booklet Finisher SR5120.
0603
Staple Position: Across
Feed 1
Adjust the vertical position of the staple (applied at an
edge) when using Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher
SR5120.
0604
Staple Position: Across
Feed 2
Adjust the vertical distance (up and down) between the
staples (dual) when using Finisher SR5110 or Booklet
Finisher SR5120.
309
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
No.
Item
Description
0605
Staple Position: With Feed
Adjust the horizontal position of the staples when using
Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120.
0606
Punch Position: Across
Feed
Adjust the vertical position of the punch holes when using
Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120.
0607
Punch Position: With Feed
Adjust the horizontal position of the punch holes when
using Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120.
0609
Set Number of Folds for
Booklet
Specify the number of booklet folds to be performed
when using Booklet Finisher SR5120.
0636
Accuracy Priority for
Stapling
Set the accuracy priority for stapling.
0637
Accuracy Priority for
Booklet
Set the accuracy priority for a booklet.
Finishing: Finisher 2
For details about the following items, see page 331 "Finishing:Finisher 2".
No.
310
Item
Description
0701
Paper Alignment for
Stapling: Across Feed
Adjust the width of the Staple Jogger*1 when using the
staple function on Finisher SR5090 or Booklet Finisher
SR5100.
0702
Paper Alignment for
Booklet: Across Feed
Adjust the width of the Staple Jogger*1 when using
Booklet Finisher SR5090.
0703
Staple Position
Adjust the staple positions (front and back parallel, and
back slant) with across feed for each specified paper
size.
0704
Staple Position for Booklet
Adjust the horizontal position of the booklet staples when
using Booklet Finisher SR5090.
0705
Folding Position for Booklet Adjust the horizontal position of the folding when using
Booklet Finisher SR5090.
0706
Folding Position for
Booklet: By Number of
Sheets
Adjust the folding position for a booklet by specified
number of sheets with feed for each specified paper size.
Menu Items and Functions
No.
Item
Description
0707
Number of Sheets Align for Specify the number of sheets to align for stapling at one
Stapling
time.
0708
Number of Sheets Align for Adjust the maximum number of prestack sheets for a
Booklet
booklet for each specified paper size.
*1 Guide for alignment of printed paper. Printed paper is centered by the right and left guides.
Finishing: Fold
For details about the following items, see page 340 "Finishing: Fold".
No.
Item
Description
0801
Z-fold Position 1
Adjust the fold position of the end segment (S) when
using the fold unit.
0802
Z-fold Position 2
Adjust the overall fold size (L) of the Z-foldout sheets
when using the fold unit.
0803
Half Fold Position: 1 sheet
Fold
Adjust the edge width of the half folded sheets (1 sheet
fold) when using the fold unit.
0804
Half Fold Position: Multisheet Fold
Adjust the edge width of the half folded sheets (multisheet fold) when using the fold unit.
0805
Letter Fold-out Position 1: 1 Adjust the fold position of the bottom segment (S2) of
sheet Fold
letter foldout sheets (1 sheet fold) when using the fold
unit.
0806
Letter Fold-out Position 1:
Multi-sheet Fold
0807
Letter Fold-out Position 2: 1 Adjust the overall fold size (L) of letter foldout sheets (1
sheet Fold
sheet fold) when using the fold unit.
0808
Letter Fold-out Position 2:
Multi-sheet Fold
Adjust the overall fold size of letter foldout sheets (multisheet fold) when using the fold unit. This setting will be
applied if the multi-sheet fold function is enabled.
0809
Letter Fold-in Position 1: 1
sheet Fold
Adjust the fold position of the bottom segment (S) of letter
fold-in sheets (1 sheet fold) when using the fold unit.
Adjust the fold position of the bottom segment of letter
foldout sheets (multi-sheet fold) when using the fold unit.
This setting will be applied if the multi-sheet fold function
is enabled.
311
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
No.
Item
Description
0810
Letter Fold-in Position 1:
Multi-sheet Fold
Adjust the fold position of the bottom segment of letter
fold-in sheets (multi-sheet fold) when using the fold unit.
0811
Letter Fold-in Position 2: 1
sheet Fold
Adjust the fold size of letter fold-in sheets (1 sheet fold)
when using the fold unit.
0812
Letter Fold-in Position 2:
Multi-sheet Fold
Adjust the fold size when Inside 3 Folding is executed
(Overlap Folding) when using the fold unit.
0813
Double Parallel Fold
Position 1
Adjust the fold position (S1) of the bottom segment 1 of
double parallel-folded sheets when using the fold unit.
0814
Double Parallel Fold
Position 2
Adjust the fold position (S2) of the bottom segment 2 of
double parallel-folded sheets when using the fold unit.
0815
Gate Fold Position 1
Adjust the fold position (S1) of the bottom segment 1 of
gatefold sheets when using the fold unit.
0816
Gate Fold Position 2
Adjust the fold position (S2) of the bottom segment 2 of
gatefold sheets when using the fold unit.
0817
Gate Fold Position 3
Adjust the fold position (S3) of the bottom segment 3 of
gatefold sheets when using the fold unit.
Finishing: Perfect Binder
For details about the following items, see page 356 "Finishing: Perfect Binder".
No.
Item
Description
0901
Perf Bind Cvr Sht Posit:
With Feed
Adjust the horizontal alignment of the cover sheet
position when performing perfect binding.
0902
Perf Bind Cvr Sht Posit:
Across Feed
Adjust the vertical alignment of the cover sheet position
when performing perfect binding.
0903
Perfect Binding Finishing
Angle
Square the top, bottom, and outside edges when
trimming a deck of paper.
0904
Applying Binding Glue
Adjust the amount of binding glue for perfect binding.
Finishing: Stacker
For details about the following items, see page 358 "Finishing:Stacker".
312
Menu Items and Functions
No.
1007
Item
Maximum Stack Quantity
in Stacker Tray
Description
Set the maximum number of sheets for the stacker tray.
Finishing: Interposer
For details about the following items, see page 359 "Finishing: Interposer".
No.
1101
Item
Interposer Double Feed
Detection
Description
Set whether to detect double feed.
313
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Values
Main Unit: Image Position
0101 Image Position: With Feed
Adjust the horizontal position of the print image.
You cannot individually adjust the image position on sides 1 and 2.
Side 1
Paper feed direction
Top
Right
(Trailing Edge)
Left
(Leading Edge)
Bottom
DGH005
Press [+] to shift the image to the right (trailing edge).
Press [−] to shift the image the left (leading edge).
Side 2
Paper feed direction
Top
Right
(Trailing Edge)
Left
(Leading Edge)
Bottom
CWY006
Press [+] to shift the image to the left (trailing edge).
Press [−] to shift the image to the right (leading edge).
314
Setting Values
Setting Items
Paper Weight 0
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
3.0
-3.0
0.1
mm
Paper Weight 1
Paper Weight 2
Paper Weight 3
Paper Weight 4
Paper Weight 5
Paper Weight 6
Paper Weight 7
Paper Weight 8
• If sheets are delivered face down, turn them over horizontally and check the image position.
• If the leading-edge margin on Side 1 of the paper is too narrow, paper jams may occur.
• If the trailing-edge margin on Side 1 of the paper is too narrow, paper jams may occur when
printing on the back side of paper during duplex printing.
Leading-edge margin
Trailing-edge margin
Paper feed direction
CWY015
• This setting is not effective for paper fed from paper trays with custom paper presets. For such
paper, the value specified in [Image Position: With Feed: Side 1], [Image Position: With Feed: Side
2] in "Advanced Settings" takes precedence.
0106 Select Test Pattern for Image Position Adjustment
This function is available for Type1, Type2 and Type3.
Select the test image for adjusting the image position.
315
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
If [Copy Image] is selected, the image scanned using the Auto Document Feeder (ADF) or exposure
glass is printed.
If [Frame Image] is selected, stripe test patterns are printed.
Setting Items
Test Pattern
Values
Copy Image
Default Value
Copy Image
Frame Image
0108 ADF Double Feed Detection
This function is available for Type1, Type2 and Type3.
Specify whether or not to detect multiple feeding of originals loaded in the Auto Document Feeder
(ADF).
If [On] is selected, the machine stops printing and displays a message reporting a paper jam when it
detects multiple feeding. The machine may erroneously detect double feeding when you use creased,
scratched or torn originals, originals with holes, perforated originals, or originals with sticky notes or
tape affixed. In such a case, select [Off] to prevent erroneous detection.
Setting Items
Setting
Values
[On]
Default Value
[On]
[Off]
Main Unit: Image Quality
0202 Execute Image Quality Adjustment
Execute image density control manually.
The machine adjusts the image density. This operation takes about 30 seconds during which a message
appears on the control panel. Do not pull out the drawer while the message is being displayed.
If the density does not change after applying this function several times, contact your sales or service
representative.
Setting Items
Adjust Image Density
316
Values
Press [OK] to apply the setting.
Setting Values
• The machine executes automatic image density adjustment after a set interval or after printing a
specified number of sheets. However, you can also manually initiate automatic image density
adjustment whenever you want.
0208 Avoid Paper Transfer Shock Jitter: Feed Interval
Specify whether or not to enable the mode to reduce the jitter*1 produced when paper enters the paper
transfer roller.
If "1" is selected, the machine adjusts the interval between sheets to reduce jitter. However, the
throughput may be reduced when you use paper larger than A4 or 81/2 × 14 . If this happens, turn
this setting off to improve the throughput.
Setting Items
Setting
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0
1
0
1
–
*1 The jitter occurs when the leading or trailing edge of paper that passes through the paper transfer unit is
transmitted to the drum unit via the intermediate transfer belt, causing banding.
• Jitter does not occur with A4 , 81/2 × 14 or smaller paper.
• This setting is not effective for paper fed from paper trays with custom paper presets. For such
paper, the value specified in [Avoid Paper Transfer Shock Jitter: Feed Interval] in "Advanced
Settings" takes precedence.
Main Unit: Paper Feed/ Output
0301 Double Feed Detection
Specify whether or not to detect double feeding of paper.
If [On] is selected, the machine stops when it detects paper double feeding, so as to prevent mixing of
unprinted paper.
The machine may not correctly detect double feeding when using special paper (two-ply paper such as
release paper). In such a case, select [Off].
317
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Items
Values
Tray 1
Off
Tray 2
On
Default Value
On
Tray 3
Tray 4
Tray 5
Tray 6
Tray A
Tray T1
Tray T2
Tray T3
Tray T4
• This setting is not effective for paper fed from paper trays with custom paper presets. For such
paper, the value specified in [Double Feed Detection] in "Advanced Settings" takes precedence.
0302 When Double Feed is Detected
Specify how the machine behaves when it detects a double feed.
If [Suspended] is selected, the machine, on detecting a double feed, stops printing and displays a paper
misfeed message.
If [Suspended After Paper Diversion] is selected, the machine stops printing if a double feed is detected,
then delivers the sheets to the paper trap inside the machine at the bottom left, and displays a paper
misfeed message.
This setting is enabled only if [Double Feed Detection] is set to [On].
Setting Items
Setting
Values
Suspended
Suspended After Paper
Diversion
0304 Skew Detection
Specify whether or not to detect paper skew.
318
Default Value
Suspended After Paper
Diversion
Setting Values
If the machine detects a paper skew when [On] is selected, the machine will stop printing and display a
message reporting a paper jam.
The machine may erroneously detect paper skew when using dark paper or paper printed to its edges.
In such a case, select [Off].
Setting Items
Values
Tray 1
Off
Tray 2
On
Default Value
On
Tray 3
Tray 4
Tray 5
Tray 6
Tray A
2 Sided
Tray T1
Tray T2
Tray T3
Tray T4
• This setting is not effective for paper fed from paper trays with custom paper presets. For such
paper, the value specified in [Skew Detection] in "Advanced Settings" takes precedence.
0310 Correct Output Paper Curl
Specify the method for straightening curled sheets.
Select the method according to the direction and degree of curl.
If the paper is curled face up, select "U Curl Correction Level". If it is curled face down, select "П Curl
Correction Level". Depending on how much the paper is curled, specify the degree of correction by
selecting "Weak" or "Strong".
319
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Items
Values
Tray 1
U Curl Correction Level: Off
Tray 2
U Curl Correction Level: Small
Tray 3
U Curl Correction Level: Large
Tray 4
П Curl Correction Level: Off
Tray 5
П Curl Correction Level: Small
Tray 6
П Curl Correction Level: Large
Default Value
U Curl Correction Level: Off
Tray A
Tray T1
Tray T2
Tray T3
Tray T4
Main Unit: Maintenance
0502 Execute Photoconductor Refreshing
Remove dust on the drum surface.
This operation takes about 4 minutes. Do not open the front covers during the operation.
Setting Items
Photoconductor Refreshing
Values
Press [OK] to apply the setting(s).
0517 Temperature / Humidity Inside
Display the internal temperature and humidity.
If your service representative requests it, report this information.
Setting Items
Temperature
Humidity
320
Values
Value display only.
Setting Values
0518 Temperature / Humidity Outside
Display the external temperature and humidity.
If your service representative requests it, report this information.
Setting Items
Temperature
Values
Value display only.
Humidity
0519 Display Banner for Conditions Outside Optimal Range
Specify whether or not to display the banner to indicate conditions outside the recommended operating
environment.
Specify whether or not to display the banner when using the machine in conditions outside the
recommended operating environment.
Setting Items
Values
High Temperature/Humidity
Off
Low Temperature/Humidity
On
Default Value
On
0522 Execute Charger Cleaning
Clean the charge unit.
If the printed copies have vertical creases, clean the charge unit. This may reduce the problem.
Do not open any covers during the operation.
Setting Items
Charger Cleaning
Values
Press [OK].
0523 Switch Print Screen
Set the function displayed when pressing [To Print Screen].
Setting Items
Setting
Values
Copier
Default Value
Copier
Printer
321
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Finishing:Finisher 1
0601 Staple Position for Booklet
Adjust the horizontal position of the booklet staples when using Booklet Finisher SR5120.
Press [ ] to move the position left, or press [ ] to move it right on the open booklet.
Paper feed direction
CWY016
322
Setting Values
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
1.0
-1.0
0.1
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
SRA3 SEF
SRA4 SEF
310 × 432mm SEF
226 × 310mm SEF
13 × 191/5 SEF
13 × 19 SEF
13 × 18 SEF
123/5 × 191/5 SEF
123/5 × 181/2 SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 132/5 SEF
81/2 × 131/2 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0602 Folding Position for Booklet
Adjust the horizontal position of the folding when using Booklet Finisher SR5120.
Press [ ] to move the position left or press [ ] to move it right on the open booklet.
323
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Folding position
Paper feed direction
CWY017
Setting Items
A3 SEF
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
SRA3 SEF
SRA4 SEF
310 × 432mm SEF
226 × 310mm SEF
13 × 191/5 SEF
13 × 19 SEF
13 × 18 SEF
123/5 × 191/5 SEF
123/5 × 181/2 SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 132/5 SEF
81/2 × 131/2 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
Other Paper Sizes
324
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
1.0
-1.0
0.1
mm
Setting Values
0603 Staple Position: Across Feed 1
Adjust the vertical position of the staple (applied at an edge) when using Finisher SR5110 or Booklet
Finisher SR5120.
Press [ ] to move the stapling position away from the side edge of the sheet or [ ] to move it toward the
edge.
Trailing
edge
Leading
edge
Paper feed direction
DFZ001
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
2.0
-2.0
0.1
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 LEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS LEF
B5 JIS SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 132/5 SEF
81/2 × 131/2 SEF
81/2 × 11 LEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
16K LEF
16K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
325
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
0604 Staple Position: Across Feed 2
Adjust the vertical distance (up and down) between the staples (dual) when using Finisher SR5110 or
Booklet Finisher SR5120.
Press [ ] to move the two stapling positions away from the center and each other or [ ] to move them
toward each other.
Leading
edge
Trailing
edge
Paper feed direction
DFZ002
326
Setting Values
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
115
-14.5
0.5
mm
B4 JIS SEF
75
A4 LEF
115
A4 SEF
28
B5 JIS LEF
75
B5 JIS SEF
0
11 × 17 SEF
98
81/2 × 14 SEF
34
81/
2
× 132/
5 SEF
81/2 × 131/2 SEF
81/2 × 11 LEF
98
81/2 × 11 SEF
34
8K SEF
85
16K LEF
16K SEF
12
Other Paper Sizes
115
0605 Staple Position: With Feed
Adjust the horizontal position of the staples when using Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120.
Press [ ] to move the stapling position away from the trailing edge of the sheet or [ ] to move it toward
the edge.
327
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Leading
edge
Trailing
edge
Paper feed direction
DFZ003
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
2.0
-2.0
0.1
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 LEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS LEF
B5 JIS SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 132/5 SEF
81/2 × 131/2 SEF
81/2 × 11 LEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
16K LEF
16K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0606 Punch Position: Across Feed
Adjust the vertical position of the punch holes when using Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120.
Press [ ] to move the position forward (up), or [ ] to move it backward (down).
328
Setting Values
2 Holes Top
Paper feed direction
2 Holes Left
Paper feed direction
CVK007
Setting Items
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
2.0
-2.0
0.5
mm
2 Holes JP / EU
3 Holes US
4 Holes EU
4 Holes NE
2 Holes US
0607 Punch Position: With Feed
Adjust the horizontal position of the punch holes when using Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher
SR5120.
Press [ ] to move the position toward the top edge (left) relative to the paper feed direction, or [ ] to
move it toward the bottom edge (right).
2 Holes Top
Paper feed direction
2 Holes Left
Paper feed direction
CVK008
329
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Items
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.5
mm
2 Holes JP / EU
3 Holes US
4 Holes EU
4 Holes NE
2 Holes US
0609 Set Number of Folds for Booklet
Specify the number of booklet folds to be performed when using Booklet Finisher SR5120.
You can adjust the paper folding strength by changing the number of folds per the booklet.
When you select "0", the default value, the finisher folds the booklet according to the number of sheets
in the booklet, as shown below.
• 1–6 sheets: 1 time
• 7–10 sheets: 2 times
• 11–30 sheets: 6 times
The value set here is added to the default values, which are 1, 2, and 3. Set a negative value to reduce
the number of times the finisher folds booklets. Set -1, -2, or -3 to not fold booklets that have 1 to 13
sheets, 14 to 15 sheets, or 16 to 25 sheets, respectively.
Setting Items
Number of Folds for Booklet
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0
6
-6
1
times
0636 Accuracy Priority for Stapling
Set the accuracy priority for stapling.
Setting Items
Set
Values
Speed Priority
Accuracy Priority
0637 Accuracy Priority for Booklet
Set the accuracy priority for a booklet.
330
Default Value
Speed Priority
Setting Values
Setting Items
Values
Set
Default Value
Speed Priority
Speed Priority
Accuracy Priority
Finishing:Finisher 2
0701 Paper Alignment for Stapling: Across Feed
Adjust the width of the Staple Jogger*1 when using the staple function on Finisher SR5090 or Booklet
Finisher SR5100.
Use the function to reduce the dispersion of paper orientation at a right angle due to paper size,
thickness, curl and so on.
Press [ ] or [ ] to increase or decrease the width.
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
1.5
-1.5
0.5
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
A4 LEF
B5 JIS SEF
B5 JIS LEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 132/5 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
81/2 × 11 LEF
8K SEF
16K SEF
16K LEF
Other Paper Sizes
*1 A guide for aligning output sheets when using the stapling function. The guide is located inside the
finisher.
331
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
0702 Paper Alignment for Booklet: Across Feed
Adjust the width of the Staple Jogger*1 when using Booklet Finisher SR5100.
Use the function to reduce the dispersion of paper orientation at a right angle due to paper size,
thickness, curl and so on.
Press [ ] or [ ] to increase or decrease the width.
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
1.5
-1.5
0.5
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 132/5 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
12 × 18 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
*1 A guide for aligning output sheets when using the stapling function. The guide is located inside the
finisher.
0703 Staple Position
Adjust the vertical position of the staple (applied at an edge) when using the Finisher SR5090 or Booklet
Finisher SR5100.
Press [ ] to move the stapling position away from the side edge of the sheet or [ ] to move it toward the
edge.
332
Setting Values
Leading
edge
Trailing
edge
Paper feed direction
CZC212
Adjust the vertical position of the staples (dual) when using the Finisher SR5090 or Booklet Finisher
SR5100.
Press [ ] to move the two stapling positions away from the center and each other or [ ] to move them
toward each other.
Leading
edge
Trailing
edge
Paper feed direction
CZC215
333
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
3.5
-3.5
0.5
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
A4 LEF
B5 JIS SEF
B5 JIS LEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 132/5 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
81/2 × 11 LEF
8K SEF
16K SEF
16K LEF
Other Paper Sizes
0704 Staple Position for Booklet
Adjust the horizontal position of the booklet staples when using Booklet Finisher SR5100.
Press [ ] to move the position left, or press [ ] to move it right on the open booklet.
Paper feed direction
CWY016
334
Setting Values
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
3.0
-3.0
0.2
mm
12 × 18 SEF
1.8
-1.8
8K SEF
3.0
-3.0
Other Paper Sizes
1.8
-1.8
Setting Items
A3 SEF
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 132/5 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
0705 Folding Position for Booklet
Adjust the horizontal position of the folding when using Booklet Finisher SR5100.
Press [ ] to move the position left or press [ ] to move it right on the open booklet.
Folding position
Paper feed direction
CWY017
335
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
3.0
-3.0
0.2
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 132/5 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
12 × 18 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0706 Folding Position for Booklet: By Number of Sheets
Adjust the folding position. In left and right spread state, move to right with [ ] and left with [ ].
336
Setting Values
Setting Items
A3 SEF: 1-5 Sheets
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
3.0
-3.0
0.2
mm
A3 SEF: 6-10 Sheets
A3 SEF: 11-15 Sheets
A3 SEF: 16 Sheets or More
B4 SEF: 1-5 Sheets
B4 SEF: 6-10 Sheets
B4 SEF: 11-15 Sheets
B4 SEF: 16 Sheets or More
A4 SEF: 1-5 Sheets
A4 SEF: 6-10 Sheets
A4 SEF: 11-15 Sheets
A4 SEF: 16 Sheets or More
B5 SEF: 1-5 Sheets
B5 SEF: 6-10 Sheets
B5 SEF: 11-15 Sheets
B5 SEF: 16 Sheets or More
11 × 17 SEF: 1-5 Sheets
11 × 17 SEF: 6-10 Sheets
11 × 17 SEF: 11-15 Sheets
11 × 17 SEF: 16 Sheets or More
337
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Items
81/2 × 14 SEF: 1-5 Sheets
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0
3.0
-3.0
0.2
mm
81/2 × 14 SEF: 6-10 Sheets
81/2 × 14 SEF: 11-15 Sheets
81/2 × 14 SEF: 16 Sheets or More
81/2 × 132/5 SEF: 1-5 Sheets
81/2 × 132/5 SEF: 6-10 Sheets
81/2 × 132/5 SEF: 11-15 Sheets
81/2 × 132/5 SEF: 16 Sheets or More
81/2 × 11 SEF: 1-5 Sheets
81/2 × 11 SEF: 6-10 Sheets
81/2 × 11 SEF: 11-15 Sheets
81/2 × 11 SEF: 16 Sheets or More
12 × 18 SEF: 1-5 Sheets
12 × 18 SEF: 6-10 Sheets
12 × 18 SEF: 11-15 Sheets
12 × 18 SEF: 16 Sheets or More
8K SEF: 1-5 Sheets
8K SEF: 6-10 Sheets
8K SEF: 11-15 Sheets
8K SEF: 16 Sheets or More
Other Paper Sizes: 1-5 Sheets
Other Paper Sizes: 6-10 Sheets
Other Paper Sizes: 11-15 Sheets
Other Paper Sizes: 16 Sheets or More
0707 Number of Sheets Align for Stapling
Specify the number of sheets to align for stapling at one time.
If too many sheets are delivered to the shift unit, the stacked sheets may not be correctly aligned due to
the paper type and paper condition.
If that happens, adjust the setting to the optimal value for the paper you are using.
When the number is less, it takes more time to align and productivity may fall.
338
Setting Values
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0
0
-1
1
sheet
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
A4 LEF
B5 JIS SEF
B5 JIS LEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
81/2 × 11 LEF
8K SEF
16K SEF
16K LEF
Other Paper Sizes
0708 Number of Sheets Align for Booklet
Adjust the maximum number of prestack sheets for a booklet for each specified paper size.
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0
0
-2
1
sheet
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 132/5 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
12 × 18 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
339
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Finishing: Fold
0801 Z-fold Position 1
Adjust the fold position of the end segment (S) when using the fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the
the trailing edge.
mark indicates
L
S
Paper feed direction
DWP561
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0802 Z-fold Position 2
Adjust the overall fold size (L) of the Z-foldout sheets when using the fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (L).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the
the trailing edge.
340
mark indicates
Setting Values
L
S
Paper feed direction
DWP561
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0803 Half Fold Position: 1 sheet Fold
Adjust the edge width of the half folded sheets (1 sheet fold) when using the fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S).
This setting will be applied if the single-sheet fold function is enabled.
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the
the trailing edge.
mark indicates
341
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
L1
S
Paper feed direction
DWP562
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
SRA3 SEF
SRA4 SEF
310 × 432mm SEF
226 × 310mm SEF
13 × 191/5 SEF
13 × 19 SEF
13 × 18 SEF
123/5 × 191/5 SEF
123/5 × 181/2 SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0804 Half Fold Position: Multi-sheet Fold
Adjust the edge width of the half folded sheets (multi-sheet fold) when using the fold unit.
342
Setting Values
This setting will be applied if the multi-sheet fold function is enabled.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the
the trailing edge.
L1
mark indicates
S
Paper feed direction
CWY007
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
SRA3 SEF
SRA4 SEF
310 × 432mm SEF
226 × 310mm SEF
13 × 191/5 SEF
13 × 19 SEF
13 × 18 SEF
123/5 × 191/5 SEF
123/5 × 181/2 SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
343
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
0805 Letter Fold-out Position 1: 1 sheet Fold
Adjust the fold position of the bottom segment (S2) of letter foldout sheets (1 sheet fold) when using the
fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S2).
This setting will be applied if the single-sheet fold function is enabled.
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the
the trailing edge.
mark indicates
S2
L
Paper feed direction
DWP563
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B5 JIS SEF
0.0
3.0
-3.0
0.2
mm
12 × 18 SEF
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
Setting Items
A3 SEF
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0806 Letter Fold-out Position 1: Multi-sheet Fold
Adjust the fold position of the bottom segment of letter foldout sheets (multi-sheet fold) when using the
fold unit. This setting will be applied if the multi-sheet fold function is enabled.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S2).
344
Setting Values
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the
the trailing edge.
mark indicates
S2
L
Paper feed direction
CWY008
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B5 JIS SEF
0.0
3.0
-3.0
0.2
mm
81/2 × 14 SEF
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
Setting Items
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
81/
2 × 11 SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0807 Letter Fold-out Position 2: 1 sheet Fold
Adjust the overall fold size (L) of letter foldout sheets (1 sheet fold) when using the fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (L).
This setting will be applied if the single-sheet fold function is enabled.
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the
the trailing edge.
mark indicates
345
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
S2
L
Paper feed direction
DWP563
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B5 JIS SEF
0.0
3.0
-3.0
0.2
mm
12 × 18 SEF
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
Setting Items
A3 SEF
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0808 Letter Fold-out Position 2: Multi-sheet Fold
Adjust the overall fold size of letter foldout sheets (multi-sheet fold) when using the fold unit. This setting
will be applied if the multi-sheet fold function is enabled.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (L).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the
the trailing edge.
346
mark indicates
Setting Values
S2
L
Paper feed direction
CWY008
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B5 JIS SEF
0.0
3.0
-3.0
0.2
mm
81/2 × 14 SEF
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
Setting Items
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0809 Letter Fold-in Position 1: 1 sheet Fold
Adjust the fold position of the bottom segment (S) of letter fold-in sheets (1 sheet fold) when using the
fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S).
This setting will be applied if the single-sheet fold function is enabled.
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the
the trailing edge.
S
mark indicates
L
Paper feed direction
DWP564
347
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0810 Letter Fold-in Position 1: Multi-sheet Fold
Adjust the fold position of the bottom segment of letter fold-in sheets (multi-sheet fold) when using the
fold unit.
This setting will be applied if the multi-sheet fold function is enabled.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the
the trailing edge.
S
L
Paper feed direction
CWY009
348
mark indicates
Setting Values
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0811 Letter Fold-in Position 2: 1 sheet Fold
Adjust the fold size of letter fold-in sheets (1 sheet fold) when using the fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (LS).
This setting will be applied if the single-sheet fold function is enabled.
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the
the trailing edge.
S
mark indicates
L
Paper feed direction
DWP564
349
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0812 Letter Fold-in Position 2: Multi-sheet Fold
Adjust the fold size when Inside 3 Folding is executed (Overlap Folding) when using the fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (L).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the
the trailing edge.
S
L
Paper feed direction
CWY009
350
mark indicates
Setting Values
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
0.0
8K SEF
-4.0
Other Paper Sizes
0813 Double Parallel Fold Position 1
Adjust the fold position (S1) of the bottom segment 1 of double parallel-folded sheets when using the
fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S1).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the mark indicates
the trailing edge. The illustration below shows a gatefold sheet partially opened in the half-folded state.
L1
S1
Paper feed direction
DWP565
351
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0814 Double Parallel Fold Position 2
Adjust the fold position (S2) of the bottom segment 2 of double parallel-folded sheets when using the
fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S2).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the
the trailing edge.
L4
L3
S2
Paper feed direction
DWP566
352
mark indicates
Setting Values
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0815 Gate Fold Position 1
Adjust the fold position (S1) of the bottom segment 1 of gatefold sheets when using the fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S1).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the mark indicates
the trailing edge. The illustration below shows a gatefold sheet partially opened in the half-folded state.
S1 S2
L3
Paper feed direction
DWP567
353
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0816 Gate Fold Position 2
Adjust the fold position (S2) of the bottom segment 2 of gatefold sheets when using the fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S2).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the mark indicates
the trailing edge. The illustration below shows a gatefold sheet partially opened in the half-folded state.
S1 S2
L3
Paper feed direction
DWP567
354
Setting Values
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0817 Gate Fold Position 3
Adjust the fold position (S3) of the bottom segment 3 of gatefold sheets when using the fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S3).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the
the trailing edge.
mark indicates
L3
S3
Paper feed direction
DWP568
355
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
Finishing: Perfect Binder
You can use the Perfect Binder on Type 1 or 2 machines only.
0901 Perf Bind Cvr Sht Posit: With Feed
Adjust the horizontal alignment of the cover sheet position when performing perfect binding.
When you bind the copies with the perfect binder, make this adjustment if the center of the book block's
spine and the center of the cover sheet are misaligned horizontally.
Press [ ] or [ ] to move the image feed direction or reverse feed direction.
Spine of the book
Front
cover
Paper feed direction
EAR312
356
Setting Values
Setting Items
Setting
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
5.0
-5.0
0.1
mm
0902 Perf Bind Cvr Sht Posit: Across Feed
Adjust the vertical alignment of the cover sheet position when performing perfect binding.
When you bind the copies with the perfect binder, make this adjustment if the center of the book block's
spine and the center of the cover sheet are misaligned vertically.
Press [ ] or [ ] to move the image backward or forward.
Spine of the book
Front
cover
Paper feed direction
CWY010
Setting Items
Setting
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
5.0
-5.0
0.1
mm
0903 Perfect Binding Finishing Angle
Square the top, bottom, and outside edges when trimming a deck of paper.
Make this adjustment if the three edges of the deck of paper cut by the perfect binder are not square.
Enter the distance from the square part at each edge.
357
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Fore Edge
Tail Edge
Head Edge
DWP570
Setting Items
Head Edge
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.00
10.0
-10.0
0.10
mm
Tail Edge
Fore Edge
0904 Applying Binding Glue
Adjust the amount of binding glue for perfect binding.
If there is not enough glue, some pages may not stick.
If there is too much glue, the glue may be squeezed out of the binding and stick the pages together
making it difficult to open the booklet.
Setting Items
Setting
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.00
0.30
-0.30
0.05
mm
Finishing:Stacker
1007 Maximum Stack Quantity in Stacker Tray
Specify the maximum number of sheets that can be stacked on the stacker tray. The setting applies to
both the 1st and 2nd stackers.
The maximum number of sheets you can set differs depending on the size, thickness, and paper curl. Set
the maximum number by specifying a ratio based on the number of sheets. Select [Large Size] when
using paper whose vertical and horizontal lengths are 210 mm or longer whose area is 81/2 × 11 or
wider. Select [Small Size] when using other size paper.
358
Setting Values
Major paper sizes that apply to each item are as follows:
• Large Size: A3
81/2 × 11
or larger (up to 13 × 191/5 ), B4 JIS , A4
• Small Size: B5 JIS
, A5
, 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 ,
, 51/2 × 81/2
If the unit detects that the number of sheets reaches the set upper limit, a warning message will appear.
Setting Items
Large Size
Values
100%
Default Value
100%
75%
50%
25%
Small Size
100%
50%
75%
50%
25%
Finishing: Interposer
1101 Interposer Double Feed Detection
Set whether to detect double feed.
If this is set to [On], the machine detects double feeding and so keeps unintended blank sheets out of the
delivered paper. The machine may erroneously detect double feeding when using special paper.
To prevent erroneous detection of double feeding, set this to [Off].
Setting Items
Interposer Upper Tray
Values
Off
Default Value
Off
On
Interposer Lower Tray
Off
Off
On
359
7. Adjustment Settings for Operators
360
8. Print
This chapter explains how to configure the printer driver, and describes notes and operational settings of
the printer function. It also explains how to store documents on the machine's hard disk, and how to print
from external media.
Installing the Printer Driver by Using Device
Software Manager Installer
Device Software Manager is a support utility for driver installation in Windows. Device Software
Manager helps you to detect the latest driver via the internet automatically according to the computer
you are using and install it with a simple procedure.
• Device Software Manager supports Windows OS only. To install the printer driver on Mac OS, see
the following sections:
• See "Installing the Printer Driver for Network Connection (OS X/macOS)", Driver Installation
Guide
• See "Installing the Printer Driver for USB Connection (OS X/macOS)", Driver Installation
Guide
• Follow the instructions of the installer to connect the USB cable.
Installing Device Software Manager from the CD-ROM
1. Set the CD-ROM in the computer.
If the installer does not start automatically, double-click [Setup.exe] in the root directory of the CDROM.
2. Select a language, and then click [OK].
361
8. Print
3. Click [Install Online].
EAR663
4. Select [I accept the agreement] on the "License Agreement" screen, and then click [Install].
5. On the "Quality Improvement Program" screen, select [I will participate in the Quality
Improvement Program] or [I will not participate in the Quality Improvement Program],
and then click [Next].
6. On the "Driver Update Notification Setting" screen, specify whether to display the
message about the driver update, and then click [Next].
The process of installing Device Software Manager starts.
7. Select the connection between the machine and computer, and then click [Next].
DZC085
• Network: Search for devices connected to the network.
362
Installing the Printer Driver by Using Device Software Manager Installer
• USB: Following the instructions on the "Connection with device" screen, connect the machine
and the computer with the USB cable to search for the machine.
8. Select this machine from among the detected devices, and then click [Next].
DZC086
The installation of the driver starts.
• If "Could not verify publisher" is displayed at the beginning of installation, continue the
installation. There is no problem with the started installer that is downloaded from the
manufacturer's website. Continue the installation.
• When you connect the machine and the computer with a USB cable, follow the instructions on
the installer screen.
If the machine is not detected, click [Cancel Connection]. Even if the connection is canceled,
the installation is complete. After the installer screen is closed, the machine is added
automatically when it is connected to the computer with the USB cable.
363
8. Print
9. When the installation is complete, click [Finish].
• After completing the installation, Device Software Manager icon is created on the desktop screen.
• You can update the installed printer driver with Device Software Manager.
• See "Updating the Driver (Windows)", Driver Installation Guide.
Installing Device Software Manager from the Downloaded File
1. Double-click the downloaded file.
2. Select [I accept the agreement] on the "License Agreement" screen, and then click [Install].
3. Click [Next] on the "Welcome to the Device Software Manager Setup Wizard" screen.
4. On the "Quality Improvement Program" screen, select [I will participate in the Quality
Improvement Program] or [I will not participate in the Quality Improvement Program],
and then click [Next].
5. On the "Driver Update Notification Setting" screen, specify whether to display the
message about the driver update, and then click [Next].
The process of installing Device Software Manager starts.
6. After completing the installation, select the [Run Device Software Manager] check box,
and then click [Finish].
The installation of Install Online is complete. Next, install the printer driver.
7. On the "End User License Agreement" screen, select [Agree], and then click [Next].
364
Installing the Printer Driver by Using Device Software Manager Installer
8. Select the connection between the machine and computer, and then click [Next].
DZC085
• Network: Search for devices connected to the network.
• USB: Following the instructions on the "Connection with device" screen, connect the machine
and the computer with the USB cable to search for the machine.
9. Select this machine from among the detected devices, and then click [Next].
DZC086
The installation of the driver starts.
• If "The publisher could not be verified" is displayed at the beginning of installation, continue
the installation. There is no problem with the started installer that is downloaded from the
manufacturer's website. Continue the installation.
• When you connect the machine and the computer with a USB cable, follow the instructions on
the installer screen.
365
8. Print
If the machine is not detected, click [Cancel Connection]. Even if the connection is canceled,
the installation is complete. After the installer screen is closed, the machine is added
automatically when it is connected to the computer with the USB cable.
10. When the installation is complete, click [Finish].
• Double-click the Device Software Manager icon created on the Finder of the computer to update
the printer driver.
• See "Updating the Driver (Windows)", Driver Installation Guide.
366
Displaying the Printer Driver Settings Screen
Displaying the Printer Driver Settings Screen
This chapter explains how to open the printer driver settings screen using Windows 10 as an example.
The screens displayed may differ depending on the application.
Displaying the Printer Driver Properties
This section explains how to open the printer driver properties.
• Manage Printers permission is required to change the printer settings. Log on as an Administrators
group member.
• You cannot change the machine default settings for individual users. Settings made in the printer
properties dialog box are applied to all users.
1. Right-click the [Start] menu, and then click [Control Panel].
2. Click [View devices and printers].
3. Right-click the icon of the printer you want to use.
4. Click [Printer properties].
Displaying the Printing Preferences Dialog Box
Displaying the [Printing preferences] dialog box from the [Start] menu
This section explains how to open the [Printing preferences] dialog box.
• When the printer driver is distributed from the print server, the setting values specified by the server
are displayed as the default for [Printing Defaults...].
• You cannot configure different print settings for each user. The settings configured in this dialog box
are used as the default.
1. Right-click the [Start] menu, and then click [Control Panel].
2. Click [View devices and printers].
3. Right-click the icon of the printer you want to use.
4. Click [Printing preferences].
367
8. Print
Displaying the [Printing preferences] dialog box in an application
You can make printer settings for a specific application. To make printer settings for a specific
application, open the [Printing preferences] dialog box from that application.
The settings displayed in the [Printing preferences] dialog box are applied as the default in the [Printing
preferences] dialog box opened in an application. When printing from an application, modify the
settings as required.
The screens displayed may differ depending on the application. The following procedure explains how
to print documents from an application using WordPad in Windows 10 as an example.
1. Click the menu button of the application you are using, and then click [Print].
2. Select the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Preferences].
• Procedures for opening the [Printing preferences] dialog box vary depending on the application.
For details, see the printer driver Help or the manuals provided with the application.
Menu names and brief overview of each function
The following is an overview of the menus that are available on the [Detailed Settings] tab of the PCL 6
printer driver. For details about other items that can be configured from each menu, see the printer driver
Help.
• The available functions may vary depending on the optional units that are installed. For details
about the optional units required for this function, see "Functions Requiring Optional
Configurations", Device Management.
Job Setup menu
You can specify job type, the classification code, and authentication.
• For details about how to store data on the hard disk of this machine and print it using the
control panel, see "Storing Documents in the Hard Disk Drive and Printing Them", Basic
Operations.
• For details about how to store data in the Document Server and print it using the control
panel, see "Saving and Printing Using the Document Server", Basic Operations.
• For details about registering classification codes, see "Registering Classification Codes", Basic
Operations.
Basic menu
You can specify the original orientation, size, and print size.
368
Displaying the Printer Driver Settings Screen
Paper menu
You can configure settings for the source tray, paper type, tab stock printing, and Letterhead
Setting.
• For details about tab stock printing, see "Tab Stock Printing", Basic Operations.
Cover/Slip/Designate menu
You can configure the settings for cover sheet, slip sheet, and chapter page.
• For details about front and back cover sheet, see "Cover Sheet", Basic Operations.
• For details about slip sheet, see "Slip Sheets", Basic Operations.
• For details about chapter page, see "Chapter Page", Basic Operations.
2 Sided/Layout/Booklet menu
You can configure combine printing, two-sided printing, and booklet printing settings.
• For details about specifying combine printing, see "Combining Multiple Pages into Single
Page", Basic Operations.
• For details about specifying two-sided printing, see page 373 "Printing on Both Sides of
Sheets".
• For details about booklet printing, see page 23 "Booklet Printing".
Imposition menu
You can configure poster function settings.
• For details about poster function, see "Poster", Basic Operations.
Output Settings menu
You can configure the settings for the output tray, collate, separation sheet, and banner page.
• For details about collate, see "Collate", Basic Operations.
• For details about separation sheet, see "Separation Sheet", Basic Operations.
• For details about banner page, see "Banner Page", Basic Operations.
Finishing menu
You can configure staple, punch, fold, ring binding, perfect binding, and fore edge cut settings.
• For details about staple and fore edge cut, see "Staple", Basic Operations.
• For details about punch, see "Punch", Basic Operations.
• For details about fold, see page 31 "Fold".
• For details about ring binding, see page 28 "Ring Binding".
• For details about perfect binding, see page 24 "Perfect Binding".
Print Quality:Standard menu
You can configure settings such as resolution and toner saving.
• For details about toner saving, see "Conserving Toner When Printing", Basic Operations.
369
8. Print
Print Quality:Advanced menu
You can configure settings such as color balance and vector/raster.
Effects menu
You can configure unauthorized copy prevention, watermark, and background numbering settings.
• For details about enabling watermark, see "Watermarks", Basic Operations.
• For details about specifying unauthorized copy prevention, see "Printing Documents That Are
Not Authorized for Duplication", Basic Operations.
• For details about specifying background numbering, see "Enabling Background Numbering"
Basic Operation.
Driver Options menu
Use this menu to provide functions concerned with controls peculiar to printer driver. For details,
see the printer driver Help.
Using one click presets
Some of the frequently used functions are registered under "One Click Preset List:" on the [Frequently
Used Settings] tab.
You can apply the relevant setting simply by clicking on the one click preset name. This helps to avoid
incorrect settings and misprints.
One click presets can be added, modified, and deleted as required. By using registered one click
presets, users without in-depth knowledge of the printer driver can utilize advanced printing functions
easily.
Follow the procedure to register one click presets.
1. Open the [Printing preferences] dialog box.
2. Make the settings you require.
3. Click [Register Current Settings...].
4. Enter a name and comment that describe the setting, and then click [OK].
5. Click [OK].
• For details about modifying and deleting one click presets, see the printer driver Help.
Displaying the Printer Driver Help
Displaying the printer driver Help
If you click [Help] in the setting dialog box for the printer driver, the Help contents corresponding to
the displayed screen appears.
370
Displaying the Printer Driver Settings Screen
Displaying the descriptions of the items on the printer driver's settings dialog box
If a question mark button is displayed in the upper right corner of the setting dialog box for the
printer driver, a question mark sign will be displayed next to the mouse pointer by clicking that
button. Move this question mark over the item whose Help information you want to view, and then
left-click to display the Help information.
371
8. Print
Standard Printing
• The default setting is two-sided printing. If you want to print on only one side, select [Off] for the
two-sided printing setting.
• If you are printing on a registered custom paper, make the correct paper settings for the custom
paper on the printer driver. For details about custom paper, see page 44 "Registering a Custom
Paper".
When using the PCL 6 printer driver
1. Click the menu button of the application you are using, and then click [Print].
2. Select the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Preferences].
4. Click the [Frequently Used Settings] tab.
5. In the "Job Type:" list, select [Normal Print].
6. In the "Document Size:" list, select the size of the original to be printed.
7. In the "Orientation" area, select [Portrait] or [Landscape] as the orientation of the
original.
8. In the "Paper Type:" list, select the type of paper that is loaded in the paper tray.
9. In the "Input Tray:" list, select the paper tray that contains the paper you want to print
onto.
If you select [Auto Tray Select] in the "Input Tray:" list, the source tray is automatically selected
according to the paper size and type specified.
10. If you want to print multiple copies, specify a number of sets in the "Copies:" box.
11. Click [OK].
12. Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.
372
Printing on Both Sides of Sheets
Printing on Both Sides of Sheets
This section explains how to print on both sides of each page using the printer driver.
• The types of paper that can be printed on both sides are as follows:
• Plain, Recycled, Letterhead, Preprinted, Prepunched, Yellow, Green, Blue, Purple, Ivory,
Orange, Pink, Red, Gray, White, Bond, Cardstock, Coated (Glossy), Coated (Matte),
Carbonless Paper
• If the document contains pages with different original sizes, page breaks may occur.
• If you are printing on a registered custom paper, make the correct paper settings for the custom
paper on the printer driver. For details about custom paper, see page 44 "Registering a Custom
Paper".
When using the PCL 6 printer driver
1. Click the menu button of the application you are using, and then click [Print].
2. Select the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Preferences].
4. Click the [Frequently Used Settings] tab.
You can also click the [Detailed Settings] tab, and then click [2 Sided/Layout/Booklet] in the
"Menu:" box.
5. Select the method for binding the output pages in the "2 sided:" list.
6. Change any other print settings if necessary.
7. Click [OK].
8. Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.
Types of two-sided printing
You can select which way the bound pages open by specifying which edge to bind.
Orientation
Open to Left
Open to Top
Portrait
373
8. Print
Orientation
Landscape
374
Open to Left
Open to Top
Printing on Envelopes
Printing on Envelopes
Configure the paper settings appropriately using both the printer driver and the control panel.
• To print on envelopes, load them into the optional wide Large Capacity Tray (LCT) or Tray A, and
be sure to specify an appropriate paper type. See page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes and
Types".
Configuring envelope settings using the control panel
1. Load envelopes in the paper tray.
About how to load envelopes, see page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".
2. Press [Tray Paper Settings] on the upper left of the screen.
3. Select the paper tray on the [Paper Tray] tab in which the envelopes are loaded.
When specifying the paper type or weight of envelopes as you want, check that [Manual Setting]
is selected.
When specifying the paper settings for envelopes by allocating from a registered custom paper,
select [Allocate from Media Catalog], select custom paper to use, and then press [Allocate to
Tray].
When specifying the setting values manually, proceed to the next step. After allocating the setting
values from the media catalog, proceed to Step 9.
4. Press [Edit the Settings].
5. Press [Paper Size], and select the envelope size.
6. Press [Paper Weight], and select the paper weight of the envelope.
7. Press [Paper Type], and select the appropriate item.
8. Press [Save Paper].
9. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
Printing on envelopes using the printer driver
When using the PCL 6 printer driver
1. Click the menu button of the application you are using, and then click [Print].
2. Select the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Preferences].
375
8. Print
4. In the "Document Size:" list, select the envelope size.
5. In the "Paper Type:" list, select [Envelope].
6. In the "Input Tray:" list, select the paper tray where the envelopes are loaded.
7. Change any other print settings if necessary.
8. Click [OK].
9. Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.
• If you are printing on a registered custom paper, make the correct paper settings for the custom
paper on the printer driver. For details about custom paper, see page 38 "Registering Custom
Paper".
376
9. Scan
This chapter describes what you can do using the machine's Scan function.
You can use the Scan function on Type 1, 2, or 3 machines only.
Preparation for Sending by Scan to Folder
To send scanned files by Scan to Folder, you must first perform the following:
• Creating a shared folder on a computer running Windows/Confirming a computer's information
• Creating a shared folder on a computer running OS X or macOS/Confirming a computer's
information
• You can create the shared folder under Windows 7 or later, Windows Server 2008 or later, and
OS X 10.10 or later.
• Files can be sent via SMB using the SMB (139/TCP or 137/UDP) or CIFS (445/TCP) protocol.
• Files can be sent via SMB (139/TCP or 137/UDP) in a NetBIOS over TCP/IP environment only.
• Files cannot be sent via SMB in a NetBEUI environment.
Creating a shared folder on a computer running Windows/confirming a
computer's information
The following procedures explain how to create a shared folder on a computer running Windows, and
how to confirm the computer's information. In these examples, Windows 10 is the operating system, and
the computer is a member in a network domain. Write down the confirmed information.
Step 1: Confirming the user name and computer name
Confirm the user name and the name of the computer you will send scanned documents to.
1. On the [Start] menu, click [All apps].
2. Click [Windows System], and then click [Command Prompt].
3. Enter the command "ipconfig/all", and then press the [Enter] key.
4. Confirm the name of the computer.
The computer's name is displayed under [Host Name].
You can also confirm the IPv4 address. The address displayed under [IPv4 Address] is the IPv4
address of the computer.
377
9. Scan
5. Next, enter the command "set user", and then press the [Enter] key. (Be sure to put a
space between "set" and "user".)
6. Confirm the user name.
The user name is displayed under [USERNAME].
• Depending on the operating system or security settings, it might be possible to specify a user name
that does not have a password assigned. However, we recommend that for greater security you
select a user name that has a password.
Step 2: Creating a shared folder on a computer running Microsoft Windows
Create a shared destination folder in Windows and enable sharing. In the following procedure, a
computer which is running under Windows 10 and participating in a domain is used as an example.
• You must log in as an Administrators group member to create a shared folder.
• If "Everyone" is left selected in Step 6, the created shared folder will be accessible by all users. This
is a security risk, so we recommend that you give access rights only to specific users. Use the
following procedure to remove "Everyone" and specify user access rights.
1. Create a folder, just as you would create a normal folder, in a location of your choice on
the computer.
2. Right-click the folder, and then click [Properties].
3. On the [Sharing] tab, select [Advanced Sharing...].
4. Select the [Share this folder] check box.
5. Click [Permissions].
6. In the [Group or user names:] list, select "Everyone", and then click [Remove].
7. Click [Add...].
8. In the [Select Users or Groups] window, click [Advanced...].
9. Specify one or more object types, select a location, and then click [Find Now].
10. From the list of results, select the groups and users you want to grant access to, and then
click [OK].
11. In the [Select Users or Groups] window, click [OK].
12. In the [Group or user names:] list, select a group or user, and then, in the [Allow] column
of the permissions list, select either the [Full Control] or [Change] check box.
Configure the access permissions for each group and user.
13. Click [OK].
378
Preparation for Sending by Scan to Folder
Step 3: Specifying access privileges for the created shared folder
If you want to specify access privileges for the created folder to allow other users or groups to access
the folder, configure the folder as follows:
1. Right-click the folder created in Step 2, and then click [Properties].
2. On the [Security] tab, click [Edit...].
3. Click [Add...].
4. In the [Select Users or Groups] window, click [Advanced...].
5. Specify one or more object types, select a location, and then click [Find Now].
6. From the list of results, select the groups and users you want to grant access to, and then
click [OK].
7. In the [Select Users or Groups] window, click [OK].
8. In the [Groups or user names:] list, select a group or user, and then, in the [Allow] column
of the permissions list, select either the [Full Control] or [Modify] check box.
9. Click [OK].
• If you are creating a shared folder for the first time on this computer, you must enable the file
sharing function. For details, see Windows Help.
• To register a shared folder in the machine's address book, you need the computer's IP address or
computer name, and the user name and password of a user who has access permissions for the
shared folder.
• For details about registering shared folders, see "Registering Folders", Device Management.
Creating a shared folder on a computer running OS X or macOS/confirming a
computer's information
The following procedures explain how to create a shared folder on a computer running OS X/macOS,
and how to confirm the computer's information. macOS 10.13 is used in these examples.
Step 1: Creating a shared folder on a computer running OS X/macOS
• You must log in as an administrator to create a shared folder.
1. Create the folder that you want to send scan files to.
2. On the Apple menu, click [System Preferences].
3. Click [Sharing].
379
9. Scan
4. Select the [File Sharing] check box.
5. Click [Options...].
6. Select the [Share files and folders using SMB] check box.
7. Select the account that will be used to access the shared folder.
8. If the "Authenticate" screen appears, enter the password for the account, click [OK], and
then click [Done].
9. Under the [Shared Folders:] list, click [+] (new).
10. Select the folder you have created, and then click [Add].
11. Make sure that the permissions for the user who will access this folder are set to [Read &
Write].
• To register a shared folder in the machine's address book, you need the computer's IP address,
and the user name and password of a user who has access permissions for the shared folder.
Step 2: Confirming the computer's name and the user name
Confirm the computer name and the user name for the computer you will send scanned documents to.
Write down the confirmed information.
1. On the Apple menu, click [About This Mac].
2. Click [System Report...].
3. In the left pane, click [Software], and then confirm the computer name and user name
under "System Software Overview:".
The computer name is displayed under [Computer Name:].
The user name is displayed under [User Name:].
• Depending on the operating system or security settings, you might be able to specify a user name
that does not have a password assigned. However, we recommend that you select a user name
that has a password.
• To confirm the IP address: on the Apple menu, click [System Preferences...], and then click
[Network] on the System Preferences window. Then click [Ethernet]. The address displayed in the IP
address field is the IP address of the computer.
380
Preparation for Sending by Scan to Folder
Registering the shared folder of the destination computer in the address book
You can register destinations to send scanned files in the address book. The registered destinations can
be selected easily by pressing the destination key that is displayed on the initial screen of the scanner
function.
1. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
2. Press the [User Tools] icon (
).
3. Press [Address Book Management].
4. Press [New Program].
5. Press [Change] next to "Name", enter the name you want to display as the destination,
and then press [OK].
6. Press [Auth. Info], and then press [Next].
7. Press [Specify Other Auth. Info] in "Folder Authentication".
8. Press [Change] next to "Login User Name", enter the login user name on the destination
computer, and then press [OK].
9. Press [Change] next to "Login Password", enter the login password on the destination
computer, and then press [OK].
10. Re-enter the password for confirmation, and then press [OK].
11. Press [Folder].
12. Select a folder from [Browse Network].
1. Press [Browse Network].
2. Select the group to which the destination computer belongs. Browse for the domain name/
workgroup name.
3. Press the name of the computer you want to send the file to.
4. Select the shared folder on the destination computer.
5. Press [OK], and proceed to Step 13.
If the folder cannot be selected from Browse Network, proceed to Step 12.
13. Enter the computer name or IP address to specify a shared folder as the destination.
• Entering the computer name to specify a shared folder
1. Press [Change] after specifying the path name.
2. Specify the destination computer and a shared folder.
For example, if the computer name is "UserPC" and a shared folder name is "scan", use
"\\UserPC\scan" as the name of the destination folder.
3. Press [OK]
• Entering the IP address to specify a shared folder
381
9. Scan
1. Press [Change] after specifying the path name.
2. Specify the destination computer and a shared folder.
For example, if the computer name is "192.168.0.152" and a shared folder name is
"scan", use "\\192.168.0.152\scan" as the name of the destination folder.
3. Press [OK]
14. Press [Connection Test].
15. When a message indicating that the connection has been successfully established
appears, press [Exit].
• If a message "Cannot find the specified path. Please check the settings." appears, see
page 463 "Messages displayed on the control panel when you use the scanner function".
16. Press [OK].
17. Press [User Tools] (
382
) on the top right of the screen.
Basic Procedure When Using Scan to Folder
Basic Procedure When Using Scan to Folder
• Before performing this procedure, see page 377 "Preparation for Sending by Scan to Folder" and
confirm the details of the destination computer. See also "Registering Folders", Device
Management, and register the address of the destination computer to the address book.
1. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
2. Press the [Scanner (Classic)] icon.
3. Make sure that no previous settings remain.
If a previous setting remains, press [Reset].
4. Press the [Folder] tab.
5. Place originals.
6. If necessary, specify the scan settings according to the original to be scanned.
Example: Scanning the document in color/duplex mode, and saving as a PDF file.
383
9. Scan
• Press [Scan Settings], press [Full Color: Text / Photo] in the [Original Type] tab, and then
press [OK].
• Press [Original Feed Type], press [2 Sided Original], and then press [OK].
• Press [Send File Type / Name], press [PDF], and then press [OK].
For information about other settings, see "Various Scan Settings", Basic Operations.
7. Specify the destination.
You can specify multiple destinations.
For details, see page 385 "Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations".
8. Press the [Start] key.
• If any of the machine's security functions are enabled, select the destination from the registered
folder only when you send files by Scan to Folder.
• If you have selected more than one destination, you can press [ ] or [ ] next to the destination
field to scroll through the destinations.
• To cancel a selected destination, press [ ] or [ ] to display the destination in the destination field,
and then press the [Clear] key. You can cancel a destination selected from the destination list by
pressing the selected destination again.
• To cancel scanning, press the [Stop] key. Check the information displayed in the dialog box, and
then press any button.
• You can also store a file and simultaneously send it by Scan to Folder. For details, see
"Simultaneous Storage and Sending by Scan to Folder", Basic Operations.
• After scan files are sent, the destination and file name fields will be automatically cleared. If you
want to preserve the information in these fields, contact your local dealer.
• You cannot switch the screen while WSD or DSM destinations are being specified. To clear the
specified destination, display the destination in the destination field, and then press the [Clear] key.
• When the specified destination is updated using the Central Management function, the spooled
documents are sent to the destination after updating.
• For details about Central Management, see "Administrator Tools", Device Management.
384
Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations
Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations
This section explains how to specify Scan to Folder destinations.
You can send a file by Scan to Folder by any of the following methods:
• Selecting the destination from the machine's address book
• Sending files to a shared network folder
• Sending files to an FTP server
• Selecting the destination from recent destinations
• You can specify multiple destinations.
• For details about sending a file to a destination that is registered in the machine's address book,
see page 393 "Selecting the Destination from the Machine's Address Book".
• For details about sending a file over the network to a shared folder, see page 386 "Sending Files
to a Shared Network Folder".
• For details about sending a file to an FTP server using Send to Folder, see page 388 "Sending files
to an FTP server".
• For details about sending a file to a recently used destination, see page 397 "Selecting the
Destination from Recent Destinations".
385
9. Scan
Sending Files to a Shared Network Folder
• When sending to a shared folder on a network, see page 377 "Preparation for Sending by Scan
to Folder" and confirm the following items for the destination computer:
• Destination computer name
• Destination computer's user name and password
• Destination shared folder name
• Depending on the operating system of the client computer, access to the shared folder may require
authentication.
You can send a file to a shared folder over the network by any of the following methods:
• Enter the path to the destination directly
• Specify the path by browsing the network for the destination
• If the firewall of an antivirus program is active, you may not be able to specify a shared folder on
the computer as a folder destination. If this is the case, see the antivirus program's Help.
• If Windows firewall is active and you cannot specify a shared folder on the computer as a folder
destination, the machine may be able to communicate with the computer by changing the
exceptions of the Windows firewall. For details, see Windows Help.
Entering the path to the destination manually
1. Press [Manual Entry].
2. Press [SMB].
3. Press [Manual Entry] on the right side of the path field.
386
Sending Files to a Shared Network Folder
4. Enter the path for the folder.
In the following example path, the shared folder name is "user" and the computer name is
"desk01":
\\desk01\user
5. Press [OK].
6. Depending on the destination setting, enter the user name for logging in to the computer.
Press [Manual Entry] to the right of the user name field to display the soft keyboard.
7. Depending on the destination setting, enter the password for logging in to the computer.
Press [Manual Entry] for the password to display the soft keyboard.
8. Press [Connection Test].
A connection test is performed to check whether the specified shared folder exists.
If the message "Cannot find the specified path. Please check the settings." appears, see page 463
"Messages displayed on the control panel when you use the scanner function".
9. Check the connection test result, and then press [Exit].
10. Press [OK].
• To change the path for the folder that has been entered, press [Edit] on the left side of the
destination field. Enter the correct path for the folder, and then press [OK].
• The connection test may take time.
• You may not be able to press [Connection Test] right after pressing [Cancel] during a connection
test.
• Even if the connection test was successful, the machine may fail to transfer the file if you do not
have write privileges for the file or there is not enough free hard disk space.
• If the client computer has a fixed IP address assigned to it, you can specify the IP address manually
by including it in the path name of the destination folder. For example, if the IP address is
"192.168.1.191" and the shared folder name is "user", enter "\\192.168.1.191\user" as the
path.
• When the specified destination is updated using the Central Management function, the spooled
documents are sent to the destination after updating.
• For details about Central Management, see "Administrator Tools", Device Management.
387
9. Scan
Specifying the path by browsing the network for destinations
1. Press [Manual Entry].
2. Press [SMB].
3. Press [Browse Network] under the path name field.
If the message "Cannot find the specified path. Please check the settings." appears, see page 463
"Messages displayed on the control panel when you use the scanner function".
4. Select the domain or workgroup in which the destination folder is located.
5. Select the client computer that has the destination folder.
If you cannot find the computer you are looking for, press [Up One Level] and browse that level.
If authentication is required to access the selected computer, the authentication screen appears. To
authenticate, enter the user name and password.
6. Select the destination folder.
When the selected folder has sub-folders, the sub-folders list appears.
If you cannot find the destination folder, press [Up One Level], and then search for the folder at that
level.
7. Press [OK] twice.
• Up to 100 computers or shared folders can be displayed.
• The machine may fail to transfer the file if you do not have the write privileges for the shared folder
or there is not enough free hard disk space.
Sending files to an FTP server
This section explains how to specify destinations when sending files to an FTP server.
388
Sending Files to a Shared Network Folder
1. Press [Manual Entry].
2. Press [FTP].
3. Press [Manual Entry] on the right side of the server name field.
4. Enter a server name.
Instead of the server name, you can also use its IPv4 address.
5. Press [OK].
6. Press [Manual Entry] on the right side of the path field.
7. Enter the path for the folder.
The following is an example of a path where the folder name is "user" and the subfolder name is
"lib": user\lib.
8. Press [OK].
9. Enter the user name according to the setting at the destination.
Press [Manual Entry] to the right of the user name field to display the soft keyboard.
10. Enter the password according to the setting at the destination.
Press [Manual Entry] next to the password field to make the soft keyboard appear.
11. To change the port number which is set in [System Settings], press [Change] on the right
side of the port number field. Enter a port number using the number keys, and then press
the [ ] key.
12. Press [Connection Test].
A connection test is performed to check whether the specified folder exists.
If the message "Cannot find the specified path. Please check the settings." appears, see page 463
"Messages displayed on the control panel when you use the scanner function".
13. Check the connection test result, and then press [Exit].
14. Press [OK].
• The connection test may take time.
389
9. Scan
• You may not be able to press [Connection Test] right after pressing [Cancel] during a connection
test.
• To change the registered path to a destination folder, press [Edit] to the left of the destination field
to display the soft keyboard, enter the new path, and then click [OK].
• The machine may fail to transfer the file if you do not have write privileges for the folder or there is
not enough free hard disk space.
390
Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-mail
Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by Email
1. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
2. Press the [Scanner (Classic)] icon.
3. Make sure that no previous settings remain.
If a previous setting remains, press [Reset].
4. Press the [Email] tab.
5. Place originals.
6. If necessary, specify the scan settings according to the original to be scanned.
Example: Scanning the document in color/duplex mode, and saving as a PDF file.
• Press [Scan Settings], press [Full Color: Text / Photo] in the [Original Type] tab, and then
press [OK].
• Press [Original Feed Type], press [2 Sided Original], and then press [OK].
• Press [PDF] under [Send File Type / Name], and then press [OK].
391
9. Scan
For information about other settings, see "Various Scan Settings", Basic Operations.
The settings explained in "Entering the E-mail Subject", "Entering the E-mail Message", "Security
Settings to E-mails", Basic Operations can also be specified.
7. Specify the destination.
You can specify multiple destinations.
For details, see page 393 "Specifying the Destination or Recipient".
8. To specify the e-mail sender, press [Sender Name], and then press [OK].
For details, see "Specifying the E-mail Sender", Basic Operations.
9. To use Message Disposition Notification, press [Recept. Notice].
If you select [Recept. Notice], the selected e-mail sender will receive e-mail notification when the email recipient has opened the e-mail.
10. Press the [Start] key.
• This machine supports SMTPS (SMTP over SSL).
• This machine supports Web mail sending.
• If [Auto Specify Sender Name] on the [File Transfer] tab under [System Settings] is set to [On], you
can send e-mails without entering anything for [Sender Name]. For details, see "File Transfer",
Device Management.
• Depending on the security setting, the logged-in user may be specified as [Sender Name].
• To use Message Disposition Notification, log in to the machine as a user and specify the sender.
Note, however, that the [Recept. Notice] notification e-mail may not be transmitted if the e-mail
software of the recipient does not support Message Disposition Notification.
• If you press [Preview] and then start scanning, the [Preview] screen appears. You can use this
screen to check how the originals are scanned and the scan setting used for scanning. After
checking the preview, you can specify whether to send the file or not. For detail, see page 141
"[Preview] screen under the scanner function".
• To cancel scanning, press the [Stop] key. Check the information displayed in the dialog box, and
then press any button.
• You can also store a scan file and simultaneously send it by e-mail. For details, see "Simultaneous
Storage and Sending by E-mail", Basic Operations.
• After an e-mail is sent, the destination, sender, subject, text, and file name fields will be
automatically cleared. If you want to preserve the information in these fields, contact your local
dealer.
• You cannot switch the screen while WSD or DSM destinations are being specified. To clear the
specified destination, display the destination in the destination field, and then press the [Clear] key.
• You can specify whether to send a file as an e-mail attachment or by sending a URL link in [File
Emailing Method]. For details, see "Send Settings", Preparation.
392
Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-mail
• When [Login User Address Priority] is set to [On], the login user's e-mail address is specified as a
destination after you log in to the machine and display the initial scanner screen. For details, see
"General Settings", Preparation.
Specifying the Destination or Recipient
This section explains how to specify the e-mail recipient or the destination folder.
The following methods of specifying the mail recipient or the destination folder are available:
• Selecting the destination from the machine's address book
• Entering the destination manually
• Selecting the destination from the recent destinations
• Searching and selecting the destination from LDAP server (only when sending files by e-mail)
• You can specify multiple destinations.
• Before you select destinations, make sure you have selected [To]. If necessary, press [Cc] or [Bcc],
and then select destinations.
• For details about entering the destination when using Scan to Folder, see page 386 "Entering the
path to the destination manually".
Selecting the Destination from the Machine's Address Book
This section explains how to select the destination from the machine's address book.
• To use this function, you must register the destinations in [System Settings] in advance. About the
settings, see Device Management for details.
• For details about registering destination folders in the machine's address book using SMB protocol,
see page 377 "Preparation for Sending by Scan to Folder".
You can use the following methods to select destinations registered in the machine's address book:
• Select a destination from the list
• Select a destination by entering the registration number
• Select a destination by searching the machine's address book
Selecting a destination from the list
Select the destination from the destination list.
393
9. Scan
1. In the destination list, press the key including the destination name.
The key of the selected destination is highlighted, and the destination appears in the destination
field at the top of the screen.
• If the target destination does not appear, display the destination by selecting its initial letter from the
title.
• Depending on the security setting, some destinations may not appear in the destination list.
Selecting destinations by entering the registration numbers
Select the destination from the machine's address book using its registration number.
1. Press [Reg. No.].
2. Using the number keys, enter the five-digit registration number assigned to the required
destination, and then press the [ ] key.
3. Press [OK].
394
Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-mail
Searching the machine's address book for the destination and selecting it
1. Press [Search Dest.].
2. To search by destination name, press [Name]. To search by e-mail address, press [Email
Address].
To search by folder name, select the [Folder] tab, and then press [Folder Name].
You can also search by combining [Name] and [Email Address].
3. Enter the beginning of the destination name.
4. Press [OK].
5. If necessary, press [Advanced Search] to specify the detailed search criteria, and then
press [OK].
6. Press [Start Search].
Destinations that match the search criteria are displayed.
7. Select a destination.
To send the file by e-mail, select [To], [Cc], or [Bcc].
8. Press [OK].
• If [LDAP Search] is set to [On] in [Administrator Tools] under [System Settings], check that [Address
Book] has been selected before executing the search.
• Search criteria that appear in [Advanced Search], such as [Name], [Email Address], and [Folder
Name], are registered in the machine's address book. For details, see "Registering Addresses and
Users", Device Management.
• By pressing [Details], you can view details about the selected destinations.
• Up to 100 destinations can be displayed as search results.
• By pressing [Advanced Search], the following criteria appear:
• [Beginning Word]: The names which start with the entered character or characters are
targeted.
395
9. Scan
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "A".
• [End Word]: The names which end with the entered character or characters are targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "C".
• [Exact Match]: The names which correspond to an entered character or characters are
targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "ABC".
• [Include one Word]: The names which contain an entered character or characters are
targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "A", "B", or "C".
• [Exclude Words]: The names which do not contain an entered character or characters are
targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "D".
• When the specified destination is updated using the Central Management function, the spooled
documents are sent to the destination after updating.
• For details about Central Management, see "Administrator Tools", Device Management.
Entering an E-mail Address Manually
1. Press [Manual Entry].
2. Enter the e-mail address.
3. Press [OK].
• Depending on the security settings, [Manual Entry] may not be displayed.
• To change a registered destination e-mail address, press [Edit] to the left of the destination field to
display the soft keyboard, use the soft keyboard to enter the new address, and then click [OK].
• The e-mail address that is entered directly can be registered in the machine's address book. For
details, see page 399 "Registering a destination in the address book manually".
396
Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-mail
Selecting the Destination from Recent Destinations
This section explains how to display destinations that have been recently entered directly, and how to
select one of those destinations.
1. Press [Recent].
2. Select a destination.
3. Press [OK].
• Depending on the security settings, [Recent] may not be displayed.
• If there are multiple recent destinations, press [ ] or [ ] to scroll through them.
• The 10 most recent destinations for each destination type (e-mail, SMB, and FTP) are displayed.
Destinations are deleted in chronological order, oldest first.
• You can add recent destinations to the machine's address book. For details, see page 399
"Registering a destination in the address book manually".
Selecting Destinations by Searching an LDAP Server
This section explains how to search for an address registered in an LDAP server and specify it as an email destination.
• To use this function, an LDAP server must be connected to the network.
• The LDAP server must be registered and [LDAP Search] must be set to [On] in [Administrator Tools]
under [System Settings]. To configure the LDAP server, see "Administrator Tools", Device
Management.
• You can specify whether or not to automatically obtain the shared folder information registered in
the LDAP server and overwrite the machine's address book. If you use this function, you do not
need to register the shared folder in the address book. For details about the settings, see "General
397
9. Scan
Settings", Preparation. If the shared folder is not registered on the LDAP server, it must be registered
on the server or in the machine's address book.
1. Press [Search Dest.].
2. Select the LDAP server that appears next to [Address Book].
If authentication is required to access the selected server, the authentication screen appears. To
authenticate, enter the user name and password.
3. To search by destination name, press [Name].
To search by e-mail address, press [Email Address].
You can also search by combining [Name] and [Email Address]. If you search by [Name], LDAP
server's settings determine whether the search is based on surname or first name. To configure the
LDAP server, see "Administrator Tools", Device Management.
4. Enter the beginning of the destination name.
To search by e-mail address, enter the beginning of the destination address.
5. Press [OK].
6. Press [Start Search].
7. Select the destination.
8. Select [To], [Cc], or [Bcc].
9. Press [OK].
• Search criteria that appear in [Advanced Search], such as [Name], [Fax Destination], [Email
Address], [Company Name], and [Department Name], are registered in the LDAP server.
• If you specified [Search Options] on [Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server] under [System
Settings], you can add a search condition for LDAP search on the [Advanced Search] screen. To
configure the LDAP server, see "Administrator Tools", Device Management.
• By pressing [Details], you can view details about the selected destinations.
• Up to 100 destinations can be displayed as search results.
398
Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-mail
• If an e-mail address returned by the LDAP server is too long, it will be impossible to specify it as the
destination. For details about the number of characters that can be specified, see "Values of
Various Set Items for Transmission/Storage Function", Preparation.
• You can register multiple e-mail addresses in individual LDAP server accounts. However, only one
e-mail address will be displayed as the search result. Usually, the address that was registered first
on the LDAP server is the address that is displayed.
• For details about configuring the advanced search options, see Steps 5 and 6 and Note of
"Searching the machine's address book for the destination and selecting it", page 393 "Selecting
the Destination from the Machine's Address Book".
Registering a Destination E-mail Address or Folder
• When the Central Management function is in use, the address book is managed by the server and
[Prg. Dest.] is not available on the control panel of the machine. When registering destinations,
consult your administrator.
• For details about Central Management, see "Administrator Tools", Device Management.
Registering a destination in the address book manually
1. Press the tab of the function you want to use.
399
9. Scan
2. In the destination field, display the destination you want to register.
3. Press [Prg. Dest.].
4. Press [Names], and then specify the name and other information to be registered.
For details about specifying the information to be registered, see "Registering Addresses and
Users", Device Management.
5. Press [OK].
• Depending on the security setting, [Prg. Dest.] may not appear. In such case, you cannot complete
the registration.
• You can also register a destination selected from the LDAP server. To register in the machine's
address book a destination searched for and selected from the LDAP server, display the
destination, and then press [Prg. Dest.].
Registering a recently used destination in the address book
1. Press the tab of the function you want to use.
2. Press [Recent].
3. Press [Program Dest.].
400
Basic Procedure for Sending Scan Files by E-mail
4. Press [Names], and then enter the name and other necessary information.
For details about entering the other information, see "Registering Addresses and Users", Device
Management.
5. Press [OK].
• Depending on the security settings, [Recent] may not be displayed.
• If there are multiple recent destinations, press [ ] or [ ] to scroll through them.
401
9. Scan
Storing and Saving the Scanned Documents
You can use the scanner function to store scanned documents in the machine. The documents that have
been stored using the scanner function can later be sent by e-mail or delivered to a shared folder.
Basic Procedure for Storing Scan Files
• You can specify a password for each stored file. We recommend that you protect stored files from
unauthorized access by specifying passwords.
• Scan file stored in the machine may be lost if some kind of failure occurs. We advise against using
the hard disk to store important files. The supplier shall not be responsible for any damage that may
result from the loss of files.
1. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
2. Press the [Scanner (Classic)] icon.
3. Make sure that no previous settings remain.
If a previous setting remains, press [Reset].
4. Place originals.
5. Press [Store File].
6. Press [Store to HDD].
7. If necessary, specify the stored file's information, such as [User Name], [File Name],
[Password], and [Select Folder].
• User Name
Press [User Name], and then select a user name. To specify an unregistered user name, press
[Manual Entry], and then enter the name. After specifying a user name, press [OK].
• File Name
Press [File Name], enter a file name, and then press [OK].
402
Storing and Saving the Scanned Documents
• Password
Press [Password], enter a password, and then press [OK]. Re-enter the password for
confirmation, and then press [OK].
• Select Folder
Press [Select Folder], specify the folder in which to save the stored files, and then press [OK].
8. Press [OK].
9. If necessary, press [Scan Settings] to specify scanner settings such as resolution and scan
size.
For details, see "Scan Settings", Basic Operations.
10. Press the [Start] key.
• Stored files will be deleted after a set period. For details about specifying the period, see
"Administrator Tools", Device Management.
• Files stored under the scanner function cannot be printed from the machine's control panel. Print the
files from a client computer after receiving them on the computer.
• For details about storing data to a USB flash memory device or SD card, see page 414 "Storing
the Scanned Documents to a USB Flash Memory Device or SD Card".
• By pressing [Store to HDD + Send], you can simultaneously store scan files and send them. For
details, see "Simultaneous Storage and Sending by E-mail" and "Simultaneous Storage and
Sending by Scan to Folder", Basic Operations.
• Only [Store to Memory Device] is available in [Store File] when PDF is selected as the File Type
and [Security] is specified in the PDF File Setting.
• You cannot specify [Store to HDD] if [Preview] is selected.
• To cancel scanning, press the [Stop] key. Check the information displayed in the dialog box, and
then press any button.
• After scan files are stored, the file information fields will be automatically cleared. If you want to
preserve the information in these fields, contact your local dealer.
Previewing the Contents of a Stored Document
You can display the [Preview] screen and check a stored file on the machine or from the client computer.
Checking a stored file selected from the list
This section explains how to preview a file selected from the list of stored files.
403
9. Scan
1. Press [Select Stored File].
2. Specify the folder in which to save the stored files.
3. From the list of stored files, select the file you want to check.
You can select more than one file.
For details about searching the stored document by user or document name, see "Searching by
User Name" and "Searching by File Name", Basic Operations.
4. Press [Preview].
• If you select a password-protected stored file, a screen for entering the password appears. To
select the file, enter the correct password, and then press [OK].
• You cannot preview documents stored as High Compression PDF files.
Stored File Preview Screen
1
2
3
4
5
7
6
1. [Switch]
You can switch to a preview of another page.
404
DWP454
Storing and Saving the Scanned Documents
2. [Switch]
You can switch to a preview of another file.
3. Display File
The name and size of the selected file appear.
4. Display Page
The page number of the previewed page, total number of pages, page size, and color mode appear.
5. Display Position
When the preview is enlarged, the location of the part of the page displayed on the preview screen is
indicated.
6. [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Press to shift the displayed area.
7. [Zoom Out], [Zoom In]
In previewing, you can reduce or enlarge the file image.
• For details, see page 141 "[Preview] screen under the scanner function".
• You can reduce and enlarge the previewed image by double-tapping it, and scroll the
enlarged image by tapping it.
Checking stored files from a client computer
Using Web Image Monitor, you can also display the files stored in the machine on a client computer.
You can also check files stored under the copier, Document Server, and printer functions.
If you enter "http:// (machine IPv4 address, or host name)/" in the address bar of the client computer's
web browser, the top page of Web Image Monitor appears.
• You can also download the stored files.
• It is recommended that you use Web Image Monitor only within your local area network.
• For details about displaying or downloading stored files using Web Image Monitor, see
"Displaying Stored Documents with Web Image Monitor" or "Downloading Stored Documents with
Web Image Monitor", Basic Operations.
• For details about making settings for using Web Image Monitor, see "Using Web Image Monitor",
Device Management.
• For details about functions for managing stored files using Web Image Monitor, click [Help] on the
upper-right corner of the displayed screen.
405
9. Scan
Sending a Stored File
This section explains how to send a stored file.
Stored files can be sent by e-mail or Scan to Folder.
There are two methods of sending stored files by e-mail. You can specify the sending method in
[Scanner Features]. For details, see "Send Settings", Preparation.
• To send the URL by e-mail:
In the [Send Settings] tab under [Scanner Features], [File Emailing Method], select [Send URL Link].
This method is useful when network restrictions prevent you sending attachments.
• To send an attached file by e-mail:
In the [Send Settings] tab under [Scanner Features], [File Emailing Method], select [Attach to
Email].
• Depending on your e-mail application, a phishing warning might appear after you receive an email message. To prevent phishing warnings appearing after you receive e-mail from a specified
sender, you must add the sender to your e-mail application's exclusion list. For details about how to
do this, see your e-mail application's Help.
1. Press [Select Stored File].
2. Specify the folder in which to save the stored files.
3. Select the file you want to send.
You can select multiple files.
The selected files are sent in the order they were selected.
If you press [Queue], only the files you have selected are displayed in the order they will be sent.
For details about searching the stored document by user or document name, see "Searching by
User Name" and "Searching by File Name", Basic Operations.
4. Press [OK] twice.
5. Press the [Email] or [Folder] tab.
406
Storing and Saving the Scanned Documents
6. If necessary, configure [Send File Type / Name].
7. Press the [Start] key.
• If you select a password-protected stored file, a screen for entering the password appears. To
select the file, enter the correct password, and then press [OK].
• When the URL has been sent by e-mail, the recipient can check the stored file by clicking that URL.
For details, see "Sending the URL by E-mail", Basic Operations.
• You can encrypt e-mail or attach a signature to it. For details, see "Security Settings to E-mails",
Basic Operations.
• If [PDF File Type: PDF/A Fixed] in [Administrator Tools] under [System Settings] is set to [On], you
cannot send PDF or High Compression PDF files.
• You can specify [OCR Settings] only for the files stored with [OCR Settings].
• You can specify [High Compression PDF] only for the files stored with the [High Compression PDF]
setting.
• When multiple files are selected, all file types available for each file can be specified. However,
some files may not be sent with the specified file type depending on the settings specified when
stored.
• Full-color or gray scale documents stored using the [Compression (Gray Scale / Full Color)]
setting in [Send Settings] under [Scanner Features] set to [On] are sent as PDF or PDF/A files
even if you specify multi-page TIFF as the file type.
• Documents stored without specifying [OCR Settings] are sent as PDF or PDF/A files even if
you specify [OCR Settings].
• Documents stored as High Compression PDF files are always sent as High Compression PDF
files regardless of the file type setting.
• Documents stored without specifying [High Compression PDF] as the file type are sent as PDF
files even if you specify [High Compression PDF].
Managing Stored File
This section explains how to delete stored files and how to change the data for stored files.
407
9. Scan
Deleting a stored file
1. Press [Select Stored File].
2. Specify the folder in which to save the stored files.
3. Press [Manage / Delete File].
4. Select the file you want to delete.
If you select a password-protected stored file, a screen for entering the password appears. To
select the file, enter the correct password, and then press [OK].
5. Press [Delete File].
6. Press [Yes].
• Files waiting for sending cannot be deleted.
• You can also delete files stored in the machine by accessing the machine from a client computer
using Web Image Monitor. For detail about Web Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor Help.
Changing stored document information
You can change information for a stored file, such as the user name, file name, and password.
• Information for files waiting for being sent cannot be changed.
408
Storing and Saving the Scanned Documents
Changing a user name
1. Press [Select Stored File].
2. Specify the folder in which to save the stored files.
3. Press [Manage / Delete File].
4. Select the file containing the user name you want to change.
If you select a password-protected stored file, a screen for entering the password appears.
Enter the password, and then press [OK].
5. Press [Change User Name].
6. Enter a new user name.
The user names shown here are names that were registered in the address book. To change a
user name not shown here, press [Manual Entry], and then enter the user name.
7. Press [OK].
8. Make sure that the user name was changed.
9. Press [Reset].
• Using Web Image Monitor you can also change the user name of a file stored in the machine
from the client computer. For details about Web Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor
Help.
409
9. Scan
Changing a file name
1. Press [Select Stored File].
2. Specify the folder in which to save the stored files.
3. Press [Manage / Delete File].
4. Select the file containing the file name you want to change.
If you select a password-protected stored file, a screen for entering the password appears.
Enter the password, and then press [OK].
5. Press [Change File Name].
6. Enter a new file name.
7. Press [OK].
8. Make sure that the file name was changed.
9. Press [Reset].
• For information about how to enter characters, see "Entering Text (When Using the Standard
Applications)", Preparation.
• Using Web Image Monitor, you can also change the file name of a file stored in the machine
from the client computer. For details about Web Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor
Help.
Changing a password
Enter the password for accessing the stored file.
410
Storing and Saving the Scanned Documents
1. Press [Select Stored File].
2. Specify the folder in which to save the stored files.
3. Press [Manage / Delete File].
4. Select the file containing the password you want to change.
A screen for entering the password appears. Enter the password, and then press [OK].
5. Press [Change Password].
6. Using the number keys, enter a new four to eight-digit password.
7. Press [OK].
8. Enter the same number again using the number keys.
9. Press [OK].
10. Press [Reset].
• Using Web Image Monitor, you can also change the password of a file stored in the machine
from the client computer. For details about Web Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor
Help.
Searching for stored documents
You can search for stored documents by user name or document name.
Searching by user name
You can search for a stored file by its user name.
411
9. Scan
1. Press [Select Stored File].
2. Specify the folder in which to save the stored files.
3. Press [User Name].
4. Select the user name to be used for the search.
The user names shown here are names that were registered in the address book. To change a
user name not shown here, press [Manual Entry], and then enter the user name.
5. Press [OK].
The search begins, and then files belonging to the specified user appear.
Searching by file name
You can search for a stored file by its file name.
1. Press [Select Stored File].
2. Specify the folder in which to save the stored files.
3. Press [File Name].
4. Enter the file name.
For information about how to enter characters, see "Entering Text (When Using the Standard
Applications)", Preparation.
5. Press [OK].
The search starts, and files whose name starts with the entered string appear.
412
Storing and Saving the Scanned Documents
Specifying Access Privileges for Stored Files
If user authentication is set, you can specify access privileges for stored files when storing them in the
Document Server. You can also change the access privileges for files after they have been stored.
To configure or change the access privileges, the user must be logged in.
For details about logging in and out, see page 145 "Logging In the Machine".
Specifying access permissions when storing a file
Specify the access privileges before storing the file in the Document Server.
1. Press [Store File].
2. Press [Access Privileges].
3. Press [New Program].
4. Select the users or groups to whom you want to assign permission.
You can select more than one user.
By pressing [All Users], you can select all the users.
5. Press [Exit].
6. Select the user to whom you want to assign access permission, and then select the
permission.
Select the access permission from [Read-only], [Edit], [Edit / Delete], or [Full Control].
7. Press [Exit].
8. Press [OK].
9. Store files in Document Server.
Changing access privileges for previously stored files
This section explains how to change access privileges for a file stored in the Document Server.
413
9. Scan
1. Press [Select Stored File].
2. Specify the folder in which to save the stored files.
3. Press [Manage / Delete File].
4. Select the documents to be changed.
5. Press [Change Access Priv.].
6. Press [Program/Change/Delete].
7. To create a new user or group and specify its access privilege, press [New Program].
To change the access privilege of a registered user or group, proceed to Step 10.
8. Select the users or groups to whom you want to assign permission.
You can select more than one user.
By pressing [All Users], you can select all the users.
9. Press [Exit].
10. Select the user to whom you want to assign access permission, and then select the
permission.
Select the access permission from [Read-only], [Edit], [Edit / Delete], or [Full Control].
11. Press [Exit].
12. Press [OK].
13. Press [Reset].
Storing the Scanned Documents to a USB Flash Memory Device or SD Card
This section explains how to save data on external media using the scanner function.
• Keep SD cards or USB flash memory devices out of reach of children. If a child accidentally
swallows an SD card or USB flash memory device, consult a doctor immediately.
1. Press [Home] (
414
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
Storing and Saving the Scanned Documents
2. Press the [Scanner (Classic)] icon.
3. Insert an SD card or USB flash memory device into the media slot on the machine's control
panel.
For details about inserting an SD card or USB flash memory device into the media slot, see
"Inserting/Removing a Memory Storage Device", Preparation.
4. Make sure that no previous settings remain.
If a previous setting remains, press [Reset].
5. Place originals.
6. Press [Store File].
7. Press [Store to Memory Device].
8. Press [OK].
9. If necessary, specify the scan settings according to the original to be scanned.
Example: Scanning the document in color/duplex mode, and saving as a PDF file.
• Press [Scan Settings], press [Full Color: Text / Photo] in the [Original Type] tab, and then
press [OK].
• Press [Original Feed Type], press [2 Sided Original], and then press [OK].
415
9. Scan
• Press [PDF] under [Send File Type / Name], and then press [OK].
For information about other settings, see each section.
10. Press the [Start] key.
When scanning batches, place subsequent originals after the scan files have been sent.
When writing is complete, a confirmation message appears.
11. Press [Exit].
12. Remove the memory device from the media slot.
Remove the media from the media slot only after data has been written completely. Removing the
media while data is being written will result in corrupted data.
For details about removing an SD card or USB flash memory device into the media slot, see
"Inserting/Removing a Memory Storage Device", Preparation.
• The amount of time required to save files to a USB flash memory device or SD card will vary
according to the device's specifications.
• The documents stored on the memory storage device can be printed from the machine's control
panel. For details, see "Direct Printing from a Memory Storage Device", Basic Operations.
• The documents stored on the memory storage device cannot be sent from the machine's control
panel.
• Depending on the security settings, [Store to Memory Device] may not be displayed. For details,
see "Restricting Media Slot Access", Security Guide.
• You cannot specify where the data is saved. Files are saved in the root directory of the memory
storage device.
• If the memory storage device is partitioned, files are saved on the first partition.
• You cannot configure file information such as [User Name], [File Name], and [Password].
• The amount of free space on the memory device is displayed. Note that if the amount of free space
exceeds 10 GB, "9999.99 MB" will be displayed.
• To cancel writing, press the [Stop] key. If files are being written when writing is cancelled, any
partially written files are deleted. Only complete files are stored on the memory storage device.
416
Specifying the File Type
Specifying the File Type
This section explains the procedure for specifying the file type of a file you want to send.
File types can be specified when sending files by e-mail or Scan to Folder, sending stored files by e-mail
or Scan to Folder, and saving files on a memory storage device.
You can select one of the following file types:
• Single Page: [TIFF / JPEG], [PDF]
If you select a single-page file type when scanning multiple originals, one file is created for each
single page and the number of files sent is the same as the number of pages scanned.
• Multi-page: [TIFF], [PDF]
If you select a multi-page file type when scan multiple originals, scanned pages are combined and
sent as a single file.
Selectable file types differ depending on the scan settings and other conditions. For details about
file types, see "Notes about and limitations of file types" below.
1. Press [Send File Type / Name].
2. Select a file type.
If the File Type is set to [PDF], configure PDF File Setting as required.
3. Press [OK].
417
9. Scan
• If you select [Store to HDD] under [Store File], you can only select [High Compression PDF] or
[OCR Settings]. When sending stored files, you can select single-page or multi-page file types.
• The version of the created PDF files is 1.4.
• If [High Compression PDF] is selected in the PDF File Setting under the File Type, you can reduce
the file size without changing the character legibility of uncompressed PDF files. PDF/A is suitable
for storing data for a long period of time. For the limitations that apply to each file type, see "Notes
about and limitations of file types" below.
• When you select [High Compression PDF], you can select Standard (Fast) mode and Text Priority
(Slow) mode. When you select Text Priority (Slow) mode, the machine makes high compression
PDF files with a higher imaging quality than PDF files made in Standard (Fast) mode.
Notes About and Limitations of File Types
Depending on the file format you select, the following limitations will apply:
Single Page [TIFF / JPEG]
• Originals scanned in black and white are sent as TIFF files.
• According to the settings specified for [Compression (Gray Scale / Full Color)] under
[Scanner Features], originals scanned in full color or gray scale are sent in one of the
following file types:
• [On] : JPEG file
• [Off] : TIFF file
Multi-page [TIFF] or [PDF]
• When [Full Color: Text / Photo], [Full Color: Glossy Photo], [Gray Scale], or [Auto Color
Select] is specified under [Original Type] and [Compression (Gray Scale / Full Color)] is set
to [On] under [Scanner Features], you cannot select [TIFF] under [Multi-page].
• Even if you select [TIFF] under [Multi-page], files stored in JPEG format are automatically
changed to multi-page PDF files and then sent.
High Compression PDF
• You cannot select [High Compression PDF] if:
• [Black & White: Text], [B & W: Text / Line Art], [B & W: Text / Photo], [Black & White:
Photo], or [Auto Color Select] is selected under [Original Type].
• [Reduce / Enlarge] is selected.
• [100 dpi] or [150 dpi] is selected as the resolution.
• [Preview] is selected.
• When the WSD or DSM destination list is used.
418
Specifying the File Type
• If [PDF File Type: PDF/A Fixed] in [Administrator Tools] under [System Settings] is set to [On],
[PDF] and [High Compression PDF] other than PDF/A cannot be selected.
• Adobe Acrobat Reader 5.0/Adobe Reader 6.0 and later versions support High Compression
PDF.
• If [High Compression PDF] is selected as the file type, areas of uneven shade may appear in
the halftone sections in the document. If this happens, change the PDF File Setting to [PDF/A]
or [PDF].
PDF/A
• [Security Settings] in the PDF File Setting cannot be selected.
OCR Settings
• You cannot select [OCR Settings] if:
• [TIFF/JPEG] or [TIFF] is selected as the file type.
• [100 dpi] or [150 dpi] is selected as the resolution.
• When the WSD or DSM destination list is used.
419
9. Scan
Specifying Scan Settings
1. Press [Scan Settings].
2. Specify resolution, scan size, and other settings, as required.
For details about individual scan setting items, see "Scan Settings", Preparation.
3. Press [OK].
420
10. Document Server
This chapter describes what you can do using the machine's Copy function. It also describes how to
store documents in the Document Server of the machine and how to print or manage the stored files.
Storing Data
This section describes the procedure for storing documents on the Document Server.
• A document accessed with a correct password remains selected even after operations are
complete, and it can be accessed by other users. After the operation, be sure to press [Reset] to
cancel the document selection.
• The user name registered to a stored document in the Document Server is to identify the document
creator and type. It is not to protect confidential documents from others.
• When scanning by the scanner, make sure that all other operations are ended.
File Name
A file name such as "COPY0001" and "COPY0002" is automatically attached to the scanned
document. You can change the file name.
User Name
You can register a user name to identify the user or user group that stored the documents. To assign
it, select the user name registered in the Address Book, or enter the name directly. Depending on
the security setting, [Access Privileges] may appear instead of [User Name].
For details about the Address Book, see "Registering Addresses and Users", Device Management.
Password
To prevent unauthorized printing, you can specify a password for any stored document. A
protected document can only be accessed if its password is entered. If a password is specified for
the documents, the lock icon appears on the left side of the file name.
1. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
2. Press the [Document Server] icon.
3. Press [To Scanning Screen].
4. Press [Target Folder to Store].
5. Specify a folder in which to store the document, and then press [OK].
6. Press [User Name].
7. Specify a user name, and then press [OK].
The user names shown are names that were registered in the Address Book. To specify a name not
shown in the screen, press [Manual Entry], and then enter a user name.
421
10. Document Server
8. Press [File Name].
9. Enter a file name, and then press [OK].
10. Press [Password].
11. Enter a password with the number keys, and then press [OK].
You can use four to eight digits for the password.
12. For double-check, enter the password again, and then press [OK].
13. Place the original.
14. Specify the original scanning conditions.
15. Press the [Start] key.
The original is scanned. The document is saved in the Document Server.
After scanning, a list of folders will be displayed. If the list does not appear, press [Finish Scanning].
• For details about the keys that appear on the Document Server screen, see page 127 "How to Use
the [Document Server] Screen".
• When eight trays are installed, press [Other Settings], and then specify a folder to store the
document and password.
• To stop scanning, press the [Stop] key. To restart a paused scanning job, press [Continue] in the
confirmation screen. To delete saved images and cancel the job, press [Cancel Scanning]. The
original placed in the ADF will be ejected. Press [Job List] to display the [Job List] screen. For
details, see "Types of Screens to Manage Jobs", Preparation.
• You can omit the user name, file name, password, and folder in which to store the document. A file
name is specified automatically and the document is stored in the shared folder if you do not
specify a folder to store it in.
• You can enter up to 20 characters for a file name. In the list; however, up to 16 characters are
displayed as the file name. If above limits are exceeded, the list will display up to 15 characters for
the file name.
• For details about how to specify a folder, see "Arranging Stored Documents Using Folders", Basic
Operations.
• If the ADF cannot detect the size of an original automatically, the scan will be made at the closest
available size.
• Data stored in the Document Server is specified to be deleted after three days (72 hours) by the
factory default. You can specify the period after which the stored data is deleted automatically
under [Auto Delete File in Document Server] in User Tools. For details, see "Administrator Tools",
Device Management.
• If you do not want stored documents to be automatically deleted, select [Off] in [Auto Delete File in
Document Server] before storing a document. If you select [On] later, data stored after will be
automatically deleted. For details, see "Administrator Tools", Device Management.
422
Storing Data
• You can protect documents by limiting access. For details, see "Specifying Access Permission for
Stored Documents", Basic Operations.
• For details about how to enter text, see "Entering Text (When Using the Standard Applications)",
Preparation.
423
10. Document Server
Printing Stored Documents
Prints stored documents on the Document Server.
The items you can specify on the printing screen are as follows:
• Paper tray
• The number of prints
• [Output/ Finisher] ([Output], [Finisher], [Folding Unit], [Perfect Binding], [Stacker])
• [Stamp] ([Background Numbering], [Preset Stamp], [User Stamp], [Date Stamp], [Page
Numbering], [Stamp Text], [Unauthorized Copy Prevention])
• [Cover/ Slip Sheet] ([Front Cover], [Back Cover], [Designate / Chapter], [Slip Sheet])
• [Edit] ([Margin Adj.], [Edit Image])
• [2 Sided / Book] ([1 Sided Print], [2 Sided Top to Top], [2 Sided Top to Bottom], [Specify Duplex
Pages], [Booklet], [Magazine])
For details about each function, see the each section.
1. Select a folder.
2. Select a document to be printed.
3. When printing two or more documents at a time, repeat Step 2.
Up to 30 documents can be printed.
4. When specifying printing conditions, press [To Printing Screen], and then configure print
settings.
5. Enter the number of print copies with the number keys.
The maximum quantity that can be entered is 9999.
6. Press the [Start] key.
• If a password is specified for the document, enter it, and then press [OK].
• To cancel the selection, press the selected (highlighted) key.
424
Printing Stored Documents
• Pressing [Reset] cancels every selection.
• Pressing [Order] displays the selected documents in the printing order.
• Pressing [Keep 2 /1 Sided Settings] while more than one document is selected prints each
document according to the print settings when it was stored.
• Pressing [Back to File List] restores the document selection screen.
• You can search the target document using [User Name] or [File Name] situated in the left side of
the screen. For details about searching the target document, see page 411 "Searching for stored
documents".
• When two or more documents are selected, press [ ] or [ ] to confirm the user name, file name
and printing order of the document.
• The copy and printer features hold the specified printing conditions after the operation is over and
apply them at the next printing.
• When two or more documents are selected, the printing conditions are stored on the first document
but not on the succeeding documents.
• When printing two or more documents at a time, the printing conditions specified for the first
document are applied to all the remaining documents.
• Some of the selected documents may not be printed due to the difference in the size or resolution.
• When printing two or more documents while selecting the Sort function, you can confirm the finish
by printing only one copy. For details about sample print function, see page 427 "Sample Print".
• You can change the maximum print quantity under [Max. Copy Quantity] in User Tools. For details,
see "General Features", Preparation.
• Web Image Monitor allows you to print a document stored in the Document Server from your
computer. For the Web Image Monitor starting procedure, see "Displaying Stored Documents with
Web Image Monitor", Basic Operations.
Interrupting a Print Job
1. Press the [Stop] key.
DWP353
425
10. Document Server
2. Press [Cancel Printing].
Changing the Number of Print Copies while Printing Is in Progress
You can change the number of sets during printing.
• This function can be used only when the Sort function is selected in the printing conditions.
1. Press the [Stop] key.
DWP353
2. Enter the number of sets anew with the number keys.
3. Press [Continue Printing].
Printing will be resumed.
• The number of sets you can enter in Step 2 differs depending on when the [Stop] key is pressed.
426
Printing Stored Documents
Sample Print
When the number of sets is massive, you can print a single set in advance to check the printing order
and the printing conditions of the selected documents.
• This function can be used only when the Sort function is selected in the printing conditions.
1. Select a folder.
2. Select the documents to be printed.
3. Press [To Printing Screen].
4. Enter the number of print copies with the number keys.
5. Select the Sort function (
) under [Sort / Stack].
6. Press [Sample Copy].
Only one set will be printed.
7. If the sample is acceptable, press [Continue].
Printing will be resumed.
• To cancel the printing, press [Suspend] in Step 7. The print screen will appear, enabling to select
another item.
Printing a Specified Page
You can print the specified page of the document selected on the document selection screen.
There are three ways to specify how to print a document.
1st Page
Print the first page of a document. When two or more documents are selected, the first page of the
respective documents is printed.
427
10. Document Server
Specified Page
Print a single page in a document. Enter the page number in [Specified Page].
Specify Range
Print a range of pages in a document. Enter the number of the first page in [Start Number] and the
number of the last page in [End Number].
1. Select a folder.
2. Select the document to be printed.
3. Press [Print Specified Page].
4. Specify the page to print.
5. Enter the page or range to be printed with number keys as necessary.
6. Press the [Start] key.
428
11. Troubleshooting
This chapter explains how to resolve problems that have occurred.
Getting Started
This section describes the items to check when the machine does not work properly.
When the Machine Makes a Beeping Sound
The machine beeps in various patterns to alert users that they have forgotten their originals or other
situations with the machine.
The beep patterns related to the exposure glass, scanner, copy, and Document Server functions are
produced on Type 1, 2, and 3 machines.
Beep pattern
Single short beep
Meaning
Notification Sound
Login/Logout
Cause
A control panel or screen key was
pressed. You also hear a beeping
sound in this pattern when you log in to
or out from the machine.
Short, then long beep
Operation Invalid
An invalid key was pressed on the
control panel or screen, or the entered
password was incorrect.
Single long beep
Operation Completed
A Copier/Document Server Features
job has finished.
2 long beeps
Warm-up
When the power is turned on or the
machine exits Sleep mode, the
machine has fully warmed up and is
ready for use.
5 long beeps
Auto Reset
An auto reset was performed through
the simple screen of the Copier/
Document Server function or the
Scanner function.
5 long beeps repeated four
times.
Sound of Less Urgent Level
An original has been left on the
exposure glass or paper tray is empty.
429
11. Troubleshooting
Beep pattern
Meaning
Cause
5 short beeps repeated five
times.
Sound of Urgent Level
The machine requires user attention
because paper has jammed, the toner
needs replenishing, or other problems
have occurred.
12 short beeps
Blank Page Detected
The first page of the original scanned
in the Copier/Document Server
function or the Scanner function has
been determined nearly blank.
• Users cannot mute the beeping sound of alert the machine is currently making. When the machine
is making the beeping sound to alert users of a paper jam or toner request, if the machine's covers
are repeatedly opened and closed within a short space of time, the beeping sound might continue
even after normal status has resumed.
• You can change the sound type and volume. For details about Sound, see "General Features",
Device Management.
When You Check the Indicator Lamps, Status Icons, and Messages on the
Control Panel
The status of the machine is indicated by the indicator lamps on the control panel, the status icons, and
messages that appear. This section describes the location of the indicator lamp for the [Check Status]
key and explains where the status icons and messages appear on the control panel.
430
Getting Started
1
2
3
3
EAR307
3
EAR308
1. Indicator lamp for the [Check Status] key
A lamp lights up in red or flashes yellow if manual operations are required. For details about the [Check
Status] screen, see page 433 "When the indicator lamp for the [Check Status] key is lit or flashing".
431
11. Troubleshooting
2. Status icons
A status icon appears on the control panel if paper is added or paper jams are cleared. For details about the
status icons that appear, see page 432 "When a status icon is displayed".
3. Messages
Messages appear on the control panel to indicate the status of the machine, such as error messages or status
messages. For details about the problems that cause messages to appear and the corrective actions to be
taken, see page 443 "When Messages Appear".
When a status icon is displayed
This section describes the status icons displayed when the machine requires the user to remove misfed
paper, to add paper, or to perform other procedures.
The Original Misfeed icon is displayed on Type 1, 2 and 3 machines.
Status Icon
: Paper Misfeed icon
Status
Appears when a paper misfeed occurs.
For details about removing jammed paper, see page 517
"Removing Jammed Paper".
: Original Misfeed icon
Appears when an original misfeed occurs.
For details about removing jammed paper, see page 517
"Removing Jammed Paper".
: Load Paper icon
Appears when paper runs out.
For details about loading paper, see page 180 "Loading
Paper".
: Add Toner icon
Appears when toner runs out.
For details about adding toner, see page 528 "Adding
toner".
: Add Staple icon
Appears when staples run out.
For details about adding staples, see page 533 "Adding
staples".
: Waste Toner Full icon
Appears when the waste toner bottle is full.
For details about replacing the waste toner bottle, see
page 531 "Replacing the waste toner bottle".
432
Getting Started
Status Icon
Status
: Hole Punch Receptacle Full icon
Appears when the hole punch receptacle is full.
For details about removing punch waste, see page 523
"Removing Punch Waste".
: Waste Staple Full icon
Appears when the waste staple receptacle is full. For details
about removing staple waste, see page 523 "Removing
Staple Waste".
: Service Call icon
Appears when the machine is malfunctioning or requires
maintenance.
: Open Cover icon
Appears when one or more covers of the machine are
open.
When the indicator lamp for the [Check Status] key is lit or flashing
If the indicator lamp for the [Check Status] key lights up or flashes, press the [Check Status] key to
display the [Check Status] screen. Check the status of each function in the [Check Status] screen.
[Check Status] screen
1
2
4
3
EAR310
1. [Mach./Applic. Stat] tab
Indicates the status of the machine and each function.
433
11. Troubleshooting
2. [Check]
If an error occurs in the machine or a function, press [Check] to view details.
Pressing [Check] displays an error message or the corresponding function screen. Check the error message
displayed on the function screen and take the appropriate action. For details about how to resolve the
problems described in error messages, see page 443 "When Messages Appear".
3. Messages
Displays a message that indicates the status of the machine and each function.
4. Status icons
The status icons that can be displayed are described below:
: The function is performing a job.
: An error has occurred on the machine.
: The function cannot be used because an error has occurred in the function or machine. This icon may also
appear if the toner is running low.
The following table explains problems that cause the indicator lamp for the [Check Status] key to light or
flash.
Problem
Cause
Solution
Documents and reports do
not print out.
There is no paper left.
Load paper. For details about loading
paper, see page 180 "Loading Paper".
Documents and reports do
not print out.
The paper output tray is full.
Remove the prints from the tray.
An error has occurred.
A item with the status "Error
Occurred" in the [Check
Status] screen is defective.
Press [Check] in the item where the
error has occurred. Then read the
displayed message, and take the
appropriate action. For details about
error messages and their solutions, see
page 443 "When Messages Appear".
You can use other functions normally.
When You Have Problems Operating the Machine
The descriptions related to copy and Document Server functions are intended for Type 1, 2, and 3
machines.
434
Getting Started
Problem
The machine does not turn
on.
Cause
The AC power switch has
not been turned on.
Solution
Turn on the AC power switch. For
details about the AC power switch, see
page 525 "General Requirements".
When the machine is turned Functions other than the
on, the only icon that
copier function are not yet
appears on the home screen ready.
is the [Copier (Classic)] icon.
Wait a little longer.
The machine has just been
turned on and the User Tools
screen is displayed, but the
User Tools menu has items
missing.
Functions other than the
copier function are not yet
ready. Time required varies
by function. Functions
appear in the User Tools
menu when they become
ready for use.
Wait a little longer.
The indicator lamp remains
lit and the machine does not
enter Sleep mode even
though the [Energy Saver]
key was pressed.
In some cases, the machine
does not enter Sleep mode
when the [Energy Saver] key
is pressed.
Before you press the [Energy Saver]
key, check that Sleep mode can be
enabled. For details about enabling
Sleep mode, see page 104 "Saving
Energy".
The display is turned off.
The machine is in Low Power
mode.
Press the [Check Status] key to cancel
Low Power mode.
The display is turned off.
The machine is in Sleep
mode.
Press the [Energy Saver] key or the
[Check Status] key to exit Sleep mode.
Nothing happens when the
[Check Status] key or the
[Energy Saver] key is
pressed.
The power is turned off.
Make sure the main power indicator is
off, and then turn on the power.
The power turns off
automatically.
The Weekly Timer setting is
set to [Main Power Off].
Change the Weekly Timer setting. For
details about the Weekly Timer setting,
see "Timer Settings", Device
Management.
The user code entry screen is Users are restricted by User
displayed.
Code Authentication.
For details about how to log in when
User Code Authentication is enabled,
see page 145 "When the
Authentication Screen is Displayed".
435
11. Troubleshooting
Problem
The Authentication screen
appears.
An error message is still
displayed, even if misfed
paper is removed.
Cause
Basic Authentication,
Windows Authentication, or
LDAP Authentication is set.
• When a misfeed
message appears, it
remains until you open
and close the cover as
required.
Solution
Enter your login user name and user
password. For details about the
Authentication screen, see page 145
"When the Authentication Screen is
Displayed".
After removing the misfed paper, fully
open the front cover, and then close it.
For details about removing jammed
paper, see page 517 "Removing
Jammed Paper".
• Paper is still jammed in
the tray.
An error message is still
displayed, even if the
indicated cover is closed.
One or more of the covers
that are not indicated are
still open.
Close all the covers of the machine.
Images are printed on the
reverse side of the paper.
You may have loaded the
paper incorrectly.
Load the paper correctly. For details
about loading paper, see page 180
"Loading Paper".
Misfeeds occur frequently.
Using curled paper often
causes misfeeds, soiled
paper edges, or slipped
positions while staple or
stack printing is performed.
• Flatten the paper with your hands
to straighten out the curl.
• Load the paper up side down so
that the curled edges face
downward. For details about
recommended paper, see
page 228 "Recommended
Paper".
• Place the cut paper on a flat
surface to prevent it from curling,
and do not lean it against the
wall. For details about the proper
way to store paper, see
page 265 "Paper Storage".
436
Getting Started
Problem
Misfeeds occur frequently.
Cause
Solution
The tray's side or end fences
may not be set properly.
• Remove the misfed paper. For
details about removing jammed
paper, see page 517 "Removing
Jammed Paper".
• Check that the side or end fences
are set properly. Also, check that
the side fences are locked. For
details about setting the side and
end fences, see page 204
"Changing the Paper Size".
Misfeeds occur frequently.
Paper of undetectable size
has been loaded.
• Remove the misfed paper. For
details about removing jammed
paper, see page 517 "Removing
Jammed Paper".
• If you load a paper size that is not
selected automatically, you need
to specify the paper size with the
control panel. For details about
specifying paper size using the
control panel, see page 226
"Changing to a Size That Is Not
Automatically Detected".
Misfeeds occur frequently.
There is a foreign object on
the output tray.
• Remove the misfed paper. For
details about removing jammed
paper, see page 517 "Removing
Jammed Paper".
• Do not place anything on the
output tray.
Misfeeds occur frequently.
The staple cartridge is not
set correctly.
Set the staple cartridge properly. For
details about how to add staples, see
page 533 "Adding staples".
437
11. Troubleshooting
Problem
438
Cause
Solution
Misfeeds occur frequently
Small thick paper has been
fed in long-edge feed (LEF)
orientation.
When feeding paper with a grammage
of 200 gsm or more and a paper
length of 21 cm (8.27 inches) or more,
pull the drawer unit out and operate
the lever of the paper transport unit to
raise its height. For details, see
page 200 "Using Small Thick Paper".
Misfeeds occur when
printing to envelopes.
The envelopes are curled.
Make sure you fully flatten curled
envelopes before you load them. Do
not stack envelopes over the specified
limit for the paper tray. If misfeeds still
occur after the envelopes have been
flattened, load envelopes on the tray
one at a time and print them
individually. For details about how to
load envelopes, see page 260
"Envelopes".
When printing to envelopes,
the envelopes may be fed in
together, or the envelopes
may not be fed.
The envelopes are curled.
Make sure you fully flatten curled
envelopes before you load them. Do
not stack envelopes over the specified
limit for the paper tray. If misfeeds still
occur after the envelopes have been
flattened, load envelopes on the tray
one at a time and print them
individually. For details about how to
load envelopes, see page 260
"Envelopes".
Cannot print in duplex
mode.
You have selected a paper
tray that is not set for duplex
printing.
Change the setting for "Apply Duplex"
in "Tray Paper Settings" to enable
duplex printing for the paper tray. For
details about setting "Apply Duplex",
see page 269 "Tray Paper Settings".
Cannot print in duplex
mode.
You have selected a paper
type that cannot be used for
duplex printing.
In "Tray Paper Settings", select a paper
type that can be used for duplex
printing. For details about setting
"Paper Type", see page 269 "Tray
Paper Settings".
Getting Started
Problem
Paper is bent.
The print image is not
properly positioned on the
paper.
Cause
Solution
Paper may be bent when it is Change the output tray to the finisher
ejected from the finisher
shift tray.
upper tray.
• The machine has not
detected the paper
type and/or width
correctly.
Contact the machine administrator or
your service representative.
• The print position is not
aligned properly.
The machine does not turn
off in 16 minutes after the
main power is turned off.
The machine cannot perform
the shutdown procedure.
An error has occurred when
the Address Book is
changed from the display
panel or Web Image
Monitor.
The Address Book cannot be Wait a while, and then retry the
changed while you delete
operation.
the multiple stored
documents.
Cannot use Web Image
Monitor to print documents
stored in Document Server.
When print volume limits are
specified, users cannot print
beyond their print volume
limit. Print jobs selected by
users who have reached
their print volume limits will
be canceled.
The function does not run or
cannot be used.
If you cannot carry out your
job, it may be that the
machine is being used by
another function.
Repeat the shutdown procedure. If the
machine does not turn off, contact your
service representative.
• For details about specifying print
volume limits, see "Managing
Print Volume per user", Security
Guide.
• To view the status of a print job,
see [Print Job History]. In Web
Image Monitor, click [Job] on the
[Status/Information] menu. And
then click [Print Job History] in
"Document Server".
Wait until the current job is completed
before trying again.
For details about Function
Compatibility, see page 442
"Function compatibility".
439
11. Troubleshooting
Problem
Output paper to the stacker
tray does not align properly.
Cause
• Paper is curled.
• When using coated
paper, the output
paper to the stacker
tray might fail to align
properly.
Solution
• When the paper is curled
downward, select [П Curl
Correction Level: Small] or [П
Curl Correction Level: Large]
under [Correct Output Paper
Curl] in "Adjustment Settings for
Operators".
• When the paper is curled
upward, select [U Curl Correction
Level: Small] or [U Curl
Correction Level: Large] under
[Correct Output Paper Curl] in
"Adjustment Settings for
Operators".
For details about the Adjustment
Settings for Operators, see page 303
"Adjustment Settings for Operators".
Output paper to the stacker
tray does not align properly.
When the paper weight is
280.0 g/m2 or more, and
the paper size is A3, SRA3
or larger, the output paper
to the stacker tray might fail
to align properly.
Select [П Curl Correction Level: Small]
or [П Curl Correction Level: Large]
under [Correct Output Paper Curl] in
"Adjustment Settings for Operators".
For details about the Adjustment
Settings for Operators, see page 303
"Adjustment Settings for Operators".
Fold
Problems
Wrinkling occurs when Gate
Fold, Letter Fold-in, or Letter
Fold-out is applied.
440
Causes
Solutions
Wrinkling can occur if Gate
Fold, Letter Fold-in, or Letter
Fold-out is applied to B4 JIS
(Japanese Industrial Standard)
, A3 , 8 1/2" × 14" , 11"
× 17" , 12" × 18" , 8K , or
larger sizes of paper.
When applying Gate Fold,
Letter Fold-in, or Letter Fold-out
to paper larger than A4, we
recommend you enable image
reduction and use paper no
larger than A4 .
Getting Started
Problems
Causes
When you print Z-folded paper, The Z-fold support tray is not
the machine indicates that the
set.
output tray is full even though
the amount of output paper on
the tray is less than the stack
capacity.
Solutions
Set the Z-fold support tray for
finisher or multi-folding unit. For
details about how to add the Zfold support tray, see page 87
"Guide to Functions of the
Machine's Options".
The multi-folding unit outputs
The paper is curled.
sheets with creased edges when
Gate Fold is applied.
• Remove the paper, and
then reload it upside
down.
• Remove the paper, and
then reload it in the
opposite direction.
The position of the fold is
incorrect when Letter Fold-in is
applied to a B5 JIS sheet.
Multi-sheet Fold has been
In [Output/Customize
specified when only one sheet is Function/Finisher] on the initial
being printed.
copier screen, under [Folding
Unit], select [Letter Fold-in].
Press [Change], and then set
"Multi-sheet Fold" to [Off]. For
details about how to specify the
Multi-sheet Fold function, see
"Fold", Basic Operations.
When using the printer function,
change the printer driver Letter
Fold-in settings so that Multisheet Fold is not specified.
• There are times when images might not turn out as you want because of paper type, paper size, or
paper capacity problems, use the recommended paper. For details about recommended paper,
see page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".
When multiple functions cannot be executed simultaneously
If you cannot carry out your job, it may be that the machine is being used by another function.
Wait until the current job is completed before trying again. In certain cases, you can carry out another
job using a different function while the current job is being performed.
For details about Function compatibility, see page 442 "Function compatibility"
441
11. Troubleshooting
Function compatibility
The following chart describes the different combinations for when multiple functions are used at the same
time. When viewing the HTML version of the manual, click "Enlarge and display" to enlarge the chart.
Function compatibility are produced on Type 1, 2, and 3 machines.
Function Compatibility
The chart shows function compatibility when [Print Priority] is set to [Interleave].
: Simultaneous operations are possible.
: Operation is enabled when the relevant function key is pressed or remote switching (of the scanner/external extension) is done.
: Operation is enabled when the [Interrupt] key is pressed to interrupt the preceding operation.
: Operation is performed automatically once the preceding operation ends.
: The operation must be started once the preceding operation ends. (Simultaneous operations are not possible.)
Scanner
TWAIN Document Server Web Document Server
Scanning
Scanning
Operations for Scanning
Stapling
Printing
Data Reception
Copying
Operations for Copying
Sort
Mode before you select
Stapling
Operations for Copying
Print
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
Printing
Printer
Printing from Document Server
Interrupt Copying
Scanning a Document to Store in
Document Server
Copy
Operations for Document Server
Mode after you select
Operations for Copying
Copy
Interrupt Copying
Stapling
*1
*1
*1
Sort
*1
*1
*1
*2
*2
*4
*3
Operations for Copying
Copying
Scanner
Print
Data Reception
Printer
Printing
*4
Stapling
*3
*3
Operations for Scanning
Scanning
TWAIN
Scanning
Document Server
Scanning a Document to Store in
Document Server
Web Document Server
Printing
*2
*2
Operations for Document Server
*5
Printing from Document Server
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*5
*5
*3
Simultaneous operations are only possible after the preceding job documents are all scanned and [New Job] appears.
You can scan a document after the preceding job documents are all scanned.
During stapling, printing automatically starts after the current job.
Stapling is not available.
Simultaneous operation becomes possible after you press [New Job].
DSD004
• To print the Function compatibility table for confirmation, specify "Landscape" as the original
orientation.
• Stapling cannot be used at the same time for multiple functions.
• If the machine can perform multiple functions simultaneously, specify which function should have
priority in "Interleave Priority". The default is "Copier/Document Server". For details about
"Interleave Priority", see "General Features", Device Management.
• When the finisher is installed, you can specify the output tray where documents are delivered. For
details about Output Tray Settings, see "General Features", Device Management.
• While printing is in progress, scanning a document using another function may take longer than
usual.
442
When Messages Appear
When Messages Appear
This section describes the machine's main messages. If other messages appear, follow their instructions.
When Messages Appear and the Machine Cannot Be Operated
Message
Cause
Solution
"Please wait."
This message appears when
you press the [Energy Saver]
key or the [Check Status]
key.
Wait for a while. If the machine is not
ready in 5 minutes, turn off the power
and make sure the main power
indicator turns off. Wait at least 10
seconds, and then turn on the power
again. If the machine is still not ready
in 5 minutes, contact your service
representative.
"Please wait."
This message appears when
the machine is warming up.
• Wait until the message
disappears. Do not turn off the
power while the message is
showing.
• Wait for a while. If the machine is
not ready in 10 minutes, turn off
the power and make sure the
main power indicator turns off.
Wait at least 10 seconds, and
then turn on the power again. If
the machine is still not ready in 5
minutes, contact your service
representative.
"Please wait."
This message appears when
you change the toner
cartridge.
Wait for a while. If the message does
not disappear in 5 minutes, turn off the
power and make sure the main power
indicator turns off. Wait at least 10
seconds, and then turn on the power
again. If the message remains
displayed for more than 5 minutes,
contact your service representative.
443
11. Troubleshooting
Message
"Please wait."
Cause
The current environmental
condition is outside the
recommended temperature
range for the machine.
Solution
• Check the optimum environmental
conditions for the machine and
move it to a different location.
• Leave the machine for a while
and allow it to adapt to the
environment.
For details about the optimum
environmental conditions for the
machine, see page 536 "Optimum
Environmental Conditions After Moving
the Machine".
"Shutting down... Please
wait. Main power will be
turned off automatically.
Maximum waiting time: 16
minute(s)"
The shut down procedure
has begun because the
power was turned off while
the machine was in standby
mode or performing an
operation.
• Follow the message that appears
and wait until the machine has
shut down. Do not turn on the
power while this message is
displayed. If the power has been
turned on, follow the message
that appears. For details about
turning on and off the power, see
page 103 "Turning On/Off the
Power".
• The shutdown time varies
according to the options that are
installed and the environmental
conditions of the location where
the machine is set up. If the main
power indicator remains lit after
16 minutes have elapsed, contact
your service representative.
Messages Displayed When You Use the Copy/Document Server Function
The messages related to copy and Document Server functions are displayed on Type 1, 2 and 3
machines.
444
When Messages Appear
• If you cannot make copies as you want because of the paper type, paper size or paper capacity
problems, use recommended paper. For details about recommended paper, see page 228
"Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".
Message
Cause
Solution
"Adjusting the temperature
of the binding glue."
The binding glue is being
heated.
Wait until the glue has reached the
correct temperature for binding.
"Cannot delete the folder
because it contains locked
files. Please contact the file
administrator."
The folder cannot be deleted Unlock the locked original to delete it.
because it contains a locked For details about locked files, see
original.
"Unlocking Stored Files", Security
Guide.
"Cannot detect original
size."
The original placed on the
exposure glass is a nonstandard size.
• Place the original on the exposure
glass again. Face the original
down.
• If the machine cannot detect the
size of the original, specify the
size manually - do not use [Auto
Paper Select] mode or the [Auto
Reduce / Enlarge] function. For
details about specifying the
settings, see page 174 "Sizes
Detectable with Auto Paper
Select".
"Cannot detect original
size."
No original has been
placed, or the original
placed on the exposure
glass is a nonstandard size.
• Place the original correctly.
• Specify the original size.
• When placing an original directly
on the exposure glass, the lifting/
lowering action of the Auto
Document Feeder (ADF) triggers
the automatic original size
detection process. Lift the ADF 30
degrees or more.
445
11. Troubleshooting
Message
"Cannot display preview of
this page."
Cause
The image data may have
been corrupted.
Solution
Press [Exit] to display the preview
screen without a thumbnail.
If the selected document contains
several pages, press [Switch] on the
"Display Page" area to change the
page, and then a preview of the next
page will appear.
446
"Cannot punch this paper
size."
The Punch function cannot
be used with paper size
selected.
For details about paper sizes, see
"Specifications for Punch Unit",
Specifications.
"Cannot staple paper of this
size."
The Staple function cannot
be used with the paper size
selected.
Select an appropriate paper size. For
details about paper sizes, see
"Specifications for Finisher SR5090" or
"Specifications for Finisher SR5110" or
"Specifications for Booklet Finisher
SR5100" or "Specifications for Booklet
Finisher SR5120", Specifications.
"Check paper size."
An irregular paper size is
set.
If you press the [Start] key, the copy
will start using the selected paper.
"Duplex is not available with
this paper size."
A paper size not available in Select an appropriate paper size. For
Duplex mode.
details about paper sizes, see
"Specifications for the Main Unit",
Specifications.
"Exceeded the maximum
number of sheets that can be
used. Copying will be
stopped."
The number of pages the
user is permitted to copy has
been exceeded.
For details about how to check the
number of copies available per user,
see "Managing Print Volume per user",
Security Guide.
"Exceeded the maximum
number of multi-sheet fold.
Printing will be cancelled."
A print job was canceled
because more than the
maximum number of Multisheet Fold was specified.
Specify fewer sheets for the Multi-sheet
Fold function. For details about the
maximum number of Multi-sheet Fold,
see "Specifications for Multi-Folding
Unit", Specifications.
When Messages Appear
Message
Cause
Solution
"Exceeded max. No. of
sheets possible for Ring
Binding."
The number of sheets per set
exceeds the limit for Ring
Binding.
Check the maximum number of sheets
that can be ring bound. For details
about the limit for Ring Binding, see
"Specifications for Ring Binder",
Specifications.
"File being stored exceeded
max. number of pages per
file. Copying will be
stopped."
The scanned originals have
too many pages to store as
one document.
Press [Exit], and then store again with
an appropriate number of pages.
"Magazine or Booklet mode You selected the
is not available due to mixed "Magazine" or "Booklet"
image mode."
function for originals
scanned using different
functions, such as copy and
printer.
Make sure originals to which the
"Magazine" or "Booklet" function is
applied are scanned using the same
function.
"Maximum number of sets is
n."
The number of copies
exceeds the maximum copy
quantity.
You can change the maximum copy
quantity from [Max. Copy Quantity] in
[General Features] under [Copier /
Document Server Features]. For details
about Max. Copy Quantity, see
"General Features", Preparation.
The number of scanned
originals exceed the number
of pages that can be stored
in memory.
Press [Print] to copy scanned originals
and cancel the scanning data. Press
[Clear Memory] to cancel the scanning
data and not copy.
"Perfect Binding is not
available for different paper
sizes."
Mixed Sizes mode is
specified.
Cancel Mixed Sizes mode, or specify
the Auto Reduce / Enlarge function.
"Perfect Binding is not
available with the settings."
Perfect Binding is not
possible under the settings
that you have specified.
Check the current settings. For details
about which functions are not
available when Perfect Binding is
specified, see "Perfect Binding", Basic
Operations.
("n" is replaced by a
variable.)
"Memory is full. nn originals
have been scanned. Press
[Print] to copy scanned
originals. Do not remove
remaining originals."
("n" is replaced by a
variable.)
447
11. Troubleshooting
Message
Cause
Solution
"Perfect Binding is not
available with this finishing
size."
Perfect Binding cannot be
used with the finishing size
that you have specified.
Select a proper finishing size. For
details about proper finishing sizes, see
"Specifications for Perfect Binder",
Specifications.
"Press [Continue] to scan
and copy remaining
originals."
The machine checked if the
Remove all copies, and then press
remaining originals should
[Continue] to continue copying. Press
be copied, after the scanned [Stop] to stop copying.
originals were printed.
"Ring Binding is not
available for different paper
sizes."
Mixed Sizes mode is
specified.
Cancel Mixed Sizes mode, or specify
the Auto Reduce / Enlarge function.
"Ring Binding is not
available with the selected
position."
Ring Binding cannot be
applied in the position that
you have specified.
Select a proper binding position. For
details about proper binding positions,
see "Ring Binding", Basic Operations.
"Ring Binding is not
available with the settings."
Ring Binding is not possible
under the settings that you
have specified.
Check the current settings. For details
about which functions are not
available when Ring Binding is
specified, see "Ring Binding", Basic
Operations.
"Ring Binding is not
available with this paper
size."
Ring Binding cannot be used
with the paper size that you
have specified.
Select a proper paper size. For details
about proper paper sizes, see
"Specifications for Ring Binder",
Specifications.
"Stapling capacity
exceeded."
The number of sheets per set
is over the staple capacity.
Check the stapler capacity. For details
about the stapler capacity, see
"Specifications for Finisher SR5110" or
"Specifications for Booklet Finisher
SR5120", Specifications.
"The selected folder is
locked. Please contact the
file administrator."
An attempt was made to edit
or use a locked folder.
For details about locked folders, see
"Unlocking Folders", Security Guide.
• If you set [Memory Full Auto Scan Restart] in [Input / Output] of User Tools to [On], even if the
memory becomes full, the memory overflow message will not be displayed. The machine will make
copies of the scanned originals first, and then automatically proceed to scan and to copy the
448
When Messages Appear
remaining originals. In this case, the resulting sorted pages will not be sequential. For details about
Memory Full Auto Scan Restart, see "Input / Output", Preparation.
Messages Displayed When You Use the Printer Function
This section describes the principal messages that appear on the control panel, error logs or reports. If
other messages appear, follow their instructions.
The messages related to the Document Server function are displayed on Type 1, 2 and 3 machines.
Messages displayed on the control panel when you use the printer function
• Before turning off the power, see page 103 "Turning On/Off the Power".
Message
Cause
Solution
"Exceeded the maximum
number of sheets possible
for Ring Binding with the
currently set binding ring
combs. Printing will be
stopped."
The ring combs currently
loaded are too small for the
number of sheets that need to
be bound.
Change to ring combs that are big
enough to bind the sheets.
"Exceeded max. No. of
sheets possible for Ring
Binding."
The number of sheets per set
exceeds the limit for Ring
Binding.
Check the maximum number of
sheets that can be ring bound. For
details about the limit for Ring
Binding, see "Specifications for Ring
Binder", Specifications.
"Hardware Problem:
Ethernet"
An error has occurred in the
Ethernet interface.
Turn off the power, and then back on
again. If the message appears
again, contact your service
representative.
"Hardware Problem: HDD"
An error has occurred in the
hard disk.
Turn off the power, and then back on
again. If the message appears
again, contact your service
representative.
"Hardware Problem: USB"
An error has occurred in the
USB interface.
Turn off the power, and then back on
again. If the message appears
again, contact your service
representative.
449
11. Troubleshooting
Message
Cause
Solution
"Hardware Problem:
WirelessCard"(A "wireless
LAN board" isreferred to as
a "wireless card".)
The wireless LAN board can
beaccessed, but an error
wasdetected.
Turn off the power, and thenconfirm
the wireless LAN boardis inserted
correctly. Afterconfirmation, turn on
the poweragain. If the message
appearsagain, contact your
servicerepresentative.
"Hardware Problem:
WirelessCard"(A "wireless
LAN board" isreferred to as
a "wireless card".)
The wireless LAN boardwas
connected while themachine
was turned on.
Turn off the power, and thenconfirm
the wireless LAN boardis inserted
correctly. Afterconfirmation, turn on
the poweragain. If the message
appearsagain, contact your
servicerepresentative.
"Load following paper in n.
To force print, select
another tray and press
[Continue]."
The printer driver settings are
incorrect or the tray does not
contain paper of the size
selected in the printer driver.
Check that the printer driver settings
are correct, and then load paper of
the size selected in the printer driver
into the input tray. For details about
how to change the paper size, see
page 204 "Changing the Paper
Size".
"Paper in staple tray. Open
cover and remove paper."
If printing is stopped before it is
finished, paper may remain in
the finisher.
Remove the paper remaining in the
finisher.
"Paper size and type are
mismatched. Select another
tray from the following and
press [Continue]. To cancel
job, press [Job Reset].
Paper size and type can
also be changed in User
Tools."
The printer driver settings are
incorrect or the tray does not
contain paper of the size or
type selected in the printer
driver.
("n" is replaced by a
variable.)
• Check that the printer driver
settings are correct, and then
load paper of the size selected
in the printer driver into the
input tray. For details about
how to change the paper size,
see page 204 "Changing the
Paper Size".
• Select the tray manually to
continue printing, or cancel a
print job. For details about how
to select the tray manually, or
cancel a print job, see "If an
Error Occurs with the Specified
Paper Size and Type", Basic
Operations.
450
When Messages Appear
Message
"Paper type of n is
mismatched. Select another
tray from the following and
press [Continue]. Paper
type can also be changed
in User Tools."
Cause
Solution
The type of the paper in the tray Select a tray containing paper that is
does not match the paper type the same type as the specified paper
specified in the printer driver.
type.
(A tray name is placed at
n.)
"Contains incorrect
setting(s) for Perfect
Binding."
Perfect Binding cannot be used
with the paper size that you
have specified.
Select a proper paper size. For
details about proper paper sizes,
see "Specifications for Perfect
Binder", Specifications.
"Printer font error."
An error has occurred in the
font settings.
Contact your service representative.
"Cannot print because both
the main and designation
(chapter) sheets are set to
the same paper tray. Press
[Job Reset] to cancel the
job. To print the job again
specify different trays."
The tray selected for other
pages is the same as the one
for slip sheets.
Reset the job. Be sure the tray you
select for slip sheets is not providing
paper for other pages.
When using direct print from a memory storage device
Message
Cause
Solution
"Exceeded the limit value
for total data size of the
selected files. Cannot select
more files."
• The size of the selected
file exceeds 1 GB.
Files or groups of files larger than 1 GB
cannot be printed.
• The total size of the
selected files exceeds 1
GB.
• When the total size of the multiple
files that are selected exceeds 1
GB, select files separately.
• When the size of the selected file
exceeds 1 GB, print from a
memory storage device using a
function other than the Direct
printing function.
You cannot select files of different
formats at the same time.
451
11. Troubleshooting
Message
"Unable to access the
specified memory storage
device."
Cause
• An error occurred when
the machine accessed
the memory storage
device or a file stored
on the memory storage
device.
Solution
Save the file to a different memory
storage device, and then print again.
• An error occurred when
the user used the Direct
printing function to print
from a memory storage
device.
Messages printed on the error logs or reports when you use the printer function
This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for the error messages that are printed on
the error logs or reports.
When print jobs are canceled
Message
452
Cause
Solution
"91: Error"
Printing was canceled by
Check that the data is valid.
the auto job cancel
function due to a command
error.
"A function which cannot
be used with Fold mode
was set. The job has been
cancelled."
A print job was canceled
because a function(s) not
available with Fold was
selected.
Cancel the function(s) not available
with Fold. For details about the
functions not available with Fold, see
page 31 "Fold".
"A function which cannot
be used with Perfect
Binding was set. The job
was cancelled."
A function not available
with Perfect Binding has
been selected.
For details about which functions are
not available with Perfect Binding,
see page 24 "Perfect Binding".
"A function which cannot
be used with Ring Binding
was set. The job was
cancelled."
A function not available
with Ring Binding has been
selected.
For details about which functions are
not available with Ring Binding, see
page 28 "Ring Binding".
When Messages Appear
Message
Cause
Solution
"A job via the network that
was not printed exists
because an error occurred.
It was stored as a job not
printed."
Jobs with errors were
stored because an error
occurred with a print job
via the network while the
error job storing function
was enabled.
Contact your administrator to check
whether the machine is connected
correctly to the network. For details
about how to check and print jobs
stored when print configuration
errors occur, see "Printing of
documents stored when print
configuration errors occur", Basic
Operations.
"Address book is currently
in use by another function.
Authentication has failed."
The address book remains
in use by another function,
and authentication query is
not possible.
Wait for a while and try again later.
"All remaining print vol.
allocated to other cent.
managed client. Job was
cancelled."
The job slot information
All job slots are occupied by other
could not be obtained, and devices. Check the status of the client
the job was canceled.
machine.
"An error occurred with the
interface box. The job has
been cancelled."
There is a problem with the
interface box.
Check the interface box settings.
"Communication error with
central management server
has occurred. The job has
been cancelled."
The job was canceled
because a Central
Management
communication error
occurred.
Check the status of the Central
Management machine.
"Error occurred while
processing an
Unauthorized Copy
Prevention job. Job
cancelled."
You tried to store a file in
the Document Server when
the [Unauthorized Copy
Prevention] was specified.
On the printer driver, select a job
type other than [Document Server] in
"Job Type:" or deselect
[Unauthorized Copy Prevention].
"Error occurred while
processing an
Unauthorized Copy
Prevention job. Job
cancelled."
The [Enter User Text:] field
on the [Unauthorized
Copy Prevention for
Pattern Details] screen is
blank.
On the printer driver's [Detailed
Settings] tab, click [Effects] in
"Menu:". Select [Unauthorized Copy
Prevention], and then click [Details...]
to display [Unauthorized Copy
Prevention for Pattern Details]. Enter
text in [Enter User Text:].
453
11. Troubleshooting
Message
454
Cause
Solution
"Error occurred while
processing an
Unauthorized Copy
Prevention job. Job
cancelled."
The resolution is set to a
value less than 600 dpi
when [Unauthorized Copy
Prevention] is specified.
On the printer driver, set the
resolution to 600 dpi or higher, or
cancel [Unauthorized Copy
Prevention].
"Error occurred while
processing an
Unauthorized Copy
Prevention job. Job
cancelled."
A color other than black
Specify black as the pattern color.
was specified as the
pattern color when a
command was used to
specify Unauthorized
Copy Prevention for
Pattern for a document and
print it.
"Error occurred while
processing an
Unauthorized Copy
Prevention job. Job
cancelled."
In [Administrator Tools]
under [System Settings],
priority was specified to be
given to Unauthorized
Copy Prevention Printing
set on this machine.
Cancel Unauthorized Copy
Prevention Printing for the printer
driver. For details about how to
cancel the settings, see the printer
driver Help.
"Collate Cancelled"
Collate was canceled.
Turn off the power, and then back on
again. If the message appears
again, contact your service
representative.
"You reach the usage limit.
This job has been
cancelled."
The number of pages the
user is permitted to print
has been exceeded.
For details about print volume use
limitation, see "Managing Print
Volume per user", Security Guide.
"Exceeded the maximum
number of multi-sheet fold.
The job has been
cancelled."
The maximum number of
Multi-sheet Fold was
exceeded.
Specify fewer sheets for the Multisheet Fold function. For details about
the maximum number of Multi-sheet
Fold, see "Specifications for MultiFolding Unit", Specifications.
"Fold is not available with
the settings. The job has
been cancelled."
Fold function is not
available with the current
settings.
Check the paper settings. For details
about the limitations of the Fold
function, see page 31 "Fold".
"Receiving data failed."
Data reception was
aborted.
Resend the data.
When Messages Appear
Message
Cause
Solution
"Sending data failed."
The machine received a
command to stop
transmission from the
printer driver.
Check if the computer is working
correctly.
"Staple error occurred. The
job has been cancelled."
The job was canceled by
the job reset condition for
stapling.
Check the number of sheets to be
stapled together, and then try
printing again.
"Job cancelled because
mixture of paper sizes
detected."
The job was cancelled
because it contained
pages of mixed paper
sizes.
Open the front cover of the stacker,
and remove the paper.
"The job was cancelled
because the specified
settings are not applicable
for Booklet."
The job was cancelled
because the settings not
applicable to Booklet
printing were specified.
Check the settings for Booklet
printing.
"The selected paper size is
not supported. This job has
been cancelled."
Job reset is automatically
performed if the specified
paper size is incorrect.
Specify the correct paper size, and
then print the file again.
"The selected paper type is
not supported. This job has
been cancelled."
Job reset is automatically
performed if the specified
paper type is incorrect.
Specify the correct paper type, and
then print the file again.
"Z-fold error."
Z-folding was canceled.
Check the tray, paper orientation,
print orientation, and Z-fold settings
again.
When there is a problem with the print settings
Message
"Booklet/Half Fold Error"
Cause
The job was canceled
because you specified invalid
settings for saddle stitching or
half fold.
Solution
Check the settings for saddle
stitching or half fold.
455
11. Troubleshooting
Message
Cause
Solution
"Classification Code is
incorrect."
The classification code has not
been entered, or the
classification code has been
entered incorrectly.
Enter the correct classification
code.
"Classification Code is
incorrect."
The classification code is not
supported with the printer
driver.
Select [Optional] for
classification code. For details
about how to specify
classification code settings,
see "Configuring classification
codes", Basic Operations.
"Duplex Cancelled"
Duplex printing was canceled.
• Select an appropriate
paper size for the duplex
function. For details
about paper, see
"Specifications for the
Main Unit",
Specifications.
• Change the setting for
"Apply Duplex" in [Tray
Paper Settings] to enable
duplex printing for the
paper tray. For details
about setting "Apply
Duplex", see page 269
"Tray Paper Settings".
456
"Exceeded Max. Pages
(Collate)"
The number of pages exceeds Reduce the number of pages
the maximum number of sheets to print.
that you can use Collate with.
"Exceeded the maximum
number of multi-sheet fold
(Half Fold)."
The maximum number of multi- For details about the maximum
sheet folds (Half Fold) was
number of multi-sheet folds
exceeded.
(Half Fold), see page 31
"Fold".
"Output Tray Changed"
The output tray was changed
because the paper size of the
specified output tray is limited.
Specify the proper output tray.
When Messages Appear
Message
Cause
Solution
"Perfect Binding is not
available with the settings."
Perfect Binding is not possible
under the settings that you
have specified.
Check the current settings. For
details about which functions
are not available when Perfect
Binding is specified, see
page 24 "Perfect Binding".
"Perfect Binding is not
available with this number of
sheets."
Perfect Binding is not possible
with the number of sheets that
you have specified.
• Check the number of
sheets.
• Specify the proper
number of sheets.
For details about the proper
number of sheets, see
"Specifications for Perfect
Binder", Specifications.
"Print Overrun"
Images were discarded while
printing.
Select a lower resolution on
the printer driver. For details
about how to change the
resolution setting, see the
printer driver Help.
"Punch Cancelled"
Punch printing was canceled.
Check the paper orientation,
print orientation, and then
punch position. Certain
settings can produce print
results that might not be as
expected.
"Ring Binding is not available
with the settings."
Ring Binding is not possible
under the settings that you
have specified.
Check the current settings. For
details about which functions
are not available when Ring
Binding is specified, see
page 28 "Ring Binding".
"Staple Cancelled"
Stapling printing was
canceled.
Check the paper orientation,
paper quantity, print
orientation, and staple
position. Certain settings can
produce print results that might
not be as expected.
457
11. Troubleshooting
When documents cannot be stored in the Document Server
Message
"Document Server is not
available to use. Cannot
store."
Cause
You cannot use the
Document Server function.
Solution
For details about using Document
Server function, contact your
administrator.
For details about how to set
permissions, see "Limiting Available
Functions", Security Guide.
"Exceeded max. capacity
of Document Server.
Cannot store."
The hard disk became full
after a file was stored.
"Exceeded max. number of The maximum file capacity
files of Document Server.
of the Document Server
Cannot store."
was exceeded.
Delete some of the files stored in the
Document Server or reduce the size
that you want to send.
Delete some of the files stored in the
Document Server.
"Exceeded max. number of While you were using the
Delete Hold Print files (automatic) or
files. (Auto)"
error job store function to
unneeded files stored on the
store Normal Print jobs as
machine.
Hold Print files, the
maximum file capacity for
file storage or Hold Print
file management
(automatic) was exceeded.
458
"Exceeded max. number of The maximum page
pages of Document Server. capacity of the Document
Cannot store."
Server was exceeded.
Delete some of the files stored in the
Document Server or reduce the
number of pages that you want to
send.
"Exceeded max. number of While you were using the
pages. (Auto)"
error job store function to
store Normal Print jobs as
Hold Print files, the
maximum page capacity
was exceeded.
Delete unneeded files stored on the
machine.
"Job cancelled because
capture file could not be
stored: Exceeded max.
memory."
Delete the files stored in the
Document Server or reduce the file
size to be sent.
The hard disk became full
after a file was stored.
Reduce the number of pages to print.
When Messages Appear
Message
Cause
Solution
"Job cancelled because
capture file could not be
stored: Exceeded max.
files."
The maximum file capacity
of the Document Server
was exceeded.
Delete the files stored in the
Document Server.
"Job cancelled because
capture file could not be
stored: Exceeded max
pages per file."
The maximum page
capacity of the Document
Server was exceeded.
Delete some of the files stored in the
Document Server or reduce the
number of pages that you want to
send.
"The specified folder in
The specified folder is
Document Server is locked. locked.
Cannot store."
Unlock the folder or specify another
folder number that can be used. For
details about locked folders, see
"Unlocking Folders", Security Guide.
When there is not enough free hard disk space
Message
Cause
Solution
"HDD Full"
When you were printing
with the PostScript 3 printer
driver, the hard disk
capacity for fonts and
forms was exceeded.
Delete unneeded forms or fonts
registered on the machine.
"HDD Full"
The hard disk became full
while you were printing a
Sample Print, Locked Print,
Hold Print, or Stored Print
file.
Delete unneeded files stored on the
machine.
The hard disk became full
while you were using the
error job store function to
store Normal Print jobs as
Hold Print files.
Delete unneeded files stored on the
machine.
"HDD is full. (Auto)"
Alternatively, reduce the data size of
the Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold
Print, or Stored Print file.
Alternatively, reduce the data size of
the Temporary Print file and/or the
Stored Print file.
459
11. Troubleshooting
When there is not enough memory
Message
"84: Error"
Cause
There is no work area
available for image
processing.
Solution
Decrease the number of files sent to
the machine.
When there is a problem with a parameter
Message
"86: Error"
Cause
Parameters of the control
code are invalid.
Solution
Check the print settings.
When the user lacks privileges to perform an operation
Message
460
Cause
Solution
"No response from the
server. Authentication has
failed."
A timeout occurred while
connection to the server
was being established for
LDAP authentication or
Windows Authentication.
Check the status of the server.
"Printing privileges have
not been set for this
document."
You have no privileges to
print the PDF document
you tried to print.
Contact the owner of the document.
"You do not have a
privilege to use this
function. This job has been
cancelled."
The entered login user
name or login password is
not correct.
Check that the user name and
password are correct.
"You do not have a
privilege to use this
function. This job has been
cancelled."
The logged in user is not
allowed to use the selected
function.
For details about how to set
permissions, see "Limiting Available
Functions", Security Guide.
When Messages Appear
When a user cannot be registered
Message
Cause
Solution
"Auto-registration of user
information has failed."
Automatic registration of
information for LDAP
Authentication or Windows
Authentication failed
because the Address Book
is full.
For details about automatic
registration of user information, see
"Auto Registration to the Address
Book", Security Guide.
"Information for user
authentication is already
registered for another
user."
The user name for LDAP
For details about user authentication,
was already registered in a see "Configuring User
different server with a
Authentication", Security Guide.
different ID, and a
duplication of the user
name occurred due to a
switching of domains
(servers), and so on.
When other errors occur
Message
Cause
"98: Error"
The machine could not
access the hard disk
correctly.
"Compressed Data Error."
The printer detected
corrupt compressed data.
Solution
Turn off the power, and then back on
again. If the message appears
frequently, contact your service
representative.
• Check the connection between
the computer and the printer.
• Check that the program you
used to compress the data is
functioning correctly.
"Data Storage Error"
You tried to print a Sample
Print, Locked Print, Hold
Print, or Stored Print file, or
to store a file in the
Document Server when the
hard disk was
malfunctioning.
Contact your service representative.
461
11. Troubleshooting
Message
Cause
Solution
"Error has occurred."
A syntax error, etc.,
occurred.
Check that the PDF file is valid.
"Exceeded Max. Stored
Files"
While printing a Sample
Print, Locked Print, Hold
Print, or Stored Print file,
the maximum file capacity
was exceeded.
Delete unneeded files stored on the
machine.
"Exceeded Max. Stored
Pages"
While printing a Sample
Print, Locked Print, Hold
Print, or Stored Print file,
the maximum page
capacity was exceeded.
Delete unneeded files stored on the
machine.
"File system is full."
PDF file does not print out
because the capacity of
the file system is full.
Delete all unnecessary files from the
hard disk, or decrease the file size
sent to the machine.
"Folding Unit Error."
There is a problem with the
multi-folding unit.
Contact your service representative.
"I/O buffer overflow."
An input buffer overflow
occurred.
Reduce the number of pages to print.
• In [Printer Features], under
[Host Interface], select [I/O
Buffer], and then set the
maximum buffer size to a larger
value.
• Reduce the number of files
being sent to the machine.
"Insufficient Memory"
462
A memory allocation error
occurred.
PCL 6
On the printer driver's [Detailed
Settings] tab, click [Print
Quality:Advanced] in "Menu:",
and then select [Raster] in the
"Vector/Raster:" list. In some
cases, it will take a long time to
complete a print job.
When Messages Appear
Message
Cause
Solution
"Memory Retrieval Error"
A memory allocation error
occurred.
Turn off the power and then back on
again. If the message appears
again, replace the RAM. For details
about replacing the RAM, contact
your service representative.
"Paper Type Error"
The specified paper type
name is not set in the
machine.
Re-obtain the latest paper type
information set in the machine.
If printing does not start, contact your service representative.
• The contents of errors may be printed on the Configuration Page. Check the Configuration
Page in conjunction with the error log. For details about how to print the Configuration Page,
see "List / Test Print", Preparation.
Messages Displayed When You Use the Scanner Function
The messages related to the scanner function are displayed on Type 1, 2 and 3 machines.
Messages displayed on the control panel when you use the scanner function
This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for the error messages that appear on the
control panel. If a message not described here appears, act according to the message.
Message
"Cannot find the specified
path. Please check the
settings."
Cause
Solution
The destination computer name
or folder name is invalid.
Check whether the computer name
and the folder name for the
destination are correct.
463
11. Troubleshooting
Message
"Cannot find the specified
path. Please check the
settings."
Cause
An antivirus program or a
firewall is preventing the
machine from connecting to
your computer.
Solution
• Antivirus programs and
firewalls can prevent client
computers from establishing
connection with this machine.
• If you are using antivirus
software, add the program to
the exclusion list in the
application settings. For
details about how to add
programs to the exclusion list,
see the antivirus software
Help.
• To prevent a firewall from
blocking the connection,
register the machine's IP
address in the firewall's IP
address exclusion settings.
For details about the
procedure for excluding an IP
address, see your operating
system's Help.
464
"Exceeded max. number of
alphanumeric characters for
the path."
The maximum number of
specifiable alphanumeric
characters in a path has been
exceeded.
Check the maximum number of
characters which can be entered,
and then enter it again. For details
about the maximum enterable
number of characters, see "Values
of Various Set Items for
Transmission/Storage Function",
Preparation.
"Exceeded max. number of
alphanumeric characters."
The maximum enterable number
of alphanumeric characters has
been exceeded.
Check the maximum number of
characters which can be entered,
and then enter it again. For details
about the maximum enterable
number of characters, see "Values
of Various Set Items for
Transmission/Storage Function",
Preparation.
When Messages Appear
Message
Cause
Solution
"Exceeded the maximum
number of OCR jobs that can
be on standby for storing,
please wait. Try again after
storing of the current job has
completed."
The maximum allowable
number of jobs on standby was
exceeded because large
quantities of documents were
stored by the OCR function.
Up to 100 jobs can be placed on
standby by the OCR function.
Scan the next document after the
current jobs have finished being
stored.
"File types have been
automatically set for some
files because multiple files
were selected."
If there are selected stored
documents which cannot be
converted to a specified file
format, those documents are
automatically converted to a
convertible format before they
are transmitted.
For details about the file formats
used to transmit stored documents,
see page 406 "Sending a Stored
File".
"Programmed. Cannot
program the destination(s)
that is not programmed in the
address book."
The destinations that were
selected while registered to the
program contain a folder
destination for which one of the
following destinations is set:
WSD destinations and DSM
destinations cannot be registered
to the program because they
cannot be registered in the
address book. For manually
entered destinations, register the
destinations in the address book,
and then try to register them to the
program again.
manually entered destination,
WSD destination, or DSM
destination
"Scanner records are full.
Please check Scanner
Features."
"Print & Delete Scanner
Records" in [Scanner Features]
is set to [Do not Print: Disable
Send], and Scanner Records
are full.
Print or delete Scanner Records.
For details about Scanner
Features, see "General Settings",
Preparation.
465
11. Troubleshooting
Message
"The entered file name
contains invalid character(s).
Enter the file name again
using any of the following 1
byte characters. "0 to 9", "A
to Z", "a to z", ". - _"
Cause
The file name contains a
character that cannot be used.
Solution
• Check the file name set at the
time of scanning. For details
about characters that can be
used in file names, see
"Specifying the file name",
Basic Operations.
• Check the file name specified
at the time of scanning. The
file name specified in the
Sending Scan Files to Folders
function cannot contain the
following characters:
\/:*?"<>|
The file name cannot start or end
with a period ".".
466
"The program is recalled.
Cannot recall the
destination(s) for which
access privileges are
required."
The currently logged-in user
does not have permission to
view the destination that was
registered in the program.
For details about how to set
permissions, see "Restricting
Usage of the Destination List",
Security Guide.
"The program is recalled.
Cannot recall the
destination(s) that is deleted
from the address book."
The destination stored in the
program could not be recalled
because it was deleted from the
address book.
Enter the destination directly to
send data separately.
"The program is recalled.
Cannot recall the folder
destination(s) with protection
code(s)."
The folder destinations for which A destination for which the
the protection code was set
protection code is set cannot be
were registered in the program. recalled by the program. Cancel
the protection code setting or send
scanned files to the destination
separately.
When Messages Appear
When documents cannot be scanned properly
Message
"All the pages are detected
as blank. No file was
created."
Cause
No PDF file was created
because all the pages of the
scanned original were detected
as blank when [On] is specified
for [Delete Blank Page] in [OCR
Settings] in [Send File Type /
Name].
Solution
Check whether the original is set
upside down.
Change [OCR Scanned PDF:
Blank Page Sensitivity] in [Scanner
Features] to "Sensitivity Level 1".
"Check original's orientation." Originals may sometimes not be Change the orientation of the
scanned depending on a
original, and then scan the original
combination of items such as the again.
specified scaling factor and
document size.
"Exceeded max. data
capacity."
The scanned data exceeded
maximum data capacity.
Specify the scan size and
resolution again. Note that it may
not be possible to scan very large
originals at a high resolution. For
details about the settings for the
scanner function, see "Relationship
between Resolution and Scan
Size", Preparation.
The scanned original exceeded
maximum data capacity.
Specify the scan size and
resolution again. Note that it may
not be possible to scan very large
originals at a high resolution. For
details about the settings for the
scanner function, see "Relationship
between Resolution and Scan
Size", Preparation.
The data being scanned is too
large for the scale ratio
specified in [Specify Size].
Reduce the resolution or [Specify
Size] value, and then scan the
original again.
"Check scanning resolution,
then press Start key again."
"Exceeded max. data
capacity."
"Check the scanning
resolution, then reset n
original(s)."
("n" in the message
represents a variable.)
"Exceeded max. data
capacity."
"Check the resolution and the
ratio and then press the Start
key again."
467
11. Troubleshooting
Message
Solution
"Exceeded max. number of
files which can be used in
Document Server at the same
time."
The maximum number of files
that can be stored in the
Document Server has been
exceeded.
Check the files stored by the other
functions, and then delete
unneeded files. For details about
how to delete files, see "Deleting
Stored Documents", Basic
Operations.
"Not all of the image will be
scanned."
If the scaling factor specified in
"Specify Reproduction Ratio" is
too large, part of the image
may be lost.
Reduce the scaling factor in
"Specify Reproduction Ratio", and
then try to scan the original again.
Using "Specify Reproduction
Ratio" to scale down a large
document may cause part of the
image to be lost.
Specify a large size in [Specify
Size], and then scan the original
again.
The data being scanned is too
small for the scale ratio
specified in [Specify Size].
Specify a higher resolution or a
large size in [Specify Size], and
then scan the original again.
"Check the ratio and then
press the Start key again."
"Not all of the image will be
scanned."
"Check the ratio and then
press the Start key again."
"The size of the scanned data
is too small."
"Check the resolution and the
ratio and then press the Start
key again."
468
Cause
If displaying the entire image is not
necessary, press the [Start] key to
start scanning with the current
scaling factor.
If displaying the entire image is not
necessary, press the [Start] key to
start scanning with the current
scaling factor.
When Messages Appear
When documents cannot be scanned because the memory is full
Message
Cause
Solution
"Memory is full. Cannot scan.
The scanned data will be
deleted."
Because of insufficient hard disk
space, the first page could not
be scanned.
Try one of the following measures:
• Wait for a while, and then
retry the scan operation.
• Reduce the scan area or
scanning resolution. For
details about changing scan
area and scanning
resolution, see "Scan
Settings", Basic Operations.
• Delete unneeded stored files.
For details about how to
delete stored files, see
"Deleting a stored file", Basic
Operations.
"Memory is full. Do you want
to store scanned file?"
Because there is not enough
free hard disk space in the
machine for storing in the
Document Server, only some of
the pages could be scanned.
Specify whether or not to use the
data.
"Memory is full. Scanning has
been cancelled. Press [Send]
to send the scanned data, or
press [Cancel] to delete."
Because there is not enough
free hard disk space in the
machine for sending by e-mail
while data is being stored in the
Document Server, only some of
the pages could be scanned.
Specify whether or not to use the
data.
When data transmission fails
Message
"Authentication with the
destination has failed. Check
settings. To check the current
status, press [Scanned Files
Status]."
Cause
The entered user name or
password was invalid.
Solution
• Check that the user name and
password are correct.
• Check that the ID and
password for the destination
folder are correct.
• A password of 128 or more
characters may not be
recognized.
469
11. Troubleshooting
Message
Cause
Solution
"Exceeded max. email size.
Sending email has been
cancelled. Check [Max.
Email Size] in Scanner
Features."
The file size per page has
reached the maximum e-mail
size specified in [Scanner
Features].
Change the scanner features
settings as follows:
"Sending the data has failed.
The data will be resent later."
A network error has occurred
Wait until sending is retried
and a file was not sent correctly. automatically after the preset
interval. If sending fails again,
contact your administrator.
"Transmission has failed.
Insufficient memory in the
destination hard disk. To
check the current status, press
[Scanned Files Status]."
Transmission has failed. There
was not enough free space on
the hard disk of the SMTP
server, FTP server, or client
computer at the destination.
Allocate sufficient space.
"Transmission has failed. To
check the current status, press
[Scanned Files Status]."
While a file was being sent, a
network error occurred and the
file could not be sent correctly.
If the same message appears
again after scanning again, the
cause could be a mixed network,
or network settings were changed
during WSD scanner transmission.
For details about network error,
contact your administrator.
• Increase the e-mail size limit
in [Max. Email Size].
• Change the [Divide & Send
Email] setting to [Yes (per
Page)] or [Yes (per Max.
Size)]. For details about these
settings, see "Send Settings",
Preparation.
When data cannot be sent because a currently used file is selected
Message
470
Cause
Solution
"Selected file is currently in
use. File name cannot be
changed."
You cannot change the name of
a file whose status is
"Waiting...".
Cancel transmission ("Waiting..."
status cleared), and then change
the file name.
"Selected file is currently in
use. Password cannot be
changed."
You cannot change the
password of a file whose status
is "Waiting...".
Cancel transmission ("Waiting..."
status cleared), and then change
the password.
When Messages Appear
Message
Cause
Solution
"Selected file is currently in
use. User name cannot be
changed."
You cannot change the sender's
name whose status is
"Waiting...".
Cancel transmission ("Waiting..."
status cleared), and then change
the user name.
"Some of selected files are
currently in use. They could
not be deleted."
You cannot delete a file which is Cancel transmission ("Waiting..."
waiting to be transmitted
status cleared), and then delete
("Waiting..." status displayed).
the file.
When data cannot be sent because there are too many documents or pages
Message
Cause
Solution
"Exceeded max. number of
The file being stored has
pages per file. Do you want
exceeded the maximum number
to store the scanned pages as of pages for one file.
1 file?"
Specify whether to store the data
or not. Scan the pages that were
not scanned, and then store them
as a new file. For details about
storing files, see page 402
"Storing and Saving the Scanned
Documents".
"Exceeded max. number of
stored files. Cannot send the
scanned data as capturing
files is unavailable."
Too many files are waiting to be
sent.
Try again after they have been
sent.
"Exceeded maximum number
of file to store. Delete all
unnecessary files."
Too many files are waiting to be
sent.
Try again after they have been
sent.
When the WSD scanner function cannot be used
Message
Cause
Solution
"Cannot communicate with
PC. Contact the
administrator."
WSD (Device) protocol or WSD For details about how to enable or
(Scanner) protocol is disabled.
disable the WSD protocol, see
"Enabling and Disabling
Protocols", Security Guide.
"Cannot start scanning
because communication was
failed."
Scan Profile is not set on the
client computer.
Set Scan Profile. For details about
how to do this, see "Creating a
new scan profile", Basic
Operations.
471
11. Troubleshooting
Message
Cause
Solution
"Cannot start scanning
because communication was
failed."
The [Take no action] setting has
been selected on the client
computer, forcing the client
computer to remain inactive
when it receives scan data.
Open scanner properties, click the
[Events] tab, and then select [Start
this program] as the computer's
response when it receives scan
data. For details, see your
operating system's Help.
"Cannot start scanning.
Check the setting(s) on the
PC."
The Scan Profile might be
incorrectly configured.
Check the Scan Profile
configuration.
"Could not send the data
because the PC timed out
before it was sent."
A time out occurred when WSD
Scanner was used. Time outs
occur when too much time
passes between scanning an
original and sending its data.
The followings are likely causes
of time outs:
• Too many originals per set.
• Misfed originals.
• Reduce the number of
originals, and then scan
again.
• Remove any misfed original,
and then scan again.
• Use Scanner Journal to check
there are no jobs awaiting
transmission, and then scan
again.
• Transmission of other jobs.
When documents cannot be stored on a memory storage device
472
Message
Cause
Solution
"Cannot write on the memory
storage device because
remaining free space is
insufficient."
The memory storage device is
full and scan data cannot be
saved. Even if the memory
storage device appears to have
sufficient free space, data might
not be saved if the maximum
number of files that can be
saved is exceeded.
• Replace the memory storage
device.
"Cannot write on the memory
storage device because the
device is write-protected."
The memory storage device is
write-protected.
• If the document is scanned as
single-page or divided into
multiple pages, data already
written to the memory storage
device is saved as is. Replace
the memory storage device,
and then press [Retry] to save
the remaining data, or press
[Cancel] to redo the scan.
Unlock the write-protection on the
memory storage device.
When Messages Appear
Message
Cause
Solution
"Cannot write on the memory
storage device. Check the
memory storage device and
machine settings."
The memory storage device is
faulty, or the file name contains
a character that cannot be used.
• Check to see if the memory
storage device is defective.
• Check the memory storage
device. It might be
unformatted, or its format
might be incompatible with
this machine.
• Check the file name set at the
time of scanning. For details
about the characters that can
be used in file names, see
"Specifying the file name",
Basic Operations.
"Exceeded max. page
capacity per file. Press
[Write] to write the scanned
data to the memory storage
device, or press [Cancel] to
delete."
The scan could not be
completed because the
maximum number of pages that
can be scanned by this machine
was exceeded during the
scanned data was written to the
memory storage device.
Reduce the number of documents
to be written to the memory
storage device, and then try
again.
"Memory is full. Press [Write]
to write the current scanned
data to the memory storage
device, or press [Cancel] to
delete."
The scan could not be
completed because there was
insufficient hard disk memory
when the scanned data was
saved to the memory storage
device.
Specify whether or not to save the
scanned document to the memory
storage device.
Messages displayed on the client computer
This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for the main error messages displayed on
the client computer when you use the TWAIN driver. If a message not described here appears, follow
the instruction.
473
11. Troubleshooting
Message
Cause
Solution
"Any of Login User Name,
Login Password or Driver
Encryption Key is incorrect."
The entered login user
name, password, or driver
encryption key was invalid.
Check your login user name, login
password, or driver encryption key,
and then enter them correctly. For
details about login user name, login
password, and driver encryption key,
see "Configuring User Authentication"
and "Enabling and Disabling
Protocols", Security Guide.
"Authentication succeeded.
However, the access
privileges for scanner
function has been denied."
The logged in user name
does not have permissions
for scanner function.
For details about how to set
permissions, see "Limiting Available
Functions", Security Guide.
"Cannot add any more
scanning mode."
The maximum number of
registrable scan modes has
been exceeded.
The maximum number of modes that
can be stored is 100. Delete unneeded
modes.
"Cannot detect the paper
size of the original. Specify
the scanning size."
The set original was
misaligned.
"Cannot specify any more
scanning area."
The maximum number of
registrable scan modes has
been exceeded.
"Clear Misfeed(s) in ADF."
A paper misfeed has
occurred inside the ADF.
• Place the original correctly.
• Specify the scan size.
• When placing an original directly
on the exposure glass, the lifting/
lowering action of the ADF
triggers the automatic original
size detection process. Lift the
ADF 30 degrees or more.
The maximum number of scanning
areas that can be stored is 100. Delete
unneeded scanning areas.
• Remove the jammed originals,
and then insert them again. For
details about jammed paper, see
page 517 "Removing Jammed
Paper".
• When a misfeed occurs, replace
the jammed originals.
• Check whether the originals are
suitable to be scanned by the
machine.
474
When Messages Appear
Message
"Error has occurred in the
scanner driver."
Cause
Solution
An error has occurred in the
driver.
• Check whether the network cable
is connected correctly to the client
computer.
• Check whether the Ethernet board
of the client computer is
recognized correctly by
Windows.
• Check whether the client
computer can use the TCP/IP
protocol.
"Error has occurred in the
scanner."
The application-specified
scan conditions have
exceeded the setting range
of the machine.
Check whether the scanning settings
made with the application exceed the
setting range of the machine.
"Fatal error has occurred in
the scanner."
An unrecoverable machine
error has occurred.
An unrecoverable machine error has
occurred. Contact your service
representative.
"Insufficient memory. Close
all other applications, then
restart scanning."
Memory is insufficient.
• Close all the unnecessary
applications running on the client
computer.
• Uninstall the TWAIN driver, and
then reinstall it after restarting the
computer.
475
11. Troubleshooting
Message
Cause
"Insufficient memory. Reduce Scanner memory is
the scanning area."
insufficient.
Solution
• Reset the scan size.
• Lower the resolution.
• Set with no compression. For
details about the settings, see
TWAIN driver Help.
The problem may be due to the
following:
• Scanning cannot be performed if
large values are set for brightness
when halftone or high resolution is
used. For details about the
relationship between scan
settings, see "Relationship
between Resolution and Scan
Size", Preparation.
• If a misfeed occurs, you might not
scan an original. Remove the
misfeed, and then scan the
original again.
"Invalid Winsock version.
Please use version 1.1 or
higher."
You are using an invalid
version of Winsock.
"No response from the
scanner."
The machine or client
computer is not connected to
the network correctly.
Install the operating system of the
computer or copy Winsock from the
operating system CD-ROM.
• Check whether the machine or
client computer is connected to
the network correctly.
• Disable the client computer's own
firewall. For details about firewall,
see Windows Help.
"No response from the
scanner."
476
The network is crowded.
Wait for a while, and then connect to
the network again.
When Messages Appear
Message
"Scanner is in use for other
function. Please wait."
Cause
A function of the machine
other than the Scanner
function is being used such
as the Copier function.
Solution
• Wait for a while, and then
connect to the network again.
• Cancel the job that is being
processed. Press the [Stop] key.
Follow the instructions in the
message that appears and exit
the function that is running.
"Scanner is not available on
the specified device."
The TWAIN scanner function Contact your service representative.
cannot be used on this
machine.
"Scanner is not ready.
Check the scanner and the
options."
The ADF cover is open.
Check whether the ADF cover is
closed.
"The name is already in use.
Check the registered
names."
You tried to register a name
that is already in use.
Use another name.
When there is a problem connecting to the scanner
Message
Cause
Solution
"Cannot connect to the
scanner. Check the network
Access Mask settings in User
Tools."
An access mask is set.
For details about an access mask,
contact your administrator.
"Cannot find "XXX" scanner
used for the previous scan.
"YYY" will be used instead."
The main power of the
previously used scanner is
not set to "On".
Check whether the main power of the
scanner used for the previous scan is
turned on.
("XXX" and "YYY" indicate
scanner names.)
477
11. Troubleshooting
Message
"Cannot find "XXX" scanner
used for the previous scan.
"YYY" will be used instead."
Cause
The machine is not
connected to the network
correctly.
("XXX" and "YYY" indicate
scanner names.)
Solution
• Check that the previously used
scanner is connected to the
network correctly.
• Cancel the personal firewall of
the client computer. For details
about firewall, see Windows
Help.
• Use an application such as telnet
to make sure SNMPv1 or
SNMPv2 is set as the machine's
protocol. For details about how to
check this, see "Remote
Maintenance Using telnet",
Device Management.
• Select the scanner used for the
previous scan.
"Cannot find the scanner.
Check if the scanner main
power is on."
The machine's power is off.
Turn on the power.
"Communication error has
occurred on the network."
A communication error has
occurred on the network.
Check whether the client computer can
use the TCP/IP protocol.
"Scanner is not available.
Check the scanner
connection status."
The machine is not
connected to the network
correctly.
• Check whether the machine is
connected to the network
correctly.
• Cancel the personal firewall
function of the client computer.
For details about firewall, see
Windows Help.
• Use an application such as telnet
to make sure SNMPv1 or
SNMPv2 is set as the machine's
protocol. For details about how to
check this, see "Remote
Maintenance Using telnet",
Device Management.
478
When Messages Appear
Message
"Scanner is not available.
Check the scanner
connection status."
Cause
Network communication is
not available because the
machine's IP address could
not be obtained from the
host name. If only "IPv6" is
set to [Active], the IPv6
address might not be
obtained.
Solution
• Check whether the machine's host
name is specified in the Network
Connection Tool. For the WIA
driver, check the [Network
Connection] tab in the properties.
• Use Web Image Monitor to set
"LLMNR" of "IPv6" to [Active].
When Other Messages Appear
The messages related to scan function, destination list, user certificate and LDAP server are displayed on
Type 1, 2 and 3 machines.
Message
Cause
Solution
"A mainframe
communication error has
occurred with an extended
option. Check the status
indicator on the interface
box."
An error occurred when the
machine tried to
communicate with the
interface box.
• Check the status indicator on the
interface box.
"An extended option error
has occurred. Check the
status of the extended
option."
An error has occurred in the
interface box.
Check the status of the interface box,
and then resolve the error.
"Cannot connect with the
wireless card. Turn the main
power switch off, then check
the card."
• The wireless LAN
board was not inserted
when the machine was
turned on.
(A "wireless LAN board" is
referred to as a "wireless
card".)
• The wireless LAN
board was pulled out
after the machine was
turned on.
Turn off the power, and then confirm
the wireless LAN board is inserted
correctly. After confirmation, turn on
the power again. If the message
appears again, contact your service
representative.
• Check the connection between
the machine and the interface
box.
• The settings are not
updated although the
unit is detected.
479
11. Troubleshooting
Message
Cause
Solution
"Clean the scanning glass.
(Located next to the
exposure glass.)"
The scanning glass or guide
plate of the ADF is dirty.
Clean the scanning glass or guide
plate. See page 541 "Maintaining
Your Machine".
"Failed to read the PDF file."
There is a possibility that the
PDF version is not supported
by the browser’s PDF viewer
or an unsupported
encryption level is specified.
With this machine’s browser PDF files
other than those whose versions and
encryption levels are specified below
cannot be viewed.
• PDF version: 1.3-1.7
• PDF encryption level: 128Bit AES
or 256Bit AES
"Following output tray is full.
Remove paper."
The output tray is full.
• Remove paper from the output
tray to resume printing. If paper is
delivered to the finisher shift tray
and you want to prevent paper
from falling off the tray, press the
[Stop] key to suspend printing,
and then remove the paper. Press
[Continue] on the control panel to
resume printing.
• When using the multi-folding unit,
the number of sheets per paper
stack depends on the paper type
and fold type.
"Internal cooling fan is
active."
480
Large print runs will cause
the machine's interior to heat
up, triggering the cooling
fan.
The fan will emit noise, but this is
normal and the machine will be
operable while the fan is running.
The amount of paper that can be
printed and the total operation time
until the fan starts running depends on
the temperature of the location at
which the machine is installed.
When Messages Appear
Message
"Self checking..."
Cause
The machine is performing
image adjustment
operations.
Solution
The machine may perform periodic
maintenance during operations. The
frequency and duration of
maintenance depends on the humidity,
temperature, and printing factors such
as number of prints, paper size, and
paper type. Wait for the machine to
resume operation.
When there is a problem scanning or storing originals
Message
Cause
"Cannot detect original size.
Select scan size."
The machine failed to detect
the size of the original.
Solution
• Place the original correctly.
• Specify the scan size, and then
place the originals again.
• When placing an original directly
on the exposure glass, the lifting/
lowering action of the ADF
triggers the automatic original
size detection process. Lift the
ADF 30 degrees or more.
"Captured file exceeded
max. number of pages per
file. Cannot send the
scanned data."
The maximum number of
pages per file has been
exceeded.
Reduce the number of pages in the
transmitted file, and then resend the
file. For details about the maximum
number of pages per file, see "Storage
function", Preparation.
"Original(s) is being
scanned for a different
function."
Another function of the
machine is being used.
Cancel the job in progress. Press [Exit],
and then press the [Stop] key. Follow
the instructions in the message that
appears and exit the function that is
running.
481
11. Troubleshooting
When the address book is updated
Message
"Updating the destination list
has failed. Try again?"
Cause
A network error has
occurred.
Solution
• Check whether the server is
connected.
• Antivirus programs and firewalls
can prevent client computers from
establishing connection with this
machine.
• If you are using antivirus software,
add the program to the exclusion
list in the application settings. For
details about how to add
programs to the exclusion list, see
the antivirus software Help.
• To prevent a firewall from
blocking the connection, register
the machine's IP address in the
firewall's IP address exclusion
settings. For details about the
procedure for excluding an IP
address, see your operating
system's Help.
482
"Updating the destination
list... Please wait. Specified
destination(s) or sender's
name has been cleared."
The destination list is being
updated from the network
using Web Image Monitor.
Wait until the message disappears. Do
not turn off the power while this
message is displayed. Depending on
the number of destinations to be
updated, there may be some delay
before operation is resumed.
Operation is not possible while this
message is displayed.
"Updating the destination
list... Please wait. Specified
destination(s) or sender's
name has been cleared."
A specified destination or
sender's name was cleared
when the destination list in
the delivery server was
updated.
Specify the destination or sender's
name again.
When Messages Appear
When data cannot be sent due to a problem with the destination
Message
Cause
Solution
"Some invalid destination(s)
contained. Do you want to
select only valid
destination(s)?"
The specified group contains In the message that appears at each
either an e-mail destination
transmission, press [Select].
and/or folder destination
that is not supported by the
specified transmission
method.
"SMTP authentication email
address and administrator
email address mismatch."
The SMTP authentication email address and the
administrator's e-mail
address do not match.
For details about how to set SMTP
authentication, see "File Transfer",
Device Management.
When the machine cannot be operated due to a problem with the user certificate
Message
Cause
Solution
"The destination cannot be
selected because its
encryption certificate is not
currently valid."
The user certificate
(destination certificate) has
expired.
A new user certificate must be installed.
For details about the user certificate
(destination certificate), see
"Configuring S/MIME", Security
Guide.
"The group destination
cannot be selected because
it contains a destination with
a encryption certificate that
is not currently valid."
The user certificate
(destination certificate) has
expired.
A new user certificate must be installed.
For details about the user certificate
(destination certificate), see
"Configuring S/MIME", Security
Guide.
"Transmission cannot be
performed because the
encryption certificate is not
currently valid."
The user certificate
(destination certificate) has
expired.
A new user certificate must be installed.
For details about the user certificate
(destination certificate), see
"Configuring S/MIME", Security
Guide.
483
11. Troubleshooting
Message
"XXX cannot be YYY
because the device
certificate used for the S/
MIME signature is not
currently valid."
Cause
Solution
The device certificate (S/
MIME) has expired.
A new device certificate (S/MIME)
must be installed. For details about
how to install a device certificate (S/
MIME), see "Configuring S/MIME",
Security Guide.
There is no device certificate
(S/MIME), or the certificate
is invalid.
For details about the device certificate
(S/MIME), see "Configuring S/
MIME", Security Guide.
The device certificate (PDF
with digital signature or
PDF/A with digital
signature) has expired.
A new device certificate (PDF with
digital signature or PDF/A with digital
signature) must be installed. For details
about how to install a device certificate
(PDF with digital signature or PDF/A
with digital signature), see
"Configuring PDFs with Electronic
Signatures", Security Guide.
There is no device certificate
(PDF with digital signature or
PDF/A with digital
signature), or the certificate
is invalid.
A new device certificate (PDF with
digital signature or PDF/A with digital
signature) must be installed. For details
about how to install a device certificate
(PDF with digital signature or PDF/A
with digital signature), see
"Configuring PDFs with Electronic
Signatures", Security Guide.
(XXX and YYY indicate the
user action.)
"XXX cannot be YYY
because there is a problem
with the device certificate
used for the S/MIME
signature. Check the device
certificate."
(XXX and YYY indicate the
user action.)
"XXX cannot be YYY
because the Digital
Signature's device certificate
is not currently valid."
(XXX and YYY indicate the
user action.)
"XXX cannot be YYY
because there is a problem
with the Digital Signature's
device certificate. Check the
device certificate."
(XXX and YYY indicate the
user action.)
• If an e-mail cannot be sent and a message appears which states that there is a problem with the
device certificate or user certificate, a new certificate must be installed. For details about how to
install a new certificate, see "Configuring S/MIME" or "Protecting Communication Paths via a
Device Certificate", Security Guide.
484
When Messages Appear
When problems occur while logging in
Message
Cause
Solution
"Cannot log in."
The entered login user name
or login password is not
correct.
For details about the correct login user
name and login password, see
"Configuring User Authentication",
Security Guide.
"Cannot log in."
The machine cannot perform
authentication.
For details about authentication, see
"Configuring User Authentication",
Security Guide.
When the user lacks privileges to perform an operation
Message
Cause
Solution
"You do not have the
privileges to use this
function."
The logged in user name
does not have permissions
for the selected function.
For details about how to set
permissions, see "Limiting Available
Functions", Security Guide.
"The selected file(s)
contained file(s) without
access privileges. Only
file(s) with access privileges
will be deleted."
You have tried to delete files
without the permission to do
so.
To check your access permission for
stored documents, or to delete a
document you do not have permission
to delete, see "Unlocking Stored Files",
Security Guide.
When the LDAP server cannot be used
Message
"Connection with LDAP
server has failed. Check the
server status."
Cause
A network error has
occurred and connection
has failed.
Solution
Try the operation again. If the message
is still displayed, the network may be
busy.
Check the settings for LDAP server in
[System Settings]. For details about
settings for LDAP server, see
"Programming the LDAP server",
Device Management.
485
11. Troubleshooting
Message
"Exceeded time limit for
LDAP server search. Check
the server status."
Cause
A network error has
occurred and connection
has failed.
Solution
• Try the operation again. If the
message is still displayed, the
network may be busy.
• Check that the correct settings for
LDAP server are listed in
[Administrator Tools] of [System
Settings]. For details about LDAP
server, see "Programming the
LDAP server", Device
Management.
"LDAP server authentication
has failed. Check the
settings."
486
A network error has
occurred and connection
has failed.
Configure settings correctly for the user
name and the password for LDAP
server authentication.
Troubleshooting When You Use the Copy/Document Server Function
Troubleshooting When You Use the Copy/
Document Server Function
This chapter describes likely causes of and possible solutions for Copier and Document Server function
problems.
The descriptions related to copy and Document Server functions are intended for Type 1, 2, and 3
machines.
When You Cannot Make Clear Copies
Problem
Cause
Solution
Copies appear dirty.
Image density is too high.
Adjust the image density settings. For
details about image density settings,
see "Adjusting Copy Image Density",
Basic Operations.
Copies appear dirty.
Auto Image Density is not
selected.
On the control panel, select [Auto
Density].
The reverse side of an
original image is copied.
Image density is too high.
Adjust the image density settings. For
details about image density settings,
see "Adjusting Copy Image Density",
Basic Operations.
The reverse side of an
original image is copied.
Auto Image Density is not
selected.
On the control panel, select [Auto
Density].
The reverse side of an
original image is copied.
The original is thin.
On the control panel, select [Auto
Density], or adjust the image density
settings.
For details about image density
settings, see "Adjusting Copy Image
Density", Basic Operations.
487
11. Troubleshooting
Problem
Shadow appears on copies
if you use pasted originals.
Cause
Image density is too high.
Solution
• Adjust the image density settings.
For details about image density
settings, see "Adjusting Copy
Image Density", Basic
Operations.
• Change the orientation of the
original.
• Use clear tape to fix down pasted
parts of the original.
Identical blemishes appear
in the same place on every
copy.
Identical blemishes appear
in the same place on every
copy.
The exposure glass,
scanning glass, or guide
plate of the ADF is dirty.
• The original that has
already been printed is
scanned.
Clean the exposure glass, scanning
glass, or guide plate of the ADF. For
details about how to clean the
machine, see page 541 "Maintaining
Your Machine".
On the control panel, press
[Generation ]to start a copy job.
• Original Type is set to
[Text / Photo], and an
original with text and
photographs that can
hardly be distinguished
from each other is
loaded.
488
The shadow density of an
area is different from that of
the original.
If Original Type is set to
[Text / Photo] for copying,
the shadow density for each
area may vary.
On the control panel, in the original
types, press [Photo] or [Text], and then
start copying.
Copies are too light.
Image density is too light.
Adjust the image density settings. For
details about image density settings,
see "Adjusting Copy Image Density",
Basic Operations.
Troubleshooting When You Use the Copy/Document Server Function
Problem
Copies are too light.
Cause
Solution
A light copy may result when
you use damp or rough
grain paper.
• Use recommended paper. For
details about recommended
paper, see page 228
"Recommended Paper Sizes and
Types".
• Use paper that has been stored in
the recommended temperature
and humidity conditions. For
details about how to store paper,
see page 265 "Paper Storage".
Parts of images are not
copied.
The original is not set
correctly.
Set the original correctly. For details
about how to set originals, see
page 176 "Placing Originals on the
Exposure Glass" and page 178
"Placing Originals in the Auto
Document Feeder".
Parts of images are not
copied.
The correct paper size is not
selected.
Select the correct paper size.
Parts of images are not
copied.
Even if you place originals
on the exposure glass or in
the ADF correctly, margins
of a few millimeters on all
four sides of the original
might not be copied.
Use "Create Margin" function to
reduce the image of its original size.
Images appear only
partially.
The paper is damp.
Use paper that has been stored in the
recommended temperature and
humidity conditions. For details about
how to store it, see page 265 "Paper
Storage".
Black lines appear.
The exposure glass,
scanning glass, or guide
plate of the ADF is dirty.
Clean the exposure glass, scanning
glass, or guide plate of the ADF. For
details about how to clean the
machine, see page 541 "Maintaining
Your Machine".
For details about image areas that
cannot be copied, see "Create
margin", Basic Operations.
489
11. Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Solution
White lines appear.
The exposure glass or
scanning glass is dirty.
Clean the exposure glass or scanning
glass. For details about how to clean
the machine, see page 541
"Maintaining Your Machine".
White lines appear.
When is flashing, toner is
beginning to run out.
Add toner. For details about adding
toner, see page 528 "Adding toner".
Copies are blank.
The original is not set
correctly.
Set the original correctly. For details
about how to set originals, see "Placing
Originals", Preparation.
A moire pattern is produced
on copies.
The original has a dot
pattern image or many lines.
Place the original on the exposure
glass at a slight angle.
Black spots appear on the
copy of a photographic
print.
Because of high humidity,
the photographic print has
stuck to the exposure glass.
• Place a transparency on the
exposure glass, and then place
the print on the transparency.
• Place the print on the exposure
glass, and then place two or three
sheets of white paper on it. Leave
the ADF open when copying.
490
White stripes appear on the
transparency.
Fragments of paper are
stuck to the transparency.
The image on the back side
of duplex copies has mottled
blank patches or is
smudged.
Missing patches and
smudges are caused by
moisture leaking from the
paper.
Use a dry cloth to wipe any paper
fragments off the back of the
transparency.
• Do not install the machine in lowtemperature areas.
• Use paper that has been stored
where temperature and humidity
conditions meet the limitations we
recommend. For details about the
paper storage conditions we
recommend, see page 265
"Paper Storage".
Troubleshooting When You Use the Copy/Document Server Function
When You Cannot Make Copies As Wanted
Basic
Problem
Misfeeds occur frequently.
Cause
Solution
The number of sheets loaded Load paper only as high as the upper
exceeds the capacity of the
limit markings on the side fences of the
machine.
paper tray, the markings on the paper
guides of the bypass tray, or the
markings on the Large Capacity Tray
(LCT).
Fan the sheets thoroughly before
loading them.
Misfeeds occur frequently.
The paper tray's side fences
are set too tightly.
Push the side fences lightly, and then
reset it.
Misfeeds occur frequently.
The paper is damp.
Use paper that has been stored in the
recommended temperature and
humidity conditions. For details about
the paper storage conditions we
recommend, see page 265 "Paper
Storage".
Misfeeds occur frequently.
The paper is too thick or thin. Use recommended paper. For details
about recommended paper, see
page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".
Misfeeds occur frequently
Small-size thick paper has
been fed in long-edge feed
(LEF) orientation.
When feeding paper with a grammage
of 200 gsm or more and a paper
length of 21 cm (8.27 inches) or more,
pull the drawer unit out and operate
the lever of the paper transport unit to
raise its height.
For details, see page 200 "Using Small
Thick Paper".
491
11. Troubleshooting
Problem
Misfeeds occur frequently.
Cause
The copy paper is wrinkled
or has been folded or
creased.
Solution
• Use recommended paper. For
details about recommended
paper, see page 228
"Recommended Paper Sizes and
Types".
• Use paper that has been stored in
the recommended temperature
and humidity conditions. For
details about the proper way to
store paper, see page 265
"Paper Storage".
492
Misfeeds occur frequently.
Printed paper is being used.
Do not load sheets that have already
been copied or printed onto by
another machine.
Misfeeds occur frequently.
Sheets are sticking together.
Fan the sheets thoroughly before
loading them. Alternatively, feed the
sheets into the machine one at a time.
Copy paper becomes
creased.
The paper is damp.
Use paper that has been stored in the
recommended temperature and
humidity conditions. For details about
the paper storage conditions we
recommend, see page 265 "Paper
Storage".
Copy paper becomes
creased.
The paper is too thin.
Use recommended paper. For details
about recommended paper, see
page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".
You want to check print
quality before making a
large print run.
You can print a single copy
without specifying the setting
again.
Check the print quality by using the
sample copy function to print out only
the first set. See "Finishing", Basic
Operations.
You cannot combine several
functions.
Selected functions cannot be
used together.
Check the combination of functions,
and then make the settings again. For
details about combination of functions,
see "Function compatibility", Basic
Operations.
Troubleshooting When You Use the Copy/Document Server Function
Problem
Cause
Solution
When sorting, pages are
divided into two blocks.
The memory became full
while pages were sorted so
that they were delivered in
two blocks.
Change the setting for [Memory Full
Auto Scan Restart] in [Copier /
Document Server Features]. For details
about setting "Memory Full Auto Scan
Restart", see "Input / Output",
Preparation.
A text pattern appears in the
background of the copy.
You have copied a
copyguarded document
protected from unauthorized
copying.
Check the document. For details about
how to prevent unauthorized copying
of the document, see "Printing
Documents that Are Not Authorized for
Duplication", Basic Operations.
Images are skewed.
The side fences in the paper
feed tray are not set
properly.
Make sure the side fences are set
properly. For details about how to set
the side fences, see page 204
"Changing the Paper Size".
Images are skewed.
The paper is fed in at a slant. Load the paper correctly. For details
about loading paper, see page 180
"Loading Paper".
Images are skewed.
The original guide of the
ADF is not set properly.
Make sure the original guide is set
properly. For details about how to set
the original guide, see page 178
"Placing Originals in the Auto
Document Feeder".
Edges of sheets are creased.
The paper is damp.
Use paper that has been stored in the
recommended temperature and
humidity conditions. For details about
the paper storage conditions we
recommend, see page 265 "Paper
Storage".
Edges of sheets are creased.
You are using nonrecommended paper.
Use recommended paper. For details
about recommended paper, see
page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".
493
11. Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Solution
Paper is bent at the corners.
Paper is curled
When using the decurl unit, adjust
[Correct Output Paper Curl] in
"Adjustment Settings for Operators".For
details about the Adjustment Settings
for Operators, see page 303
"Adjustment Settings for Operators".
Sheets are fed in together,
resulting in paper jams.
Sheets are sticking together.
Fan the sheets to flatten the paper
before loading it. Alternatively, feed a
sheet of paper at a time.
"Add Staples" message
appears and the Staple
function cannot be used.
The staple cartridge is not set Make sure the staple cartridge is set
properly.
properly.
When a sheet of paper is
feed into a two-tray wide
LCT, it cannot be sent, or
double feeding occurs.
The paper is curling.
Flatten the curled paper, and then set it
in the tray.
Edit
Problem
494
Cause
Solution
In "Double Copies" mode,
parts of the original image
are not copied.
Combination of original and
copy paper is not correct.
Specify the paper size again. For
example, select A3 for A4
originals. For details about the settings
for double copies, see "Double
Copies", Basic Operations.
In "Erase Border", "Erase
Center", or "Erase Center /
Border" mode, parts of the
original image are not
copied.
You have entered a wide
erased margin.
Make the margin width narrower.
In "Erase Border", "Erase
Center", or "Erase Center /
Border" mode, parts of the
original image are not
copied.
Originals are not scanned
correctly.
Place the originals correctly.
Troubleshooting When You Use the Copy/Document Server Function
Problem
In "Margin Adjustment"
mode, parts of the original
image are not copied.
Cause
Solution
• You set a wide erased
margin.
Set a narrower margin with User Tools.
• There is a lack of
margin space on the
opposite side of the
binding position.
In "Image Repeat" mode, the You selected copy paper the Select copy paper larger than the
original image is not copied same size as the originals, or originals or specify the proper
repeatedly.
you did not select the proper reproduction ratio.
reproduction ratio.
Stamp
Problem
Cause
Solution
The stamp position is wrong.
The paper orientation is
wrong.
Check the paper orientation and stamp
position.
The stamp is not printed on
the back side of sheets when
duplex copying is
performed.
The back side stamp position Reset the back side stamp position. For
is incorrect for the paper
details about Adj. Back Side Stamp
size.
Position, see "Copier / Document
Server Features", Preparation.
Combine
Problem
Copies made with the
"Booklet" or "Magazine"
function cannot be folded
into a book correctly.
Cause
Solution
You have selected a setting
("Open to Left" or "Open to
Right") that does not match
the orientation of originals.
Change the setting for [Orientation:
Booklet, Magazine] in [Copier /
Document Server Features]. For details
about the setting of [Orientation:
Booklet, Magazine], see "Edit",
Preparation.
495
11. Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Solution
When "Combine" is used,
parts of the image are not
copied.
You specified a
reproduction ratio that does
not match the sizes of the
originals and copy paper.
When you specify a reproduction ratio
using Manual Paper Select mode,
make sure the ratio matches the
originals and the copy paper. Select
the correct reproduction ratio before
using Combine mode. For details about
Combine mode, see "One-Sided
Combine", "Two-Sided Combine", or
"Auto reduce / enlarge", Basic
Operations.
Copies are not in correct
order.
You placed the originals in
the incorrect order.
When you place a stack of originals in
the ADF, the last page should be on
the bottom.
If you place an original on the
exposure glass, start with the first page
to be copied.
Duplex
Problem
496
Cause
Solution
Cannot print in duplex
mode.
You have loaded paper that
is too thick or thin.
Change the paper. For details about
paper weight that can be used for
duplex printing, see "Specifications for
the Main Unit", Specifications.
Cannot print in duplex
mode.
You have selected a paper
tray that is not set for duplex
printing.
Change the setting for "Apply Duplex"
in [Tray Paper Settings] to enable
duplex printing for the paper tray. For
details about setting "Apply Duplex",
see page 269 "Tray Paper Settings".
Cannot print in duplex
mode.
You have selected a paper
type that cannot be used for
duplex printing.
In [Tray Paper Settings], select a paper
type that can be used for duplex
printing. For details about setting
"Paper Type", see page 269 "Tray
Paper Settings".
Troubleshooting When You Use the Copy/Document Server Function
Problem
Copies are not in correct
order.
Cause
You placed the originals in
the incorrect order.
Solution
When you place a stack of originals in
the ADF, the last page should be on
the bottom.
If you place an original on the
exposure glass, start with the first page
to be copied.
When "Duplex" is used,
copy is made top to bottom
even though [Top to Top] is
selected.
You placed the originals in
the wrong orientation.
Place the original in the correct
orientation. For details about original
orientations for duplex copy, see
page 157 "Duplex Copying".
Document Server
Problem
Cannot access file.
Cause
• The file is passwordprotected.
• The entered password
is not correct.
You cannot find out what is
stored in a file.
You may not be able to
check the contents of a file
simply from the file name.
Solution
For details about password-protected
files, see "Managing Stored Files",
Security Guide.
You can switch the Select File screen
between the [List] and [Thumbnails]
display to check the file information.
• List display
The file name, the total number of
pages, and user name are shown.
• Thumbnails display
An image of the stored file
appears.
For details about the Select File screen,
see "Checking the Details of a Stored
Document", Basic Operations.
497
11. Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Memory frequently becomes The Document Server
full.
memory is full.
Solution
Delete unnecessary files. On the file
selection display, select unnecessary
files, and then press [Delete File]. If this
does not increase available memory
space, do the following:
• Switch to the scanner screen, and
then delete unnecessary files
stored under the scanner function.
• Switch to the printer screen, and
then delete unnecessary files
stored under Sample Print, Locked
Print, Hold Print, or Stored Print.
Finishing
Problem
Cause
Solution
Copies are not stapled.
There are jammed staples in
the stapler.
Remove the jammed staples. For details
about removing jammed staples, see
page 522 "Removing Jammed
Staples".
Copies are not stapled.
Copy paper is curled.
• Turn the copy paper over in the
tray.
• Straighten the curled sheets using
[Adjustment Settings for
Operators]. For details about the
settings for [Adjust Paper Curl],
see page 303 "Adjustment
Settings for Operators".
Copies are not stapled.
498
The number of copies is too
large for the stapler to staple
the copies as a single batch.
For details about the stapler capacity,
see "Specifications for Finisher
SR5090" or "Specifications for Finisher
SR5110" or "Specifications for Booklet
Finisher SR5100" or "Specifications for
Booklet Finisher SR5120",
Specifications.
Troubleshooting When You Use the Copy/Document Server Function
Problem
Cause
Solution
Saddle-stitched documents
Certain types of paper are
come apart and do not stack resistant to folding and open
properly.
out after being folded and
stitched.
For details about the recommended
paper, see page 228 "Recommended
Paper Sizes and Types".
Staples are wrongly
positioned.
Originals are not set
correctly.
For details about how to place the
originals with stapling, see "Staple",
Basic Operations.
Stapled sheets of paper are
not output during printing.
When you stop printing
while using the staple
function, paper not stapled
during printing may be left in
the staple unit.
Press the [Stop] key, and then cancel
copy settings, including stapling.
499
11. Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting When You Use the Printer
Function
This chapter describes likely causes of and possible solutions for printer function problems.
Checking the Error Log
If files could not be stored due to printing errors, identify the cause of the errors by checking the error log
on the control panel.
• The most recent 50 errors are recorded in the error log. If a new error is added when there are 50
errors already recorded, the oldest error is deleted. However, if the earliest error is a Sample Print,
Locked Print, Hold Print, or Stored Print error, it is not deleted. The error is recorded separately until
30 errors are recorded.
• You cannot view [Error Log] on the simple screen.
• If the power is turned off, the log is deleted.
1. Press [Home] (
(Classic)] icon.
) at the bottom of the screen in the center, and press the [Printer
2. Press [Error Log].
3. Select the error log you want to check, and then press [Details].
500
Troubleshooting When You Use the Printer Function
If USB Connection Fails
Problem
Cause
The machine is not
automatically recognized.
The USB cable is not
connected properly.
The machine is not
automatically recognized.
Windows has already
configured the USB settings.
Solution
Disconnect the USB cable, and then
turn off the power. Turn on the power
again. When the machine has fully
booted up, reconnect the USB cable.
• Check whether the computer has
identified the machine as an
unsupported device.
• Open Windows' Device
Manager, and then, under
[Universal Serial Bus controllers],
remove any conflicting devices.
Conflicting devices have a [!] or
[?] icon by them. Take care not to
accidentally remove required
devices. For details, see Windows
Help.
The machine does not
recognize the USB
connection even when a
USB cable is inserted.
If the USB cable is
connected while the
machine is off, the machine
might not recognize the USB
connection.
Press the [Energy Saver] key, and then
disconnect the USB cable. Press the
[Energy Saver] key again. When the
machine has returned to the ready
condition, reconnect the USB cable.
When You Cannot Print
Cause
Solution
The power is off.
For details about how to turn on the power, see
page 103 "Turning On/Off the Power".
The cause is displayed on the screen of
the control panel.
Check the error message or warning status on the control
panel, and then take the required action. For details
about solutions, see page 449 "Messages Displayed
When You Use the Printer Function".
501
11. Troubleshooting
Cause
Solution
The interface cable is not connected
correctly.
For details about how to connect interface cables
correctly, see "Connecting to the Interface", Device
Management.
The correct interface cable is not being
used.
The type of interface cable you use depends on the
computer. Be sure to use the correct one. If the cable is
damaged or worn, replace it. For details about the
interface cable, see "Connecting to the Interface", Device
Management.
The interface cable was connected after
the power was turned on.
Connect the interface cable before turning on the power.
If the machine is using wireless LAN,
failure to print might result from a weak
wireless signal.
• Check the radio signal status of the wireless LAN in
[System Settings]. If signal quality is not satisfactory,
move the machine to a location where radio waves
can pass, or remove objects that might cause
interference.
• You can check the radio signal status only when
wireless LAN is used in infrastructure mode. For
details about the radio signal status of the wireless
LAN, see "Interface Settings", Device Management.
502
When there is a microwave oven or a
wireless LAN access point near the
device, radio waves may be interfering
with the Bluetooth's communication.
Turn off the microwave oven and the wireless LAN
access point, and then try printing again. If printing is
successful, move the devices to a location where they do
not interfere.
If the machine is using a wireless LAN
(IEEE 802.11b/g/n), radio waves may
be interfering with the wireless
communication. This may occur if there is
a microwave oven, cordless telephone,
industrial machine, scientific instrument, or
medical instrument using the same
frequency range near the device.
Turn off other machines or instruments which use the
same frequency range and then try printing again. If
printing is successful, move the devices to a location
where they do not interfere.
If the machine is using wireless LAN, SSID
settings are incorrect.
Check using the machine's display panel that the SSID is
correctly set. For details about SSID setting, see
"Interface Settings", Device Management.
Troubleshooting When You Use the Printer Function
Cause
Solution
If the machine is using wireless LAN, the
receiver's MAC address may be
preventing communication with the access
point.
• Check access point settings when in infrastructure
mode. Depending on the access point, client access
may be limited by MAC address.
• Check there are no problems in transmission
between the access point and wired clients, and
between the access point and wireless clients.
The login user name, login password, or
driver encryption key is invalid.
Check the login user name, login password, or driver
encryption key.
Advanced encryption has been set using
the extended security function.
Check the extended security function settings. For details
about extended security function settings, see "Specifying
the Extended Security Functions", Security Guide.
A mechanical error might have occurred.
Contact your service representative.
The transmission mode is not configured
correctly when using a wireless LAN in ad
hoc mode.
• Turn off the power, and then back on again. For
details about how to turn on and off the power, see
"Turning On/Off the Power", Preparation.
• Change [Communication Mode] in [System
Settings] to [802.11 Ad-hoc Mode], and then
select [Off] for [Security Method]. For details about
Communication Mode, see "Interface Settings",
Device Management.
When the Data In indicator does not light
up or flash after a print job starts, data is
not being sent to the machine.
• When a cable is used to connect the computer
directly to the machine, check whether the print
ports are configured correctly.
• When the computer is connected to the network,
ask your administrator about the computer's
network connection.
If printing does not start, contact your service representative.
Other Printing Problems
This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for problems that can occur when printing
from a computer.
503
11. Troubleshooting
When you cannot print clearly
Problem
Cause
Solution
The printed image is
smudged.
Settings for thick paper have
not been made for printing
on thick paper in the bypass
tray.
On the printer driver's [Detailed
Settings] tab, click [Paper] in "Menu:",
and then select [Tray A] in the "Input
Tray:" list. Then in the "Paper Type:" list,
select a proper paper type.
The printed image is faded
over the entire page.
The paper is damp.
Use paper that has been stored in the
recommended temperature and
humidity conditions. For details about
the paper storage conditions we
recommend, see page 265 "Paper
Storage".
The printed image is faded
over the entire page.
The paper is unsuitable.
Use recommended paper. Printing on
coarse or treated paper might result in
faint print image. For details about
recommended paper, see page 228
"Recommended Paper Sizes and
Types".
The printed image is faded
over the entire page.
If the [Toner Saving] is
selected in the printer driver
settings, the entire page will
be faded when printed.
On the printer driver's [Detailed
Settings] tab, click [Print
Quality:Standard] in "Menu:", and
then select [Off] in the "Toner Saving:"
list.
Images smudge when
rubbed. (Toner is not fixed.)
The specified paper type
and the paper that is
actually loaded might be
different. For example, thick
paper might be loaded but
not specified as the paper
type.
On the printer driver's [Detailed
Settings] tab, click [Paper] in "Menu:",
and then select a proper paper type in
the "Paper Type:" list.
The printed image is different Printing will be performed by Only when using PCL 6
from the image on the
the machine's graphic
On the printer driver's [Detailed
computer's display.
processing function.
Settings] tab, click [Print
Quality:Advanced] in "Menu:",
and then select [Raster] in the
"Vector/Raster:" list.
504
Troubleshooting When You Use the Printer Function
Problem
Cause
Solution
When graphics are printed,
the output and the screen
are different.
If the printer driver is
configured to use the
graphics command, the
graphics command from the
machine is used to print.
If you want to print accurately, set the
printer driver to print without using the
graphics command. For details about
settings for printer driver, see the
printer driver Help.
Lines of garbled or
unwanted alphanumeric
characters appear.
An incorrect printer
language might have been
selected.
Select the correct printer driver, and
then print the file again.
Images are cut off, or
margins are printed.
You may be using paper
smaller than the size
selected in the application.
Use the same size paper as that
selected in the application. If you
cannot load paper of the correct size,
use the reduction function to reduce the
image, and then print. For details
about reduction function, see the
printer driver Help.
Photo images are coarse.
Some applications print at
lower resolution.
Use the application's settings or printer
driver's settings to specify a higher
resolution. For details about printer
driver's settings, see the printer driver
Help.
A solid line is printed as a
dashed line or appears
blurred.
Dither patterns do not match. Only when using PostScript 3
Fine or inconsistently thick
lines appear, or fine lines do
not appear.
Extremely fine lines have
been specified, or a color
that is too light has been
specified for the lines.
Change the dithering settings on
the printer driver. For details
about the dithering settings, see
the printer driver Help.
Only when using PostScript 3
Change the dithering settings on
the printer driver. For details
about the dithering settings, see
the printer driver Help.
If the problem continues after you
change the dithering settings, use the
settings of the application in which the
image was created to change the
thickness of the lines.
505
11. Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Images appear only
partially.
The paper is damp.
The image on the back side
of duplex copies has mottled
blank patches or is
smudged.
Missing patches and
smudges are caused by
moisture leaking from the
paper.
Solution
Use paper that has been stored in the
recommended temperature and
humidity condition. For details about
the paper storage conditions we
recommend, see page 265 "Paper
Storage".
• Do not install the machine in lowtemperature areas.
• Use paper that has been stored
where temperature and humidity
conditions meet the conditions we
recommend. For details about the
paper storage conditions we
recommend, see page 265
"Paper Storage".
• Install the optional anti-humidity
heater. For details about the
antihumidity heater, contact your
service representative.
When paper is not fed properly
Problem
506
Cause
Solution
Paper is not fed from the
selected tray.
When you are using a
Windows operating system,
printer driver settings
override those settings
applied to the display panel.
On the Printer driver's [Detailed
Settings] tab, click [Paper] in "Menu:",
and then select the input tray you want
to use in the "Input Tray:" list.
Images are printed at a
slant.
The tray's side fences might
not be locked.
Check that the side fences are locked.
For details about how to set the side
fences, see page 204 "Changing the
Paper Size".
Images are printed at a
slant.
The paper is fed in at a slant. Load the paper correctly. For details
about loading paper, see page 180
"Loading Paper".
Troubleshooting When You Use the Printer Function
Problem
Cause
Solution
Misfeeds occur frequently.
The number of sheets loaded Load paper only as high as the upper
exceeds the capacity of the
limit markings on the side fences of the
machine.
paper tray, the markings on the paper
guides of the bypass tray, or the
markings on the LCT.
Misfeeds occur frequently.
The paper tray's side fences
are set too tightly.
Push the side fences lightly, and then
reset them.
Misfeeds occur frequently.
The paper is damp.
Use paper that has been stored in the
recommended temperature and
humidity conditions. For details about
the paper storage conditions we
recommend, see page 265 "Paper
Storage".
Misfeeds occur frequently.
The paper is too thick or thin. Use recommended paper. For details
about recommended paper, see
page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".
Misfeeds occur frequently.
The paper is wrinkled or has
been folded or creased.
• Use recommended paper. For
details about recommended
paper, see page 228
"Recommended Paper Sizes and
Types".
• Use paper that has been stored in
the recommended temperature
and humidity conditions. For
details about the proper way to
store paper, see page 265
"Paper Storage".
Misfeeds occur frequently.
Printed paper is being used.
Do not load sheets that have already
been copied or printed.
Misfeeds occur frequently.
Sheets are sticking together.
Fan the sheets thoroughly before
loading them. Alternatively, feed the
sheets into the machine one at a time.
Sheets are fed in together,
resulting in jams.
Sheets are sticking together.
Fan the sheets thoroughly before
loading them. Alternatively, feed the
sheets into the machine one at a time.
507
11. Troubleshooting
Problem
508
Cause
Solution
Paper becomes creased.
The paper is damp.
Use paper that has been stored in the
recommended temperature and
humidity conditions. For details about
the paper storage conditions we
recommend, see page 265 "Paper
Storage".
Paper becomes creased.
The paper is too thin.
Use recommended paper. For details
about recommended paper, see
page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".
Edges of sheets are creased.
The paper is damp.
Use paper that has been stored in the
recommended temperature and
humidity conditions. For details about
the paper storage conditions we
recommend, see page 265 "Paper
Storage".
Edges of sheets are creased.
You are using nonrecommended paper.
Use recommended paper. For details
about recommended paper, see
page 228 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".
Duplex printing cannot be
applied.
You have loaded paper that
is too thick or thin.
Change the paper. For details about
paper weight that can be used for
duplex printing, see "Specifications for
the Main Unit", Specifications.
Duplex printing cannot be
applied.
You have selected a paper
tray that is not set for duplex
printing.
Change the setting for "Apply Duplex"
in [Tray Paper Settings] to enable
duplex printing for the paper tray. For
details about setting "Apply Duplex",
see page 269 "Tray Paper Settings".
Duplex printing cannot be
applied.
You have selected a paper
type that cannot be used for
duplex printing.
In [Tray Paper Settings], select a paper
type that can be used for duplex
printing. For details about setting
"Paper Type", see page 269 "Tray
Paper Settings".
Troubleshooting When You Use the Printer Function
Problem
White stripes appear on the
transparency.
Cause
Fragments of paper are
stuck to the transparency.
Solution
Use a dry cloth to wipe any paper
fragments off the back of the
transparency.
Other printing problems
Problem
Cause
Solution
It takes a long time to
complete a print job.
Sleep mode or Fusing Unit
Off mode might be set.
The machine requires time to warm up
if it has been in Sleep mode or Fusing
Unit Off mode. For details about Sleep
mode and Fusing Unit Off mode, see
page 104 "Saving Energy".
It takes a long time to
complete a print job.
Photographs and other
data- intensive pages take a
long time for the machine to
process. Wait until printing is
complete.
If the Data In indicator is flashing, the
printer has received data. Wait for a
moment.
Images are printed in the
wrong orientation.
The feed orientation you
selected and the feed
orientation selected in the
printer driver's option setup
might be different.
Make sure the machine's feed
orientation and the printer driver's feed
orientation match. For details about
printer driver settings, see the printer
driver Help.
Optional components
connected to the machine
are not recognized.
Bidirectional communication
is not working.
Set up optional devices on the
Properties of the printer. For details
about how to set up optional devices,
see the printer driver Help.
Combined printing, booklet
printing, or Auto Reduce/
Enlarge printing does not
work as expected.
The correct application or
printer driver settings are not
configured.
Make sure the application's paper size
and orientation settings match those of
the printer driver. If a different paper
size and orientation are set, select the
same size and orientation.
A print instruction was issued
from the computer, but
printing did not start.
User Authentication may
have been set.
For details about user authentication,
see "User Code Authentication",
Security Guide.
Specifying a lower resolution with the
printer driver may help speed up
printing. For details about how to
change the resolution setting, see the
printer driver Help.
509
11. Troubleshooting
Problem
510
Cause
Solution
PDF files cannot print or PDF
direct printing cannot be
performed.
PDF files are passwordprotected.
To print password-protected PDF files,
enter the password in the [PDF Menu]
or on Web Image Monitor. For details
about printing PDF files, see "PDF
Menu", Preparation, or Web Image
Monitor Help.
PDF files cannot print or PDF
direct printing cannot be
performed.
PDF files cannot print if they
are print-disabled in PDF file
security setting.
Change the PDF file security setting.
PDF direct print produces
garbled characters.
Fonts were not embedded.
Embed fonts in the PDF file you want to
print, and then print.
Printing did not start even
though the specified print
time passed.
[Jobs Not Printed As Machn.
Was Off] was set to [Do not
Print] in [Printer Features],
but when the specified print
time arrived, the power was
turned off.
Set [Jobs Not Printed As Machn. Was
Off] to [Print When Machine On] in
[Printer Features].
Printing did not start even
though the specified print
time passed.
The time set on the machine
or computer is incorrect.
Set the correct time on the machine or
computer.
Printing via wireless LAN is
slow.
The number of jobs exceeds
the capacity of the machine.
Reduce the number of jobs.
Troubleshooting When You Use the Printer Function
Problem
Printing via wireless LAN is
slow.
Cause
Solution
• A communication error
might have occurred.
• Move the machine farther away
from the wireless LAN device.
• Interference from other
wireless LAN devices
can reduce
communication speed.
• If there are active wireless LAN
devices nearby, move the
machine or disable those devices.
• If the machine is using
a wireless LAN (IEEE
802.11b/g/n), radio
waves may be
interfering with the
wireless
communication. This
may occur if there is a
microwave oven,
cordless telephone,
industrial machine,
scientific instrument, or
medical instrument
using the same
frequency range near
the device.
• Turn off other machines or
instruments which use the same
frequency range and then try
printing again. If printing is
successful, move the devices to a
location where they do not
interfere.
If the problem cannot be resolved, contact your service representative.
511
11. Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting When You Use the Scanner
Function
This chapter describes likely causes of and possible solutions for scanner function problems.
The descriptions related to the scanner function are intended for Type 1, 2, and 3 machines.
When You Cannot Send Scanned Files
When stored files cannot be accessed
Problem
Cause
The stored file is locked and
is not accessible.
The password-protected file
is locked because the
password was incorrectly
entered ten times.
Solution
For details about locked files, see
"Unlocking Stored Files", Security
Guide.
When stored files cannot be edited
Problem
Stored files cannot be
deleted. File names and
passwords cannot be
changed. Files cannot be
delivered repeatedly.
Cause
Operational restrictions
have been imposed using
the available extended
security function.
Solution
For details about the extended security
function, see "Specifying the Extended
Security Functions", Security Guide.
When you cannot browse the network to send a scan file
Problem
Browsing through the
network is not possible when
specifying a destination
folder.
512
Cause
The following machine
settings may not be correct:
• IP address
• Subnet Mask
Solution
Check the settings. For details about IP
address or Subnet Mask settings, see
"Interface Settings", Device
Management.
Troubleshooting When You Use the Scanner Function
When the TWAIN driver cannot be started
Problem
The Scanner Properties
dialog box cannot be
displayed.
Cause
Advanced encryption has
been specified in the
extended security setting.
Solution
For details about the extended security
setting, see "Specifying the Extended
Security Functions", Security Guide.
When e-mails are not sent as expected
Problem
Cause
Solution
The original file cannot be
restored because a split email cannot be recovered at
the destination.
The file size exceeds the
maximum e-mail size
specified in [Max. Email
Size]. Because [Yes (per
Max. Size)] is specified for
[Divide & Send Email], the
file is divided halfway down
the page and sent.
Specify [Yes (per Page)] for [Divide &
Send Email] in [Scanner Features]. The
file is divided per page and sent.
To send an e-mail without splitting it,
perform the following:
• Specify a resolution so that the file
size does not exceed the
maximum size set in [Max. Email
Size].
• Specify a larger value for [Max.
Email Size] in [Scanner Features].
Make sure the larger maximum email size does not exceed the
allowable size range set on the
SMTP server.
• Specify [No] for [Divide & Send
Email] in [Scanner Features].
For details about these settings, see
"Send Settings", Preparation.
513
11. Troubleshooting
When S/MIME cannot be used
Problem
Cause
If several destinations are
selected for a broadcasting
sequence, data is sent over
twice.
Encrypted e-mails are sent to
the destinations for which S/
MIME authentication is set,
and plain text e-mails are
sent to the destinations for
which S/MIME
authentication is not set.
Make sure S/MIME-authentication
destinations are separated from plain
text destinations.
When S/MIME is applied,
the administrator appears in
the "From" field, and the
sender appears in the
"Reply-to" field.
For details about applying S/MIME,
see "Configuring S/MIME", Security
Guide.
To put a signature on an email using S/MIME, an email address for "Sender" is
not set for "From".
Solution
To encrypt e-mails, a user certificate
must be installed in Address Book.
For details about destination settings,
see "Configuring S/MIME", Security
Guide.
• The size of S/MIME e-mails is larger than that of e-mails without using S/MIME.
When you cannot send scan files using WSD
Problem
514
Cause
Solution
The WSD scanner function
cannot be used.
Scan Profile is not set on the
client computer.
Set Scan Profile. For details about how
to specify Scan Profile, see "Creating a
new scan profile", Basic Operations.
The WSD scanner function
cannot be used.
The [Take no action] setting
has been selected on the
client computer, forcing the
client computer to remain
inactive when it receives
scan data.
Open scanner Properties, click the
[Events] tab, and then select [Start this
program] when the computer receives
scan data. For details, see your
operating system's Help.
When Scanning Is Not Performed As Expected
When Scanning Is Not Performed As Expected
The descriptions related to the scanner function are intended for Type 1, 2, and 3 machines.
Problem
Cause
Solution
The scanned image is dirty.
The exposure glass,
scanning glass, or guide
plate of the ADF is dirty.
Clean the exposure glass, scanning
glass, or guide plate of the ADF. For
details about how to clean the
machine, see page 541
"Maintaining Your Machine".
The image is distorted or not
correctly placed.
The original was moved
during scanning.
Do not move the original during
scanning.
The image is distorted or not
correctly placed.
The original was not pressed Make sure the original is pressed flat
flat against the exposure
against the exposure glass.
glass.
The scanned image is upside The original was placed
down.
upside down.
Place the original in the correct
orientation. For details about how to
place originals, see "Setting of Original
Feed Type", Basic Operations.
No scanned image is
available.
The original was placed
with the front and back
reversed.
When the original is placed directly on
the exposure glass, the side to be
scanned must face down. When the
original is placed in the ADF, the side
to be scanned must face up.
Scanned images are
rotated.
If you set the original with its
top edge backward and
save full color/gray scale
images as a TIFF or JPEG
file, scanned images are
rotated.
When placing an original directly on
the exposure glass, align its top edge
flush against the left side of the
exposure glass.
When placing originals in the ADF,
place them from its top edge. For
details about placing originals, see
"Setting of Original Feed Type", Basic
Operations.
515
11. Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
The scanned image contains
white spaces.
If you scan originals using
functions other than the
network TWAIN scanner
function, certain paper size
and resolution settings may
produce scanned images
that are larger than the
specified size because of
margins being added to the
sides.
Scanning at a higher resolution may
reduce the margins.
The shadow density of the
scanned image is different
from that of the original.
If High Compression PDF is
selected as the save format
when the original is
scanned, the shadow
density may vary.
Press [Send File Type / Name] on the
initial scanner screen, and then specify
[PDF/A] for "PDF File Setting".
A text pattern appears in the
background.
You have scanned a
document protected from
unauthorized copying.
Check the document. For details about
how to prevent unauthorized copying
of documents, see "Printing Documents
that Are Not Authorized for
Duplication", Basic Operations.
After an original is scanned,
the following settings are
canceled:
To prevent scanned data
from being sent to wrong
destinations, this machine
has a function to cancel the
settings after scanned data
is sent.
Contact your service representative for
details about how to prevent the
settings from being automatically reset
after scanned data is sent.
Destination, Sender, E-mail
text, Subject, and File name
516
Solution
For details about PDF file settings, see
"Specifying the File Type and File
Name", Basic Operations.
Clearing Misfeeds
Clearing Misfeeds
This chapter describes what to do when paper or originals are misfed (become jammed inside the
machine).
Removing Jammed Paper
• There are highly-heated parts inside the machine. When removing misfed paper, do not touch
areas other than those specified in this manual. Touching those areas can result in burns.
• Keep your hands clear of the paper output slot of the finisher booklet tray when pulling it out or
pushing it in the finisher's staple unit. You may trap your fingers in the machine's gap and injury
can result.
• When replacing paper or removing jammed paper, make sure not to trap or injure your fingers.
• When removing paper misfeeds, do not turn off the power. If you do, the configured functions and
values will be lost.
• To prevent paper misfeeds, do not leave any torn scraps of paper inside the machine.
• If paper jams continue to occur, see page 434 "When You Have Problems Operating the
Machine", page 491 "When You Cannot Make Copies As Wanted", and page 503 "Other
Printing Problems" for details about how to resolve the problem. If the actions recommended in this
manual cannot resolve the problem, contact your service representative.
• When removing jammed paper, you can touch only those areas explicitly indicated in the manual.
• Do not remove the fusing unit. Doing so will result in loss of print quality.
• To remove paper that has not been fed into the fixing section correctly, remove the jammed paper
through the underside of the fusing unit. If the jammed paper cannot be removed through the
underside of the fusing unit, remove it from the top.
• To remove jammed paper in the bypass tray, remove the paper that is loaded on the bypass tray.
• Inside the finisher, or inside the front cover, there are stickers or sheets explaining how to remove
misfed paper.
• If a detailed removal instruction appears on the right of the screen, follow it.
• You can also use the procedure indicated in the [Check Status] screen to remove jammed paper.
517
11. Troubleshooting
• If coated paper frequently becomes jammed and causes "U" to appear, contact your service
representative.
Locating jammed paper
If a misfeed happens, remove the jammed paper by following the procedures stated in the animation
that appears on the screen.
There is a section in the machine where the indicator is flashing. If you pull out the unit to remove the
jammed paper while the indicator is still flashing, the paper may be ripped or pieces of torn paper may
be left inside the machine.
When the indicator is flashing, open the guide board of the corresponding section to remove the
jammed paper or turn the knob to move the paper along the feed path. Confirm that the indicator has
stopped flashing, and then pull out the unit.
When flashing, indicators shows the following:
• A2–A3: Paper is left in the source tray and around the guide board.
• B1–B2: Paper is left somewhere between A and the drawer unit or between the LCT and the
drawer unit.
• D1: Paper is left between the drawer unit and the post-processing unit.
• E: Paper is left in the turnover section.
• C1, C2: The unit can be pulled out by moving the lever as indicated by the arrow.
• A misfeed has occurred in the place corresponding to the letter displayed on the screen.
EAQ311
518
Clearing Misfeeds
• Multiple paper misfeed locations may be indicated at the same time. When this happens, check all
the areas indicated.
• If there is no misfed paper in the area you check first, see the other areas that are indicated.
• If coated paper frequently becomes jammed and causes "U" to appear, contact your service
representative.
• If a paper misfeed occurs in Rb1 - Rb5, check whether any paper has been output on top of the
paper press of the finisher shift tray. If there is paper on top of the paper press, remove the paper,
and then remove the misfed paper from inside the finisher.
Procedure for removing jammed paper
1. Remove the jammed paper by following the procedures that are displayed on the control
panel.
When [Next] or [Previous] is displayed on the screen.
After each step is complete, press [Next]. To go back to the previous step, press [Previous].
2. When the jammed paper is removed, restore the machine to the original state.
• More than one misfeed may be indicated. When this happens, check all the areas indicated.
• If there is no misfed paper in the first area you check, see the other areas that are indicated.
• When paper cannot be transferred to the post-processing side by turning the knob D1 as instructed
on the screen, see the position of the letter in the figure and turn the knob D1 in reverse direction
(clockwise) to send the paper back to the drawer unit, and then remove the paper.
519
11. Troubleshooting
• After C is displayed and the drawer unit is pulled out to remove the jammed paper, check that there
is no toner searing on the location indicated in the figure. If toner smear is left, wipe off the toner
with a clean and dry cloth.
EAQ312
After Removing a Paper Jam in the Banner Sheet Tray of Multi Bypass Tray (Tray A)
After jammed paper was removed from Banner sheet tray of multi bypass tray (Tray A).
1. Press the base board elevation button to lower the base board.
DSC022
520
Clearing Misfeeds
2. Remove the end fence.
DSC023
3. Load paper into the tray again.
DSC024
4. Align the end fence with the bottom edge of the paper.
DSC025
521
11. Troubleshooting
5. Press the base board elevation button to raise the base board.
DSC026
Removing Jammed Staples
If a staple jam occurs, remove the jammed staple by following the procedures indicated in the animation
that appears on the control panel. This section describes how to remove jammed staples when the
procedure is not displayed on the control panel.
• Keep your hands clear of the paper output slot of the finisher booklet tray when pulling it out or
pushing it in the finisher's staple unit. You may trap your fingers in the machine's gap and injury
can result.
• Curled paper may cause staples to jam. To avoid this, turn paper over in the tray.
• When the finisher is installed, after jammed staples are removed, staples will not be ejected the first
few times when you use the stapler. If a staple jam occurs on the saddle stitch, the stapler will not
staple after the jammed staples are removed.
• Remove the jammed staples according to the finisher type. Check the type if you are unsure of the
finisher type. For details about type of finisher, see page 87 "Guide to Functions of the Machine's
Options".
Removing Jammed Ring Combs
If ring combs become jammed, a message appears on the control panel. Follow the message's
instructions to remove the jammed ring combs. This section describes how to remove jammed ring combs
when the procedure is not displayed on the control panel.
522
Clearing Misfeeds
• When removing bound booklets, keep your hands clear of the paper exit. You might trap your
fingers if you do not.
• The ring combs set in the ring comb cartridge might move or become slanted when you remove the
jammed ring combs from the ring comb cartridge. Before replacing the cartridge, check that all the
ring combs are straight and properly aligned.
Removing Punch Waste
If the punch receptacle is full, remove punch waste by following the procedures indicated in the
animation that appears on the control panel.
• While "Hole Punch Receptacle is full." is displayed, you cannot use the Punch function.
• "Hole Punch Receptacle is full." is displayed until the punch waste box is installed again.
• If the message is still displayed, install the punch waste box again.
Removing Staple Waste
If the staple waste box is full, remove staple waste by following the procedures stated in the animation
that appears on the control panel.
• While "Waste Staple Receptacle Full" is displayed, you cannot use the staple function.
• "Waste Staple Receptacle Full" is displayed until the staple waste box is reinstalled.
• If the message is still displayed, reinstall the staple waste box.
Removing Waste Paper
If the waste paper receptacle is full, remove waste paper by following the procedures stated in the
animation that appears on the control panel.
• While "The waste paper receptacle is full. Empty the receptacle." is displayed, you cannot use the
perfect binding.
• While "The Trimmer waste paper receptacle is full. Empty the receptacle." is displayed, you cannot
use the trimmer.
523
11. Troubleshooting
• "The waste paper receptacle is full. Empty the receptacle." or "The Trimmer waste paper receptacle
is full. Empty the receptacle." is displayed until the receptacle is reinstalled.
• If the message is still displayed, reinstall the receptacle.
524
12. Maintenance
This chapter explains how to perform daily maintenance tasks of the machine.
General Requirements
This section explains the items that should be followed during use of this machine.
You can use the Document Server function and scanner function on Type 1, 2, or 3 machines only.
Dos and Don'ts
• Avoid taking the following actions close to or inside this machine because doing so can result in
fire or electric shock:
• Using flammable sprays, solvents, and so on
• Placing flammable sprays, solvents, and so on
• Placing containers holding liquids or small metal objects
• Do not obstruct the machine's vents. Doing so can result in fire as the internal components are
overheated.
• If you do not use the machine for a long period of time such as consecutive holidays, be sure to
disconnect the power cord plug from the wall outlet for reasons of safety.
• When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, make sure to pull the plug, not the
cord. Do not pull the power cord forcibly. Doing so can damage the power cord, possibly
resulting in fire or electric shock.
• Turn off the main power switch before unplugging the power cord. See page 103 "Turning On/Off
the Power".
• After scanning originals continuously, the exposure glass may become warm - this is not a
malfunction.
• The area around the vents might feel warm. This is caused by exhaust air and is not a malfunction.
• If the machine is moved from a cold to a warm place, condensation may form inside it. After
moving the machine, do not use it for at least an hour. The machine requires this time to adapt to its
new environment.
525
12. Maintenance
• Do not turn off the power while the machine is in operation.
• Do not open the covers of the machine when it is in operation. If you do, misfeeds might occur.
• Do not move or tilt the machine when the power is on.
• Do not knock the machine while it is operating (for instance, do not use the machine's surfaces to
knock stacks of paper into square).
• Depending on the ambient temperature and humidity, steam may come from the vents at the rear
right side of the machine during printing. This is water vapor from the paper, not a sign of
malfunction.
• If condensation forms inside the machine as a result of temperature change, the machine may not
print properly. To minimize this problem, use the anti-condensation heaters.
• The optional anti-humidity heater and the anti-condensation heater warm the machine's interior to
maintain the proper humidity. These heaters keep the machine warm even if the main power switch
is turned off.
Ventilation
When you use this machine in a confined space without good ventilation for a long time or print
large quantities, you might detect an odd smell.
This might cause the output paper to also have an odd smell.
When you detect an odd smell, regularly ventilate in order to keep the workplace comfortable.
• Set up the machine so that it does not directly ventilate towards people.
• Ventilation should be more than 50 m3/hr/person.
New machine smell
When a machine is new, it might have a unique smell. This smell will subside in about one week.
When you detect an odd smell, sufficiently ventilate and circulate the air in the room.
AC power switch
If the machine is not used for several days or longer at a time, set the AC power switch inside the
left front cover of the main unit to "Stand by". Make sure that the main power switch is turned off
and the main power indicator goes out before turning off the AC power switch. Not doing so may
damage the hard disk.
EAQ303
526
General Requirements
• The anti-condensation heater work even after the AC power switch is turned off as long as the
power cord is connected.
• In normal operation, keep the AC power switch in the "On" position.
• When you set the AC power switch to "Stand by", do not immediately set it to "On". After
setting the switch to "Stand by", wait one minute or more before setting it to "On".
Drawer unit
When removing jammed paper, do not touch the rail in the upper part of the drawer unit.
Your hands may be dirtied with the lubricant applied on the rail.
DSC208
Saving Printouts
• Prints will fade if exposed to strong light or dampness and humidity for lengthy periods. Preserve
the quality of your copies by storing them in a binder in a dark, dry place.
• Toner may melt if a print and a half-dried print are put on top of each other.
• Toner may also melt when using solvent type adhesive agents for pasting prints.
• When folding prints, toner in the folds will come off.
• Toner may melt if it is placed on mats made of chlorinated plastic in locations of high temperature
for long periods of time.
• Toner may melt if prints are placed in places of extremely high temperatures, such as near heaters.
Backing Up Hard Disk Data
You can store data such as images and Address Book information on the machine's hard disk.
This section describes how to back up or download this data.
• Avoid strong impact to the machine. Doing so may damage the hard disk.
527
12. Maintenance
• When turning off the power or disconnecting the power cord, follow the proper procedures. Not
doing so may damage the hard disk. For details about how to turn off the power, see page 103
"Turning On/Off the Power".
• If the machine's hard disk fails, data stored on it, including Address Book information might be lost.
For this reason, do not save important data on the machine's hard disk without backing it up or
downloading it. We also recommend backing up fonts, forms, and any other downloaded
resources that are stored on the hard disk. The manufacturer is not liable for damages resulting
from lost data.
• You can use Device Manager NX or Web Image Monitor to back up the machine's Address Book.
For details about Device Manager NX, see the manual for Device Manager NX. For details about
Web Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor Help.
• You can use Web Image Monitor to download data stored on the Document Server to your
computer. For details about how to do this, see "Downloading Stored Documents with Web Image
Monitor", Basic Operations, or Web Image Monitor Help.
Replenishing and Replacing Consumables
This section explains precautions for adding toner or staples.
You can send scanned documents on a Type 1, 2, or 3 machine.
Adding toner
This section explains precautions when adding toner, how to send scanned documents when the toner
has run out, and how to dispose of used toner.
• Do not dispose of the following items into a fire. Toner will ignite on contact with naked flame
and burns can result.
• Toner (new or used)
• Toner containers while toner is inside
• Toner-attached parts
• Do not store toner (new or used) or toner containers while toner is inside in a place with an open
flame. The toner can ignite and result in burns or fire.
528
General Requirements
• Do not absorb spilled toner (including used toner) using a vacuum cleaner. Absorbed toner may
cause ignition or explosion due to electric contact sparks inside the vacuum cleaner. However,
you can use a toner-compatible industrial vacuum cleaner. When toner is spilled, remove the
spilled toner using a wet cloth so that the toner is not scattered.
• The following explains the warning messages on the plastic bag used in this product's
packaging:
• Do not leave the polythene materials (bags, etc.) supplied with this machine close to babies
and small children. Suffocation can result if polythene materials are brought into contact
with the mouth or nose.
• Do not open toner containers forcibly while toner is inside, crush or squeeze them. Toner
spillage can cause accidental ingestion or dirtying of clothes, hands, or floor.
• Do not leave the following items in a place where children can reach them:
• Toner (new or used)
• Toner containers while toner is inside
• Toner-attached parts
• When the following occurs while toner is handled, receive emergency measures first, and then
consult a doctor if necessary.
• When inhaling toner, gargle with a large amount of water and move into a fresh air
environment.
• When swallowing toner, dilute gastric contents with a large amount of water.
• When getting toner into your eyes, flush them with a large amount of water.
• If toner (new or used) comes into contact with your skin or clothes and smears them, take the
following actions:
• If toner comes into contact with your skin, wash the affected area thoroughly with soap and
water.
• If toner comes into contact with your clothes, wash the stained area with cold water.
Heating the stained area by applying hot water will set the toner into the fabric and
removing the stain may become impossible.
• When replacing a container with toner (including used toner) or consumables with toner, be
careful that the toner does not splatter. After removing used consumables and shutting the lid of
the container if the lid is available, put them in a bag.
529
12. Maintenance
• When replacing a toner or waste toner container or consumables with toner, make sure that the
toner does not splatter. Put the waste consumables in a bag after they are removed. For
consumables with a lid, make sure that the lid is shut.
• Always replace the toner cartridge when a notification appears on the machine.
• Fault may occur if you use toner other than the recommended type.
• Leave the machine on when replacing toner. If you turn off the main power when replacing toner,
the settings will be lost and you cannot restart printing, or the machine may not be able to detect
that a toner cartridge is inserted.
• When adding toner, do not turn off the main power. If you do, settings will be lost.
• Store toner where it will not be exposed to direct sunlight, temperatures above 35°C (95°F), or
high humidity.
• Store toner horizontally.
• Do not shake the toner cartridge with its mouth down after removing it. Residual toner may scatter.
• Do not remove the toner cartridge straight after installing it. If you do, the toner may spill out.
• Do not repeatedly install and remove toner cartridges. This will result in toner leakage.
• When a toner cartridge is being used, it cannot be removed. Do not remove the cartridge forcibly.
Follow the instruction on the control panel regarding how to replace a toner cartridge.
If one of the toner cartridge is empty, you can keep printing by using the other cartridge. You can
change the toner cartridge during printing.
Be sure to set the new toner cartridge in the left hole first when both toner cartridges are empty.
After replacing a toner cartridge, be sure to close the toner cartridge cover. The machine stops printing if
you leave the toner cartridge cover open.
• If "Toner Cartridge is almost empty." appears, the toner has almost run out. Have a replacement
toner cartridge at hand.
• You can check the name of the required toner and the replacement procedure using the [ Add
Toner] screen.
• For details about how to check contact number where you can order supplies, see page 548
"Inquiry".
• Do not remove the outer cap of the toner cartridge before shaking it. Wait until you install the toner
cartridge before removing the cap.
• Do not remove the inner cap.
530
General Requirements
• If you cannot get it to click in, pull out the toner cartridge a little, slightly rotate it to the left or right,
then try again.
• Do not remove toner cartridges that are being used or install toner cartridges that are partially
used. The remaining toner amount displayed on the screen will not always correspond with the
actual amount in the cartridge, causing the machine to unexpectedly run out of toner.
• Do not install an empty toner cartridge.
Sending scanned documents when toner has run out
When the machine has run out of toner, the indicator lamps on the control panel will be lit up. Note
that even if there is no toner left, you can still send scanned documents.
1. Press [Home] (
(Classic)] icon.
) at the bottom of the screen in the center, and press the [Scanner
2. Perform transmission operation.
Disposing of used toner
This section describes what to do with used toner.
Toner cannot be re-used.
Pack used toner containers in the container's box or a bag to prevent the toner from leaking out of
the container when you dispose of it.
(mainly Europe and Asia)
If you want to discard your used toner container, please contact your local sales office. If you
discard it by yourself, treat it as general plastic waste material.
(mainly North America)
Please see our local company website for information on the recycling of supply products, or you
can recycle items according to the requirements of your local municipalities or private recyclers.
Replacing the waste toner bottle
• Do not dispose of the following items into a fire. Toner will ignite on contact with naked flame
and burns can result.
• Toner (new or used)
• Toner containers while toner is inside
• Toner-attached parts
• Do not store toner (new or used) or toner containers while toner is inside in a place with an open
flame. The toner can ignite and result in burns or fire.
531
12. Maintenance
• The following explains the warning messages on the plastic bag used in this product's
packaging:
• Do not leave the polythene materials (bags, etc.) supplied with this machine close to babies
and small children. Suffocation can result if polythene materials are brought into contact
with the mouth or nose.
• Do not absorb spilled toner (including used toner) using a vacuum cleaner. Absorbed toner may
cause ignition or explosion due to electric contact sparks inside the vacuum cleaner. However,
you can use a toner-compatible industrial vacuum cleaner. When toner is spilled, remove the
spilled toner using a wet cloth so that the toner is not scattered.
• Do not open toner containers forcibly while toner is inside, crush or squeeze them. Toner
spillage can cause accidental ingestion or dirtying of clothes, hands, or floor.
• Do not leave the following items in a place where children can reach them:
• Toner (new or used)
• Toner containers while toner is inside
• Toner-attached parts
• When the following occurs while toner is handled, receive emergency measures first, and then
consult a doctor if necessary.
• When inhaling toner, gargle with a large amount of water and move into a fresh air
environment.
• When swallowing toner, dilute gastric contents with a large amount of water.
• When getting toner into your eyes, flush them with a large amount of water.
• If toner (new or used) comes into contact with your skin or clothes and smears them, take the
following actions:
• If toner comes into contact with your skin, wash the affected area thoroughly with soap and
water.
• If toner comes into contact with your clothes, wash the stained area with cold water.
Heating the stained area by applying hot water will set the toner into the fabric and
removing the stain may become impossible.
• When replacing a container with toner (including used toner) or consumables with toner, be
careful that the toner does not splatter. After removing used consumables and shutting the lid of
the container if the lid is available, put them in a bag.
532
General Requirements
• Waste toner bottles cannot be reused.
• Before removing the waste toner bottle from the machine, spread paper or some other material
around the area to keep toner from dirtying your workspace.
• When removing the waste toner bottle, do not touch the inside of the machine.
• Be careful to not allow the toner to leak from the waste toner bottle when you remove it.
• Carefully pull the waste toner bottle out horizontally when you are replacing it.
• Do not use a waste toner bottle that has not been used for a long time.
• Take care not to drop the waste toner bottle.
• Make sure the waste toner bottle is fully inserted. If it is not, toner will leak inside the machine.
• We recommend purchasing and keeping a spare waste toner bottle on hand since waste toner
bottles are consumable items.
Follow the instruction on the control panel regarding how to replace a waste toner bottle.
• Replace the waste toner bottle if "Waste Toner Bottle is full. Replace Waste Toner Bottle." appears
on the control panel.
• When the "Replacement of Waste Toner Bottle will soon be necessary." appears on the control
panel, the waste toner bottle should be replaced soon. Prepare a new waste toner bottle.
• Your service representative can replace the waste toner bottle if it is included in your contract. For
details, contact your local dealer or service representative.
Adding staples
• Keep your hands clear of the paper output slot of the finisher booklet tray when pulling it out or
pushing it in the finisher's staple unit. You may trap your fingers in the machine's gap and injury
can result.
• Stapling failures or jams may occur if you use a staple cartridge other than that recommended.
Follow the instruction on the control panel regarding how to add staples.
• If you cannot pull out the upper unit, there are staples remaining inside the cartridge. Use all the
staples, and do not add more.
• If staples have completely or almost run out, the message "Add Staples" appears on the control
panel.
533
12. Maintenance
Replacing ring combs
• When removing bound booklets, keep your hands clear of the paper exit. You might trap your
fingers if you do not.
• Use of non-recommended ring combs and/or ring comb cartridges can result in binding failures
and comb jams.
Follow the instruction on the control panel regarding how to replace ring combs.
• Add new ring combs to the cartridge only when the "Out of binding ring combs." message appears
on the control panel.
• The ring comb cartridge can hold both 100-sheet and 50-sheet type ring combs, but be sure not to
mix the two sizes inside the cartridge.
• We recommend that you prepare separate ring comb cartridges for each type and color of ring
comb.
• Store ring combs in their original packaging and stand them upright.
Changing the type of ring combs
1. Pull the ring comb cartridge out of the machine.
CET028
534
General Requirements
2. Push the ring combs up from the bottom of the cartridge.
CET029
3. Place your fingers between the cartridge and the ring combs, and then remove the
ring combs.
CET030
4. Insert the ring combs you want to use into the cartridge.
Make sure that the ring combs are engaged and attached properly.
5. Put the cartridge back into the machine.
Filling the glue container
• Store binding glue in a dark room whose ambient temperature is -20 to 40°C (-4 to 104°F), away
from moisture, extremely high temperatures, direct sunlight, and open flames.
• Keep binding glue out of the reach of children.
• Use of non-recommended glue can result in failed bindings and faulty adhesion of the cover sheet
and book block.
• To use binding glue, you must first heat it. To begin the heating process, press the glue temperature
adjustment key.
Follow the instruction on the control panel regarding how to fill the glue container with binding glue.
535
12. Maintenance
• The container can hold up to 380 g (0.84 lb.) of glue (about two of the provided cups).
• You can change the glue heating time under [Binding Glue Heater Auto Off Timer] in [System
Settings]. For details, see "Timer Settings", Device Management.
• The glue requires up to 6.5 minutes before the binding can begin. To begin binding quickly, be
sure to press the glue temperature adjustment key in advance.
Where to Put Your Machine
This section describes precautions for installation and movement.
Moving the machine
This section describes precautions when moving the machine.
Choose your machine's location carefully.
Environmental conditions greatly affect its performance.
• When carrying or moving the machine by lifting it for relocation to another floor, contact your
service representative. Dropping or toppling the machine can result in injury or malfunction.
• Contact your sales representative before moving the machine out of the building or to another
location in the building. A moving service can be provided for a fee.
Optimum Environmental Conditions After Moving the Machine
Optimum environmental conditions
• Be sure to install the machine as close as possible to a wall outlet so that you can disconnect the
power cord plug easily in an emergency.
• Do not place the machine in a humid or dusty environment. Doing so can result in fire or electric
shock.
536
General Requirements
• Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. Doing so can cause the machine to
fall or topple over, possibly resulting in injury.
• After moving the machine, use the caster fixture to fix it in place. Otherwise, the machine might
move or topple over to cause injury.
• When using this machine in a poorly ventilated or narrow room continuously for a long period
of time or printing a high volume of materials, make sure to ventilate the room sufficiently.
• Keep the machine away from salt-bearing air and corrosive gases. Also, do not install the machine
in places where chemical reactions are likely (laboratories, etc.), as doing so will cause the
machine to malfunction.
Avoid the following environments when locating the machine. If the machine is placed somewhere
where the conditions are different from those recommended, a failure may occur.
• Low temperature and humidity or high temperature and humidity
The following is the recommended temperature and humidity range:
• Temperature: 10–32°C (50–89.6°F) (humidity to be 54% at 32°C, 89.6°F)
• Humidity: 15–80% (temperature to be 27°C, 80.6°F at 80%)
• Places that are exposed to direct sunlight or other sources of strong light (more than 1,500 lux)
• Places that are directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner or heated air from a heater
(Sudden temperature changes can cause condensation to form inside the machine)
• Places that are where the machine will be subject to frequent strong vibration
• Places that are where the machine is exposed to dampness or wet weather, such as rain and snow
• Places that are with poor ventilation
• Dusty areas
• Places that are close to machines generating ammonia, such as a diazo copy machine
• Unstable places
• Place the machine on a level spot. The machine must be level within 5 mm, 0.2 inches: both
front to rear and left to right.
Optimum space for locating the machine
Place the machine near the power source, providing the clearance areas shown.
The clearance shown is necessary for using and servicing the machine.
537
12. Maintenance
1
4
2
3
DER110
1. Rear: 47 cm (18.6 inches) or more
2. Right: 100 cm (39.4 inches) or more
3. Front: 57 cm (22.5 inches) or more
4. Left: 100 cm (39.4 inches) or more
• For the required space when options are installed, contact your service representative.
Power connection
• Avoid taking the following actions because doing so can result in fire or electric shock:
• Using any power supply voltage or frequencies other than those that match the
specifications shown
• Using multi-socket adaptors
• Using extension cords
• Touching the prongs of the power cable's plug with anything metallic
• Avoid applying the following actions to power cords because doing so can result in fire or
electric shock:
• Damaging them
• Bundling them
• Modifying them
• Putting heavy objects on them
• Pulling them forcibly
• Bending them forcibly
538
General Requirements
• The supplied power cord or cords are for use with this machine only. They cannot be used for
appliances other than this machine. Also, do not use power cords other than the power cord or
cords supplied with this machine. Doing so can result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not handle the power cord plug with wet hands. Doing so can result in electric shock.
• To prevent fire or electric shock, disconnect the plug and the power cord from the wall outlet at
least once a year and check them. If any of the following conditions exist, do not use the plug
and the power cord continuously, and consult your dealer or service representative.
• There are burn marks on the plug
• The prongs on the plug are deformed
• The power cord's inner wires are exposed or broken
• The power cord's coating is cracked, dented, or damaged
• When the power cord is bent, the power turns off and on
• Part of the power cord becomes hot
• Be sure to push the power cord plug fully into the wall outlet. Also, do not push it into loose and
unstable wall outlets likely to cause a contact failure. Doing so can result in heat generation.
• If you do not use the machine for a long period of time such as consecutive holidays, be sure to
disconnect the power cord plug from the wall outlet for reasons of safety.
• When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, make sure to pull the plug, not the
cord. Do not pull the power cord forcibly. Doing so can damage the power cord, possibly
resulting in fire or electric shock.
• Be sure to disconnect the plug from the wall outlet and clean the prongs and the area around
the prongs at least once a year. Allowing dust to build up on the plug constitutes a fire hazard.
• When performing maintenance on the machine, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet
for safety.
• Power Source
•
(mainly Europe and Asia)
220–240 V, 16 A, 50/60 Hz
•
(mainly North America)
208–240 V, 20 A, 50/60 Hz
539
12. Maintenance
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above.
• Voltage tolerance
Voltage must not fluctuate by more than 10%.
540
Maintaining Your Machine
Maintaining Your Machine
You can use the exposure glass and scanning glass, and the ADF on a Type 1, 2, or 3 machine.
How to Clean the Machine
• Do not look into the light source. Doing so may damage your eyes.
• Contact your sales or service representative for cleaning the machine's interior. If the machine's
interior is not regularly cleaned while dust accumulates, fire and malfunction can result.
• Do not use chemical cleaners or organic solvents, such as thinner or benzene. If such substances
get inside the machine or melt plastic parts, a failure might occur.
• Do not clean parts other than those explicitly specified in this manual. Other parts should only be
cleaned by your service representative.
Cleaning the Machine
Wipe the machine with a soft, dry cloth. If this does not remove the dirt, wipe the machine with a damp
and tightly wrung cloth. If a damp cloth still does not remove the dirt, try using a mild detergent. Use the
cleaning cloth provided with the machine to wipe the exposure glass or scanning glass.
If a cleaning procedure is specified for the part, use the specified procedure for cleaning.
Cleaning the Exposure Glass and Scanning Glass
If the exposure glass or scanning glass is dirty, copy clarity may be reduced. Clean these parts if they
are dirty.
• Do not close the ADF while hard objects are placed on the scanning glass. Doing so may damage
the machine.
Cleaning the Machine
Use the cleaning cloth provided with the machine to wipe the parts.
541
12. Maintenance
1. Wipe the exposure glass and the scanning glass.
1
2
DER111
1. Scanning glass
2. Exposure glass
Cleaning the Auto Document Feeder
If the ADF is dirty, copy clarity may be reduced. Clean these parts if they are dirty.
Cleaning the Machine
Use the cleaning cloth provided with the machine to wipe the scanning glass.
1. Wipe the sheet and guide plate of the ADF.
1
2
CWW502
1. Guide plate
2. Sheet
542
Maintaining Your Machine
2. Slide the lever to the left.
CWW503
3. Wipe the scanning glass.
1
CWW504
1. Scanning glass
4. Return the sheet to its original position.
Cleaning the Power Cord Plug
• To prevent fire or electric shock, disconnect the plug and the power cord from the wall outlet at
least once a year and check them. If any of the following conditions exist, do not use the plug
and the power cord continuously, and consult your dealer or service representative.
• There are burn marks on the plug
• The prongs on the plug are deformed
• The power cord's inner wires are exposed or broken
• The power cord's coating is cracked, dented, or damaged
• When the power cord is bent, the power turns off and on
• Part of the power cord becomes hot
543
12. Maintenance
• Be sure to disconnect the plug from the wall outlet and clean the prongs and the area around
the prongs at least once a year. Allowing dust to build up on the plug constitutes a fire hazard.
• Turn off the main power switch before unplugging the power cord. See page 103 "Turning On/Off
the Power".
• After cleaning the power cord plug, make sure that the power cord is connected to the machine
firmly, and then connect the plug to the wall outlet.
544
Checking the Earth Leakage Breakers
Checking the Earth Leakage Breakers
• When the machine's circuit breaker turns "Off", contact your service representative. Setting it to
"On" can result in electric shock, fire, smoke, or tripping of the room's breakers.
• If the earth leakage breaker is not functioning normally, contact your sales or service
representative.
An earth leakage breaker is installed on this machine, trimmer, ring binder, and perfect binder.
Once a year, check that the earth leakage breaker functions properly. Normally, the breaker is in the
On position.
The following procedure is explained using illustrations of the main unit and trimmer as an example.
1. Turn off the main power.
Make sure that the main power indicator goes out.
2. Open the front left cover, and then turn off the AC power switch.
3. Using a ballpoint pen or similar pointed object, press in the earth leakage breaker's test
button.
Main unit
EAQ319
545
12. Maintenance
Trimmer
CWW508
4. Check that the earth leakage breaker moves to the Off position.
Main unit
EAQ302
Trimmer
CWW509
546
Checking the Earth Leakage Breakers
5. Return the earth leakage breaker to the On position.
Main unit
EAQ301
Trimmer
CWW510
6. Turn on the AC power switch, and then close the front left cover.
7. Push the main power switch to turn on the main power.
• If the machine does not start up when you turn its main power switch back on, check whether the
earth leakage breaker is in the Off position. If the breaker is in the Off position, contact your sales
or service representative. Do not reset the earth leakage breaker yourself.
Useful Information
This section describes how to check the counter value, telephone number for repairs, or ordering
consumables such as toner.
Counter
The counter displays the total number of pages used by each of the functions.
You can also print out the counter information.
547
12. Maintenance
1. Press [Counter] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the right.
2. To print a counter list, press [Print Counter List], and then press the [Start] key.
3. Press [Exit].
Inquiry
The Inquiry function lets you check the telephone numbers to contact for repairs or ordering
consumables such as toner.
Checking Inquiry using the User Tools
Be sure to contact your service engineer to verify the following:
Supplies
• Toner
• Staple
• Staple (Booklet)
• Binding Glue
Machine Maintenance/Repair
• Telephone No.
• Serial No. of Machine
Sales Representative
• Telephone No.
Supply Order
• Telephone No.
1. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
2. Press the [User Tools] icon (
).
3. Press [Inquiry].
4. To print an inquiry list, press [Print Inquiry List], and then press the [Start] key.
5. Press [Exit].
Checking Inquiry using the [Check Status] key
You can check the following items under [Inquiry]:
• [Machine Repairs]
Displays the machine number and contact number which are required for service.
• [Sales Representative]
Displays the sales representative's telephone number.
• [Supply Order]
548
Checking the Earth Leakage Breakers
Displays the contact number for placing supply orders.
• [Supply Details]
Displays the name of toner, staples, etc., used on the machine.
1. Press the [Check Status] key.
DWP146
2. Press the [Maintnc./Inquiry/Mach. Info].
3. Press [Inquiry].
4. After checking the information, press [Close] twice.
549
MEMO
550
MEMO
551
MEMO
552
EN GB
EN US
EN AU
D0BX-7217
© 2018
EN GB
EN US
EN AU
D0BX-7217
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement